2012 Escalade ESV Owners Manual

Black plate (1,1)Cadillac Escalade/Escalade ESV Owner Manual - 2012 - 2nd CRC - 11/29/11

2012 Cadillac Escalade/Escalade ESV Owner Manual M

In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18Performance andMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24

Keys, Doors, andWindows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1Keys and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Vehicle Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13Exterior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16Interior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21

Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . 3-1Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41

Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . 4-1Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

Instruments and Controls . . . . 5-1Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10

Information Displays . . . . . . . . . . 5-23Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 5-38Universal Remote System . . . . 5-46

Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8Lighting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9

Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 7-1Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18Rear Seat Infotainment . . . . . . . 7-31Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-62Voice Recognition . . . . . . . . . . . 7-100Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-103

Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7


2012 Cadillac Escalade/Escalade ESV Owner Manual M

Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . 9-1Driving Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Starting and Operating . . . . . . . 9-21Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29Automatic Transmission . . . . . . 9-30Drive Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . 9-37Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41Object Detection Systems . . . . 9-44Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-51Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-57Conversions and Add-Ons . . . 9-69

Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2Vehicle Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33

Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-35Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38Wheels and Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-88Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-93Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . 10-96

Service and Maintenance . . . 11-1General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1Cadillac Premium CareMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3

Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-3Special ApplicationServices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9

Additional Maintenanceand Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9

Recommended Fluids,Lubricants, and Parts . . . . . . 11-13

Maintenance Records . . . . . . . 11-16

Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . 12-1Vehicle Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Customer Information . . . . . . . 13-1Customer Information . . . . . . . . 13-1Reporting Safety Defects . . . . 13-18Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19

OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1OnStar Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1OnStar Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2OnStar AdditionalInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-1


Introduction iii

The names, logos, emblems,slogans, vehicle model names,and vehicle body designs appearingin this manual including, but notlimited to, GM, the GM logo,CADILLAC, the CADILLAC Crestand Wreath, ESCALADE, and ESVare trademarks and/or servicemarks of General Motors LLC, itssubsidiaries, affiliates, or licensors.

This manual describes features thatmay or may not be on your specificvehicle either because they areoptions that you did not purchase ordue to changes subsequent to theprinting of this owner manual.Please refer to the purchasedocumentation relating to yourspecific vehicle to confirm each ofthe features found on your vehicle.For vehicles first sold in Canada,substitute the name “GeneralMotors of Canada Limited” forCadillac Motor Division wherever itappears in this manual.

If the vehicle is a hybrid, see thehybrid supplement for moreinformation.

Keep this manual in the vehicle forquick reference.

Canadian Vehicle Owners

Propriétaires Canadiens

A French language copy of thismanual can be obtained from yourdealer or from:

On peut obtenir un exemplaire dece guide en français auprès duconcessionnaire ou à l'adressesuivante:

Helm, IncorporatedAttention: Customer Service47911 Halyard DrivePlymouth, MI 48170

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 20902920 B Second Printing ©2011 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.


iv Introduction

Using this ManualTo quickly locate information aboutthe vehicle, use the Index in theback of the manual. It is analphabetical list of what is in themanual and the page number whereit can be found.

Danger, Warnings, andCautionsWarning messages found on vehiclelabels and in this manual describehazards and what to do to avoid orreduce them.

Danger indicates a hazard with ahigh level of risk which will result inserious injury or death.

Warning or Caution indicates ahazard that could result in injury ordeath.

{ WARNING

These mean there is somethingthat could hurt you or otherpeople.

Notice: This means there issomething that could result inproperty or vehicle damage.This would not be covered by thevehicle's warranty.

A circle with a slash through it is asafety symbol which means “DoNot,” “Do not do this,” or “Do not letthis happen.”

SymbolsThe vehicle has components andlabels that use symbols instead oftext. Symbols are shown along withthe text describing the operation orinformation relating to a specificcomponent, control, message,gauge, or indicator.

M : This symbol is shown whenyou need to see your owner manualfor additional instructions orinformation.

* : This symbol is shown whenyou need to see a service manualfor additional instructions orinformation.


Introduction v

Vehicle Symbol Chart

Here are some additional symbolsthat may be found on the vehicleand what they mean. For moreinformation on the symbol, refer tothe Index.

0 : Adjustable Pedals

9 : Airbag Readiness Light

# : Air Conditioning

! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)

% : Audio Steering Wheel Controlsor OnStar®

$ : Brake System Warning Light

" : Charging System

I : Cruise Control

B : Engine Coolant Temperature

O : Exterior Lamps

# : Fog Lamps

. : Fuel Gauge

+ : Fuses

3 : Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger

( : Heated Steering Wheel

j : LATCH System ChildRestraints

* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp

: : Oil Pressure

g : Outside Power FoldawayMirrors

O : Power

/ : Remote Vehicle Start

> : Safety Belt Reminders

7 : Tire Pressure Monitor

_ : Tow/Haul Mode

d : Traction Control/StabiliTrak®

M : Windshield Washer Fluid


vi Introduction

2 NOTES


In Brief 1-1

In Brief

Instrument PanelInstrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Initial Drive InformationInitial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 1-4Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9Second Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . 1-10Third Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10Heated and VentilatedSeats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

Head RestraintAdjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11

Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11Passenger SensingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12

Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12Steering WheelAdjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14

Throttle and Brake PedalAdjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14

Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . 1-16Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17

Vehicle FeaturesRadio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18Portable Audio Devices . . . . . . 1-18Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18Mobile Apps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . 1-19Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20Driver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20

Side Blind ZoneAlert (SBZA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21

Rear VisionCamera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22

Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 1-22Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22Universal Remote System . . . 1-22Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23

Performance and MaintenanceStabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . 1-24Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . 1-24Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24

Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 1-25Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . 1-25Driving for Better FuelEconomy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25

Roadside Service . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26


1-2 In Brief

Instrument Panel

English Version Shown; Metric Similar.


In Brief 1-3

A. Air Vents on page 8‑7.

B. Turn and Lane‐Change Lever.See Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals on page 6‑7.

Windshield Wiper/Washer onpage 5‑4.

C. Instrument Cluster onpage 5‑11.

D. Hazard Warning Flashers onpage 6‑7.

E. Shift Lever. See AutomaticTransmission on page 9‑30.

Driver Shift Control (DSC).See Manual Mode onpage 9‑33.

F. Tow/Haul Mode on page 9‑33.

G. Driver Information Center (DIC)Buttons. See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5‑23.

H. Clock on page 5‑7.

I. Infotainment on page 7‑2.

J. StabiliTrak® System onpage 9‑37.

Rear Park Aid Disable Button.See Ultrasonic Parking Assiston page 9‑44.

K. Steering Wheel Adjustment onpage 5‑2.

L. Exterior Lamp Controls onpage 6‑1.

M. Dome Lamp Override.See Dome Lamps on page 6‑9.

Instrument Panel IlluminationControl on page 6‑8.

Fog Lamps on page 6‑8.

N. Data Link Connector (DLC)(Out of View). See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp on page 5‑16.

O. Automatic Transfer CaseControl (Hybrid only). See thehybrid supplement for moreinformation.

P. Cruise Control on page 9‑41.

Heated Steering Wheel onpage 5‑4 (If Equipped).

Q. Horn on page 5‑4.

R. Steering Wheel Controls onpage 5‑2.

S. Dual Automatic Climate ControlSystem on page 8‑1.

T. Pedal Adjust Button. SeeAdjustable Throttle and BrakePedal on page 9‑22.

Power Assist Steps onpage 2‑12 (If Equipped).


1-4 In Brief

Initial DriveInformationThis section provides a briefoverview about some of theimportant features that may or maynot be on your specific vehicle.

For more detailed information, referto each of the features which can befound later in this owner manual.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemThe RKE transmitter is used toremotely lock and unlock the doorsfrom up to 60 m (195 ft) away fromthe vehicle.

Press K to unlock the driver door.

Press K again within three secondsto unlock all remaining doors.

Press Q to lock all doors.

Lock and unlock feedback can bepersonalized. See VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑38.

Press and hold8 to open orclose the liftgate.

Press and holdm to open theliftglass.

PressL and release to locate thevehicle.

PressL and hold forthree seconds to sound the panicalarm.

PressL again to cancel the panicalarm.

See Keys on page 2‑2 and RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 2‑3.

Remote Vehicle StartWith this feature the engine can bestarted from outside of the vehicle.

Starting the Vehicle

1. Aim the RKE transmitter at thevehicle.

2. Press and release Q.3. Immediately after completing

Step 2, press and hold/ untilthe turn signal lamps flash.


In Brief 1-5

When the vehicle starts, the parkinglamps will turn on and remain onas long as the engine is running.The doors will be locked and theclimate control system maycome on.

The engine will continue to run for10 minutes. Repeat the steps for a10-minute time extension. Remotestart can be extended only once.

Canceling a Remote Start

To cancel a remote start:. Aim the RKE transmitter at the

vehicle and press and hold/until the parking lamps turn off.

. Turn on the hazard warningflashers.

. Turn the ignition on and thenback off.

See Remote Vehicle Start onpage 2‑5.

Door LocksThere are several ways to lock andunlock the vehicle.

From outside, use the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter orthe key in the driver door.

From inside, use the power doorlocks or the manual door locks.To lock or unlock the door with themanual locks, push down or pull upon the manual lock knob.

Power Door Locks

Press Q or K on the RKEtransmitter. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operation onpage 2‑3.

Premium Trim Shown,Up‐Level Similar

Q : Press to lock the doors.

K : Press to unlock the doors.

See Door Locks on page 2‑7.


1-6 In Brief

Liftgate

The liftglass or liftgate cannot beopened if the rear wiper is in motion.Attempting to open the liftglass orliftgate while the rear wiper is inmotion will cause the release of theliftglass or liftgate to delay until thewipers are parked off the liftglass.

Manual Liftgate Operation

To unlock the liftgate, press " onthe power door lock switch orpress " on the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmittertwice, seeRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 2‑3.

Press the touch pad on theunderside of the liftgate handle (B)and lift up.

Use the pull cup to lower and closethe liftgate. Do not press the touchpad while closing the liftgate.This will cause the liftgate to beunlatched.

Power Liftgate Operation

On vehicles with a power liftgate,the switch is on the overheadconsole.

The vehicle must be in P (Park) touse the power feature. The taillampswill flash and a chime will soundwhen the power liftgate moves.

There are several ways to open andclose the power liftgate:

. Press and hold8 on theRKEtransmitter until the liftgatestarts moving.

. Press8 on the overheadconsole.

. Pressl on the bottom of theliftgate next to the latch to close.


In Brief 1-7

Pressing a second time while theliftgate is moving reverses thedirection.

To disable the power liftgatefunction, press OFF on the liftgateswitch, see Liftgate on page 2‑9.

Liftglass

If equipped, there are two ways toopen the liftglass:. Press the button on the

underside of the license plateapplique (A).

. Pressm on the RKEtransmitter.

Windows


The driver door has switchesthat control all windows, thepassengers door switch onlycontrol that window. The powerwindows work when the ignition isin ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY,

or in Retained Accessory Power(RAP). See Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) on page 9‑26 for moreinformation.

Press the switch to lower thewindow. Pull the switch up toraise it.

For more information, see:. Windows on page 2‑18.. Power Windows on page 2‑19.


1-8 In Brief

Seat Adjustment

To adjust the seat:. Move the seat forward or

rearward by sliding the controlforward or rearward.

. Raise or lower the front or rearpart of the seat cushion bymoving the front or rear of thecontrol up or down.

. Raise or lower the entire seat bymoving the entire control upor down.

See Power Seat Adjustment onpage 3‑3.

Lumbar Adjustment

To adjust the lumbar support:. Press and hold the front or rear

of the control to increase ordecrease lumbar support.

. Press and hold the top or bottomof the control to raise or lowerthe height of the support.

See Lumbar Adjustment onpage 3‑3.

Reclining Seatbacks

To adjust the seatback:. Tilt the top of the control

rearward to recline.. Tilt the top of the control forward

to raise.

See Reclining Seatbacks onpage 3‑4.


In Brief 1-9

Memory Features

The controls on the driver door areused to program and recall memorysettings for the driver seat, outsidemirrors, power steering column, andthe adjustable throttle and brakepedals.

Storing Memory Positions

To save into memory:

1. Adjust the driver seat, includingthe seatback recliner andlumbar, both outside mirrors,power steering column, and thethrottle and brake pedals.

See Power Mirrors onpage 2‑16, Steering WheelAdjustment on page 5‑2, andAdjustable Throttle and BrakePedal on page 9‑22.

Not all mirrors and adjustablethrottles and brake pedals willhave the ability to save andrecall their positions.

2. Press and hold “1” untiltwo beeps sound.

3. Repeat for a second driverposition using “2.”

To recall, press and release “1”or “2.” The vehicle must be inP (Park). A single beep will sound.The seat, outside mirrors, steeringcolumn, and adjustable throttle andbrake pedals will move to thepositions previously stored for theidentified driver.

See Memory Seats on page 3‑5and Vehicle Personalization onpage 5‑38.

Easy Exit Positions

This feature can move the driverseat rearward and the powersteering column up and forward toallow extra room to exit the vehicle.

B : Press to recall the easy exitpositions. The vehicle must bein P (Park).

See Memory Seats on page 3‑5and Vehicle Personalization onpage 5‑38.


1-10 In Brief

Second Row SeatsOn vehicles with a 60/40 split benchor buckets seats, the seatbackscan be folded for additional cargospace, or the seats can be foldedand tumbled for easy entry/exit tothe third row seats, if equipped.On vehicles with bucket seats, theseatbacks also recline.

See Second Row Seats onpage 3‑8.

Third Row SeatsOn vehicles with third row seats,the seatbacks can be folded, andthe entire seat can be tumbled orremoved from the vehicle.

For detailed instructions, seeThird Row Seats on page 3‑12.

Heated and VentilatedSeats

The buttons are on the climatecontrol panel.

{ : Press to cool the entire seat.

+ : Press to heat theseatback only.

z : Press to heat the seat andseatback.

Press the desired button once forthe highest setting. With each pressof the button, the seat will change tothe next lower setting, and then tothe off setting. Indicator bars next tothe symbol on the climate controldisplay show the selected setting:three for high, two for medium, andone for low.

See Heated and Ventilated FrontSeats on page 3‑7.


In Brief 1-11

Heated Rear Seats

The buttons are on the Rear SearAudio (RSA) panel on the rear of thecenter console.

Press M or L to heat the leftoutboard or right outboard seatcushion and to cycle through thetemperature settings.

See Heated Rear Seats onpage 3‑8.

Head RestraintAdjustmentDo not drive until the head restraintsfor all occupants are installed andadjusted properly.

To achieve a comfortable seatingposition, change the seatbackrecline angle as little as necessarywhile keeping the seat and thehead restraint height in the properposition.

See Head Restraints on page 3‑2and Power Seat Adjustment onpage 3‑3.

Safety Belts

Refer to the following sections forimportant information on how to usesafety belts properly.. Safety Belts on page 3‑15.. How to Wear Safety Belts

Properly on page 3‑16.. Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 3‑17.. Lower Anchors and Tethers for

Children (LATCH System) onpage 3‑49.


1-12 In Brief

Passenger SensingSystemThe passenger sensing system,if equipped, turns off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbagunder certain conditions. No otherairbag is affected by the passengersensing system.

If the vehicle has one of theindicators pictured in the followingillustrations, then the vehicle has apassenger sensing system for theright front passenger position.

The passenger airbag statusindicator, if equipped, will be visibleon the overhead console when thevehicle is started.

United States

Canada and Mexico

See Passenger Sensing System onpage 3‑33 for important information.

Mirror Adjustment

Exterior Mirrors


Mirror Adjustment

1. Press (A) or (B) to select thedriver or passenger side mirror.

2. Press the arrows on the controlpad to move the mirror up,down, right, or left.

3. Press the opposite side to getthe control pad to a neutralposition.


In Brief 1-13

Power Folding Mirrors

To fold the mirrors:

1. Press (C) to fold the mirrors outto the driving position.

2. Press (D) to fold the mirrors in tothe folded position.

See Power Mirrors on page 2‑16.

Automatic Dimming Mirror

The driver outside mirrorautomatically dimes for the glareof headlamps from behind.This feature is controlled by theon and off setting on the insiderearview mirror. See AutomaticDimming Rearview Mirror onpage 2‑17 for more information.

Heated Mirrors

The heated outside rearview mirrorsturn on when the rear windowdefogger is on.

Press1 to heat the mirrors.

See “Rear Window Defogger” underDual Automatic Climate ControlSystem on page 8‑1 for moreinformation.

Park Tilt Mirrors

If the vehicle has the memorypackage, the exterior mirrors tilt toa preselected position when thevehicle is in R (Reverse). Thisfeature lets the driver view the curbwhen parallel parking. The mirrorsreturn to the original positionwhen the vehicle is shifted out ofR (Reverse), or the ignition is turnedoff or to OFF/LOCK.

This feature can be programedthrough the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑38 formore information.

Interior Mirror

Adjustment

Hold the rearview mirror in thecenter and move it to view the areabehind the vehicle.

Automatic Dimming RearviewMirror

The mirror will automatically reducethe glare from the headlamps frombehind. The dimming feature comeson and the indicator light illuminateseach time the vehicle is started.

O : Press to turn the dimmingfeature on or off.

See Automatic Dimming RearviewMirror on page 2‑17 for moreinformation.


1-14 In Brief

Steering WheelAdjustment

Push the control up or down to tiltthe steering wheel up or down.

To set the memory position,see Vehicle Personalization onpage 5‑38.

Throttle and Brake PedalAdjustmentThe vehicle has adjustable throttleand brake pedals that allow you tochange their positions.

The switch used to adjust thepedals is located on the centerconsole below the climate controlsystem.

Press the right and left arrows tomove the pedals either closer orfurther from your body.

See Adjustable Throttle and BrakePedal on page 9‑22.

Interior LightingDome Lamps

The dome lamps are located in theoverhead console.

They come on when any door isopened and turn off after all thedoors are closed.

Turn the instrument panelbrightness knob located belowthe dome lamp override button,clockwise to the farthest position tomanually turn on the dome lamps.The dome lamps remain on until theknob is turned counterclockwise.


In Brief 1-15

Dome Lamp Override

The dome lamp override button islocated next to the exterior lampscontrol.

k : Press the button in and thedome lamps remain off when a dooris opened. Press the button again toreturn it to the extended position sothat the dome lamps come on whena door is opened.

Reading Lamps

For vehicles with reading lamps inthe overhead console, press thebutton located next to the lamp toturn it on or off.

The vehicle may also have readinglamps in other locations. The lampscannot be adjusted.

For more information about interiorlamps, see:. Dome Lamps on page 6‑9.. Reading Lamps on page 6‑9.. Instrument Panel Illumination

Control on page 6‑8.

Exterior Lighting

The exterior lamps control is locatedon the instrument panel to the left ofthe steering wheel.

P : Turns off the automaticheadlamps and Daytime RunningLamps (DRL). Turning the headlampcontrol to the off position again willturn the automatic headlamps andDRL back on.

For vehicles first sold in Canada,the off position only works when thevehicle is shifted into the P (Park)position.


1-16 In Brief

AUTO: Automatically turns on theheadlamps at normal brightness,along with the parking lamps,instrument panel lights, license platelamps, and taillamps.

; : Turns on the parking lamps,along with the instrument panellights, license plate lamps, andtaillamps.

5 : Turns on the headlamps,parking lamps, instrument panellights, license plate lamps, andtaillamps.

For more information, see:. Exterior Lamp Controls on

page 6‑1.. Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)

on page 6‑5.. Fog Lamps on page 6‑8.

Windshield Wiper/Washer

The front and rear wiper controlsare located on the turn andlane‐change lever.

Turn the band with the wiper symbolto control the windshield wipers.

8 : For a single wipe, turn to8,then release. For several wipes,hold the band on8 longer.

9 : Turns the windshieldwipers off.

6 : Turn the band up for morefrequent wipes or down for lessfrequent wipes.

6 : Slow wipes.

? : Fast wipes.

L : Push the paddle at the top ofthe lever to spray washer fluid onthe windshield.

Rear Wiper Window Wiper/Washer

To turn the rear wiper on, slide thelever to a wiper position.

9 : Turns the wiper off.

5 : Turns on the rear wiper delay.

Z : Turns on the rear wiper.

= : Press the button on the end ofthe lever to spray washer fluid onthe rear window.

See Windshield Wiper/Washer onpage 5‑4 and Rear WindowWiper/Washer on page 5‑5.


In Brief 1-17

Climate ControlsThe heating, cooling, and ventilation in the vehicle can be controlled withthis system.

Climate Control with Cooled and Heated Seats shown

A. Driver and PassengerTemperature Controls

B. AUTO (Automatic Operation)

C. Defrost

D. Air Recirculation

E. Rear Window Defogger

F. Air Conditioning

G. Heated and Cooled Seats

H. Fan Control

I. REAR (Rear Climate Control)

J. Air Delivery Mode Control

See Dual Automatic Climate ControlSystem on page 8‑1 and RearClimate Control System (RearClimate with Rear Seat Audio) onpage 8‑6 (If Equipped).

Transmission

Driver Shift Control (DSC)

The DSC switch is located on theshift lever.

To enable the DSC feature:

1. Move the column shift lever tothe M (Manual) position. TheDriver Information Center (DIC)display will show the messageMANUAL SHIFT on the first lineand the current gear will bedisplayed on the second line.This is the highest attainablerange with all lower gearsaccessible. As an example,when 5 (Fifth) gear is selected,1 (First) through 5 (Fifth) gearsare available.


1-18 In Brief

2. Press the plus/minus buttons,located on the steering columnshift lever, to select the desiredrange of gears for current drivingconditions. See Manual Mode onpage 9‑33.

While using DSC, cruise controland the tow/haul mode canbe used.

Grade Braking is not available whenDSC is active. See Tow/Haul Modeon page 9‑33.

Vehicle Features

Radio(s)This vehicle's radio is part of thenavigation system. See Infotainmenton page 7‑2.

Satellite RadioXM is a satellite radio service thatis based in the 48 contiguousUnited States and 10 Canadianprovinces. XM satellite radio has awide variety of programming andcommercial-free music, coast tocoast, and in digital-quality sound.

A fee is required to receive theXM service.

For more information, refer to:. www.xmradio.com or call

1-800-929-2100 (U.S.). www.xmradio.ca or call

1-877-438-9677 (Canada)

Also, see Satellite Radio onpage 7‑15.

Portable Audio DevicesThis vehicle has an auxiliary input,located on the audio faceplate,and a USB port located on theinstrument panel or in the centerconsole. External devices suchas iPod®, laptop computers,MP3 players, CD changers,USB storage device, etc. can beconnected to the auxiliary port usinga 3.5 mm (1/8 in) input jack or theUSB port depending on the audiosystem.

See Auxiliary Devices on page 7‑30or CD/DVD Player on page 7‑18for further information.

Bluetooth®

For vehicles with a Bluetoothsystem, it allows users with aBluetooth‐enabled cell phone tomake and receive hands-free callsusing the vehicle’s audio systemand controls.


In Brief 1-19

The Bluetooth‐enabled cell phonemust be paired with the Bluetoothsystem before it can be used in thevehicle. Not all phones will supportall functions. For more information,visit www.gm.com/bluetooth.

For more information, see Bluetoothon page 7‑103.

Mobile AppsMobile apps are available fordownload through iTunes® to thenaccess the iPhone® App Storeand Google™ Marketplace forAndroid™. Search for the apps todownload. The apps are free ofcharge; however, the myCadillacapp requires the user to link theirown vehicle and OnStar MyLinkrequires an active OnStarsubscription.

Steering Wheel Controls

If available, some audio controlscan be adjusted at the steeringwheel.

w : Press to go to the next favoriteradio station, track on a CD,or folder on an iPod® or USBdevice.

c /x : Press to go to theprevious favorite radio station, trackon a CD, or folder on an iPod® orUSB device. Press to reject anincoming call, or to end a call.

b / g : Press to silence the vehiclespeakers only. Press again to turnthe sound on. Press and hold longerthan two seconds to interact withOnStar® or Bluetooth systems,if equipped.

+ e : Press to increase volume.

− e : Press to decrease volume.

SRCE: Press to switch betweenthe radio and CD, and for equippedvehicles, the DVD, front auxiliary,and rear auxiliary.

¨ : Press to seek the next radiostation, the next track or chapterwhile sourced to the CD or DVDslot, or to select tracks and folderson an iPod or USB device.

For more information, see SteeringWheel Controls on page 5‑2.


1-20 In Brief

Cruise Control

Cruise Control Shown withHeated Steering Wheel Button

(If Equipped)

The cruise control buttons arelocated on the left side of thesteering wheel.

I : Press to turn the system on oroff. The indicator light is on whencruise control is on and turns offwhen cruise control is off.

+ RES: Press briefly to make thevehicle resume to a previouslyset speed, or press and hold toaccelerate.

SET −: Press to set the speed andactivate cruise control or make thevehicle decelerate.

[ : Press to disengage cruisecontrol without erasing the setspeed from memory.

See Cruise Control on page 9‑41.

Navigation SystemThe navigation system providesdetailed maps of most majorfreeways and roads throughoutthe United States and Canada.After a destination has been set,the system provides turn-by-turninstructions for reaching thedestination. In addition, the systemcan help locate a variety of POIs(Points of Interest), such as banks,airports, restaurants, and more.

See Using the Navigation Systemon page 7‑62 for more information.

Driver InformationCenter (DIC)The DIC display is located at thebottom of the instrument panelcluster. It shows the status of manyvehicle systems and enablesaccess to the personalization menu.

The DIC buttons are located onthe instrument panel, next to thesteering wheel.

3 : Press to display theodometer, trip odometer, fuel range,average economy, fuel used,timer, transmission temperature,


In Brief 1-21

instantaneous economy, andaverage vehicle speed.The compass and outside airtemperature will also be shown inthe display. The temperature will beshown in °C or °F depending on theunits selected.

T : Press to display the oil life,units, side blind zone system on/off,tire pressure readings for vehicleswith the Tire Pressure MonitorSystem (TPMS), compass zonesetting, and compass recalibration.

U : Press to customize thefeature settings on your vehicle.See Vehicle Personalization onpage 5‑38 for more information.

V : Press to set or reset certainfunctions and to turn off oracknowledge messages on the DIC.

For more information, see DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5‑23.

Vehicle CustomizationSome vehicle features can beprogrammed by using the DICbuttons next to the steering wheel.These features include:. Language. Door Lock and Unlock Settings. RKE Lock and Unlock Feedback. Lighting. Chime Volume. Memory Features. Digital Speedometer Display

See Vehicle Personalization onpage 5‑38.

Side Blind ZoneAlert (SBZA)If available, this feature will alert youto vehicles located in the vehicle'sside blind zone. When the systemdetects a vehicle in the side blind

zone, the SBZA display will light upin the corresponding outside sidemirror.

The system is enabled at everyvehicle startup. It can be disabledthrough the Driver InformationCenter (DIC).

If the message SIDE BLIND ZONESYSTEM UNAVAILABLE appearson the DIC, the system has beendisabled because the sensor isblocked and cannot detect vehiclesin the blind zone. The sensor maybe blocked by mud, dirt, snow, ice,slush, or even heavy rainstorms.This message may also activateduring heavy rain or due to roadspray. The vehicle does not needservice.

See Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)on page 9‑45 for more information.


1-22 In Brief

Rear VisionCamera (RVC)If available, the RVC displays a viewof the area behind the vehicle onthe navigation screen when thevehicle is shifted into R (Reverse).Once shifted out of R (Reverse), thenavigation screen will go back to thelast screen that had been displayed,after a delay.

To clean the camera lens, locatedabove the license plate, rinse it withwater and wipe it with a soft cloth.

See Rear Vision Camera (RVC) onpage 9‑48.

Ultrasonic Parking AssistIf available, the Ultrasonic RearParking Assist (URPA) system usessensors on the rear bumper toassist with parking and avoidingobjects while in R (Reverse).It operates at speeds less than8 km/h (5 mph). URPA uses audiblebeeps to provide distance andsystem information.

Keep the sensors on the vehicle'srear bumper clean to ensure properoperation.

See Ultrasonic Parking Assist onpage 9‑44.

Power OutletsThe accessory power outlets can beused to plug in electrical equipment,such as a cell phone or MP3 player.

The vehicle has three accessorypower outlets located:. Inside the floor console

storage bin.. On the rear of the floor console.. In the rear cargo area on the

passenger side.

The accessory power outlets arepowered, even when the ignition isin LOCK/OFF. Continuing to usepower outlets while the ignition is inLOCK/OFF may cause the vehicle'sbattery to run down.

See Power Outlets on page 5‑8.

Universal Remote System

Vehicles with the Universal RemoteSystem will have these buttonslocated in the headliner.

This system provides a way toreplace up to three remote controltransmitters used to activatedevices such as garage dooropeners, security systems, andhome automation devices.

Read the instructions completelybefore attempting to program thetransmitter. Because of the stepsinvolved, it may be helpful to haveanother person assist withprogramming the transmitter.

See Universal Remote System onpage 5‑46.


In Brief 1-23

Sunroof

A. Open or Close

B. Vent

On vehicles with a sunroof, thesunroof only operates when theignition is in the ACC/ACCESSORYor ON/RUN, or when RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) is active.See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) on page 9‑26 for moreinformation.

Vent: From the closed position,press the rear of switch (B) to ventthe sunroof.

Open/Close: To open the sunroof,press and hold switch (A) until thesunroof reaches the desiredposition. Press and hold the front ofswitch (A) to close it.

Express-Open/Express-Close:To express-open the sunroof, fullypress and release the rear ofswitch (A) until the sunroofreaches the desired position.To express-close the sunroof,fully press and release the frontof switch (A). Press the switchagain to stop it.

When the sunroof is opened, an airdeflector will automatically raise.The air deflector will retract whenthe sunroof is closed.

The sunroof also has a sunshadewhich can be pulled forward to blocksun rays. The sunshade must beopened and closed manually.

If an object is in the path of thesunroof while it is closing, theanti-pinch feature will detect theobject and stop the sunroof.

See Sunroof on page 2‑21 for moreinformation.


1-24 In Brief

Performance andMaintenance

StabiliTrak® SystemThe vehicle has a traction controlsystem that limits wheel spin andthe StabiliTrak system that assistswith directional control of thevehicle in difficult driving conditions.Both systems turn on automaticallyevery time the vehicle is started.. To turn off traction control, press

and release g on the instrumentpanel. The appropriate DICmessage displays. See RideControl System Messages onpage 5‑34.

. To turn off both traction controland StabiliTrak, press andhold g until g illuminates andthe appropriate DIC messagedisplays. See Ride ControlSystem Messages on page 5‑34.

. Press and release g again toturn on both systems.

For more information, seeStabiliTrak® System on page 9‑37.

Tire Pressure MonitorThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).

The TPMS warning light alerts youto a significant loss in pressure ofone of the vehicle's tires. If thewarning light comes on, stop assoon as possible and inflate thetires to the recommended pressureshown on the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑16. The warninglight will remain on until the tirepressure is corrected.

During cooler conditions, the low tirepressure warning light may appearwhen the vehicle is first started and

then turn off. This may be an earlyindicator that the tire pressures aregetting low and the tires need to beinflated to the proper pressure.

The TPMS does not replace normalmonthly tire maintenance. It is thedriver’s responsibility to maintaincorrect tire pressures.

See Tire Pressure Monitor Systemon page 10‑53.

Tire Sealant andCompressor KitThis vehicle may come with a sparetire and tire changing equipment ora tire sealant and compressor kit.The kit can be used to temporarilyseal small punctures in the treadarea of the tire. See Tire Sealantand Compressor Kit on page 10‑67.

If the vehicle came with a spare tireand tire changing equipment, seeIf a Tire Goes Flat on page 10‑65.


In Brief 1-25

Engine Oil Life SystemThe engine oil life system calculatesengine oil life based on vehicle useand displays a DIC message whenit is necessary to change the engineoil and filter. The oil life systemshould be reset to 100% onlyfollowing an oil change.

Resetting the Oil Life System

1. Display OIL LIFE REMAININGon the DIC.

2. Press and hold the SET/RESETbutton on the DIC for more thanfive seconds. The oil life willchange to 100%.

See Engine Oil Life System onpage 10‑9.

Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol)Vehicles that have a FlexFuel badgeand a yellow fuel cap can use eitherunleaded gasoline or ethanol fuelcontaining up to 85% ethanol (E85).See Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) onpage 9‑54. For all other vehicles,use only the unleaded gasolinedescribed under RecommendedFuel on page 9‑52.

Driving for Better FuelEconomyDriving habits can affect fuelmileage. Here are some driving tipsto get the best fuel economypossible.. Avoid fast starts and accelerate

smoothly.. Brake gradually and avoid

abrupt stops.. Avoid idling the engine for long

periods of time.

. When road and weatherconditions are appropriate,use cruise control.

. Always follow posted speedlimits or drive more slowly whenconditions require.

. Keep vehicle tires properlyinflated.

. Combine several trips into asingle trip.

. Replace the vehicle's tires withthe same TPC Spec numbermolded into the tire's sidewallnear the size.

. Follow recommended scheduledmaintenance.


1-26 In Brief

Roadside ServiceU.S.: 1-800-224-1400

Canada: 1-800-882-1112

TTY Users (U.S. only):1-888-889-2438

Mexico: 01-800-466-0805

As the owner of a new Cadillac,you are automatically enrolled in theRoadside Service program.

See Roadside Service (U.S. andCanada) on page 13‑7 or RoadsideService (Mexico) on page 13‑9.

Roadside Service and OnStar(U.S. and Canada)

If you have an active OnStarsubscription, press theQ buttonand the current GPS location will besent to an OnStar advisor who willassess your problem, contactRoadside Service, and relay yourexact location to get the helpyou need.

Online Owner Center(U.S. and Canada)

The Online Owner Center is acomplimentary service that includesonline service reminders, vehiclemaintenance tips, online ownermanual, special privileges,and more.

Sign up today at:

U.S.: cadillac.com

Click on “Owners,” then “ManageMy Cadillac/Owners Login.”

Canada: cadillacowner.ca

OnStar®

If equipped, this vehicle has acomprehensive, in-vehicle systemthat can connect to a live Advisorfor Emergency, Security, Navigation,Connection, and DiagnosticServices. See OnStar Overview onpage 14‑1.


Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-1

Keys, Doors, andWindows

Keys and LocksKeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 2-5Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . 2-8Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

DoorsLiftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Power Assist Steps . . . . . . . . . . 2-12

Vehicle SecurityVehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13Anti-theft Alarm System . . . . . . 2-13Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Immobilizer Operation . . . . . . . 2-14

Exterior MirrorsConvex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . 2-17Park Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17

Interior MirrorsAutomatic Dimming RearviewMirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17

WindowsWindows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21

RoofSunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21


2-2 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Keys and Locks

Keys

{ WARNING

Leaving children in a vehicle withthe ignition key is dangerous formany reasons. Children or otherscould be badly injured or evenkilled. They could operate thepower windows or other controlsor even make the vehicle move.The windows will function with thekeys in the ignition and childrencould be seriously injured or killedif caught in the path of a closingwindow. Do not leave the keys ina vehicle with children.

The key can be used for the ignitionand door locks.

See your dealer if a replacementkey or additional key is needed.

Notice: If the keys get locked inthe vehicle, it may have to bedamaged to get them out. Alwayscarry a spare key.

If locked out of your vehicle, contactRoadside Service. See RoadsideService (U.S. and Canada) onpage 13‑7 or Roadside Service(Mexico) on page 13‑9 for moreinformation.

With an active OnStar subscription,an OnStar Advisor may remotelyunlock the vehicle. See OnStarOverview on page 14‑1.



Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemSee Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑21 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.

If there is a decrease in the RKEoperating range:. Check the distance. The

transmitter may be too far fromthe vehicle.

. Check the location. Othervehicles or objects may beblocking the signal.

. Check the transmitter's battery.See “Battery Replacement” laterin this section.

. If the transmitter is still notworking correctly, see yourdealer or a qualified technicianfor service.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System OperationThe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter functions work up to60 m (195 ft) away from the vehicle.

There are other conditions whichcan affect the performance of thetransmitter. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System on page 2‑3.

With Remote Start and PowerLiftgate and Liftglass (Without

Remote Start Similar)

The following functions may beavailable if this vehicle has theRKE system:

Q (Lock): Press to lock all thedoors.

If enabled through the DriverInformation Center (DIC), the turnsignal lamps flash once to indicatelocking has occurred. If enabledthrough the DIC, the horn chirpswhen Q is pressed again withinthree seconds. See VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑38 foradditional information.

Pressing Q arms the contenttheft‐deterrent system. SeeAnti-theft Alarm System onpage 2‑13.

K (Unlock): Press once to unlockonly the driver door. If K is pressedagain within three seconds, allremaining doors unlock. The interiorlamps may come on and stay on for20 seconds or until the ignition isturned on.



If enabled through the DIC, the turnsignal lamps flash twice to indicateunlocking has occurred. See VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑38.If enabled through the DIC, theexterior lamps turn on briefly if it isdark enough outside. See“Approach Lighting” under VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑38.

Pressing K on the RKE transmitterdisarms the content theft‐deterrentsystem. See Anti-theft AlarmSystem on page 2‑13.

/ (Remote Vehicle Start): Forvehicles with this feature, press/to start the engine from outside thevehicle using the RKE transmitter.See Remote Vehicle Start onpage 2‑5 for additional information.

8 (Power Liftgate): Press andhold to open and close the liftgate.The taillamps flash and a chimesounds to indicate when the liftgateis opening and closing.

m (Liftglass): Press and hold toopen the liftglass.

L (Vehicle Locator/PanicAlarm): Press and release tolocate the vehicle. The turn signallamps flash and the horn soundsthree times.

Press and holdL forthree seconds to activate the panicalarm. The turn signal lamps flashand the horn sounds repeatedly for30 seconds. The alarm turns offwhen the ignition is moved toON/RUN orL is pressed again.The ignition must be in LOCK/OFFfor the panic alarm to work.

The vehicle comes withtwo transmitters. Each transmitterwill have a number on top of it,“1” or “2”. These numberscorrespond to the driver of thevehicle. For example, the memoryseat position for driver 1 will berecalled when using the transmitterlabeled “1”, if enabled through theDIC. See Memory Seats onpage 3‑5 for more information.

Programming Transmitters tothe Vehicle

Only RKE transmitters programmedto this vehicle will work. If atransmitter is lost or stolen, areplacement can be purchased andprogrammed through your dealer.When the replacement transmitter isprogrammed to this vehicle, allremaining transmitters must also bereprogrammed. Any lost or stolentransmitters will no longer workonce the new transmitter isprogrammed. Each vehicle canhave up to eight transmittersprogrammed to it. See your dealerto have transmitters programmed tothe vehicle.

Battery Replacement

Replace the battery if the REPLACEBATTERY IN REMOTE KEYmessage displays in the DIC. See“REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTEKEY” under Key and LockMessages on page 5‑32 foradditional information.



Notice: When replacing thebattery, do not touch any of thecircuitry on the transmitter. Staticfrom your body could damage thetransmitter.

To replace the battery:

1. Separate the transmitter with aflat, thin object inserted into thenotch, located above themetal base.

2. Remove the old battery. Do notuse a metal object.

3. Insert the new battery, positiveside facing up. Replace with aCR2032 or equivalent battery.

4. Snap the transmitter backtogether.

Remote Vehicle StartThis feature allows you to start theengine from outside of the vehicle.It may also start up the vehicle'sheating or air conditioning systemsand rear window defogger. Normaloperation of the system will returnafter the key is turned to theON/RUN position.

During a remote start, the climatecontrol system will default to aheating or cooling mode dependingon the outside temperatures.

During a remote start, if the vehiclehas an automatic climate controlsystem and heated seats, theheated seats will turn on duringcolder outside temperatures and willshut off when the key is turned toON/RUN. If the vehicle does nothave an automatic climate control

system, during remote start, you willneed to manually turn the heatedseats on and off. See Heated andVentilated Front Seats on page 3‑7for additional information.

Laws in some communities mayrestrict the use of remote starters.For example, some laws mayrequire a person using the remotestart to have the vehicle in viewwhen doing so. Check localregulations for any requirements onremote starting of vehicles.

Do not use the remote start featureif the vehicle is low on fuel. Thevehicle may run out of fuel.

If the vehicle has the remote startfeature, the RKE transmitterfunctions will have an increasedrange of operation. However, therange may be less while the vehicleis running.

There are other conditions whichcan affect the performance of thetransmitter, see Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System on page 2‑3 foradditional information.



/ (Remote Start): This button willbe on the RKE transmitter if youhave remote start.

To start the vehicle using the remotestart feature:

1. Aim the transmitter at thevehicle.

2. Press and release Q.

3. Immediately press and hold /until the turn signal lamps flash.If you cannot see the vehicle'slamps, press and hold/ fortwo to four seconds.

When the vehicle starts, theparking lamps will turn on andremain on while the vehicle isrunning. The doors will belocked and the climate controlsystem may come on.

The engine will continue to runfor 10 minutes. Repeat the stepsfor a 10-minute time extension.Remote start can be extendedonly once.

After entering the vehicle during aremote start, insert and turn the keyto ON/RUN to drive the vehicle.

To cancel a remote start, do any ofthe following:. Aim the RKE transmitter at the

vehicle and press and hold/until the parking lamps turn off.

. Turn on the hazard warningflashers.

. Turn the ignition on and thenback off.

The vehicle can be remote startedtwo separate times between drivingsequences. The engine will run for10 minutes after each remote start.

Or, you can extend the engine runtime by another 10 minutes withinthe first 10 minute remote start timeframe, and before the engine stops.

For example, if Q and then/ arepressed again after the vehicle hasbeen running for five minutes,10 minutes are added, allowing theengine to run for 15 minutes.

The additional 10 minutes areconsidered a second remote vehiclestart.

After the vehicle's engine has beenstarted two times using/, or asingle remote start with one timeextension, the vehicle must bestarted with the key.

After the key is removed from theignition, the vehicle can be remotestarted again.

The vehicle cannot be remotestarted if the key is in the ignition,the hood is not closed, or if there isan emission control systemmalfunction and the malfunctionindicator lamp is on.

Also, the engine will turn off during aremote vehicle start if the coolanttemperature gets too high or if theoil pressure gets low.



Door Locks

{ WARNING

Unlocked doors can bedangerous.

. Passengers, especiallychildren, can easily open thedoors and fall out of a movingvehicle. When a door islocked, the handle will notopen it. The chance of beingthrown out of the vehicle in acrash is increased if thedoors are not locked. So, allpassengers should wearsafety belts properly and thedoors should be lockedwhenever the vehicle isdriven.

. Young children who get intounlocked vehicles may beunable to get out. A child canbe overcome by extreme heatand can suffer permanent

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

injuries or even death fromheat stroke. Always lock thevehicle whenever leaving it.

. Outsiders can easily enterthrough an unlocked doorwhen you slow down or stopthe vehicle. Locking the doorscan help prevent this fromhappening.

There are several ways to lock andunlock the vehicle.

From outside, use the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter orthe key in the driver door.

From inside, use the power doorlocks or manual door locks. To lockor unlock the door with the manuallocks, push down or pull up on themanual lock knob.

Power Door Locks

Press Q or K on the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 2‑3.

Premium Trim Shown, Up‐LevelSimilar

Q (Lock): Press to lock the doors.

K (Unlock): Press to unlock thedoors.



Delayed LockingWhen locking the doors with thepower lock switch and a door or theliftgate is open, the doors will lockfive seconds after the last door isclosed. You will hear three chimesto signal that the delayed lockingfeature is in use.

Pressing the power lock switchtwice will override the delayedlocking feature and immediatelylock all the doors.

This feature will not operate if thekey is in the ignition.

You can program this feature usingthe Driver Information Center (DIC).See “Delay Door Lock” underVehicle Personalization onpage 5‑38.

Automatic Door LocksThe vehicle may have an automaticlock/unlock feature. This feature canbe programmed using the DriverInformation Center (DIC). See

Vehicle Personalization onpage 5‑38 for more information onDIC programming.

Lockout ProtectionIf the driver side power door lockswitch is pressed when the driverdoor is open and the key is in theignition, all of the doors will lock andthen the driver door will unlock.

If the passenger side power doorlock switch is pressed when thefront passenger door is open andthe key is in the ignition, all of thedoors will lock and then the frontpassenger door will unlock.

Safety LocksThe vehicle has rear door securitylocks to prevent passengers fromopening the rear doors from theinside.

Open the rear doors to access thesecurity locks on the inside edge ofeach door.

To set the locks, insert a key intothe slot and turn it to the horizontalposition. The door can only beopened from the outside with thedoor unlocked. To return the door tonormal operation, turn the slot to thevertical position.



Doors

Liftgate

{ WARNING

Exhaust gases can enter thevehicle if it is driven with theliftgate or trunk/hatch open,or with any objects that passthrough the seal between thebody and the trunk/hatch orliftgate. Engine exhaust containscarbon monoxide (CO) whichcannot be seen or smelled. It cancause unconsciousness and evendeath.

If the vehicle must be driven withthe liftgate or trunk/hatch open:

. Close all of the windows.

. Fully open the air outlets onor under the instrumentpanel.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Adjust the climate controlsystem to a setting thatbrings in only outside air andset the fan speed to thehighest setting. See “ClimateControl Systems” in theIndex.

. If the vehicle is equipped witha power liftgate, disable thepower liftgate function.

For more information aboutcarbon monoxide, see EngineExhaust on page 9‑29.

Notice: If you open the liftgatewithout checking for overheadobstructions such as a garagedoor, you could damage theliftgate or the liftgate glass.Always check to make sure thearea above and behind the liftgateis clear before opening it.

The liftglass or liftgate cannot beopened if the rear wiper is in motion.Attempting to open the liftglass orliftgate while the rear wiper is inmotion will cause the release of theliftglass or liftgate to delay until thewipers are parked off the liftglass.

Manual Liftgate Operation

To unlock the liftgate, press " onthe power door lock switch or press" on the Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) transmittertwice, see RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 2‑3.



Press the touch pad on theunderside of the liftgate handle (B)and lift up.

Use the pull cup to lower and closethe liftgate. Do not press the touchpad while closing the liftgate. Thiswill cause the liftgate to beunlatched.

Power Liftgate Operation

On vehicles with a power liftgate,the switch is on the overheadconsole.

The vehicle must be in P (Park) touse the power feature. The taillampswill flash and a chime will soundwhen the power liftgate moves.

{ WARNING

Exhaust gases can enter thevehicle if it is driven with theliftgate, trunk/hatch open, or withany objects that pass through theseal between the body and thetrunk/hatch or liftgate. Engine

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

exhaust contains CarbonMonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. It can causeunconsciousness and even death.

If the vehicle must be driven withthe liftgate, or trunk/hatch open:

. Close all of the windows.


. Adjust the Climate Controlsystem to a setting thatbrings in only outside air andset the fan speed to thehighest setting. See ClimateControl System in the Index.

. If the vehicle is equipped witha power liftgate, disable thepower liftgate function.


There are several ways to open andclose the power liftgate:

. Press and hold8 on theRKEtransmitter until the liftgatestarts moving.

. Press8 on the overheadconsole.

. Pressl on the bottom of theliftgate next to the latch to close.

Pressing a second time while theliftgate is moving reverses thedirection.

To disable the power liftgatefunction, press OFFon the liftgateswitch.

The power liftgate may betemporarily disabled under extremetemperatures, or under low batteryconditions. If this occurs, the liftgatecan still be operated manually.

If the transmission is shifted out ofP (Park) while the power function isin progress, the liftgate powerfunction will continue to completion.



If the transmission is shifted out ofP (Park) and the vehicle acceleratesbefore the power liftgate latchesclosed, the liftgate may reverse tothe open position. Cargo could fallout of the vehicle. Always makesure the power liftgate is closed andlatched before driving away.

If the liftgate is opened using poweroperation and the liftgate supportstruts have lost pressure, the turnsignals flash and a chime willsound. The liftgate stays opentemporarily, and then slowly closes.See a dealer for service beforeusing the liftgate.

Obstacle Detection Features

If the liftgate encounters an obstacleduring a power open or close cycle,a warning chime will sound and theliftgate will automatically reversedirection to the full closed or openposition. After removing theobstruction, the power liftgateoperation can be used again. If theliftgate encounters multiple

obstacles on the same power cycle,the power function will deactivateand a message will display in theDriver Information Center (DIC), seeObject Detection System Messageson page 5‑33. After removing theobstructions, the liftgate will resumenormal power operation.

Pinch sensors are located on theside edges of the liftgate. If anobject is caught between the liftgateand the vehicle and presses againstthis sensor, the liftgate will reversedirection and open fully. The liftgatewill remain open until it is activatedagain or closed manually.

Manual Operation of PowerLiftgate

To change the liftgate to manualoperation, press OFFon the liftgateswitch.

With the power liftgate disabled andall of the doors unlocked, the liftgatecan be manually opened andclosed.

To open the liftgate, press the touchpad on the handle (B) and lift up.Use the pull cup to lower and closethe liftgate. Do not press the touchpad while closing the liftgate. Thiswill cause the liftgate to beunlatched. The liftgate latch willpower close. Always close theliftgate before driving.

If8 on the RKEtransmitter orlon the liftgate is pressed whilepower operation is disabled, thelamps will flash three times, but theliftgate will not move.

It is not recommended to drive withthe liftgate open, however, whendriving with the liftgate open; theliftgate should be set to manualoperation by pressing OFFon theliftgate switch on the center console.

The liftgate has an electric latch.If the battery is disconnected or haslow voltage, the liftgate will notopen. The liftgate will resumeoperation when the battery isreconnected and charged.



If the battery is properly connectedwith adequate voltage, the switch isnot disabled, and the liftgate still willnot function, see a dealer forservice.

Liftglass

If equipped, there are two ways toopen the liftglass:. Press the button on the

underside of the license plateapplique (A).

. Pressm on theRKEtransmitter.

Power Assist Steps

The vehicle may have power assiststeps. To enable or disable thepower assist steps pushj.

The power assist stepsautomatically extend from beneaththe vehicle on the side in which thedoor has been opened. Once thedoor is closed, the assist stepsautomatically move back under thevehicle after a brief delay. Thevehicle must not be moving for theassist steps to extend or retract.

The assist steps cannot be disabledin the extended position.



Vehicle SecurityThis vehicle has theft-deterrentfeatures; however, they do not makeit impossible to steal.

Anti-theft Alarm SystemYour vehicle has a contenttheft-deterrent alarm system.

This is the security light.

To arm the theft-deterrent system:

1. Open the door.

2. Lock the door with the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitteror the power door lock switch.

The security light will come on toinform the driver the system isarming. If a door is open whenthe doors are locked, thesecurity light will flash.

If the delayed locking feature isturned on, the theft‐deterrentsystem will not start the armingprocess until the last door isclosed and the delay timer hasexpired. See Delayed Lockingon page 2‑8.

3. Close all doors. The securitylight should go off after about30 seconds. The alarm is notarmed until the security lightgoes off.

If a locked driver door is openedwithout using the RKE transmitter, a10-second pre-alarm will occur. Thehorn will chirp and the lights willflash. If the key is not placed in theignition and turned to START or thedoor is not unlocked by pressing theunlock button on the RKEtransmitter during the 10-second

pre-alarm, the alarm will go off. Yourvehicle's headlamps will flash andthe horn will sound for about30 seconds, then will turn off to savethe battery power.

The theft-deterrent system will notactivate if the doors are locked withthe vehicle's key or the manual doorlock. It activates only if you use thepower door lock switch with the dooropen or the RKE transmitter. Youshould also remember that you canstart your vehicle with the correctignition key if the alarm has beenset off.

To avoid setting off the alarm byaccident:. If you do not want to activate the

theft-deterrent system, thevehicle should be locked withthe door key after the doors areclosed.

. Always unlock the doors with theRKE transmitter. Unlocking adoor any other way will set offthe alarm if it is armed.



If you set off the alarm by accident,press unlock on the RKE transmitteror place the key in the ignition andturn it to START to turn off thealarm. The alarm will not stop if youtry to unlock a door any other way.

Testing the Alarm

To test the alarm:

1. From inside the vehicle, lowerthe driver window and open thedriver door.

2. Activate the system by lockingthe doors with the power doorlock switch while the door isopen, or with the RKEtransmitter.

3. Get out of the vehicle, close thedoor and wait for the securitylight to go out.

4. Then reach in through thewindow, unlock the door with themanual door lock and open thedoor. This should set off thealarm.

While the alarm is set, the powerdoor unlock switch will not work.

If the alarm does not sound when itshould but the headlamps flash,check to see if the horn works. Thehorn fuse may be blown. To replacethe fuse, see Fuses and CircuitBreakers on page 10‑39.

If the alarm does not sound or theheadlamps do not flash, the vehicleshould be serviced by your dealer.

ImmobilizerSee Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑21 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.

Immobilizer OperationThis vehicle has PASS-Key® III+(Personalized Automotive SecuritySystem) theft-deterrent system.PASS-Key III+ is a passivetheft-deterrent system.

The system is automatically armedwhen the key is removed from theignition.

The system is automaticallydisarmed when the key is turned toON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY,or START from the LOCK/OFFposition.

You do not have to manually arm ordisarm the system.

The security light will come on ifthere is a problem with arming ordisarming the theft-deterrentsystem.

When the PASS-Key III+ systemsenses that someone is using thewrong key, it prevents the vehiclefrom starting. Anyone using atrial-and-error method to start the



vehicle will be discouraged becauseof the high number of electrical keycodes.

If the engine does not start and thesecurity light on the instrumentpanel cluster comes on when tryingto start the vehicle, there may be aproblem with the theft-deterrentsystem. Turn the ignition off and tryagain.

If the engine still does not start, andthe key appears to be undamaged,try another ignition key. At this time,you may also want to check thefuse. See Fuses and CircuitBreakers on page 10‑39. If theengine still does not start with theother key, the vehicle needs service.If the vehicle does start, the first keymay be faulty. See your dealer whocan service the PASS-Key III+ tohave a new key made.

It is possible for the PASS-Key III+decoder to learn the transpondervalue of a new or replacement key.

Up to 10 keys may be programmedfor the vehicle. The followingprocedure is for programmingadditional keys only. If all thecurrently programmed keys are lostor do not operate, you must seeyour dealer or a locksmith who canservice PASS-Key III+ to have keysmade and programmed to thesystem.

See your dealer or a locksmith whocan service PASS-Key III+ to get anew key blank cut exactly as theignition key that operates thesystem.

To program the new additional key:

1. Verify that the new key has a 1stamped on it.

2. Insert the original, alreadyprogrammed key in the ignitionand start the engine. If theengine will not start, see yourdealer for service.

3. After the engine has started, turnthe key to LOCK/OFF, andremove the key.

4. Insert the new key to beprogrammed and turn it to theON/RUN position withinfive seconds of turning theignition to the LOCK/OFFposition in Step 3.

The security light will turn offonce the key has beenprogrammed.

5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 ifadditional keys are to beprogrammed.

If you lose or damage yourPASS-Key III+ key, see your dealeror a locksmith who can servicePASS-Key III+ to have a newkey made.

Do not leave the key or device thatdisarms or deactivates thetheft-deterrent system in the vehicle.



Exterior Mirrors

Convex Mirrors

{ WARNING

A convex mirror can make things,like other vehicles, look fartheraway than they really are. If youcut too sharply into the right lane,you could hit a vehicle on theright. Check the inside mirror orglance over your shoulder beforechanging lanes.

The passenger side mirror is convexshaped. A convex mirror's surface iscurved so more can be seen fromthe driver seat.

Power Mirrors


Mirror Adjustment

1. Press (A) or (B) to select thedriver or passenger side mirror.

2. Press the arrows on the controlpad to move the mirror up,down, right, or left.

3. Press the opposite side to getthe control pad to a neutralposition.

Power Folding Mirrors

To fold the mirrors:

1. Press (C) to fold the mirrors outto the driving position.

2. Press (D) to fold the mirrors intothe folded position.

Resetting the Power FoldingMirrors

Reset the power folding mirrors if:. The mirrors are accidentally

obstructed while folding.. They are accidentally manually

folded/unfolded.. The mirrors will not stay in the

unfolded position.. The mirrors vibrate at normal

driving speeds.

Fold and unfold the mirrors one timeusing the mirror controls to resetthem to their normal position.A popping noise may be heardduring the resetting of the powerfolding mirrors. This sound is normalafter a manual folding operation.



See Power Mirrors on page 2‑16.

Turn Signal Indicator

The vehicle has a turn signalindicator on the mirror. An arrow onthe mirror flashes in the direction ofthe turn or lane change.

Heated MirrorsThe heated outside rearview mirrorsturn on when the rear windowdefogger is on.

1 (Rear Window Defogger): Thisbutton is on the climate controlpanel.

See “Rear Window Defogger” underDual Automatic Climate ControlSystem on page 8‑1 for moreinformation.

Automatic DimmingMirrorThe vehicle has an automaticdimming mirror. The driver outsidemirror automatically adjusts for theglare of headlamps behind you. This

feature is controlled by the on andoff setting on the inside rearviewmirror. See Automatic DimmingRearview Mirror on page 2‑17 formore information.

Park Tilt MirrorsIf the vehicle has the memorypackage, the passenger and/ordriver mirror tilts to a preselectedposition when the vehicle is inR (Reverse). This feature lets thedriver view the curb when parallelparking. The mirror(s) return to theoriginal position when the vehicle isshifted out of R (Reverse), or theignition is turned off or toOFF/LOCK.

Turn this feature on or off throughthe Driver Information Center (DIC).See Driver Information Center (DIC)on page 5‑23 for more information.

Interior Mirrors

Automatic DimmingRearview MirrorTo adjust the inside rearview mirror,hold the rearview mirror in thecenter and move it to view the areabehind the vehicle.

The automatic dimming rearviewmirror will automatically reduce theglare from the headlamps frombehind. The dimming feature comeson when the vehicle is started.

O (On/Off): Press to turn thedimming feature on or off.

The vehicle may have IntelliBeam®.For more information on IntelliBeam,see “IntelliBeam IntelligentHigh‐Beam Headlamp ControlSystem” under Exterior LampControls on page 6‑1.



Vehicles with OnStar® have threeadditional control buttons located atthe bottom of the mirror. See yourdealer for more information aboutOnStar and how to subscribe to it.See OnStar Overview on page 14‑1for more information.

Cleaning the Mirror

Do not spray glass cleaner directlyon the mirror. Use a soft toweldampened with water.

Windows

{ WARNING

Leaving children, helpless adults,or pets in a vehicle with thewindows closed is dangerous.They can be overcome by theextreme heat and sufferpermanent injuries or even deathfrom heat stroke. Never leave achild, a helpless adult, or a petalone in a vehicle, especially withthe windows closed in warm orhot weather.

The vehicle aerodynamics aredesigned to improve fuel economyperformance. This may result in apulsing sound when a window ispartially open. To reduce the sound,open another window or the sunroof(if equipped).



Power Windows

{ WARNING

Leaving children in a vehicle withthe keys is dangerous for manyreasons. Children or others couldbe badly injured or even killed.They could operate the powerwindows or other controls or evenmake the vehicle move. Thewindows will function and theycould be seriously injured or killedif caught in the path of a closingwindow. Do not leave keys in avehicle with children.

When there are children in therear seat use the window lockoutbutton to prevent unintentionaloperation of the windows.


The driver door has switches thatcontrol all windows, the passengersdoor switch only control thatwindow. The power windows workwhen the ignition is in ON/RUN orACC/ACCESSORY, or in RetainedAccessory Power (RAP). SeeRetained Accessory Power (RAP)on page 9‑26 for more information.

Press the switch to lower thewindow. Pull the switch up toraise it.

Express-Down/Up Windows

Windows with the express featureallow the windows to be raised andlowered all the way without holdingthe switch.

Press or pull the switch fully andrelease it to activate the expressfeature.

The express mode can be canceledat any time by briefly pressing orpulling the switch.

Express Window Anti-PinchFeature

If any object is in the path of thewindow when the express‐up isactive, the window will stop at theobstruction and auto‐reverse to apreset factory position. Weatherconditions such as severe icingmay also cause the window toauto‐reverse. The window will returnto normal operation once theobstruction or condition is removed.



Express Window Anti‐PinchOverride

{ WARNING

If express override is activated,the window will not reverseautomatically. You or others couldbe injured and the window couldbe damaged. Before you useexpress override, make sure thatall people and obstructions areclear of the window path.

In an emergency, the anti‐pinchfeature can be overridden in asupervised mode. Hold the windowswitch all the way up to the secondposition. The window will rise for aslong as the switch is held. Once theswitch is released, the expressmode is re‐activated.

In this mode, the window can stillclose on an object in its path. Usecare when using the override mode.

Programming the PowerWindows

If the battery on the vehicle hasbeen recharged, disconnected, oris not working, you will need toreprogram each front power windowfor the express-up feature to work.Before reprogramming, replace orrecharge the vehicle's battery.

To program each front window,follow these steps:

1. With the ignition in ACC/ACCESSORY, ON/RUN,or when RAP is active, close alldoors.

2. Press and hold the powerwindow switch until the windowis fully open.

3. Pull the power window switch upuntil the window is fully closed.

4. Continue holding the switch upfor approximately two secondsafter the window is completelyclosed.

The window is now reprogrammed.Repeat the process for the otherwindows.

Window Lockout

This feature prevents the rearpassenger windows from operating,except from the driver position.

. Presso to activate the rearwindow locks. An indicator lightwill illuminate when the featureis on.

. Presso again to deactivate therear window locks.



Sun Visors

Pull the sun visor down to blockglare. Detach the sun visor from thecenter mount to pivot to the sidewindow, or to extend along the rod,if available.

Roof

Sunroof

A. Open or Close

B. Vent

On vehicles with a sunroof, thesunroof only operates when theignition is in the ACC/ACCESSORYor ON/RUN, or when RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) is active.See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) on page 9‑26

Vent: From the closed position,press the rear of switch (B) to ventthe sunroof.

Open/Close: To open the sunroof,press and hold switch (A) until thesunroof reaches the desiredposition. Press and hold the front ofswitch (A) to close it.

Express-Open/Express-Close: Toexpress-open the sunroof, fullypress and release the rear ofswitch (A) until the sunroofreaches the desired position. Toexpress-close the sunroof, fullypress and release the front ofswitch (A). Press the switch again tostop it.

When the sunroof is opened, an airdeflector will automatically raise.The air deflector will retract whenthe sunroof is closed.

The sunroof also has a sunshadewhich can be pulled forward to blocksun rays. The sunshade must beopened and closed manually.



If an object is in the path of thesunroof while it is closing, theanti-pinch feature will detect theobject and stop the sunroof.

Dirt and debris may collect on thesunroof seal or in the track. Thiscould cause an issue with sunroofoperation or noise. It could also plugthe water drainage system.Periodically open the sunroof andremove any obstacles or loosedebris. Wipe the sunroof seal androof sealing area using a cleancloth, mild soap, and water. Do notremove grease from the sunroof.


Seats and Restraints 3-1

Seats andRestraints

Head RestraintsHead Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Front SeatsPower Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . 3-3Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Memory Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5Heated and Ventilated FrontSeats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

Rear SeatsHeated Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8Second Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8Third Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12

Safety BeltsSafety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23

Lap Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . 3-24Safety System Check . . . . . . . . 3-24Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24Replacing Safety Belt SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-25

Airbag SystemAirbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . 3-27When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29

What Makes an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31

How Does an AirbagRestrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31

What Will You See after anAirbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32

Passenger SensingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33

Servicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 3-38

Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . 3-40Replacing Airbag SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-40

Child RestraintsOlder Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41Infants and YoungChildren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43

Child Restraint Systems . . . . . 3-45Where to Put the Restraint . . . 3-47Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCHSystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49

Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-56

Securing Child Restraints(Rear Seat Position) . . . . . . . . 3-56

Securing Child Restraints(Center Front SeatPosition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59

Securing Child Restraints(Right Front SeatPosition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-60


3-2 Seats and Restraints

Head Restraints

{ WARNING

With head restraints that are notinstalled and adjusted properly,there is a greater chance thatoccupants will suffer a neck/spinal injury in a crash. Do notdrive until the head restraints forall occupants are installed andadjusted properly.

Adjust the head restraint so that thetop of the restraint is at the sameheight as the top of the occupant'shead. This position reduces thechance of a neck injury in a crash.

Front Seats

The front seats have adjustablehead restraints in the outboardseating positions.

The height of the head restraint canbe adjusted. Pull the head restraintup to raise it. Try to move the headrestraint to make sure that it islocked in place.

To lower the head restraint, pressthe button, located on the top of theseatback, and push the headrestraint down. Try to move thehead restraint after the button isreleased to make sure that it islocked in place.

The front seat outboard headrestraints are not designed tobe removed.

Rear Seats

The vehicle's second-row seatshave head restraints in the outboardseating positions that cannot beadjusted.

The vehicle's third-row seats,if equipped, have adjustableheadrests in the outboard seatingpositions.

The height of the headrest can beadjusted. Pull the headrest up toraise it. To lower the headrest, pushdown on the headrest.

Rear seat head restraints andheadrests are not designed to beremoved.



Front Seats

Power Seat Adjustment

{ WARNING

You can lose control of thevehicle if you try to adjust a driverseat while the vehicle is moving.The sudden movement couldstartle and confuse you, or makeyou push a pedal when you donot want to. Adjust the driver seatonly when the vehicle is notmoving.

To adjust a power seat:. Move the seat forward or

rearward by sliding the controlforward or rearward.

. Raise or lower the front or rearpart of the seat cushion bymoving the front or rear of thecontrol up or down.

. Raise or lower the entire seat bymoving the entire control upor down.

To adjust the seatback, seeReclining Seatbacks on page 3‑4.

Lumbar Adjustment

To adjust the lumbar support:. Press and hold the front or rear

of the control to increase ordecrease lumbar support.

. Press and hold the top or bottomof the control to raise or lowerthe height of the lumbar support.



Reclining Seatbacks

Power Reclining Seatbacks

To adjust the seatback:. Tilt the top of the control

rearward to recline.. Tilt the top of the control forward

to raise.

{ WARNING

Sitting in a reclined position whenthe vehicle is in motion can bedangerous. Even when buckledup, the safety belts cannot dotheir job.

The shoulder belt will not beagainst your body. Instead, it willbe in front of you. In a crash, youcould go into it, receiving neck orother injuries.

The lap belt could go up overyour abdomen. The belt forceswould be there, not at your pelvicbones. This could cause seriousinternal injuries.

For proper protection when thevehicle is in motion, have theseatback upright. Then sit wellback in the seat and wear thesafety belt properly.

Do not have a seatback reclined ifthe vehicle is moving.



Memory Seats

The controls on the driver door areused to program and recall memorysettings for the driver seat, outsidemirrors, power steering column, andthe adjustable throttle and brakepedals.

Storing Memory Positions

To save into memory:

1. Adjust the driver seat, includingthe seatback recliner andlumbar, both outside mirrors,power steering column, and thethrottle and brake pedals.

See Power Mirrors onpage 2‑16, Steering WheelAdjustment on page 5‑2, andAdjustable Throttle and BrakePedal on page 9‑22.

Not all mirrors and adjustablethrottles and brake pedals willhave the ability to save andrecall their positions.

2. Press and hold “1” untiltwo beeps sound.

3. Repeat for a second driverposition using “2.”

To recall, press and release “1” or“2.” The vehicle must be in P (Park).A single beep will sound. The seat,outside mirrors, power steeringcolumn, and adjustable throttle andbrake pedals will move to thepositions previously stored for theidentified driver.

Memory Remote Recall

The memory feature can recall thedriver seat, outside mirrors, powersteering column, and pedals tostored positions when entering thevehicle.

To activate, unlock the driverdoor with the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter. The driverseat, outside mirrors, power steeringcolumn, and adjustable pedals willmove to the memory positionsassociated with the transmitter usedto unlock the vehicle.



This feature can be turned on or offusing the vehicle personalizationmenu. See Vehicle Personalizationon page 5‑38.

To stop recall movement, press oneof the power seat controls, memoryor power mirror buttons, powersteering column control, or theadjustable pedal switch.

If something has blocked the driverseat, power steering column, or theadjustable pedals while recalling amemory position, the recall maystop. Remove the obstruction; thenpress and hold the appropriatemanual control for the memory itemthat is not recalling for two seconds.Try recalling the memory positionagain by pressing the appropriatememory button. If the memoryposition is still not recalling, seeyour dealer for service.

Easy Exit Positions

This feature can move the driverseat rearward and the powersteering column up and forward toallow extra room to exit the vehicle.

B (Easy Exit Positions): Press torecall the easy exit positions. Thevehicle must be in P (Park).

If the easy exit feature isprogrammed on in the vehiclepersonalization menu, automaticdriver seat and power steeringcolumn movement occur when theignition key is removed.

A single beep sounds. The driverseat moves back approximately8 cm (3 in) and the power steeringcolumn moves up and forward. Tomove the seat back farther, pressB again until the seat is all theway back.

If something has blocked the driverseat while recalling the exit position,the recall may stop. Remove theobstruction; then press and hold thepower seat control rearward fortwo seconds. Try recalling the exitposition again. If the exit position isstill not recalling, see your dealer forservice.

See Vehicle Personalization onpage 5‑38.



Heated and VentilatedFront Seats

{ WARNING

If you cannot feel temperaturechange or pain to the skin, theseat heater may cause burnseven at low temperatures. Toreduce the risk of burns, peoplewith such a condition should usecare when using the seat heater,especially for long periods oftime. Do not place anything onthe seat that insulates againstheat, such as a blanket, cushion,cover, or similar item. This maycause the seat heater tooverheat. An overheated seatheater may cause a burn or maydamage the seat.

The buttons are on the climatecontrol panel.

{ (Cooled Seat): Press to coolthe seat.

+ (Heated Seatback): Press toheat the seatback.

z (Heated Seat and Seatback):Press to heat the seat andseatback.

Press the desired button once forthe highest setting. With each pressof the button, the seat will change tothe next lower setting, and then tothe off setting. Indicator bars next tothe symbol on the climate controldisplay show the selectedsetting: three for high, two formedium, and one for low.

The heated and cooled seatsare canceled when the ignition isturned off. To use this feature afterrestarting the vehicle, press thedesired button again.



Rear Seats

Heated Rear Seats

{ WARNING

If you cannot feel temperaturechange or pain to the skin, theseat heater may cause burnseven at low temperatures. Seethe Warning under Heated andVentilated Front Seats onpage 3‑7.

The buttons are on the Rear SeatAudio (RSA) panel on the rear of thecenter console.

Press M or L to heat the leftoutboard or right outboard seatcushion. An indicator on the RSAdisplay appears when this featureis on.

Press the button once for thehighest setting. With each press ofthe button, the heated seat changesto the next lower setting, and thenthe off setting. Indicator bars next tothe symbol show the setting: threefor high, two for medium, and onefor low.

The heated seats are canceledten seconds after the ignition isturned off. To use this feature afterthe vehicle is restarted, press thedesired button.

Second Row SeatsThe second row seats can be foldedfor additional cargo space or foldedand tumbled for easy entry and exit

to the third row seat, if equipped.The seat has either the manual foldand tumble feature or the automaticseat release fold and tumblefeature.

Reclining Seatbacks (BucketSeats Only)

On vehicles with second row bucketseats, the seatbacks can bereclined.

To recline the seatback:

1. Lift the lever on the outboardside of the seat.



2. Move the seatback to thedesired position, and thenrelease the lever to lock theseatback in place.

3. Push and pull on the seatback tomake sure it is locked.

To return the seatback to the uprightposition:

1. Lift the lever fully withoutapplying pressure to theseatback, and the seatback willreturn to the upright position.

{ WARNING

If either seatback is not locked, itcould move forward in a suddenstop or crash. That could causeinjury to the person sitting there.Always push and pull on theseatbacks to be sure they arelocked.


Manual Fold and TumbleFeature

Folding and Tumbling the Seat

To fold and tumble the seat:

1. Make sure that there is nothingunder, in front of, or on the seat.

Notice: Folding a rear seat withthe safety belts still fastened maycause damage to the seat or thesafety belts. Always unbuckle thesafety belts and return them totheir normal stowed positionbefore folding a rear seat.

2. Lift the lever, on the outboardside of the seat, to release theseatback.

The seatback will fold forward tocreate a flat load floor.

If the seatback cannot fold flat,try moving the front seat forwardand/or put the front seatback inthe upright position.



3. Lift the lever again to release therear of the seat from the floor.The seat will tumble forward.

Folding and Tumbling the Seatfrom the Third Row Seat

{ WARNING

Using the third row seatingposition while the second row isfolded, or folded and tumbled,could cause injury in a suddenstop or crash. Be sure to return

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

the seat to the passenger seatingposition. Push and pull on theseat to make sure it is locked intoplace.

To fold and tumble the seat from thethird row seat, if equipped:



60/40 Split-Bench Seat Shown,Bucket Seat Similar

2. Lift the lever, on the bottom rearof the second row seat on theinboard side, to release theseatback. The seatback will foldforward.

3. Lift the same lever again torelease the rear of the seat fromthe floor. The seat will tumbleforward.



Automatic Fold and TumbleFeature

The transmission must be inP (Park) for this feature to work.

{ WARNING

Automatically folding andtumbling the seat when someoneis sitting in the seat, could causeinjury to the person sitting there.Always make sure there is no onesitting in the seat before pressingthe automatic seat release button.

Folding and Tumbling the SecondRow Seat from the Third Row Seator Outside the Vehicle

{ WARNING

Using the third row seatingposition while the second row isfolded, or folded and tumbled,could cause injury in a sudden

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

stop or crash. Be sure to returnthe seat to the passenger seatingposition. Push and pull on theseat to make sure it is locked intoplace.

To fold and tumble the seat from thethird row seat, if equipped:



Driver Side Rear Panel ButtonShown

2. Press the automatic seat releasebutton on the panel behind therear doors.

The seatback automatically foldsflat and the seat tumblesforward. There will be a slightdelay between the folding of theseatback and the tumbling ofthe seat.



Returning the Seat to theSitting Position

To return the seat to the sittingposition from the tumbled position:

1. Pull the seat down until it latchesto the floor. The seatback cannotbe raised if the seat is notlatched to the floor.

{ WARNING


2. Lift the seatback and push itrearward. Push and pull on theseatback to make sure it islocked.

3. For the 60/40 split-bench seat,make sure the safety belt in thecenter seating position is notcaught between the two seatsand is not twisted.

Third Row SeatsIf the vehicle has a third row seat,the seatback can be folded, and theentire seat can be tumbled orremoved from the vehicle.

Folding the Seatback

To fold the seatback:

1. Open the liftgate to access thecontrols for the seat.

2. Remove all items on the seatcushion.


3. Lift the release lever “1”. on thebottom rear of the seatback onthe outboard side of the seat,and the seatback folds forward.

Returning the Seatback to theUpright Position

To return the seatback to the uprightposition:


2. Raise the seatback to theupright position.



{ WARNING



Tumbling the Third Row Seat

To tumble the seat:


2. Make sure the headrests arecompletely lowered and there isnothing under, in front of, or onthe seat.

3. Fold the seatbacks forwardusing lever “1” and theinstructions listed previouslyunder “Folding the Seatback.”

The seat cannot be unlatchedfrom the floor unless theseatback is folded.

4. Unlatch the seat from the floorby lifting lever “2” next to thecarrying handle on the rear ofthe seat, near the bottom.

5. Lift the rear of the seat up fromthe floor.

6. Tilt the seat fully forward to lockit into place.

7. Push and pull on the seat tomake sure it is locked.

Put the seat in this position onlywhen necessary for additionalcargo space.

Returning the Third Row Seatfrom a Tumbled Position

To return the seat to the normalseating position:


2. Make sure there is nothing thatcould become trapped underthe seat.

3. Release the seat from thetumbled position by lifting lever“2” next to the carrying handle atthe bottom rear of the seat.

4. Pull the seat down until it latchesto the floor. The seatback cannotbe raised to the upright positionunless the seat is latched to thefloor.




{ WARNING



Removing the Third Row Seat

To remove the seat:


2. Fold the seatbacks forwardusing lever “1” and theinstructions listed previouslyunder “Folding the Seatback.”The seat cannot be unlatchedfrom the floor unless theseatback is folded.

3. Unlatch the seat from the floorby pulling the handle at the rearof the seat “3 Removal Only”toward the rear of the vehicle.

4. Roll the seat out of the vehicle.There is a track in the floor toguide the seat wheels out of thevehicle.

Installing the Third Row Seat

To install the seat:

1. Open the liftgate to access therear of the vehicle.

2. Slide the front outboard seatwheels into the track on the floorand roll the seat forward. Thefront latches should lock intoplace. If the latches do not lock,try tilting the rear of the seatupward slightly.

3. Lower the rear of the seat andpush down on the seat toengage the rear floor latches.



{ WARNING

A seat that is not locked intoplace properly can move aroundin a collision or sudden stop.People in the vehicle could beinjured. Be sure to lock the seatinto place properly wheninstalling it.

4. Push and pull on the seat tomake sure it is locked into place.The seatback cannot be raisedto the upright position unless theseat is latched to the floor.



7. Make sure the safety belts arereturned to the original positionover the seatbacks.

Safety BeltsThis section of the manualdescribes how to use safety beltsproperly. It also describes somethings not to do with safety belts.

{ WARNING

Do not let anyone ride where asafety belt cannot be wornproperly. In a crash, if you or yourpassenger(s) are not wearingsafety belts, injuries can be muchworse than if you are wearingsafety belts. You can be seriouslyinjured or killed by hitting thingsinside the vehicle harder or bybeing ejected from the vehicle. Inaddition, anyone who is notbuckled up can strike otherpassengers in the vehicle.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

It is extremely dangerous to ridein a cargo area, inside or outsideof a vehicle. In a collision,passengers riding in these areasare more likely to be seriouslyinjured or killed. Do not allowpassengers to ride in any area ofthe vehicle that is not equippedwith seats and safety belts.

Always wear a safety belt, andcheck that all passenger(s) arerestrained properly too.

This vehicle has indicators as areminder to buckle the safety belts.See Safety Belt Reminders onpage 5‑13.



Why Safety Belts Work

When riding in a vehicle, you travelas fast as the vehicle does. If thevehicle stops suddenly, you keepgoing until something stops you.It could be the windshield, theinstrument panel, or the safety belts!

When you wear a safety belt, youand the vehicle slow down together.There is more time to stop becauseyou stop over a longer distance and,when worn properly, your strongestbones take the forces from the

safety belts. That is why wearingsafety belts makes such goodsense.

Questions and Answers AboutSafety Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicleafter a crash if I am wearing asafety belt?

A: You could be— whether you arewearing a safety belt or not.Your chance of being consciousduring and after a crash, so youcan unbuckle and get out, ismuch greater if you are belted.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, whyshould I have to wear safetybelts?

A: Airbags are supplementalsystems only; so they work withsafety belts— not instead ofthem. Whether or not an airbagis provided, all occupants stillhave to buckle up to get themost protection.

Also, in nearly all states and inall Canadian provinces, the lawrequires wearing safety belts.

How to Wear Safety BeltsProperlyThis section is only for people ofadult size.

There are special things to knowabout safety belts and children. Andthere are different rules for smallerchildren and infants. If a child will beriding in the vehicle, see OlderChildren on page 3‑41 or Infantsand Young Children on page 3‑43.Follow those rules for everyone'sprotection.

It is very important for all occupantsto buckle up. Statistics show thatunbelted people are hurt more oftenin crashes than those who arewearing safety belts.

There are important things to knowabout wearing a safety belt properly.



. Sit up straight and always keepyour feet on the floor in frontof you.

. Always use the correct bucklefor your seating position.

. Wear the lap part of the belt lowand snug on the hips, justtouching the thighs. In a crash,this applies force to the strongpelvic bones and you would beless likely to slide under the lapbelt. If you slid under it, the beltwould apply force on yourabdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries.

. Wear the shoulder belt over theshoulder and across the chest.These parts of the body are bestable to take belt restrainingforces. The shoulder belt locks ifthere is a sudden stop or crash.

{ WARNING

You can be seriously injured,or even killed, by not wearingyour safety belt properly.

. Never allow the lap orshoulder belt to becomeloose or twisted.

. Never wear the shoulder beltunder both arms or behindyour back.

. Never route the lap orshoulder belt over anarmrest.

Lap-Shoulder BeltAll seating positions in the vehiclehave a lap-shoulder belt except forthe center front passenger position,if equipped, which has a lap belt.See Lap Belt on page 3‑23 for moreinformation.

The lap‐shoulder belts for the firstand second row seating positionsare equipped with free‐falling latchplates. If the vehicle has a third row,the lap‐shoulder belts have eitherfree‐falling or cinching latch plates.



Use the following pictures todetermine the latch plate style:

Free-Falling Latch Plate

Cinching Latch Plate

The following instructions explainhow to wear a lap-shoulder beltproperly.

1. Adjust the seat, if the seat isadjustable, so you can sit upstraight. To see how, see “Seats”in the Index.

2. Pick up the latch plate and pullthe belt across you. Do not let itget twisted.

The lap-shoulder belt may lock ifyou pull the belt across you veryquickly. If this happens, let thebelt go back slightly to unlock it.Then pull the belt across youmore slowly.

If the shoulder portion of apassenger belt with a free‐fallinglatch plate is pulled out all theway, the child restraint lockingfeature may be engaged. If thishappens, let the belt go back allthe way and start again.

Engaging the child restraintlocking feature in the right frontseating position may affect thepassenger sensing system,if equipped. See PassengerSensing System on page 3‑33for more information.



If the belt stops before it reachesthe buckle, for lap‐shoulder beltswith cinching latch plates, tilt thelatch plate and keep pulling thesafety belt until it can bebuckled.

3. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks. If you findthat the latch plate will not gofully into the buckle, see if youare using the correct buckle.

Pull up on the latch plate tomake sure it is secure. If the beltis not long enough, see SafetyBelt Extender on page 3‑24.

Position the release button onthe buckle so that the safety beltcould be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.

4. If equipped with a shoulder beltheight adjuster, move it to theheight that is right for you. See“Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster”in this section for instructions onuse and important safetyinformation.

5. To make the lap part tight, pullup on the shoulder belt.

It may be necessary to pullstitching on the safety beltthrough the latch plate to fullytighten the lap belt on smalleroccupants.



To unlatch the belt, push the buttonon the buckle. The belt shouldreturn to its stowed position.

Before a door is closed, be sure thesafety belt is out of the way. If adoor is slammed against a safetybelt, damage can occur to both thebelt and the vehicle.

Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster

The vehicle has a shoulder beltheight adjuster for the driver andright front passenger positions.

Adjust the height so the shoulderportion of the belt is on the shoulderand not falling off of it. The beltshould be close to, but notcontacting, the neck. Impropershoulder belt height adjustmentcould reduce the effectiveness ofthe safety belt in a crash. See Howto Wear Safety Belts Properly onpage 3‑16.

Squeeze the buttons (A) on thesides of the height adjuster andmove the height adjuster to thedesired position.

The adjuster can be moved up justby pushing up on the shoulder beltguide.

After the adjuster is set to thedesired position, try to move it downwithout squeezing the buttons tomake sure it has locked intoposition.

Safety Belt Pretensioners

This vehicle has safety beltpretensioners for front outboardoccupants. Although the safety beltpretensioners cannot be seen, theyare part of the safety belt assembly.They can help tighten the safetybelts during the early stages of amoderate to severe frontal, nearfrontal, or rear crash if the thresholdconditions for pretensioneractivation are met. And, if thevehicle has side impact airbags,safety belt pretensioners can helptighten the safety belts in a sidecrash or a rollover event.

Pretensioners work only once. If thepretensioners activate in a crash,the pretensioners and probablyother parts of the vehicle's safetybelt system will need to be replaced.See Replacing Safety Belt SystemParts after a Crash on page 3‑25.



Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuides

This vehicle may have rear shoulderbelt comfort guides. If not, they areavailable through your dealer. Theguides may provide added safetybelt comfort for older children whohave outgrown booster seats andfor some adults. When installed andproperly adjusted, the comfort guidepositions the belt away from theneck and head.

There is one guide, if equipped, foreach outside passenger position inthe second row seat.

Here is how to install a comfortguide to the safety belt:

1. Remove the guide from itsstorage clip on the interior body.

2. Place the guide over the belt,and insert the two edges of thebelt into the slots of the guide.



3. Be sure that the belt is nottwisted and it lies flat. Theelastic cord must be under thebelt and the guide on top.

{ WARNING

A safety belt that is not properlyworn may not provide theprotection needed in a crash. Theperson wearing the belt could beseriously injured. The shoulderbelt should go over the shoulderand across the chest. These partsof the body are best able to takebelt restraining forces.

4. Buckle, position, and release thesafety belt as describedpreviously in this section. Makesure the shoulder portion of thebelt is on the shoulder and notfalling off of it. The belt shouldbe close to, but not contacting,the neck.

To remove and store the comfortguide, squeeze the belt edgestogether so that the safety belt canbe removed from the guide. Slidethe guide onto its storage clip on theinterior body.



Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancySafety belts work for everyone,including pregnant women. Like alloccupants, they are more likely tobe seriously injured if they do notwear safety belts.

A pregnant woman should wear alap-shoulder belt, and the lapportion should be worn as low aspossible, below the rounding,throughout the pregnancy.

The best way to protect the fetus isto protect the mother. When a safetybelt is worn properly, it is more likelythat the fetus will not be hurt in acrash. For pregnant women, as foranyone, the key to making safetybelts effective is wearing themproperly.

Lap BeltThis part is only for the lap belt. Tolearn how to wear a lap-shoulderbelt, see Lap-Shoulder Belt onpage 3‑17.

The vehicle may have a centerseating position. When you sit in thecenter front seating position, youhave a lap safety belt, which has noretractor.

To make the belt longer, tilt the latchplate and pull it along the belt.

Buckle, position and release it thesame way as the lap part of alap-shoulder belt.



To make the belt shorter, pull its freeend as shown until the belt is snug.

If the belt is not long enough, seeSafety Belt Extender on page 3‑24.

Make sure the release button on thebuckle is positioned so you wouldbe able to unbuckle the safety beltquickly if necessary.

If you find that the latch plate willnot go fully into the buckle, see ifyou are using the correct buckle. Besure that the latch plate clicks wheninserted into the buckle.

Safety Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle's safety belt will fastenaround you, you should use it.

But if a safety belt is not longenough, your dealer will order youan extender. When you go in toorder it, take the heaviest coat youwill wear, so the extender will belong enough for you. To help avoidpersonal injury, do not let someoneelse use it, and use it only for theseat it is made to fit. The extenderhas been designed for adults. Neveruse it for securing child seats. Towear it, attach it to the regular safetybelt. For more information, see theinstruction sheet that comes withthe extender.

Safety System CheckNow and then, check that the safetybelt reminder light, safety belts,buckles, latch plates, retractors, andanchorages are all working properly.Look for any other loose ordamaged safety belt system partsthat might keep a safety belt system

from doing its job. See your dealerto have it repaired. Torn or frayedsafety belts may not protect you in acrash. They can rip apart underimpact forces. If a belt is torn orfrayed, get a new one right away.

Make sure the safety belt reminderlight is working. See Safety BeltReminders on page 5‑13.

Keep safety belts clean and dry.See Safety Belt Care on page 3‑24.

Safety Belt CareKeep belts clean and dry.

{ WARNING

Do not bleach or dye safety belts.It may severely weaken them. Ina crash, they might not be able toprovide adequate protection.Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.



Replacing Safety BeltSystem Parts after aCrash

{ WARNING

A crash can damage the safetybelt system in the vehicle.A damaged safety belt systemmay not properly protect theperson using it, resulting inserious injury or even death in acrash. To help make sure thesafety belt systems are workingproperly after a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon aspossible.

After a minor crash, replacement ofsafety belts may not be necessary.But the safety belt assemblies thatwere used during any crash mayhave been stressed or damaged.See your dealer to have the safetybelt assemblies inspected orreplaced.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the safety beltsystem was not being used at thetime of the crash.

Have the safety belt pretensionerschecked if the vehicle has been in acrash, or if the airbag readiness lightstays on after you start the vehicleor while you are driving. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 5‑14.

Airbag SystemThe vehicle has the followingairbags:. A frontal airbag for the driver.. A frontal airbag for the right front

passenger.. A seat‐mounted side impact

airbag for the driver.. A seat‐mounted side impact

airbag for the right frontpassenger.

. A roof-rail airbag for the driverand passenger directly behindthe driver.

. A roof-rail airbag for the rightfront passenger and the personseated directly behind thatpassenger.



The vehicle may have the followingairbags:. If the vehicle has a third row

seat, it will have a third rowroof-rail airbag.

All of the airbags in the vehicle willhave the word AIRBAG embossedin the trim or on an attached labelnear the deployment opening.

For frontal airbags, the wordAIRBAG will appear on the middlepart of the steering wheel for thedriver and on the instrument panelfor the right front passenger.

With seat‐mounted side impactairbags, the word AIRBAG willappear on the side of the seatbackclosest to the door.

With roof-rail airbags, the wordAIRBAG will appear along theheadliner or trim.

Airbags are designed to supplementthe protection provided by safetybelts. Even though today's airbagsare also designed to help reduce

the risk of injury from the force of aninflating bag, all airbags must inflatevery quickly to do their job.

Here are the most important thingsto know about the airbag system:

{ WARNING

You can be severely injured orkilled in a crash if you are notwearing your safety belt— even ifyou have airbags. Airbags aredesigned to work with safetybelts, but do not replace them.Also, airbags are not designed todeploy in every crash. In somecrashes safety belts are your onlyrestraint. See When Should anAirbag Inflate? on page 3‑29.

Wearing your safety belt during acrash helps reduce your chanceof hitting things inside the vehicleor being ejected from it. Airbagsare “supplemental restraints” tothe safety belts. Everyone in your

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

vehicle should wear a safety beltproperly—whether or not there isan airbag for that person.

{ WARNING

Because airbags inflate with greatforce and faster than the blink ofan eye, anyone who is upagainst, or very close to anyairbag when it inflates can beseriously injured or killed. Do notsit unnecessarily close to anyairbag, as you would be if sittingon the edge of the seat or leaningforward. Safety belts help keepyou in position before and duringa crash. Always wear a safetybelt, even with airbags. The drivershould sit as far back as possiblewhile still maintaining control ofthe vehicle.

(Continued)



WARNING (Continued)

Occupants should not lean on orsleep against the door or sidewindows in seating positions withseat-mounted side impact airbagsand/or roof-rail airbags.

{ WARNING

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbagwhen it inflates can be seriouslyinjured or killed. Airbags pluslap-shoulder belts offer protectionfor adults and older children, butnot for young children and infants.Neither the vehicle safety beltsystem nor its airbag system isdesigned for them. Youngchildren and infants need theprotection that a child restraint

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

system can provide. Alwayssecure children properly in thevehicle. To read how, see OlderChildren on page 3‑41 or Infantsand Young Children onpage 3‑43.

There is an airbag readiness lighton the instrument panel cluster,which shows the airbag symbol.

The system checks the airbagelectrical system for malfunctions.The light tells you if there is anelectrical problem. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 5‑14 formore information.

Where Are the Airbags?

The driver frontal airbag is in themiddle of the steering wheel.



The right front passenger frontalairbag is in the instrument panel onthe passenger side.

Driver Side Shown, PassengerSide Similar

The seat‐mounted side impactairbags for the driver and right frontpassenger are in the side of theseatbacks closest to the door.


The roof-rail airbags for the driver,right front passenger, and secondrow outboard passengers are in theceiling above the side windows.




If the vehicle has a third rowpassenger seat, the roof-rail airbagsare located in the ceiling above therear windows for the outboardpassenger positions in the third row.

{ WARNING

If something is between anoccupant and an airbag, theairbag might not inflate properlyor it might force the object into

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

that person causing severe injuryor even death. The path of aninflating airbag must be keptclear. Do not put anythingbetween an occupant and anairbag, and do not attach or putanything on the steering wheelhub or on or near any otherairbag covering.

Do not use seat accessories thatblock the inflation path of aseat-mounted side impact airbag.

Never secure anything to the roofof a vehicle with roof-rail airbagsby routing a rope or tie‐downthrough any door or windowopening. If you do, the path of aninflating roof-rail airbag will beblocked.

When Should an AirbagInflate?Frontal airbags are designed toinflate in moderate to severe frontalor near-frontal crashes to helpreduce the potential for severeinjuries mainly to the driver's or rightfront passenger's head and chest.However, they are only designed toinflate if the impact exceeds apredetermined deploymentthreshold. Deployment thresholdsare used to predict how severe acrash is likely to be in time for theairbags to inflate and help restrainthe occupants.

Whether the frontal airbags will orshould deploy is not based on howfast your vehicle is traveling.It depends largely on what you hit,the direction of the impact, and howquickly your vehicle slows down.



Frontal airbags may inflate atdifferent crash speeds. Forexample:. If the vehicle hits a stationary

object, the airbags could inflateat a different crash speed than ifthe vehicle hits a moving object.

. If the vehicle hits an object thatdeforms, the airbags couldinflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle hits an objectdoes not deform.

. If the vehicle hits a narrow object(like a pole), the airbags couldinflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle hits a wideobject (like a wall).

. If the vehicle goes into an objectat an angle, the airbags couldinflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle goes straightinto the object.

Thresholds can also vary withspecific vehicle design.

Frontal airbags are not intended toinflate during vehicle rollovers, rearimpacts, or in many side impacts.

In addition, the vehicle hasdual-stage frontal airbags.Dual-stage airbags adjust therestraint according to crash severity.The vehicle has electronic frontalsensors, which help the sensingsystem distinguish between amoderate frontal impact and a moresevere frontal impact. For moderatefrontal impacts, dual-stage airbagsinflate at a level less than fulldeployment. For more severe frontalimpacts, full deployment occurs.

The vehicle has a seat positionsensor. Vehicles with dual stageairbags also have seat positionsensors which enable the sensingsystem to monitor the position of thedriver seat and the right frontpassenger seat.

The seat position sensor providesinformation that is used to determineif the airbags should deploy at areduced level or at full deployment.

The vehicle has seat‐mounted sideimpact and roof-rail airbags. SeeAirbag System on page 3‑25.Seat‐mounted side impact androof-rail airbags are intended toinflate in moderate to severe sidecrashes. In addition, these roof-railairbags are intended to inflateduring a rollover or in a severefrontal impact. Seat‐mounted sideimpact and roof-rail airbags willinflate if the crash severity is abovethe system's designed thresholdlevel. The threshold level can varywith specific vehicle design.

Roof-rail airbags are not intendedto inflate in rear impacts. Aseat‐mounted side impact airbag isintended to deploy on the side of thevehicle that is struck. Both roof-railairbags will deploy when either sideof the vehicle is struck or if thesensing system predicts that thevehicle is about to roll over, or in asevere frontal impact.



In any particular crash, no one cansay whether an airbag should haveinflated simply because of thedamage to a vehicle or because ofwhat the repair costs were. Forfrontal airbags, inflation isdetermined by what the vehicle hits,the angle of the impact, and howquickly the vehicle slows down. Forseat‐mounted side impact androof-rail airbags, deployment isdetermined by the location andseverity of the side impact. In arollover event, roof-rail airbagdeployment is determined by thedirection of the roll.

What Makes an AirbagInflate?In a deployment event, the sensingsystem sends an electrical signaltriggering a release of gas from theinflator. Gas from the inflator fills theairbag causing the bag to break outof the cover and deploy. The inflator,the airbag, and related hardware areall part of the airbag module.

Frontal airbag modules are locatedinside the steering wheel andinstrument panel. For vehicles withseat‐mounted side impact airbags,there are airbags modules in theside of the front seatbacks closestto the door. For vehicles withroof-rail airbags, there are airbagmodules in the ceiling of the vehicle,near the side windows that haveoccupant seating positions.

How Does an AirbagRestrain?In moderate to severe frontal ornear frontal collisions, even beltedoccupants can contact the steeringwheel or the instrument panel. Inmoderate to severe side collisions,even belted occupants can contactthe inside of the vehicle.

Airbags supplement the protectionprovided by safety belts. Frontalairbags distribute the force of theimpact more evenly over theoccupant's upper body, stoppingthe occupant more gradually.

Seat‐mounted side impact androof-rail airbags distribute the forceof the impact more evenly over theoccupant's upper body.

Rollover capable roof-rail airbagsare designed to help contain thehead and chest of occupants in theoutboard seating positions in thefirst, second, and third rows,if equipped with a third row seat.The rollover capable roof-railairbags are designed to help reducethe risk of full or partial ejection inrollover events, although no systemcan prevent all such ejections.

But airbags would not help in manytypes of collisions, primarilybecause the occupant's motion isnot toward those airbags. See WhenShould an Airbag Inflate? onpage 3‑29 for more information.

Airbags should never be regardedas anything more than a supplementto safety belts.



What Will You See afteran Airbag Inflates?After the frontal airbags andseat-mounted side impact airbagsinflate, they quickly deflate, soquickly that some people may noteven realize an airbag inflated.Roof-rail airbags may still be at leastpartially inflated for some time afterthey deploy. Some components ofthe airbag module may be hot forseveral minutes. For location of theairbag modules, see What Makesan Airbag Inflate? on page 3‑31.

The parts of the airbag that comeinto contact with you may be warm,but not too hot to touch. There maybe some smoke and dust comingfrom the vents in the deflatedairbags. Airbag inflation does notprevent the driver from seeing out ofthe windshield or being able to steerthe vehicle, nor does it preventpeople from leaving the vehicle.

{ WARNING

When an airbag inflates, theremay be dust in the air. This dustcould cause breathing problemsfor people with a history ofasthma or other breathing trouble.To avoid this, everyone in thevehicle should get out as soon asit is safe to do so. If you havebreathing problems but cannotget out of the vehicle after anairbag inflates, then get fresh airby opening a window or a door.If you experience breathingproblems following an airbagdeployment, you should seekmedical attention.

The vehicle may have a feature thatmay automatically unlock the doors,turn on the interior lamps andhazard warning flashers, and shutoff the fuel system after the airbagsinflate. You can lock the doors, turn

off the interior lamps and hazardwarning flashers by using thecontrols for those features.

{ WARNING

A crash severe enough to inflatethe airbags may have alsodamaged important functions inthe vehicle, such as the fuelsystem, brake and steeringsystems, etc. Even if the vehicleappears to be drivable after amoderate crash, there may beconcealed damage that couldmake it difficult to safely operatethe vehicle.

Use caution if you should attemptto restart the engine after a crashhas occurred.



In many crashes severe enough toinflate the airbag, windshields arebroken by vehicle deformation.Additional windshield breakage mayalso occur from the right frontpassenger airbag.. Airbags are designed to inflate

only once. After an airbaginflates, you will need some newparts for the airbag system.If you do not get them, theairbag system will not be thereto help protect you in anothercrash. A new system will includeairbag modules and possiblyother parts. The service manualfor your vehicle covers the needto replace other parts.

. The vehicle has a crash sensingand diagnostic module whichrecords information after acrash. See Vehicle DataRecording and Privacy onpage 13‑19 and Event DataRecorders on page 13‑19.

. Let only qualified technicianswork on the airbag systems.Improper service can mean thatan airbag system will not workproperly. See your dealer forservice.

Passenger SensingSystemIf the vehicle has the passengerairbag status indicator pictured inthe following illustration, then thevehicle has a passenger sensingsystem for the right front passengerposition. The passenger airbagstatus indicator, if equipped, isvisible on the overhead consolewhen the vehicle is started.

In addition, if the vehicle has apassenger sensing system for theright front passenger position, thelabel on the vehicle's sun visorsrefers to “ADVANCED AIRBAGS”.

United States

Canada and Mexico

The words ON and OFF, or thesymbols for on and off, will bevisible during the system check.If you are using remote start,if equipped, to start the vehicle froma distance, you may not see thesystem check. When the systemcheck is complete, either the wordON or OFF, or the symbol for on oroff, will be visible. See PassengerAirbag Status Indicator onpage 5‑14.



The passenger sensing system willturn off the right front passengerfrontal airbag under certainconditions. The driver airbag,seat‐mounted side impact airbags(if equipped) and the roof-railairbags are not affected by thepassenger sensing system.

The passenger sensing systemworks with sensors that are part ofthe right front passenger seat andsafety belt. The sensors aredesigned to detect the presence ofa properly-seated occupant anddetermine if the right frontpassenger frontal airbag should beenabled (may inflate) or not.

According to accident statistics,children are safer when properlysecured in a rear seat in the correctchild restraint for their weightand size.

We recommend that children besecured in a rear seat, including: aninfant or a child riding in arear-facing child restraint; a childriding in a forward-facing child seat;

an older child riding in a boosterseat; and children, who are largeenough, using safety belts.

A label on the sun visor says,“Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front.” This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag deploys.

{ WARNING

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates and thepassenger seat is in a forwardposition.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though theairbag is turned off.

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if the airbagis off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe right front seat, always movethe front passenger seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.



The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag if:. The right front passenger seat is

unoccupied.. The system determines an infant

is present in a child restraint.. A right front passenger takes

his/her weight off of the seat fora period of time.

. There is a critical problem withthe airbag system or thepassenger sensing system.

When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag, the offindicator will light and stay lit as areminder that the airbag is off. SeePassenger Airbag Status Indicatoron page 5‑14.

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn on (may inflate) theright front passenger frontal airbaganytime the system senses that aperson of adult size is sittingproperly in the right frontpassenger seat.

When the passenger sensingsystem has allowed the airbag to beenabled, the on indicator will lightand stay lit as a reminder that theairbag is active.

For some children, includingchildren in child restraints, and forvery small adults, the passengersensing system may or may not turnoff the right front passenger frontalairbag, depending upon theperson's seating posture and body

build. Everyone in the vehiclewho has outgrown child restraintsshould wear a safety beltproperly — whether or not there isan airbag for that person.

{ WARNING

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others,have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 5‑14 for moreinformation, including importantsafety information.



If the On Indicator is Lit for aChild Restraint

If a child restraint has been installedand the on indicator is lit:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove the child restraint fromthe vehicle.

3. Remove any additional itemsfrom the seat such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.

4. Reinstall the child restraintfollowing the directions providedby the child restraintmanufacturer and refer toSecuring Child Restraints (RearSeat Position) on page 3‑56 orSecuring Child Restraints (RightFront Seat Position) onpage 3‑60 or Securing ChildRestraints (Center Front SeatPosition) on page 3‑59.

5. If, after reinstalling the childrestraint and restarting thevehicle, the on indicator is still lit,turn the vehicle off. Then slightlyrecline the vehicle seatback andadjust the seat cushion, ifadjustable, to make sure that thevehicle seatback is not pushingthe child restraint into the seatcushion.

Also make sure the childrestraint is not trapped under thevehicle head restraint. If thishappens, adjust the headrestraint. See Head Restraintson page 3‑2.

6. Restart the vehicle.

The passenger sensing systemmay or may not turn off theairbag for a child in a childrestraint depending upon thechild’s seating posture and bodybuild. It is better to secure thechild restraint in a rear seat.

If the Off Indicator is Lit for anAdult-Size Occupant

If a person of adult size is sitting inthe right front passenger seat, butthe off indicator is lit, it could bebecause that person is not sittingproperly in the seat. If this happens,use the following steps to allow thesystem to detect that person andenable the right front passengerfrontal airbag:

1. Turn the vehicle off.



2. Remove any additional materialfrom the seat, such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.

3. Place the seatback in the fullyupright position.

4. Have the person sit upright inthe seat, centered on the seatcushion, with legs comfortablyextended.

5. Restart the vehicle and have theperson remain in this position fortwo to three minutes after the onindicator is lit.

Additional Factors AffectingSystem Operation

Safety belts help keep thepassenger in position on the seatduring vehicle maneuvers andbraking, which helps the passengersensing system maintain thepassenger airbag status. See“Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints”

in the Index for additionalinformation about the importance ofproper restraint use.

If the shoulder portion of the belt ispulled out all the way, the childrestraint locking feature will beengaged. This may unintentionallycause the passenger sensingsystem to turn the airbag off forsome adult‐size occupants. If thishappens, let the belt go back all theway and start again.

A thick layer of additional material,such as a blanket or cushion,or aftermarket equipment such asseat covers, seat heaters, and seatmassagers, can affect how well thepassenger sensing systemoperates. We recommend that younot use seat covers or otheraftermarket equipment except whenapproved by GM for your specific

vehicle. See Adding Equipment tothe Airbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3‑38 for more informationabout modifications that can affecthow the system operates.

The on indicator may be lit if anobject, such as a briefcase,handbag, grocery bag, laptop,or other electronic device, is put onan unoccupied seat. If this is notdesired, remove the object fromthe seat.

{ WARNING

Stowing of articles under thepassenger seat or between thepassenger seat cushion andseatback may interfere with theproper operation of the passengersensing system.



Servicing theAirbag-Equipped VehicleAirbags affect how the vehicleshould be serviced. There are partsof the airbag system in severalplaces around the vehicle. Yourdealer and the service manual haveinformation about servicing thevehicle and the airbag system. Topurchase a service manual, seeService Publications OrderingInformation on page 13‑17.

{ WARNING

For up to 10 seconds after thevehicle is turned off and thebattery is disconnected, an airbagcan still inflate during improperservice. You can be injured if youare close to an airbag when itinflates. Avoid yellow connectors.They are probably part of theairbag system. Be sure to followproper service procedures, andmake sure the person performingwork for you is qualified to do so.

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped VehicleQ: Is there anything I might add

to or change about the vehiclethat could keep the airbagsfrom working properly?

A: Yes. If you add things thatchange the vehicle's frame,bumper system, height, front endor side sheet metal, they maykeep the airbag system fromworking properly. Changing ormoving any parts of the frontseats, safety belts, the airbagsensing and diagnostic module,steering wheel, instrumentpanel, roof-rail airbag modules,ceiling headliner or pillar garnishtrim, overhead console, frontsensors, side impact sensors,or airbag wiring can affect theoperation of the airbag system.



In addition, the vehicle may havea passenger sensing system forthe right front passengerposition, which includes sensorsthat are part of the passengerseat. The passenger sensingsystem may not operate properlyif the original seat trim isreplaced with non-GM covers,upholstery or trim, or with GMcovers, upholstery or trimdesigned for a different vehicle.Any object, such as anaftermarket seat heater or acomfort enhancing pad ordevice, installed under or on topof the seat fabric, could alsointerfere with the operation ofthe passenger sensing system.This could either prevent properdeployment of the passengerairbag(s) or prevent thepassenger sensing system from

properly turning off thepassenger airbag(s). SeePassenger Sensing System onpage 3‑33.

If you have any questions, callCustomer Assistance. Thephone numbers and addressesfor Customer Assistance are inStep Two of the CustomerSatisfaction Procedure in thismanual. See CustomerSatisfaction Procedure (U.S. andCanada) on page 13‑1 orCustomer SatisfactionProcedure (Mexico) onpage 13‑3.

If the vehicle has rolloverroof-rail airbags, see DifferentSize Tires and Wheels onpage 10‑62 for additionalimportant information.

Q: Because I have a disability,I have to get my vehiclemodified. How can I find outwhether this will affect myairbag system?

A: If you have questions, callCustomer Assistance. Thephone numbers and addressesfor Customer Assistance are inStep Two of the CustomerSatisfaction Procedure in thismanual. See CustomerSatisfaction Procedure (U.S. andCanada) on page 13‑1 orCustomer SatisfactionProcedure (Mexico) onpage 13‑3.

In addition, your dealer and theservice manual have informationabout the location of the airbagsensors, sensing and diagnosticmodule and airbag wiring.



Airbag System CheckThe airbag system does not needregularly scheduled maintenance orreplacement. Make sure the airbagreadiness light is working. SeeAirbag Readiness Light onpage 5‑14.

Notice: If an airbag covering isdamaged, opened, or broken, theairbag may not work properly. Donot open or break the airbagcoverings. If there are anyopened or broken airbag covers,have the airbag covering and/orairbag module replaced. For thelocation of the airbags, seeWhere Are the Airbags? onpage 3‑27. See your dealer forservice.

Replacing Airbag SystemParts after a Crash

{ WARNING

A crash can damage the airbagsystems in the vehicle.A damaged airbag system maynot work properly and may notprotect you and yourpassenger(s) in a crash, resultingin serious injury or even death. Tohelp make sure the airbagsystems are working properlyafter a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon aspossible.

If an airbag inflates, you will need toreplace airbag system parts. Seeyour dealer for service.

If the airbag readiness light stays onafter the vehicle is started or comeson when you are driving, the airbagsystem may not work properly. Havethe vehicle serviced right away. SeeAirbag Readiness Light onpage 5‑14.



Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrownbooster seats should wear thevehicle safety belts.

The manufacturer's instructions thatcome with the booster seat state theweight and height limitations for thatbooster. Use a booster seat with alap-shoulder belt until the childpasses the fit test below:. Sit all the way back on the seat.

Do the knees bend at the seatedge? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

. Buckle the lap-shoulder belt.Does the shoulder belt rest onthe shoulder? If yes, continue.If no, try using the rear safetybelt comfort guide. See “RearSafety Belt Comfort Guides”under Lap-Shoulder Belt onpage 3‑17 for more information.If the shoulder belt still does notrest on the shoulder, then returnto the booster seat.

. Does the lap belt fit low andsnug on the hips, touching thethighs? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

. Can proper safety belt fit bemaintained for the length of thetrip? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

Q: What is the proper way towear safety belts?

A: An older child should wear alap-shoulder belt and get theadditional restraint a shoulderbelt can provide. The shoulderbelt should not cross the face orneck. The lap belt should fitsnugly below the hips, justtouching the top of the thighs.This applies belt force to thechild's pelvic bones in a crash.It should never be worn over theabdomen, which could causesevere or even fatal internalinjuries in a crash.

Also see “Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt onpage 3‑17.



According to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition.

In a crash, children who are notbuckled up can strike other peoplewho are buckled up, or can bethrown out of the vehicle. Olderchildren need to use safety beltsproperly.

{ WARNING

Never allow more than one childto wear the same safety belt. Thesafety belt cannot properly spreadthe impact forces. In a crash, theycan be crushed together andseriously injured. A safety beltmust be used by only one personat a time.

{ WARNING

Never allow a child to wear thesafety belt with the shoulder beltbehind their back. A child can beseriously injured by not wearingthe lap-shoulder belt properly. In acrash, the child would not berestrained by the shoulder belt.The child could move too farforward increasing the chance ofhead and neck injury. The childmight also slide under the lap

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

belt. The belt force would then beapplied right on the abdomen.That could cause serious or fatalinjuries. The shoulder belt shouldgo over the shoulder and acrossthe chest.



Infants and YoungChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needsprotection! This includes infants andall other children. Neither thedistance traveled nor the age andsize of the traveler changes theneed, for everyone, to use safetyrestraints. In fact, the law in everystate in the United States and inevery Canadian province sayschildren up to some age must berestrained while in a vehicle.

{ WARNING

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck andthe safety belt continues totighten. Never leave childrenunattended in a vehicle and neverallow children to play with thesafety belts.

Airbags plus lap‐shoulder belts offerprotection for adults and olderchildren, but not for young childrenand infants. Neither the vehicle'ssafety belt system nor its airbagsystem is designed for them. Everytime infants and young children ridein vehicles, they should have theprotection provided by appropriatechild restraints.

Children who are not restrainedproperly can strike other people,or can be thrown out of the vehicle.

{ WARNING

Never hold an infant or a childwhile riding in a vehicle. Due tocrash forces, an infant or a childwill become so heavy it is notpossible to hold it during a crash.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

For example, in a crash at only40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb)infant will suddenly become a110 kg (240 lb) force on a person'sarms. An infant should besecured in an appropriaterestraint.



{ WARNING

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbag whenit inflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Never put a rear-facingchild restraint in the right frontseat. Secure a rear-facing childrestraint in a rear seat. It is alsobetter to secure a forward-facingchild restraint in a rear seat. If youmust secure a forward-facingchild restraint in the right frontseat, always move the frontpassenger seat as far back as itwill go.

Q: What are the different types ofadd-on child restraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, whichare purchased by the vehicleowner, are available in four basictypes. Selection of a particularrestraint should take intoconsideration not only the child'sweight, height, and age but alsowhether or not the restraint willbe compatible with the motorvehicle in which it will be used.

For most basic types of childrestraints, there are manydifferent models available. Whenpurchasing a child restraint, besure it is designed to be used ina motor vehicle. If it is, therestraint will have a label sayingthat it meets federal motorvehicle safety standards.



The restraint manufacturer'sinstructions that come with therestraint state the weight andheight limitations for a particularchild restraint. In addition, thereare many kinds of restraintsavailable for children withspecial needs.

{ WARNING

To reduce the risk of neck andhead injury during a crash, infantsneed complete support. In acrash, if an infant is in arear-facing child restraint, thecrash forces can be distributedacross the strongest part of aninfant's body, the back andshoulders. Infants should alwaysbe secured in rear-facing childrestraints.

{ WARNING

A young child's hip bones are stillso small that the vehicle's regularsafety belt may not remain low onthe hip bones, as it should.Instead, it may settle up aroundthe child's abdomen. In a crash,the belt would apply force on abody area that is unprotected byany bony structure. This alonecould cause serious or fatalinjuries. To reduce the risk ofserious or fatal injuries during acrash, young children shouldalways be secured in appropriatechild restraints.

Child Restraint Systems

Rear-Facing Infant Seat

A rear-facing infant seat providesrestraint with the seating surfaceagainst the back of the infant.

The harness system holds the infantin place and, in a crash, acts tokeep the infant positioned in therestraint.



Forward-Facing Child Seat

A forward-facing child seat providesrestraint for the child's body with theharness.

Booster Seats

A booster seat is a child restraintdesigned to improve the fit of thevehicle's safety belt system.A booster seat can also help a childto see out the window.

Securing an Add-On ChildRestraint in the Vehicle

{ WARNING

A child can be seriously injured orkilled in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly secured inthe vehicle. Secure the childrestraint properly in the vehicleusing the vehicle safety belt orLATCH system, following theinstructions that came with thatchild restraint and the instructionsin this manual.

To help reduce the chance of injury,the child restraint must be securedin the vehicle. Child restraintsystems must be secured in vehicleseats by lap belts or the lap beltportion of a lap-shoulder belt, or bythe LATCH system. See LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) on page 3‑49.



Children can be endangered in acrash if the child restraint is notproperly secured in the vehicle.

When securing an add-on childrestraint, refer to the instructionsthat come with the restraint whichmay be on the restraint itself or in abooklet, or both, and to this manual.The child restraint instructions areimportant, so if they are notavailable, obtain a replacementcopy from the manufacturer.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inthe vehicle — even when no child isin it.

In some areas of the United Statesand Canada, Certified ChildPassenger Safety Technicians(CPSTs) are available to inspectand demonstrate how to correctly

use and install child restraints. Inthe U.S., refer to the NationalHighway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) website tolocate the nearest child safety seatinspection station. For CPSTavailability in Canada, check withTransport Canada or the ProvincialMinistry of Transportation office.

Securing the Child Within theChild Restraint

{ WARNING

A child can be seriously injured orkilled in a crash if the child is notproperly secured in the childrestraint. Secure the childproperly following the instructionsthat came with that child restraint.

Where to Put theRestraintAccording to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition.

We recommend that children andchild restraints be secured in a rearseat, including: an infant or a childriding in a rear-facing child restraint;a child riding in a forward-facingchild seat; an older child riding in abooster seat; and children, who arelarge enough, using safety belts.



A label on your sun visor says,“Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front.” This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag deploys.

{ WARNING

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates and thepassenger seat is in a forwardposition.

The vehicle may have apassenger sensing system whichis designed to turn off the rightfront passenger frontal airbagunder certain conditions.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Even if the passenger sensingsystem, if equipped, has turnedoff the right front passengerfrontal airbag, no system isfail-safe. No one can guaranteethat an airbag will not deployunder some unusualcircumstance, even though it isturned off.

Secure rear-facing childrestraints in a rear seat, even ifthe airbag is off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe right front seat, always movethe front passenger seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 3‑33 for additionalinformation.

{ WARNING

A child in a child restraint in thecenter front seat can be badlyinjured or killed by the frontalairbags if they inflate. Neversecure a child restraint in thecenter front seat. It is alwaysbetter to secure a child restraint ina rear seat.

Do not use child restraints in thecenter front seat position.

When securing a child restraint in arear seating position, study theinstructions that came with yourchild restraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

Child restraints and booster seatsvary considerably in size, and somemay fit in certain seating positionsbetter than others. Always makesure the child restraint is properlysecured.



Depending on where you place thechild restraint and the size of thechild restraint, you may not be ableto access adjacent safety beltassemblies or LATCH anchors foradditional passengers or childrestraints. Adjacent seatingpositions should not be used if thechild restraint prevents access to orinterferes with the routing of thesafety belt.

Wherever a child restraint isinstalled, be sure to secure the childrestraint properly.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inyour vehicle— even when no childis in it.

Lower Anchors andTethers for Children(LATCH System)The LATCH system holds a childrestraint during driving or in a crash.This system is designed to makeinstallation of a child restraint easier.The LATCH system uses anchors inthe vehicle and attachments on thechild restraint that are made for usewith the LATCH system.

Make sure that a LATCH-compatiblechild restraint is properly installedusing the anchors, or use thevehicle's safety belts to secure therestraint, following the instructionsthat came with that restraint, andalso the instructions in this manual.

When installing a child restraint witha top tether, you must also useeither the lower anchors or thesafety belts to properly secure thechild restraint. A child restraint mustnever be attached using only the toptether and anchor.

In order to use the LATCH system inyour vehicle, you need a childrestraint that has LATCHattachments. The child restraintmanufacturer will provide you withinstructions on how to use the childrestraint and its attachments. Thefollowing explains how to attach achild restraint with theseattachments in your vehicle.

Not all vehicle seating positions orchild restraints have lower anchorsand attachments or top tetheranchors and attachments.



Lower Anchors

Lower anchors (A) are metal barsbuilt into the vehicle. There are twolower anchors for each LATCHseating position that willaccommodate a child restraint withlower attachments (B).

Top Tether Anchor

A top tether (A, C) anchors the topof the child restraint to the vehicle.A top tether anchor is built into thevehicle. The top tetherattachment (B) on the child restraintconnects to the top tether anchor inthe vehicle in order to reduce theforward movement and rotation ofthe child restraint during driving or ina crash.

Your child restraint may have asingle tether (A) or a dual tether (C).Either will have a singleattachment (B) to secure the toptether to the anchor.

Some child restraints with toptethers are designed for use with orwithout the top tether beingattached. Others require the toptether always to be attached. InCanada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached. Be sure to read and followthe instructions for your childrestraint.



Lower Anchor and Top TetherAnchor Locations

Second Row — 60/40

H (Lower Anchor): Seatingpositions with two lower anchors.

I (Top Tether Anchor): Seatingpositions with top tether anchors.

For models with 60/40 second rowseating, the rear right sidepassenger and center seatingpositions have exposed metalanchors in the crease between theseatback and the seat cushion.

Second Row — Bucket

H (Lower Anchor): Seatingpositions with two lower anchors.

I (Top Tether Anchor): Seatingpositions with top tether anchors.

For models with second row bucketseats, both rear seating positionshave exposed metal anchors in thecrease between the seatback andthe seat cushion.

Third Row Seat

I (Top Tether Anchor): Seatingpositions with top tether anchors.There is one top tether anchor thatcan be used for either the third rowcenter or driver side seating positionbut not both at the same time.

For models with a third row seat,see the information following forinstalling a child restraint with a toptether in the third row. Never installtwo top tethers using the same toptether anchor.



To assist in locating the top tetheranchors, the top tether anchorsymbol appears near the anchors.

Second Row Seat — Bucket

For models with bucket second rowseating, the top tether anchors areat the bottom rear of the seatcushion for each seating position inthe second row. Be sure to use an

anchor on the same side of thevehicle as the seating positionwhere the child restraint will beplaced.

Second Row Seat — 60/40

For models with 60/40 second rowseating, the top tether anchors areat the bottom rear of the seatcushion for each seating position inthe second row. Be sure to use ananchor on the same side of thevehicle as the seating positionwhere the child restraint will beplaced.

Third Row Seat

For vehicles with a third row seat,there is one top tether anchor at thebottom rear of the seat cushion thatcan be used for either the third rowcenter or driver side seatingposition. Never install two toptethers using the same top tetheranchor.



Do not secure a child restraint in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be attached, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top tethermust be attached.

According to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition. See Where to Put theRestraint on page 3‑47 foradditional information.

Securing a Child RestraintDesigned for the LATCHSystem

{ WARNING

If a LATCH-type child restraint isnot attached to anchors, the childrestraint will not be able to protectthe child correctly. In a crash, thechild could be seriously injured orkilled. Install a LATCH-type childrestraint properly using theanchors, or use the vehicle safetybelts to secure the restraint,following the instructions thatcame with the child restraint andthe instructions in this manual.

{ WARNING

Do not attach more than one childrestraint to a single anchor.Attaching more than one childrestraint to a single anchor couldcause the anchor or attachmentto come loose or even breakduring a crash. A child or otherscould be injured. To reduce therisk of serious or fatal injuriesduring a crash, attach only onechild restraint per anchor.



{ WARNING

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck andthe safety belt continues totighten. Buckle any unused safetybelts behind the child restraint sochildren cannot reach them. Pullthe shoulder belt all the way outof the retractor to set the lock,if the vehicle has one, after thechild restraint has been installed.

Notice: Do not let the LATCHattachments rub against thevehicle’s safety belts. This maydamage these parts. If necessary,move buckled safety belts toavoid rubbing the LATCHattachments.

Do not fold the empty rear seatwith a safety belt buckled. Thiscould damage the safety belt orthe seat. Unbuckle and return thesafety belt to its stowed position,before folding the seat.

1. Attach and tighten the lowerattachments to the loweranchors. If the child restraintdoes not have lowerattachments or the desiredseating position does not havelower anchors, secure the childrestraint with the top tether andthe safety belts. Refer to yourchild restraint manufacturerinstructions and the instructionsin this manual.

1.1. Find the lower anchors forthe desired seatingposition.

1.2. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

1.3. Attach and tighten the lowerattachments on the childrestraint to the loweranchors.

2. If the child restraint manufacturerrecommends that the top tetherbe attached, attach and tightenthe top tether to the top tetheranchor, if equipped. Refer to thechild restraint instructions andthe following steps:

2.1. Find the top tether anchor.

2.2. Route, attach, and tightenthe top tether according toyour child restraintinstructions and thefollowing instructions:

. If the position you are usingdoes not have a headrestor head restraint and you



are using a single tether,route the tether over theseatback.

. If the position you are usingdoes not have a headrestor head restraint and youare using a dual tether,route the tether over theseatback.

. If the position you are usinghas an adjustable headrestor head restraint and youare using a single tether,raise the headrest or headrestraint and route thetether under the headrest orhead restraint and inbetween the headrest orhead restraint posts.

. If the position you are usinghas a fixed headrest orhead restraint and you areusing a single tether, routethe tether around theinboard or outboard side ofthe headrest or headrestraint.



. If the position you are usinghas a fixed or an adjustableheadrest or head restraintand you are using a dualtether, route the tetheraround the headrest orhead restraint.

3. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at theLATCH path and attempt tomove it side‐to‐side andback‐and‐forth. There should beno more than 2.5 cm (1 in) ofmovement, for properinstallation.

Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash

{ WARNING

A crash can damage the LATCHsystem in the vehicle. A damagedLATCH system may not properlysecure the child restraint,resulting in serious injury or evendeath in a crash. To help makesure the LATCH system isworking properly after a crash,see your dealer to have thesystem inspected and anynecessary replacements made assoon as possible.

If the vehicle has the LATCH systemand it was being used during acrash, new LATCH system partsmay be needed.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the LATCHsystem was not being used at thetime of the crash.

Securing Child Restraints(Rear Seat Position)When securing a child restraint in arear seating position, study theinstructions that came with the childrestraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

If the child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3‑49 for how andwhere to install the child restraintusing LATCH. If a child restraint issecured in the vehicle using asafety belt and it uses a top tether,see Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) onpage 3‑49 for top tether anchorlocations.

Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top strapmust be anchored.



In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached.

If the child restraint does not havethe LATCH system, you will beusing the safety belt to secure thechild restraint in this position. Besure to follow the instructions thatcame with the child restraint. Securethe child in the child restraint whenand as the instructions say.

If more than one child restraintneeds to be installed in the rearseat, be sure to read Where to Putthe Restraint on page 3‑47.

The vehicle's lap‐shoulder belts forthe first and second row seatingpositions are equipped with free‐falling latch plates. If the vehicle hasa third row, the lap‐shoulder beltshave either free‐falling or cinchinglatch plates.

Use the following pictures todetermine the latch plate style:

Free‐Falling Latch Plate

Cinching Latch Plate

1. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

2. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portions ofthe vehicle's safety belt throughor around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will showyou how.



For third row seating positions,with cinching latch plates, tilt thelatch plate to adjust the belt ifneeded.

3. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks.


4. For passenger seating positionswith a lap‐shoulder belt and afree‐falling latch plate, pull therest of the shoulder belt all theway out of the retractor to setthe lock. When installing a childrestraint using a lap‐shoulderbelt and a cinching latch plate,skip Step 4 and proceed toStep 5.



5. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of the beltand feed the shoulder belt backinto the retractor. When installinga forward-facing child restraint, itmay be helpful to use your kneeto push down on the childrestraint as you tighten the belt.

Try to pull the belt out of theretractor to make sure theretractor is locked. If theretractor is not locked, repeatSteps 4 and 5.

6. If the child restraint has a toptether, follow the child restraintmanufacturer's instructionsregarding the use of the toptether. See Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3‑49 for moreinformation.

7. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at thesafety belt path and attemptto move it side‐to‐side andback‐and‐forth. When the childrestraint is properly installed,there should be no more than2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle safety belt andlet it return to the stowed position.If the top tether is attached to a toptether anchor, disconnect it.

Securing Child Restraints(Center Front SeatPosition)

{ WARNING

A child in a child restraint in thecenter front seat can be badlyinjured or killed by the frontalairbags if they inflate. Neversecure a child restraint in thecenter front seat. It is alwaysbetter to secure a child restraint ina rear seat.

Do not use child restraints in thecenter front seat position.



Securing Child Restraints(Right Front SeatPosition)This vehicle has airbags. A rearseat is a safer place to secure aforward-facing child restraint. SeeWhere to Put the Restraint onpage 3‑47.

In addition, the vehicle may have apassenger sensing system which isdesigned to turn off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag undercertain conditions. See PassengerSensing System on page 3‑33 andPassenger Airbag Status Indicatoron page 5‑14 for more information,including important safetyinformation.

A label on the sun visor says,“Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front.” This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great if theairbag deploys.

{ WARNING

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates. Thisis because the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates and thepassenger seat is in a forwardposition.

The vehicle may have apassenger sensing system whichis designed to turn off the rightfront passenger frontal airbagunder certain conditions.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem, if equipped, has turnedoff the right front passengerfrontal airbag, no system is

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

fail-safe. No one can guaranteethat an airbag will not deployunder some unusualcircumstance, even though it isturned off.

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if the airbagis off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe right front seat, always movethe front passenger seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 3‑33 for additionalinformation.

If the child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3‑49 for how andwhere to install the child restraintusing LATCH. If a child restraint is



secured using a safety belt and ituses a top tether, see LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) on page 3‑49 fortop tether anchor locations.

Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top strapmust be anchored.

In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached.

You will be using the lap-shoulderbelt to secure the child restraint inthis position. Follow the instructionsthat came with the child restraint.

1. Move the seat as far back as itwill go before securing theforward-facing child restraint.

2. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

3. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portions ofthe vehicle's safety belt throughor around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will showyou how.

4. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks.


5. Pull the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set thelock. When the retractor lock isset, the belt can be tightened butnot pulled out of the retractor.



6. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of the belt,and feed the shoulder belt backinto the retractor. When installinga forward-facing child restraint, itmay be helpful to use your kneeto push down on the childrestraint as you tighten the belt.

Try to pull the belt out of theretractor to make sure theretractor is locked. If theretractor is not locked, repeatSteps 5 and 6.

7. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at thesafety belt path and attemptto move it side‐to‐side andback‐and‐forth. When the childrestraint is properly installed,there should be no more than2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.

If the vehicle is equipped with thepassenger sensing system, andwhen the passenger sensing systemhas turned off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag, the offindicator in the passenger airbagstatus indicator should light and staylit when you start the vehicle. SeePassenger Airbag Status Indicatoron page 5‑14.

If a child restraint has been installedand the on indicator is lit, see “If theOn Indicator is Lit for a ChildRestraint” under Passenger SensingSystem on page 3‑33 for moreinformation.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle safety belt andlet it return to the stowed position.


Storage 4-1

Storage

Storage CompartmentsGlove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Armrest Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Rear Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Center Console Storage . . . . . . 4-3

Roof Rack SystemRoof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

StorageCompartments

Glove BoxPull the bottom of the glove boxhandle upward to open it.Use the key to lock and unlockthe glove box.

CupholdersCupholders are in the centerconsole for the front passengers.Press down on the access doorrelease to open and use the frontcupholders. Push the door backdown to close it. Push down andthen back on the front cupholder toremove it for cleaning.

Heated and CooledCupholders

For vehicles with heated and cooledcupholders, these are located in thefront center console.

Press down on the access doorrelease button to open thecupholder door.

To set to cool mode, press andrelease the button; the i showsblue. Press and release again toturn it off.


4-2 Storage

To set to heat mode, press andrelease the button; the h showsred. Press and release again to turnit off.

Insulated containers will not workproperly. Use only non-insulatedcontainers.

Notice: When the cuphholder isturned on, the inside receptaclesare hot or cold. Temperaturevariations in the cupholders maycause condensation. To avoiddamage, do not store electronicdevices or other items here.

Rear Passenger Cupholders

Pull down on the lid to access thecupholders in the rear floor console.

Vehicles with the rear seat armrestmay also contain cupholders.Pull down the armrest to use thecupholders.

Armrest StorageFor vehicle with an armrest/storagecompartment located by the secondrow seat, pull the loop at the top ofthe armrest out to lower the armrest.

Push the button on the front of thearmrest and pull the top up to openthe compartment.

Rear StorageFor vehicles with a rear storagearea, it is located in the rear cargoarea of the vehicle on thedriver side.

Turn the knobs and pull the storagedoor to access. The door can beremoved.


Storage 4-3

Center Console StorageA console compartment is locatedbetween the bucket seats.

The console has both an upper andlower storage bin accessed by liftingup on the latches located at thefront of the console lid.

The console may have anaccessory power outlet inside.See Power Outlets on page 5‑8.

The rear of the console also has acupholder that swings down for therear seat passengers to use.

Roof Rack System

{ WARNING

If something is carried on top ofthe vehicle that is longer or widerthan the roof rack— like paneling,plywood, or a mattress— thewind can catch it while the vehicleis being driven. The item beingcarried could be violently torn off,and this could cause a collisionand damage the vehicle. Nevercarry something longer or widerthan the roof rack on top of thevehicle unless using a GMcertified accessory carrier.

For vehicles with a roof rack, therack can be used to load items.For roof racks that do not havecrossrails included, GMCertified

crossrails can be purchased as anaccessory. See your dealer foradditional information.

For vehicles with crossrails, theycan be moved back and forth tohelp secure cargo. To adjust them,turn the knob located at each endof the crossrail counterclockwiseuntil the crossrail can move freely.To secure the crossrail, turn theknob located at each end of thecrossrail clockwise until tightened.Tie the load to the siderails orsiderail supports.

Notice: Loading cargo on theroof rack that weighs more than91 kg (200 lbs) or hangs over therear or sides of the vehicle maydamage the vehicle. Load cargoso that it rests evenly betweenthe crossrails, making sure tofasten cargo securely.


4-4 Storage

To prevent damage or loss of cargowhen driving, check to make surecrossrails and cargo are securelyfastened. Loading cargo on the roofrack will make the vehicle’s centerof gravity higher. Avoid high speeds,sudden starts, sharp turns, suddenbraking or abrupt maneuvers,otherwise it may result in loss ofcontrol. If driving for a long distance,on rough roads, or at high speeds,occasionally stop the vehicle tomake sure the cargo remains in itsplace.

Do not exceed the maximum vehiclecapacity when loading the vehicle.For more information on vehiclecapacity and loading, see VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑16.

To prevent damage or loss of cargo,check now and then to make surethe luggage and cargo are stillsecurely fastened.

Be sure the cargo is properlyloaded.. If small heavy objects are placed

on the roof, place the load in thearea over the rear wheels(behind the rear side door onextended models). If needed,cut a piece of 3/8 inch plywoodto fit inside the crossrails andsiderails to spread the load.If plywood is used, tie it to thesiderail supports.

. Tie the load to the crossrails orthe siderail supports. Use thecrossrails only to keep the loadfrom sliding. To move thecrossrails, pull out on the latchrelease handle at each end.Slide the crossrail to the desiredposition balancing the force sideto side. Push the release handleback into the latched positionand slide the crossrail back andforth slightly to be sure the latchsnaps securely into place.

. If needed to carry long items,move the crossrails as far apartas they will go. Tie the load tothe crossrails and the siderailsor siderail supports. Also tie theload to the bumpers. Do nottie the load so tightly that thecrossrails or siderails aredamaged.

. After moving a crossrail, be sureit is securely locked into thesiderail.

A Center High-Mounted Stoplamp(CHMSL) is located above the glassor above the rear load doors.

If items are loaded on the roof of thevehicle, care should be taken not toblock or damage the CHMSL unit.


Instruments and Controls 5-1

Instruments andControls

ControlsSteering Wheel Adjustment . . . 5-2Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . 5-2Heated Steering Wheel . . . . . . . 5-4Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 5-4Rear WindowWiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10

Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10

Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12

Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12Engine Coolant TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . 5-13Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . 5-14Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14

Charging System Light . . . . . . 5-16MalfunctionIndicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16

Brake System WarningLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

Antilock Brake System (ABS)Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20

Tow/Haul Mode Light . . . . . . . . 5-20StabiliTrak® OFF Light . . . . . . . 5-20Traction Control System(TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light . . . . 5-21

Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-21Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . 5-22Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . 5-22

Front Fog Lamp Light . . . . . . . . 5-23Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . . 5-23Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . 5-23

Information DisplaysDriver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23

Vehicle MessagesVehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28Battery Voltage andCharging Messages . . . . . . . . 5-29

Brake System Messages . . . . 5-29Door Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-29Engine Cooling SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30

Engine Oil Messages . . . . . . . . 5-31Engine Power Messages . . . . 5-32Fuel System Messages . . . . . . 5-32Key and Lock Messages . . . . . 5-32Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32Object Detection SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33

Ride Control SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34


5-2 Instruments and Controls

Airbag System Messages . . . . 5-35Anti-theft Alarm SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36

Tire Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36Transmission Messages . . . . . 5-37Vehicle ReminderMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37

Washer Fluid Messages . . . . . 5-37

Vehicle PersonalizationVehicle Personalization . . . . . . 5-38

Universal Remote SystemUniversal Remote System . . . 5-46Universal Remote SystemProgramming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46

Universal Remote SystemOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52

Controls

Steering WheelAdjustment

Push the control up or down to tiltthe steering wheel up or down.

To set the memory position, seeVehicle Personalization onpage 5‑38.

Steering Wheel Controls

If equipped, some audio controlscan be adjusted at the steeringwheel.

w (Next): Press to go to the nextfavorite radio station, track on a CD,or folder on an iPod® or USBdevice.

c /x (Previous/End): Press togo to the previous favorite radiostation, track on a CD, or folder onan iPod® or USB device. Press toreject an incoming call, or end acurrent call.



Radio

To select preset or favorite radiostations:

Press and releasew orc /x togo to the next or previous radiostation stored as a preset orfavorite.

CD/DVD

To select tracks on a CD/DVD:

Press and releasew orc /x togo to the next or previous track.

Navigating an iPod or USB Deviceon the Main Audio Screen

1. Press and releasew orc /xto select the next or previoustrack within the selectedcategory.

2. Press and holdw orc /x tomove quickly through the tracks.

3. Press and release ¨ to move upone track within the selectedcategory.

Navigating an iPod or USB Deviceon the Music Navigator Screen

1. Press and releasew orc /xto select the next or previoustrack within the selectedcategory.

2. Press and holdw orc /x tomove quickly through the trackswithin the selected category.

3. Press and release ¨ to move upone track within the selectedcategory.

b / g (Mute/Push to Talk): Pressto silence the vehicle speakers only.Press again to turn the sound on.

For vehicles with Bluetooth orOnStar systems, press and hold forlonger than two seconds to interactwith those systems. See Bluetoothon page 7‑103 and OnStarOverview on page 14‑1 for moreinformation.

SRCE (Source/VoiceRecognition): Press to switchbetween the radio and CD, and forequipped vehicles, the DVD, frontauxiliary, and rear auxiliary.

Press and hold this button for longerthan one second to initiate voicerecognition. See Voice Recognitionon page 7‑100 for more information.

¨ (Seek): Press to go to the nextradio station while in AM,FM, or XM™.

Press ¨ to go to the next track orchapter while sourced to the CD orDVD slot.

Press ¨ to select a track or a folderwhen navigating folders on an iPodor USB device.



To scan radio stations:

1. Press and hold ¨ until a beep isheard, to place the radio intoSCAN mode. A station will playfor five seconds before movingto the next station.

2. To stop the SCAN function,press ¨ again.

While listening to a CD/DVD,press and hold ¨ to quickly moveforward through the tracks. Releaseto stop on the desired track.

+ e : Press to increase volume.

− e : Press to decrease volume.

Heated Steering WheelFor vehicles with a heatedsteering wheel, the button forthis feature is located on thesteering wheel.

( : Press to turn the heatedsteering wheel on or off. A light onthe button displays when the featureis turned on.

The steering wheel takes aboutthree minutes to start heating.

HornTo sound the horn, press the centerpad on the steering wheel.

Windshield Wiper/Washer

The front wiper control is located onthe turn and lane‐change lever.Turn the band with the wiper symbolto control the windshield wipers.

8 (Mist): For a single wipe,turn to8 , then release.For several wipes, hold the bandon8 longer.

9 (Off): Turns the windshieldwipers off.

6 (Adjustable Interval Wipes):Turn the band up for more frequentwipes or down for less frequentwipes.

6 (Low Speed): Slow wipes.

? (High Speed): Fast wipes.

Clear ice and snow from the wiperblades before using them. If frozento the windshield, carefully loosen orthaw them. Damaged wiper bladesshould be replaced. See WiperBlade Replacement on page 10‑32.

Heavy snow or ice can overload thewiper motor. A circuit breaker willstop the motor until it cools down.



Windshield Washer

{ WARNING

In freezing weather, do not usethe washer until the windshield iswarmed. Otherwise the washerfluid can form ice on thewindshield, blocking your vision.

L (Washer Fluid): Push thepaddle at the top of the multifunctionlever, to spray washer fluid on thewindshield. The wipers clear thewindow and then either stop orreturn to the preset speed.

Rear WindowWiper/WasherThe rear wiper control is located onthe turn and lane‐change lever.

To turn the rear wiper on, slide thelever to a wiper position.

9 (Off): Turns the wiper off.

5 (Rear Wiper Delay): Turns onthe rear wiper delay.

Z (Rear Wiper): Turns on the rearwiper.

= (Rear Wiper Wash): Press thisbutton on the end of the lever tospray washer fluid on the rearwindow. The wipers will clear therear window and either stop orreturn to your preset speed.For more washer cycles, press andhold the button.

The rear window wiper/washer willnot operate if the liftgate or liftglassis open or ajar. If the liftgate orliftglass is opened while the rearwiper is on, the wiper returns to theparked position and stops.

CompassYour vehicle may have acompass in the Driver InformationCenter (DIC).

Compass Zone

The zone is set to zone eight uponleaving the factory. Your dealer willset the correct zone for yourlocation.

Under certain circumstances,such as during a long distancecross-country trip or moving to anew state or province, it will benecessary to compensate forcompass variance by resetting thezone through the DIC if the zoneis not set correctly.



Compass variance is the differencebetween the earth's magnetic northand true geographic north. If thecompass is not set to the zonewhere you live, the compass maygive false readings. The compassmust be set to the variance zone inwhich the vehicle is traveling.

To adjust for compass variance,use the following procedure:

Compass Variance (Zone)Procedure

1. Do not set the compass zonewhen the vehicle is moving.Only set it when the vehicle isin P (Park).

Press the vehicle informationbutton until PRESS V TOCHANGE COMPASS ZONEdisplays.

2. Find the vehicle's currentlocation and variance zonenumber on the map.

Zones 1 through 15 areavailable.

3. Press the set/reset button toscroll through and select theappropriate variance zone.

4. Press the trip/fuel buttonuntil the vehicle heading,for example, N for North, isdisplayed in the DIC.

5. If calibration is necessary,calibrate the compass.See “Compass CalibrationProcedure” following.

Compass Calibration

The compass can be manuallycalibrated. Only calibrate thecompass in a magnetically cleanand safe location, such as an openparking lot, where driving thevehicle in circles is not a danger.It is suggested to calibrate awayfrom tall buildings, utility wires,manhole covers, or other industrialstructures, if possible.

If CAL should ever appear in theDIC display, the compass should becalibrated.

If the DIC display does notshow a heading, for example,N for North, or the heading does notchange after making turns, theremay be a strong magnetic fieldinterfering with the compass.Such interference may be causedby a magnetic CB or cell phoneantenna mount, a magneticemergency light, magnetic note padholder, or any other magnetic item.



Turn off the vehicle, move themagnetic item, then turn on thevehicle and calibrate the compass.

To calibrate the compass, use thefollowing procedure:

Compass Calibration Procedure

1. Before calibrating the compass,make sure the compass zone isset to the variance zone inwhich the vehicle is located.See “Compass Variance (Zone)Procedure” earlier in thissection.

Do not operate any switchessuch as window, sunroof,climate controls, seats, etc.during the calibration procedure.

2. Press the vehicle informationbutton until PRESS V TOCALIBRATE COMPASSdisplays.

3. Press the set/reset button tostart the compass calibration.

4. The DIC will displayCALIBRATING: DRIVE INCIRCLES. Drive the vehiclein tight circles at less than8 km/h (5 mph) to complete thecalibration. The DIC will displayCALIBRATION COMPLETEfor a few seconds when thecalibration is complete. The DICdisplay will then return to theprevious menu.

ClockThe analog clock is not connectedwith any other vehicle system andruns by itself.

To adjust the clock, do the following:

1. Locate the adjustment button,near the lower left corner of theclock.

2. Push and hold the adjustmentbutton to advance the clockhands. Holding the button downwill cause the clock to advancefaster. Release the button beforeyou get to the desired time.

3. Push and release the button toincrease the time by one minuteincrements until the desired timeis reached.



Power OutletsThe accessory power outlets can beused to plug in electrical equipment,such as a cell phone or MP3 player.

The vehicle has three accessorypower outlets located:. Inside the floor console

storage bin.. On the rear of the floor console.. In the rear cargo area on the

passenger side.

Remove the cover to use andreplace when not in use.

The accessory power outlets arepowered, even when the ignition isin LOCK/OFF. Continuing to usepower outlets while the ignition is inLOCK/OFF may cause the vehicle'sbattery to run down.

{ WARNING

Power is always supplied to theoutlets. Do not leave electricalequipment plugged in when thevehicle is not in use because thevehicle could catch fire and causeinjury or death.

Notice: Leaving electricalequipment plugged in for anextended period of time whilethe vehicle is off will drain thebattery. Always unplug electricalequipment when not in use anddo not plug in equipment thatexceeds the maximum 20 ampererating.

Certain power accessory plugsmay not be compatible with theaccessory power outlet and couldoverload adapter or vehicle fuses.If a problem is experienced, seeyour dealer.

When adding electrical equipment,be sure to follow the properinstallation instructions includedwith the equipment. Do not useequipment exceeding themaximum amperage rating of20 amperes. See Add-On ElectricalEquipment on page 9‑69.

Notice: Hanging heavyequipment from the poweroutlet can cause damage notcovered by the vehicle warranty.The power outlets are designedfor accessory power plugs only,such as cell phone charge cords.



Power Outlet 110 VoltAlternative Current

The vehicle may have a poweroutlet that can be used to plug inelectrical equipment that uses amaximum limit of 150 watts.

The power outlet is located on therear of the center console.

An indicator light on the outlet turnson to show it is in use. The lightcomes on when the ignition is inON/RUN and equipment requiringless than 150 watts is plugged intothe outlet, and no system fault isdetected.

If equipment is connected usingmore than 150 watts or a systemfault is detected, a protection circuitshuts off the power supply and theindicator light turns off. To reset thecircuit, unplug the item and plug itback in or turn the RemoteAccessory Power (RAP) off andthen back on. See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) onpage 9‑26.

The power outlet is not designed forand may not work properly, if thefollowing are plugged in:. Equipment with high initial

peak wattage such as:compressor-driven refrigeratorsand electric power tools.

. Other equipment requiringan extremely stablepower supply such as:microcomputer-controlledelectric blankets, touch sensorlamps, etc.

Cigarette LighterFor vehicles with a cigarette lighter,it is located in the center consolenear the cupholders. Press on theaccess door to open it and use thelighter.

To use the cigarette lighter, push itin all the way, and let go. When it isready, it will pop back out by itself.

Notice: Holding a cigarette lighterin while it is heating does not letthe lighter back away from theheating element when it is hot.Damage from overheating canoccur to the lighter or heatingelement, or a fuse could beblown. Do not hold a cigarettelighter in while it is heating.



AshtraysFor vehicles with an ashtray, it islocated in the center console nearthe cupholders. Press on the accessdoor to open it and use the ashtray.

Notice: If papers, pins, or otherflammable items are put in theashtray, hot cigarettes or othersmoking materials could ignitethem and possibly damage thevehicle. Never put flammableitems in the ashtray.

To remove the ashtray, pull it fromthe center console. Slide it back inand push down to be sure it issecure.

Warning Lights,Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning lights and gauges cansignal that something is wrongbefore it becomes serious enoughto cause an expensive repair orreplacement. Paying attention to thewarning lights and gauges couldprevent injury.

Warning lights come on when therecould be a problem with a vehiclefunction. Some warning lights comeon briefly when the engine is startedto indicate they are working.

Gauges can indicate when therecould be a problem with a vehiclefunction. Often gauges and warninglights work together to indicate aproblem with the vehicle.

When one of the warning lightscomes on and stays on whiledriving, or when one of the gaugesshows there may be a problem,check the section that explains whatto do. Follow this manual's advice.Waiting to do repairs can be costlyand even dangerous.



Instrument Cluster

English Shown, Metric Similar



SpeedometerThe speedometer shows the vehiclespeed in both kilometers per hour(km/h) and miles per hour (mph).

OdometerThe vehicle's odometer workstogether with the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). The Trip odometer canbe set. See “Trip Odometer” underDriver Information Center (DIC) onpage 5‑23 for more information.

To check the odometer mileagewhile the vehicle is not running,press the trip stem on theinstrument panel cluster.

If the vehicle ever needs a newodometer installed, the new one willbe set to the correct mileage total ofthe old odometer.

Trip OdometerThe trip odometer can show how farthe vehicle has been driven sincethe trip odometer was last setto zero.

For more information see “TripOdometer” under Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5‑23.

TachometerThe tachometer displays theengine speed in revolutions perminute (rpm).

Fuel Gauge

When the ignition is on, the fuelgauge shows about how much fuelthe vehicle has left in the tank.

An arrow on the fuel gaugeindicates the side of the vehicle thefuel door is on.

The gauge will first indicate emptybefore the vehicle is out of fuel, butthe vehicle's fuel tank should befilled soon.

Here are some situations ownersmay experience with the fuel gauge.None of these indicate a problemwith the fuel gauge.. At the gas station, the fuel pump

shuts off before the gaugereads full.

. It takes a little more or less fuelto fill up than the fuel gaugeindicated. For example, thegauge may have indicated thetank was half full, but it actuallytook a little more or less thanhalf the tank's capacity to fillthe tank.

. The gauge goes back to emptywhen the ignition is turned off.



Engine CoolantTemperature Gauge

This gauge shows the enginecoolant temperature.

If the indicator on the gauge movestowards the shaded area on thethermostat, it means that the enginecoolant has overheated. If thevehicle has been operating undernormal driving conditions, pull offthe road, stop the vehicle and turnoff the engine as soon as possible.

See Engine Overheating onpage 10‑19.

Safety Belt Reminders

Driver Safety Belt ReminderLight

There is a driver safety beltreminder light on the instrumentpanel cluster.

When the vehicle is started, thislight flashes and a chime may comeon to remind the driver to fastentheir safety belt. Then the light stayson solid until the belt is buckled.

This cycle may continue severaltimes if the driver remains orbecomes unbuckled while thevehicle is moving.

If the driver safety belt is buckled,neither the light nor the chimecomes on.

Passenger Safety BeltReminder Light

When the vehicle is started, thislight flashes and a chime may comeon to remind front passengers tofasten their safety belt. Then thelight stays on solid until the belt isbuckled.

See Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 5‑14.

This cycle continues several timesif the front passenger remains orbecomes unbuckled while thevehicle is moving.

If the front passenger safety belt isbuckled, neither the chime nor thelight comes on.



The front passenger safety beltreminder light and chime may turnon if an object is put on the seatsuch as a briefcase, handbag,grocery bag, laptop, or otherelectronic device. To turn off thereminder light and/or chime, removethe object from the seat or bucklethe safety belt.

Airbag Readiness LightThe system checks the airbag'selectrical system for possiblemalfunctions. If the light stays on itindicates there is an electricalproblem. The system check includesthe airbag sensor(s), passengersensing system, the pretensioners,the airbag modules, the wiring, andthe crash sensing and diagnosticmodule. For more information on theairbag system, see Airbag Systemon page 3‑25.

The airbag readiness light comes onsolid for a few seconds when theengine is started. If the light doesnot come on then, have it fixedimmediately.

{ WARNING

If the airbag readiness light stayson after the vehicle is started orcomes on while driving, it meansthe airbag system might not beworking properly. The airbags inthe vehicle might not inflate in acrash, or they could even inflatewithout a crash. To help avoidinjury, have the vehicle servicedright away.

If there is a problem with the airbagsystem, a Driver Information Center(DIC) message can also come on.See Airbag System Messages onpage 5‑35 for more information.

Passenger Airbag StatusIndicatorIf the vehicle has the airbag statusindicator pictured in the followingillustration, then the vehicle has apassenger sensing system for theright front passenger position.The passenger airbag statusindicator is on the overheadconsole. See Passenger SensingSystem on page 3‑33 for importantsafety information.

In addition, if the vehicle has apassenger sensing system for theright front passenger position, thelabel on the vehicle's sun visorsrefers to “ADVANCED AIRBAGS.”



United States

Canada and Mexico

When the vehicle is started, thepassenger airbag status indicatorwill light ON and OFF, or thesymbols for on and off, for severalseconds as a system check. If youare using remote start, if equipped,to start the vehicle from a distance,you may not see the system check.

Then, after several more seconds,the status indicator will light eitherON or OFF, or either the on or offsymbol to let you know the status ofthe right front passenger frontalairbag.

If the word ON or the on symbol islit on the passenger airbag statusindicator, it means that the rightfront passenger frontal airbag isenabled (may inflate).

If the word OFF or the off symbol islit on the airbag status indicator, itmeans that the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag.

If, after several seconds, bothstatus indicator lights remain on,or if there are no lights at all, theremay be a problem with the lights orthe passenger sensing system.See your dealer for service.

{ WARNING

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others,have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 5‑14 for moreinformation, including importantsafety information.



Charging System Light

This light comes on briefly whenthe ignition key is turned to START,but the engine is not running, as acheck to show it is working.

If it does not, have the vehicleserviced by your dealer.

The light should go out once theengine starts. If it stays on,or comes on while driving, therecould be a problem with thecharging system. A charging systemmessage in the Driver InformationCenter (DIC) can also appear.See Battery Voltage and ChargingMessages on page 5‑29 for moreinformation. This light could indicatethat there are problems with a

generator drive belt, or that there isan electrical problem. Have itchecked right away. If the vehiclemust be driven a short distance withthe light on, turn off accessories,such as the radio and airconditioner.


MalfunctionIndicator LampA computer system called OBD II(On-Board Diagnostics-SecondGeneration) monitors the operationof the vehicle to ensure emissionsare at acceptable levels, to producea cleaner environment. This lightcomes on when the vehicle isplaced in ON/RUN, as a check toshow it is working. If it does not,have the vehicle serviced by yourdealer. See Ignition Positions onpage 9‑22.

If the malfunction indicator lampcomes on and stays on while theengine is running, this indicates thatthere is an OBD II problem andservice is required.

Malfunctions often are indicated bythe system before any problem isapparent. Being aware of the lightcan prevent more serious damageto the vehicle. This system assiststhe service technician in correctlydiagnosing any malfunction.

Notice: If the vehicle iscontinually driven with this lighton, the emission controls mightnot work as well, the vehicle fueleconomy might not be as good,and the engine might not run assmoothly. This could lead tocostly repairs that might not becovered by the vehicle warranty.



Notice: Modifications made to theengine, transmission, exhaust,intake, or fuel system of thevehicle or the replacement ofthe original tires with otherthan those of the same TirePerformance Criteria (TPC) canaffect the vehicle's emissioncontrols and can cause this lightto come on. Modifications tothese systems could lead tocostly repairs not coveredby the vehicle warranty.This could also result in a failureto pass a required EmissionInspection/Maintenance test.See Accessories andModifications on page 10‑3.

This light comes on during amalfunction in one of two ways:

Light Flashing: A misfire conditionhas been detected. A misfireincreases vehicle emissions andcould damage the emission controlsystem on the vehicle. Diagnosisand service might be required.

To prevent more serious damage tothe vehicle:. Reduce vehicle speed.. Avoid hard accelerations.. Avoid steep uphill grades.. If towing a trailer, reduce the

amount of cargo being hauledas soon as it is possible.

If the light continues to flash, stopand park the vehicle. Turn thevehicle off, wait at least 10 seconds,and restart the engine. If the light isstill flashing, follow the previoussteps and see your dealer forservice as soon as possible.

Light On Steady: An emissioncontrol system malfunction hasbeen detected on the vehicle.Diagnosis and service might berequired.

The following may correct anemission system malfunction:. Check that the fuel cap is fully

installed. See Filling the Tank onpage 9‑55. The diagnosticsystem can determine if thefuel cap has been left off orimproperly installed. A loose ormissing fuel cap allows fuel toevaporate into the atmosphere.A few driving trips with the capproperly installed should turn thelight off.

. Check that good quality fuel isused. Poor fuel quality causesthe engine not to run asefficiently as designed and maycause stalling after start-up,stalling when the vehicle ischanged into gear, misfiring,hesitation on acceleration,or stumbling on acceleration.These conditions might go awayonce the engine is warmed up.



If one or more of these conditionsoccurs, change the fuel brand used.It will require at least one full tank ofthe proper fuel to turn the light off.

See Recommended Fuel onpage 9‑52.

If none of the above have made thelight turn off, your dealer can checkthe vehicle. The dealer has theproper test equipment anddiagnostic tools to fix anymechanical or electrical problemsthat might have developed.

Emissions Inspection andMaintenance Programs

Some local governments mayhave programs to inspect theon-vehicle emission controlequipment. For the inspection,the emission system test equipmentis connected to the vehicle’s DataLink Connector (DLC).

The DLC is under the instrumentpanel to the left of the steeringwheel. See your dealer if assistanceis needed.

The vehicle may not passinspection if:. The malfunction indicator lamp

is on with the engine running,or if the light does not come onwhen the ignition is turned toON/RUN while the engine is off.See your dealer for assistance inverifying proper operation of themalfunction indicator lamp.

. The OBD II (On-BoardDiagnostics) system determinesthat critical emission controlsystems have not beencompletely diagnosed.The vehicle would be considerednot ready for inspection. Thiscan happen if the 12-volt batteryhas recently been replaced orrun down. The diagnostic systemis designed to evaluate criticalemission control systems duringnormal driving. This can takeseveral days of routine driving.If this has been done and thevehicle still does not pass theinspection for lack of OBD IIsystem readiness, your dealercan prepare the vehicle forinspection.



Brake System WarningLightWith the ignition on, the brakesystem warning light comes onwhen the parking brake is set. If thevehicle is driven with the parkingbrake engaged, a chime soundswhen the vehicle speed is greaterthan 5 km/h (3 mph).

The vehicle brake system consistsof two hydraulic circuits. If onecircuit is not working, the remainingcircuit can still work to stop thevehicle. For normal brakingperformance, both circuits need tobe working.

If the warning light comes on and achime sounds there could be abrake problem. Have the brakesystem inspected by your dealer.

This light can also come on due tolow brake fluid. See Brake Fluid onpage 10‑25 for more information.

Metric English

This light comes on briefly when theignition is turned to ON/RUN. If itdoes not, have it fixed so it will beready to warn if there is a problem.

If the light comes on while driving,pull off the road and stop carefully.The pedal could be harder to pushor could go closer to the floor. It cantake longer to stop. If the light is stillon, have the vehicle towed forservice. See Towing the Vehicle onpage 10‑93.

{ WARNING

The brake system might not beworking properly if the brakesystem warning light is on.Driving with the brake systemwarning light on can lead to acrash. If the light is still on afterthe vehicle has been pulled offthe road and carefully stopped,have the vehicle towed forservice.



Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning Light

For vehicles with the Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS), this light comes onbriefly when the engine is started.

If it does not, have the vehicleserviced by your dealer. If thesystem is working normally theindicator light then goes off.

If the ABS light stays on, turn theignition off. If the light comes onwhile driving, stop as soon as it issafely possible and turn the ignitionoff. Then start the engine again toreset the system. If the ABS lightstays on, or comes on again whiledriving, the vehicle needs service.If the regular brake system warninglight is not on, the vehicle still hasbrakes, but not antilock brakes.

If the regular brake system warninglight is also on, the vehicle does nothave antilock brakes and there is aproblem with the regular brakes.See Brake System Warning Light onpage 5‑19.

For vehicles with a DriverInformation Center (DIC), see BrakeSystem Messages on page 5‑29 forall brake‐related DIC messages.


Tow/Haul Mode Light

For vehicles with the Tow/HaulMode feature, this light comes onwhen the Tow/Haul Mode has beenactivated.

For more information, see Tow/HaulMode on page 9‑33.

StabiliTrak® OFF Light

This light comes on briefly whilestarting the engine.

If it does not, have the vehicleserviced by your dealer. If thesystem is working normally, theindicator light then goes off.

Press and release the TractionControl System (TCS)/StabiliTrakbutton to turn off TCS, and amessage displays in the DIC.

Press and briefly hold theTCS/StabiliTrak button to turn offthe StabiliTrak system; theStabiliTrak Off light comes on anda message appears in the DriverInformation Center (DIC).



If the StabiliTrak/TCS system is off,the system does not assist incontrolling the vehicle. Turn on theStabiliTrak/TCS system and theindicator light turns off.

See StabiliTrak® System onpage 9‑37, and Ride Control SystemMessages on page 5‑34 for moreinformation.

Traction Control System(TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light

The TCS/StabiliTrak light comes onbriefly when the engine is started.

If the light does not come on orstays on, have the vehicle servicedby the dealer. If the system isworking normally, the indicator lightturns off.

If the light comes on and stays onwhile driving, and a messagedisplays in the Driver InformationCenter (DIC), have the vehicleserviced by the dealer. See RideControl System Messages onpage 5‑34 for more information.

If the light flashes while driving, thismeans that StabiliTrak or TCS isassisting in controlling the vehicle.See StabiliTrak® System onpage 9‑37 for more information.

Tire Pressure Light

For vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), this lightcomes on briefly when the engine isstarted. It provides informationabout tire pressures and the TPMS.

When the Light Is On Steady

This indicates that one or moreof the tires are significantlyunderinflated.

A Driver Information Center (DIC)tire pressure message may alsodisplay. See Tire Messages onpage 5‑36. Stop as soon aspossible, and inflate the tires to thepressure value shown on the Tireand Loading Information label.See Tire Pressure on page 10‑52.

When the Light Flashes First andThen Is On Steady

If the light flashes for about a minuteand then stays on, there may be aproblem with the TPMS. If theproblem is not corrected, the lightwill come on at every ignition cycle.See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation on page 10‑55.



Engine Oil Pressure Light

Notice: Lack of proper engine oilmaintenance can damage theengine. Driving with the engineoil low can also damage theengine. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Check the oil level as soon aspossible. Add oil if required, butif the oil level is within theoperating range and the oilpressure is still low, have thevehicle serviced. Always followthe maintenance schedule forchanging engine oil.

This light comes on briefly whilestarting the engine. If it does not,have the vehicle serviced by yourdealer. If the system is workingnormally the indicator light thengoes off.

If the light comes on and stays on, itmeans that oil is not flowing throughthe engine properly. The vehiclecould be low on oil and it mighthave some other system problem.


Security Light

The security light should come onbriefly as the engine is started. If thesystem is working normally, theindicator light turns off. If it does notcome on, have the vehicle servicedby your dealer.

If the light stays on and the enginedoes not start, there could be aproblem with the theft-deterrentsystem.

This light is also used to indicatethe status of the anti-theft alarmsystem when the ignition is turnedoff. The light will flash rapidly if thealarm system is arming and one ormore of the monitored entry pointsis not closed. The light will stay on ifthe alarm is arming and all entrypoints are closed.

For information regarding this lightand the vehicle's security system,see Anti-theft Alarm System onpage 2‑13.

High-Beam On Light

This light comes on when thehigh-beam headlamps are in use.

See Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger on page 6‑5 for moreinformation.



Front Fog Lamp Light

The front fog lamp light comes onwhen the fog lamps are in use.

The light goes out when the foglamps are turned off. See FogLamps on page 6‑8 for moreinformation.

Lamps On Reminder

This light comes on whenever theparking lamps are on.

See Exterior Lamp Controls onpage 6‑1 for more information.

Cruise Control Light

The cruise control light comes onwhenever the cruise control is set.

The light goes out when the cruisecontrol is turned off. See CruiseControl on page 9‑41 for moreinformation.

Information Displays

Driver InformationCenter (DIC)Your vehicle has a DriverInformation Center (DIC).

The DIC displays informationabout your vehicle. It also displayswarning messages if a systemproblem is detected. The DICalso allows some features tobe customized. See VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑38 formore information.

All messages will appear in the DICdisplay located in the center of theinstrument panel cluster.

The DIC comes on when the ignitionis on. After a short delay, the DICwill display the information that waslast displayed before the enginewas turned off.



Operation and Displays

The DIC has different displayswhich can be accessed by pressingthe DIC buttons located on theinstrument panel, next to thesteering wheel.

The DIC displays trip, fuel, andvehicle system information, andwarning messages if a systemproblem is detected. A digitalspeedometer also appears at thebottom of the DIC display.The digital speedometer can beenabled or disabled. See “DISPLAYDIGITAL SPEED” under VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑38 formore information.

DIC Buttons

The buttons are the trip/fuel,vehicle information, customization,and set/reset buttons. The buttonfunctions are detailed in thefollowing pages.

3 (Trip/Fuel): Press to displaythe odometer, trip odometer, fuelrange, average economy, fuel used,timer, transmission temperature,instantaneous economy, andaverage vehicle speed.

The compass and outside airtemperature will also be shown inthe display. The temperature will beshown in °C or °F depending on theunits selected.

T (Vehicle Information): Pressto display the oil life, units, sideblind zone system on/off, tirepressure readings for vehicleswith the Tire Pressure MonitorSystem (TPMS), compass zonesetting, and compass recalibration.

U (Customization): Press tocustomize the feature settings onyour vehicle. See VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑38 formore information.

V (Set/Reset): Press to set orreset certain functions and to turnoff or acknowledge messages onthe DIC.



Trip/Fuel Menu Items

3 (Trip/Fuel): Press to scrollthrough the following menu items:

Odometer

Press the trip/fuel button untilODOMETER displays. This displayshows the distance the vehicle hasbeen driven in either kilometers (km)or miles (mi).

To switch between English andmetric measurements, see “Units”later in this section.

Trip Odometer

Press the trip/fuel button until TRIPdisplays. This display shows thecurrent distance traveled in eitherkilometers (km) or miles (mi)) sincethe last reset for the trip odometer.

The trip odometer can be reset tozero by pressing the set/resetbutton while the trip odometer isdisplayed.

Fuel Range

Press the trip/fuel button until FUELRANGE displays. This displayshows the approximate number ofremaining kilometers (km) ormiles (mi) the vehicle can be drivenwithout refueling. The display willshow LOW if the fuel level is low.

The fuel range estimate is based onan average of the vehicle's fueleconomy over recent driving historyand the amount of fuel remaining inthe fuel tank. This estimate willchange if driving conditions change.For example, if driving in traffic andmaking frequent stops, this displaymay read one number, but if thevehicle is driven on a freeway, thenumber may change even thoughthe same amount of fuel is in thefuel tank. This is because differentdriving conditions produce differentfuel economies. Generally,freeway driving produces betterfuel economy than city driving.Fuel range cannot be reset.

Average Economy

Press the trip/fuel button untilAVERAGE ECONOMYdisplays. This display shows theapproximate average liters per100 kilometers (L/100 km) or milesper gallon (mpg). This number iscalculated based on the number ofL/100 km (mpg) recorded since thelast time this menu item was reset.To reset AVERAGE ECONOMY,press and hold the set/reset button.

Fuel Used

Press the trip/fuel button untilFUEL USED displays. This displayshows the number of liters (L) orgallons (gal) of fuel used since thelast reset of this menu item. To resetthe fuel used information, press andhold the set/reset button while FUELUSED is displayed.

Timer

Press the trip/fuel button untilTIMER displays. This display can beused as a timer.



To start the timer, press theset/reset button while TIMER isdisplayed. The display will show theamount of time that has passedsince the timer was last reset, notincluding time the ignition is off.Time will continue to be counted aslong as the ignition is on, even ifanother display is being shown onthe DIC. The timer will recordup to 99 hours, 59 minutes and59 seconds (99:59:59) after whichthe display will return to zero.

To stop the timer, press the set/resetbutton briefly while TIMER isdisplayed.

To reset the timer to zero, press andhold the set/reset button whileTIMER is displayed.

Transmission Temperature

Press the trip/fuel button untilTRANS TEMP displays. Thisdisplay shows the temperature ofthe automatic transmission fluid ineither degrees Celsius (°C) ordegrees Fahrenheit (°F).

Instantaneous Economy

If your vehicle has this display,press the trip/fuel button until INSTECON displays. This display showsthe current fuel economy at aparticular moment and will changefrequently as driving conditionschange. This display shows theinstantaneous fuel economy in litersper 100 kilometers (L/100 km) ormiles per gallon (mpg). Unlikeaverage economy, this screencannot be reset.

The display may also show if thevehicle is currently in V4, V6 orV8 mode.

Average Vehicle Speed

Press the trip/fuel button untilAVERAGE SPEED displays.This display shows the averagespeed in kilometers per hour (km/h)or miles per hour (MPH).

Blank Display

This display shows no information.

Vehicle Information MenuItems

T (Vehicle Information): Pressto scroll through the following menuitems:

Oil Life

Press the vehicle informationbutton until OIL LIFE REMAININGdisplays. This display shows anestimate of the oil's remaininguseful life. If you see 99%OIL LIFEREMAINING on the display, thatmeans 99% of the current oil liferemains. The engine oil life systemwill alert you to change the oil on aschedule consistent with yourdriving conditions.

When the remaining oil life is low,the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage will appear on the display.See “CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON”under Engine Oil Messages onpage 5‑31. You should change theoil as soon as you can. See EngineOil on page 10‑7. In addition to the



engine oil life system monitoring theoil life, additional maintenance isrecommended in the MaintenanceSchedule in this manual. SeeMaintenance Schedule onpage 11‑3 for more information.

Remember, you must reset the OILLIFE display yourself after each oilchange. It will not reset itself. Also,be careful not to reset the OIL LIFEdisplay accidentally at any timeother than when the oil has justbeen changed. It cannot be resetaccurately until the next oil change.To reset the engine oil life system,see Engine Oil Life System onpage 10‑9.

Side Blind Zone Alert

If your vehicle has the Side BlindZone Alert (SBZA) system, thisdisplay allows the system to beturned on or off. Once in thisdisplay, press the set/reset buttonto select between ON or OFF.

If you choose ON, the system willbe turned on. If you choose OFF,the system will be turned off. Whenthe SBZA system is turned off, theDIC will display the SIDE BLINDZONE ALERT SYSTEM OFFmessage as a reminder that thesystem has been turned off. SeeObject Detection System Messageson page 5‑33 and Side Blind ZoneAlert (SBZA) on page 9‑45 for moreinformation.

Units

Press the vehicle information buttonuntil UNITS displays. This displayallows you to select between metricor English units of measurement.Once in this display, press theset/reset button to select betweenENGLISH or METRIC units.All of the vehicle information willthen be displayed in the unit ofmeasurement selected.

Tire Pressure

On vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), thepressure for each tire can beviewed in the DIC. The tire pressurewill be shown in either poundskilopascals (kPa) or per squareinch (psi). Press the vehicleinformation button until the DICdisplays FRONT TIRES kPa (PSI)LEFT ## RIGHT ##. Press thevehicle information button againuntil the DIC displays REARTIRES kPa (PSI) LEFT ##RIGHT ##.

If a low tire pressure condition isdetected by the system whiledriving, a message advising you toadd air to a specific tire will appearin the display. See Tire Pressure onpage 10‑52 and Tire Messages onpage 5‑36 for more information.

If the tire pressure display showsdashes instead of a value, theremay be a problem with your vehicle.If this consistently occurs, see yourdealer for service.



Battery Voltage

This display shows the currentbattery voltage. If the voltage is inthe normal range, the value willdisplay. For example, the displaymay read BATTERY VOLTAGE13 VOLTS. If the voltage is low,the display will show LOW. If thevoltage is high, the display will showHIGH. Your vehicle's chargingsystem regulates voltage based onthe state of the battery. The batteryvoltage may fluctuate when viewingthis information on the DIC. This isnormal. See Charging System Lighton page 5‑16 for more information.If there is a problem with the batterycharging system, the DIC willdisplay a message. See BatteryVoltage and Charging Messages onpage 5‑29.

Oil Pressure

This display will show the oilpressure in either poundskilopascals (kPa) or per squareinch (psi).

Compass Zone Setting

This display allows for setting thecompass zone. See Compass onpage 5‑5 for more information.

Compass Recalibration

This display allows for calibratingthe compass. See Compass onpage 5‑5 for more information.

Blank Display

This display shows no information.

Vehicle MessagesMessages displayed on the DICindicate the status of the vehicle orsome action may be needed tocorrect a condition. Multiplemessages may appear one afteranother.

The messages that do not requireimmediate action can beacknowledge and cleared bypressing any DIC button.

The messages that requireimmediate action cannot be cleareduntil that action is performed.

All messages should be takenseriously and clearing the messagedoes not correct the problem.

The following are the possiblemessages and some informationabout them.



Battery Voltage andCharging Messages

BATTERY LOW STARTVEHICLE

When the vehicle’s battery isseverely discharged, this messagewill display and four chimeswill sound. Start the vehicleimmediately. If the vehicle is notstarted and the battery continues todischarge, the climate controls,heated seats, and audio systemswill shut off and the vehicle mayrequire a jump start. These systemswill function again after the vehicleis started.

SERVICE BATTERYCHARGING SYSTEM

On some vehicles, this messagedisplays if there is a problemwith the battery charging system.Under certain conditions, thecharging system light may also turnon in the instrument panel cluster.

See Charging System Light onpage 5‑16. Driving with this problemcould drain the battery. Turn off allunnecessary accessories. Have theelectrical system checked as soonas possible. See your dealer.

Brake System Messages

SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM

This message displays along withthe brake system warning light ifthere is a problem with the brakesystem. See Brake System WarningLight on page 5‑19. If this messageappears, stop as soon as possibleand turn off the vehicle. Restart thevehicle and check for the messageon the DIC display. If the messageis still displayed or appears againwhen you begin driving, the brakesystem needs service as soon aspossible. See your dealer.

SERVICE BRAKES SOON

This message displays if there is aproblem with the brake system.If this message appears, stop assoon as possible and turn off thevehicle. Restart the vehicle andcheck for the message on the DICdisplay. If the message is stilldisplayed or appears again whenyou begin driving, the brake systemneeds service. See your dealer.

Door Ajar Messages

DRIVER DOOR OPEN

This message displays and achime sounds if the driver door isnot fully closed and the vehicle isshifted out of P (Park). Stop and turnoff the vehicle, check the door forobstructions, and close the dooragain. Check to see if the messagestill appears on the DIC.



HOOD OPEN

This message displays and a chimesounds if the hood is not fullyclosed. Stop and turn off thevehicle, check the hood forobstructions, and close the hoodagain. Check to see if the messagestill appears on the DIC.

LEFT REAR DOOR OPEN

This message displays and a chimesounds if the driver side rear door isnot fully closed and the vehicle isshifted out of P (Park). Stop and turnoff the vehicle, check the door forobstructions, and close the dooragain. Check to see if the messagestill appears on the DIC.

PASSENGER DOOR OPEN

This message displays and a chimesounds if the front passenger dooris not fully closed and the vehicle isshifted out of P (Park). Stop and turnoff the vehicle, check the door for

obstructions, and close the dooragain. Check to see if the messagestill appears on the DIC.

REAR ACCESS OPEN

This message displays and achime sounds if the liftgate orliftglass is open while the ignition isin ON/RUN. Turn off the vehicle andcheck the liftgate and liftglass.Restart the vehicle and check forthe message on the DIC display.

RIGHT REAR DOOR OPEN

This message displays and a chimesounds if the passenger side reardoor is not fully closed and thevehicle is shifted out of P (Park).Stop and turn off the vehicle,check the door for obstructions,and close the door again. Check tosee if the message still appears onthe DIC.

Engine Cooling SystemMessagesNotice: If you drive the vehiclewhile the engine is overheating,severe engine damage mayoccur. If an overheat warningappears on the instrument panelcluster and/or DIC, stop thevehicle as soon as possible.See Engine Overheating onpage 10‑19 for more information.

ENGINE HOT A/C (AirConditioning) TURNED OFF

This message displays when theengine coolant becomes hotter thanthe normal operating temperature.See Engine Coolant TemperatureGauge on page 5‑13. To avoidadded strain on a hot engine,the air conditioning compressorautomatically turns off. When thecoolant temperature returns tonormal, the air conditioningcompressor turns back on. You cancontinue to drive your vehicle.



If this message continues to appear,have the system repaired by yourdealer as soon as possible to avoiddamage to the engine.

ENGINE OVERHEATEDIDLE ENGINE

This message displays when theengine coolant temperature is toohot. Stop and allow the vehicle toidle until it cools down. See EngineCoolant Temperature Gauge onpage 5‑13.

See Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating Mode on page 10‑22 forinformation on driving to a safeplace in an emergency.

ENGINE OVERHEATEDSTOP ENGINE

This message displays and a chimesounds if the engine cooling systemreaches unsafe temperatures foroperation. Stop and turn off thevehicle as soon as it is safe todo so to avoid severe damage.

This message clears when theengine has cooled to a safeoperating temperature.

Engine Oil Messages

CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON

This message displays when theengine oil needs to be changed.When you change the engine oil, besure to reset the CHANGE ENGINEOIL SOON message. See EngineOil Life System on page 10‑9 forinformation on how to reset themessage. See Engine Oil onpage 10‑7 and MaintenanceSchedule on page 11‑3 for moreinformation.

ENGINE OIL HOT IDLEENGINE

This message displays when theengine oil becomes hotter than thenormal operating temperature. Stopand allow the vehicle to idle until itcools down. See Engine CoolantTemperature Gauge on page 5‑13.

OIL PRESSURE LOWSTOP ENGINE

Notice: If you drive the vehiclewhile the engine oil pressure islow, severe engine damagemay occur. If a low oil pressurewarning appears on the DriverInformation Center (DIC), stopthe vehicle as soon as possible.Do not drive the vehicle until thecause of the low oil pressure iscorrected. See Engine Oil onpage 10‑7 for more information.

This message displays if low oilpressure levels occur. Stop thevehicle as soon as safely possibleand do not operate it until the causeof the low oil pressure has beencorrected. Check the oil as soonas possible and have the vehicleserviced by your dealer. See EngineOil on page 10‑7.



Engine Power Messages

ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED

This message displays and a chimesounds when the cooling systemtemperature gets too hot and theengine further enters the enginecoolant protection mode. SeeEngine Overheating on page 10‑19for further information.

This message also displays whenthe engine power is reduced.Reduced engine power can affectthe vehicle's ability to accelerate.If this message is on, but there isno reduction in performance,proceed to your destination.The performance may be reducedthe next time the vehicle is driven.The vehicle may be driven at areduced speed while this messageis on, but acceleration and speedmay be reduced. Anytime thismessage stays on, the vehicleshould be taken to your dealer forservice as soon as possible.

Fuel System Messages

FUEL LEVEL LOW

This message displays and achime sounds if the fuel level is low.Refuel as soon as possible. SeeFuel Gauge on page 5‑12 and Fuelon page 9‑51 for more information.

TIGHTEN GAS CAP

This message may display alongwith the check engine light on theinstrument panel cluster if the fuelcap is not tightened properly.See Malfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 5‑16. Reinstall the fuel capfully. See Filling the Tank onpage 9‑55. The diagnostic systemcan determine if the fuel cap hasbeen left off or improperly installed.A loose or missing fuel capallows fuel to evaporate into theatmosphere. A few driving trips withthe cap properly installed shouldturn this light and message off.

Key and Lock Messages

REPLACE BATTERY INREMOTE KEY

This message displays if a RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitterbattery is low. The battery needs tobe replaced in the transmitter.See “Battery Replacement” underRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 2‑3.

Lamp Messages

SERVICE LEFT HEADLAMPASSEMBLY

On some models, this messagewill be displayed when the leftheadlamp is out and needs to beserviced. See “LED Lighting” inLED Lighting on page 10‑36 formore information.



SERVICE RIGHT HEADLAMPASSEMBLY

On some models, this messagewill be displayed when the rightheadlamp is out and needs to beserviced. See “LED Lighting” inLED Lighting on page 10‑36 formore information.

TURN SIGNAL ON

This message displays and a chimesounds if a turn signal is left on for1.2 km (3/4 of a mi). Move the turnsignal/multifunction lever to the offposition.

Object Detection SystemMessages

PARKING ASSIST BLOCKEDSEE OWNERS MANUAL

This message displays if there issomething interfering with the parkassist system. See UltrasonicParking Assist on page 9‑44 formore information.

PARKING ASSIST OFF

After the vehicle has been started,this message displays to remind thedriver that the Ultrasonic RearParking Assist (URPA) system hasbeen turned off. Press the set/resetbutton to acknowledge this messageand clear it from the DIC display.To turn the URPA system back on,see Ultrasonic Parking Assist onpage 9‑44.

SERVICE PARKING ASSIST

This message displays if there is aproblem with the Ultrasonic RearParking Assist (URPA) system.Do not use this system to help youpark. See Ultrasonic Parking Assiston page 9‑44 for more information.See your dealer for service.

SERVICE SIDE BLIND ZONEALERT SYSTEM

If your vehicle has the Side BlindZone Alert (SBZA) system and thismessage displays, both SBZAdisplays will remain on indicatingthere is a problem with the SBZAsystem. If these displays remain onafter continued driving, the systemneeds service. See your dealer.See Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA)on page 9‑45 for more information.

SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERTSYSTEM OFF

If your vehicle has the Side BlindZone Alert (SBZA) system, thismessage displays when the SBZAsystem has been turned off. SeeSide Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) onpage 9‑45 and Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5‑23 for moreinformation.



SIDE BLIND ZONE SYSTEMUNAVAILABLE

If your vehicle has the Side BlindZone Alert (SBZA) system, thismessage displays when the SBZAsystem is disabled because thesensor is blocked and cannotdetect vehicles in your blind zone.The sensor may be blocked bymud, dirt, snow, ice, or slush.This message may also displayduring heavy rain or due to roadspray. It may also come on whendriving in isolated areas with noguardrails, trees, or road signs andlight traffic. Your vehicle does notneed service. For cleaninginstructions, see “Washing YourVehicle” in Exterior Care onpage 10‑96. See Side Blind ZoneAlert (SBZA) on page 9‑45 for moreinformation.

Ride Control SystemMessages

SERVICE STABILITRAK

If your vehicle has StabiliTrak andthis message displays, it meansthere may be a problem with theStabiliTrak system. If you see thismessage, try to reset the system.Stop; turn off the engine for at least15 seconds; then start the engineagain. If this message still comeson, it means there is a problem.You should see your dealer forservice. The vehicle is safe to drive,however, you do not have thebenefit of StabiliTrak, so reduceyour speed and drive accordingly.

SERVICE SUSPENSIONSYSTEM

This message displays when theRoad Sensing Suspension (RSS)system is not operating properly.Have your vehicle serviced by yourdealer.

SERVICE TRACTIONCONTROL

If your vehicle has StabiliTrak, thismessage displays when there is aproblem with the Traction ControlSystem (TCS). When this messagedisplays, the system will not limitwheel spin. Adjust your drivingaccordingly. See your dealer forservice. See StabiliTrak® System onpage 9‑37 for more information.

STABILITRAK INITIALIZING

If the vehicle has StabiliTrak, thismessage may come on if theStabiliTrak system has not fullyinitialized because of roadconditions or the incorrect tire size.When the StabiliTrak system is fullyinitialized, the message will turn off.See StabiliTrak® System onpage 9‑37 for more information.If this message continues to bedisplayed for multiple ignition cyclesand on different road surfaces, seeyour dealer for service.



TRACTION XXSTABILITRAK XX

This message displays when thetraction control and/or StabiliTraksystems have been turned on or off.Adjust your driving accordingly.To limit wheel spin and realizethe full benefits of the stabilityenhancement system, you shouldnormally leave StabiliTrak on.However, you should turnStabiliTrak off if the vehicle getsstuck in sand, mud, ice, or snowand you want to rock the vehicleto attempt to free it, or if youare driving in extreme off-roadconditions and require more wheelspin. See If the Vehicle Is Stuck onpage 9‑15. To turn the StabiliTraksystem on or off, see StabiliTrak®

System on page 9‑37.

STABILITRAK OFF may alsodisplay when the stability controlhas been automatically disabled.There are several conditions thatcan cause this message to appear.. One condition is overheating,

which could occur if StabiliTrakactivates continuously for anextended period of time.

. The message also displays if thebrake system warning light is on.See Brake System WarningLight on page 5‑19.

. The message could display if thestability system takes longerthan usual to complete itsdiagnostic checks due to drivingconditions.

. The message displays if anengine or vehicle relatedproblem has been detectedand the vehicle needs service.See your dealer.

The message turns off as soon asthe conditions that caused themessage to be displayed are nolonger present.

Airbag System Messages

SERVICE AIR BAG

This message displays if there is aproblem with the airbag system.Have your dealer inspect thesystem for problems. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 5‑14 andAirbag System on page 3‑25 formore information.



Anti-theft Alarm SystemMessages

SERVICE THEFT DETERRENTSYSTEM

This message displays when thereis a problem with the theft-deterrentsystem. The vehicle may or may notrestart so you may want to take thevehicle to your dealer before turningoff the engine. See ImmobilizerOperation on page 2‑14 for moreinformation.

Tire Messages

SERVICE TIRE MONITORSYSTEM

On vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), thismessage displays if a part on theTPMS is not working properly.

The tire pressure light also flashesand then remains on during thesame ignition cycle. See TirePressure Light on page 5‑21.Several conditions may cause thismessage to appear. See TirePressure Monitor Operation onpage 10‑55 for more information.If the warning comes on and stayson, there may be a problem with theTPMS. See your dealer.

TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE

On vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), thismessage displays when the TPMSis re-learning the tire positions onyour vehicle. The tire positions mustbe re-learned after rotating the tiresor after replacing a tire or sensor.See Tire Inspection on page 10‑57,Tire Rotation on page 10‑58, TirePressure Monitor System onpage 10‑53, and Tire Pressure onpage 10‑52 for more information.

TIRE LOW ADD AIR TO TIRE

On vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), thismessage displays when thepressure in one or more of thevehicle's tires needs to be checked.This message also displaysLEFT FRT (left front), RIGHT FRT(right front), LEFT RR (left rear),or RIGHT RR (right rear) to indicatethe location of the low tire. The lowtire pressure warning light will alsocome on. See Tire Pressure Lighton page 5‑21. You can receive morethan one tire pressure message at atime. To read the other messagesthat may have been sent at thesame time, press the set/resetbutton or the trip odometer resetstem. If a tire pressure messageappears on the DIC, stop as soonas you can. Have the tire pressureschecked and set to those shown onthe Tire Loading Information label.



See Tires on page 10‑46, VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑16, and TirePressure on page 10‑52. The DICalso shows the tire pressure values.See “DIC Operation and Displays(With DIC Buttons)” earlier in thissection.

Transmission Messages

MANUAL SHIFT

This message displays when theautomatic transmission is in manualmode. See Manual Mode onpage 9‑33 for more information.

TRANSMISSION HOT IDLEENGINE

Notice: Do not drive the vehiclewhile the transmission fluid isoverheating and the transmissiontemperature warning is displayedon the instrument panel clusterand/or DIC, or the transmissioncan be damaged. This could leadto costly repairs that would notbe covered by the warranty.

This message displays along withfour chimes if the transmission fluidin the vehicle gets hot. Driving withthe transmission fluid temperaturehigh can cause damage to thevehicle. Stop the vehicle and let itidle to allow the transmission tocool. This message clears and thechime stops when the fluidtemperature reaches a safe level.

Vehicle ReminderMessages

ICE POSSIBLE DRIVEWITH CARE

This message displays when iceconditions are possible.

Washer Fluid Messages

WASHER FLUID LOW ADDFLUID

This message displays when thewindshield washer fluid is low.Fill the windshield washer fluidreservoir as soon as possible.See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑6 for the location of thewindshield washer fluid reservoir.Also, see Washer Fluid onpage 10‑23 for more information.



VehiclePersonalizationYour vehicle may havecustomization capabilities that allowyou to program certain features toone preferred setting. Customizationfeatures can only be programmed toone setting on the vehicle andcannot be programmed to apreferred setting for two differentdrivers.

All of the customization options maynot be available on your vehicle.Only the options available will bedisplayed on the DIC.

The default settings for thecustomization features were setwhen your vehicle left the factory,but may have been changed fromtheir default state since then.

The customization preferences areautomatically recalled.

To change customizationpreferences, use the followingprocedure.

Entering the FeatureSettings Menu

1. Turn the ignition on and placethe vehicle in P (Park).

To avoid excessive drain on thebattery, it is recommended thatthe headlamps are turned off.

2. Press the customization buttonto scroll through the availablecustomizable options.

Feature Settings Menu Items

The following are customizationfeatures that allow you to programsettings to the vehicle:

DISPLAY IN ENGLISH

This feature will only display if alanguage other than English hasbeen set. This feature allows you tochange the language in which theDIC messages appear to English.

Press the customization button untilthe PRESS V TO DISPLAY INENGLISH screen appears on theDIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to display all DICmessages in English.

DISPLAY LANGUAGE

This feature allows you to selectthe language in which the DICmessages will appear.

Press the customization button untilthe DISPLAY LANGUAGE screenappears on the DIC display. Pressthe set/reset button once to accessthe settings for this feature. Thenpress the customization button toscroll through the following settings:

ENGLISH (default): All messageswill appear in English.

DEUTSCH: All messages willappear in German.

ITALIANO: All messages willappear in Italian.



FRANCAIS: All messages willappear in French.

ESPANOL: All messages willappear in Spanish.

ARABIC: All messages will appearin Arabic.

CHINESE: All messages willappear in Chinese.

NO CHANGE: No change will bemade to this feature. The currentsetting will remain.

To select a setting, press theset/reset button while the desiredsetting is displayed on the DIC.

AUTO DOOR LOCK

This feature allows you to selectwhen the vehicle's doors willautomatically lock. See AutomaticDoor Locks on page 2‑8 for moreinformation.

Press the customization button untilAUTO DOOR LOCK appears on theDIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

SHIFT OUT OF PARK (default):The doors will automatically lockwhen the vehicle is shifted out ofP (Park).

AT VEHICLE SPEED: The doorswill automatically lock when thevehicle speed is above 13 km/h(8 mph) for three seconds.



AUTO DOOR UNLOCK

This feature allows you to selectwhether or not to turn off theautomatic door unlocking feature.It also allows you to select whichdoors and when the doors willautomatically unlock. See AutomaticDoor Locks on page 2‑8 for moreinformation.

Press the customization button untilAUTO DOOR UNLOCK appears onthe DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF: None of the doors willautomatically unlock.

DRIVER AT KEY OUT: Only thedriver door will unlock when the keyis taken out of the ignition.

DRIVER IN PARK: Only the driverdoor will unlock when the vehicle isshifted into P (Park).



ALL AT KEY OUT: All of the doorswill unlock when the key is takenout of the ignition.

ALL IN PARK (default): All of thedoors will unlock when the vehicle isshifted into P (Park).



REMOTE DOOR LOCK

This feature allows you to select thetype of feedback you will receivewhen locking the vehicle with theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter. You will not receivefeedback when locking the vehiclewith the RKE transmitter if the doorsare open. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operation onpage 2‑3 for more information.

Press the customization button untilREMOTE DOOR LOCK appears onthe DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF: There will be no feedbackwhen you press the lock button onthe RKE transmitter.

LIGHTS ONLY: The exterior lampswill flash when you press the lockbutton on the RKE transmitter.

HORN ONLY: The horn will soundon the second press of the lockbutton on the RKE transmitter.

HORN & LIGHTS (default): Theexterior lamps will flash when youpress the lock button on the RKEtransmitter, and the horn will soundwhen the lock button is pressedagain within five seconds of theprevious command.



REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK

This feature allows you to select thetype of feedback you will receivewhen unlocking the vehicle with theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter. You will not receivefeedback when unlocking thevehicle with the RKE transmitter ifthe doors are open. See RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 2‑3 for moreinformation.

Press the customization buttonuntil REMOTE DOOR UNLOCKappears on the DIC display. Pressthe set/reset button once to accessthe settings for this feature. Thenpress the customization button toscroll through the following settings:

LIGHTS OFF: The exterior lampswill not flash when you press theunlock button on the RKEtransmitter.



LIGHTS ON (default): The exteriorlamps will flash when you pressthe unlock button on the RKEtransmitter.



DELAY DOOR LOCK

This feature allows you to selectwhether or not the locking of thevehicle's doors and liftgate will bedelayed. When locking the doorsand liftgate with the power door lockswitch and a door or the liftgateis open, this feature will delaylocking the doors and liftgate untilfive seconds after the last door isclosed. You will hear three chimesto signal that the delayed lockingfeature is in use. The key must beout of the ignition for this feature to

work. You can temporarily overridedelayed locking by pressing thepower door lock switch twice.See Delayed Locking on page 2‑8for more information.

Press the customization button untilDELAY DOOR LOCK appears onthe DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF: There will be no delayedlocking of the vehicle's doors.

ON (default): The doors will notlock until five seconds after the lastdoor or the liftgate is closed.



EXIT LIGHTING

This feature allows you to selectthe amount of time you want theexterior lamps to remain on whenit is dark enough outside. Thishappens after the key is turned fromON/RUN to LOCK/OFF.

Press the customization buttonuntil EXIT LIGHTING appears onthe DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF: The exterior lamps will notturn on.

30 SECONDS (default): Theexterior lamps will stay on for30 seconds.

1MINUTE: The exterior lamps willstay on for 1 minute.

2MINUTES: The exterior lampswill stay on for 2 minutes.





APPROACH LIGHTING

This feature allows you to selectwhether or not to have the exteriorlamps turn on briefly during low lightperiods after unlocking the vehicleusing the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter.

Press the customization button untilAPPROACH LIGHTING appears onthe DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF: The exterior lamps will notturn on when you unlock the vehiclewith the RKE transmitter.

ON (default): If it is dark enoughoutside, the exterior lamps will turnon briefly when you unlock thevehicle with the RKE transmitter.

The lamps will remain on for20 seconds or until the lock buttonon the RKE transmitter is pressed,or the vehicle is no longer off.See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 2‑3 formore information.



AUTO HIGH BEAMS

If your vehicle has this feature, itallows you to select to have theIntelliBeam system turned off or on.See Exterior Lamp Controls onpage 6‑1 for more information.

Press the customization button untilAUTO HIGH BEAMS appears onthe DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF (default): The IntelliBeamsystem will be turned off.

ON: The IntelliBeam system will beturned on.



CHIME VOLUME

This feature allows you to select thevolume level of the chime.

Press the customization buttonuntil CHIME VOLUME appears onthe DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settings



for this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

NORMAL: The chime volume willbe set to a normal level.

LOUD: The chime volume will beset to a loud level.


There is no default for chimevolume. The volume will stay at thelast known setting.


PARK TILT MIRRORS

This feature allows you to selectwhether or not the outside mirror(s)will automatically tilt down when thevehicle is shifted into R (Reverse).See Park Tilt Mirrors on page 2‑17for more information.

Press the customization button untilPARK TILT MIRRORS appears onthe DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF (default): Neither outsidemirror will be tilted down when thevehicle is shifted into R (Reverse).

DRIVER MIRROR: The driveroutside mirror will be tilted downwhen the vehicle is shifted intoR (Reverse).

PASSENGER MIRROR: Thepassenger outside mirror will betilted down when the vehicle isshifted into R (Reverse).

BOTH MIRRORS: The driver andpassenger outside mirrors will betilted down when the vehicle isshifted into R (Reverse).



EASY EXIT RECALL

If your vehicle has this feature, itallows you to select your preferencefor the automatic easy exit seatfeature. See Memory Seats onpage 3‑5 for more information.

Press the customization button untilEASY EXIT RECALL appears onthe DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

DOOR BUTTON ONLY: Noautomatic seat exit recall will occur.The recall will only occur afterpressing the easy exit seat button.



BUTTON AND KEY OUT(default): If the features areenabled through the EASY EXITSETUP menu, the driver seat willmove back, and if the vehicle hasthe power tilt wheel feature, thepower steering column will move upwhen the key is removed from theignition or after pressing the easyexit seat button.

The automatic easy exit seatmovement will only occur one timeafter the key is removed from theignition. If the automatic movementhas already occurred, and you putthe key back in the ignition andremove it again, the seat andsteering column will stay in theoriginal exit position, unless amemory recall took place prior toremoving the key again.



EASY EXIT SETUP

If your vehicle has this feature, itallows you to select which areas willrecall with the automatic easy exitseat feature. It also allows you toturn off the automatic easy exitfeature. See Memory Seats onpage 3‑5 and “EASY EXIT RECALL”earlier for more information.

Press the customization button untilEASY EXIT SETUP appears on theDIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press themenu up/down button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF: No automatic seat exit willrecall.

SEAT ONLY: The driver seat willrecall.

TILT ONLY: The steering wheel tiltfeature will recall.

SEAT & TILT (default): The driverseat and the steering wheel tiltfeature will recall.



MEMORY SEAT RECALL

This feature allows you to selectyour preference for the remotememory seat recall feature.See Memory Seats on page 3‑5for more information.

Press the customization buttonuntil MEMORY SEAT RECALLappears on the DIC display.Press the set/reset button once toaccess the settings for this feature.Then press the customization buttonto scroll through the followingsettings:

OFF (default): No remote memoryseat recall will occur.



ON: The driver seat, and on somevehicles, the outside mirrors willautomatically move to the storeddriving position when the unlockbutton on the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter is pressed.On some vehicles with theadjustable throttle and brake pedalfeature, the pedals will alsoautomatically move.



REMOTE START

If your vehicle has this feature, itallows you to turn the remote startoff or on. The remote start featureallows you to start the engine fromoutside of the vehicle using the

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter. See Remote VehicleStart on page 2‑5 for moreinformation.

Press the customization button untilREMOTE START appears on theDIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

OFF: The remote start feature willbe disabled.

ON (default): The remote startfeature will be enabled.



DISPLAY DIGITAL SPEED

This feature allows you to enable ordisable the digital speedometer onthe DIC.

Press the customization buttonuntil DISPLAY DIGITAL SPEEDappears on the DIC display. Pressthe set/reset button once to accessthe settings for this feature. Thenpress the customization button toscroll through the following settings:

OFF: The digital speedometer willbe disabled.

ON (default): The digitalspeedometer will be enabled.





FACTORY SETTINGS

This feature allows you to set all ofthe customization features back totheir factory default settings.

Press the customization button untilFACTORY SETTINGS appears onthe DIC display. Press the set/resetbutton once to access the settingsfor this feature. Then press thecustomization button to scrollthrough the following settings:

RESTORE ALL (default):The customization features will beset to their factory default settings.

DO NOT RESTORE: Thecustomization features will not beset to their factory default settings.


EXIT FEATURE SETTINGS

This feature allows you to exit thefeature settings menu.

Press the customization button untilPRESS V TO EXIT FEATURESETTINGS appears in the DICdisplay. Press the set/reset buttononce to exit the menu.

If you do not exit, pressing thecustomization button again willreturn you to the beginning of thefeature settings menu.

Exiting the FeatureSettings Menu

The feature settings menu will beexited when any of the followingoccurs:. The vehicle is no longer in

ON/RUN.. The trip/fuel or vehicle

information DIC buttons arepressed.

. The end of the feature settingsmenu is reached and exited.

. A 40-second time period haselapsed with no selection made.

Universal RemoteSystemSee Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑21 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.

Universal Remote SystemProgramming

Vehicles with the Universal RemoteSystem will have these buttonslocated in the headliner.



This system provides a way toreplace up to three remote controltransmitters used to activatedevices such as garage dooropeners, security systems, andhome automation devices.

Do not use this system with anygarage door opener that does nothave the stop and reverse feature.This includes any garage dooropener model manufactured beforeApril 1, 1982.

Read the instructions completelybefore attempting to program thetransmitter. Because of the stepsinvolved, it may be helpful to haveanother person assist withprogramming the transmitter.

Be sure to keep the original remotecontrol transmitter for use in othervehicles, as well as for futureprogramming. Only the originalremote control transmitter is neededfor Fixed Code programming.

The programmed buttons should beerased when the vehicle is sold orthe lease ends. See “ErasingUniversal Home Remote Buttons”in this section.

Park the vehicle outside of thegarage when programming a garagedoor. Be sure that people andobjects are clear of the garage dooror gate that is being programmed.

Programming Universal HomeRemote — Rolling Code

For questions or help programmingthe Universal Home RemoteSystem, call 1-866-572-2728 orgo to www.learcar2u.com.

Most garage door openers soldafter 1996 are Rolling Code units.

Programming a garage door openerinvolves time-sensitive actions, soread the entire procedure beforestarting. Otherwise, the device willtime out and the procedure will haveto be repeated.

To program up to three devices:

1. From inside the vehicle,press the two outside buttonsat the same time for one totwo seconds, and immediatelyrelease them.



2. In the garage, locate thegarage door opener receiver(motor-head unit). Find the“Learn” or “Smart” button.It can usually be found wherethe hanging antenna wire isattached to the motor-head unitand may be a colored button.Press this button. After pressingthis button, complete thefollowing steps in less than30 seconds.

3. Immediately return to thevehicle. Press and hold theUniversal Home Remote buttonthat will be used to control thegarage door until the garagedoor moves. The indicator light,above the selected button,should slowly blink. This buttonmay need to be held for up to20 seconds.

4. Immediately, within one second,release the button when thegarage door moves. Theindicator light will blink rapidlyuntil programming is complete.

5. Press and release the samebutton again. The garage doorshould move, confirming thatprogramming is successful andcomplete.

To program another Rolling Codedevice such as an additional garagedoor opener, a security device,or home automation device, repeatSteps 1 through 5, choosing adifferent function button in Step 3than what was used for the garagedoor opener.

If these instructions do not work, thegarage door opener is probably aFixed Code unit. Follow theprogramming instructions that followfor a Fixed Code garage dooropener.

Programming Universal HomeRemote — Fixed Code

For questions or help programmingthe Universal Home RemoteSystem, call 1-866-572-2728 or goto www.learcar2u.com.

Most garage door openers soldbefore 1996 are Fixed Code units.



Programming a garage door openerinvolves time-sensitive actions, soread the entire procedure beforestarting. Otherwise, the device willtime out and the procedure will haveto be repeated.

To program up to three devices:

1. To verify that the garage dooropener is a Fixed Code unit,remove the battery cover on thehand-held transmitter suppliedby the manufacturer of thegarage door opener motor.

If there is a row of dip switchessimilar to the graphic above,the garage door opener is aFixed Code unit. If you do notsee a row of dip switches,return to the previous section forProgramming Universal HomeRemote — Rolling Code.

Your hand-held transmittercan have between 8 to 12 dipswitches depending on thebrand of transmitter.

The garage door opener receiver(motor head unit) could alsohave a row of dip switches thatcan be used when programmingthe Universal Home Remote.

If the total number of switcheson the motor head andhand-held transmitter aredifferent, or if the dip switchsettings are different, use thedip switch settings on the motorhead unit to program theUniversal Home Remote.The motor head dip switchsettings can also be used whenthe original hand-held transmitteris not available.



Example of Eight Dip Switcheswith Two Positions

Example of Eight Dip Switcheswith Three Positions

The panel of switches might notappear exactly as they do in theexamples above, but theyshould be similar.

The switch positions on thehand-held transmitter could belabeled as follows:. A switch in the up position

could be labeled as Up,+, or On.

. A switch in the downposition could be labeledas Down, −, or Off.

. A switch in the middleposition could be labeledas Middle, 0, or Neutral.

2. Write down the 8 to 12 switchsettings from left to right asfollows:. When a switch is in the

up position, write “Left.”. When a switch is in the

down position, write “Right.”

. If a switch is set betweenthe up and down position,write “Middle.”

The switch settings writtendown in Step 2 nowbecome the button strokesto be entered into theUniversal Home Remote inStep 4. Be sure to enter theswitch settings written downin Step 2, in order from leftto right, into the UniversalHome Remote, whencompleting Step 4.

3. From inside your vehicle,first firmly press all three buttonsat the same time for aboutthree seconds. Release thebuttons to put the UniversalHome Remote intoprogramming mode.



A. Left Button(Up, +, or On)

B. Middle Button(Middle, 0, or Neutral)

C. Right Button(Down, −, or Off)

4. The indicator lights will blinkslowly. Enter each switch settingfrom Step 2 into your vehicle'sUniversal Home Remote.You will have two and one-halfminutes to complete Step 4.

Now press one button on theUniversal Home Remote foreach switch setting as follows:. If you wrote “Left,” press

the left button (A) in thevehicle.

. If you wrote “Right,” pressthe right button (C) in thevehicle.

. If you wrote “Middle,” pressthe middle button (B) in thevehicle.

5. After entering all of the switchpositions, once again firmlypress and release all threebuttons at the same time.The indicator lights will turn on.

6. Press and hold the button thatwill be used to control thegarage door until the garagedoor moves. The indicator lightabove the selected buttonshould slowly blink. This buttonmay need to be held for up to55 seconds.

7. Immediately release the buttonwhen the garage door moves.The indicator light will blinkrapidly until programming iscomplete.

8. Press and release the samebutton again. The garage doorshould move, confirming thatprogramming is successful andcomplete.

To program another Fixed Codedevice such as an additional garagedoor opener, a security device,or home automation device, repeatSteps 1-8, choosing a differentbutton in Step 6 than what was usedfor the garage door opener.



Universal Remote SystemOperationPress and hold the appropriatebutton for at least half of a second.The indicator light will come onwhile the signal is being transmitted.

Reprogramming UniversalHome Remote Buttons

Any of the three buttons can bereprogrammed by repeating theinstructions.

Erasing Universal HomeRemote Buttons

The programmed buttons should beerased when the vehicle is sold orthe lease ends.

To erase either Rolling Code orFixed Code settings on theUniversal Home Remote device:

1. Press and hold the two outsidebuttons at the same time forapproximately 20 seconds, untilthe indicator lights, locateddirectly above the buttons, beginto blink rapidly.

2. Once the indicator lights beginto blink, release both buttons.The codes from all buttons willbe erased.

For help or information on theUniversal Home Remote System,call the customer assistance phonenumber under Customer AssistanceOffices (U.S. and Canada) onpage 13‑4 or Customer AssistanceOffices (Mexico) on page 13‑5.


Lighting 6-1

Lighting

Exterior LightingExterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . 6-1Exterior Lamps OffReminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Automatic HeadlampSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 6-7Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8

Interior LightingInstrument Panel IlluminationControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8

Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9

Lighting FeaturesEntry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9Battery Load Management . . . 6-10Battery Power Protection . . . . 6-10

Exterior Lighting

Exterior Lamp Controls

The exterior lamps control is locatedon the instrument panel to the left ofthe steering wheel.

It controls the following systems:. Headlamps. Taillamps. Parking Lamps. License Plate Lamps. Instrument Panel Lights


6-2 Lighting

The exterior lamps control has fourpositions:

P (Off): Turns off the automaticheadlamps and Daytime RunningLamps (DRL). Turning the headlampcontrol to the off position again willturn the automatic headlamps orDRL back on.

For vehicles first sold in Canada,the off position only works when thevehicle is shifted into the P (Park)position.

AUTO (Automatic): Automaticallyturns on the headlamps at normalbrightness, together with thefollowing:. Parking Lamps. Instrument Panel Lights. Taillamps. License Plate Lamps

; (Parking Lamps): Turns on theparking lamps together with thefollowing:. Instrument Panel Lights. Taillamps. License Plate Lamps

2 (Headlamps): Turns on theheadlamps together with thefollowing:. Parking Lamps. Instrument Panel Lights. Taillamps. License Plate Lamps

When the headlamps are turned onwhile the vehicle is on, theheadlamps will turn off automatically10 minutes after the ignition isturned off. When the headlamps areturned on while the vehicle is off,the headlamps will stay on for10 minutes before automatically

turning off to prevent the batteryfrom being drained. Turn theheadlamp control to off and thenback to the headlamp on position tomake the headlamps stay on for anadditional 10 minutes.

IntelliBeam® IntelligentHigh-Beam Headlamp ControlSystem

For vehicles with this feature, besure to read this entire sectionbefore using it.

IntelliBeam is an enhancement tothe vehicle's headlamp system.Using a digital light sensor on therearview mirror, this system will turnthe vehicle's high-beam headlampson and off according to surroundingtraffic conditions.

The IntelliBeam system turns thehigh-beam headlamps on when it isdark enough, there is no other trafficpresent, and the IntelliBeam systemis enabled.


Lighting 6-3

Turning On and EnablingIntelliBeam

Press and release the IntelliBeambutton on the inside rear viewmirror. The IntelliBeam indicator onthe mirror will turn on to let youknow the system has been turnedon. Once the system has beenturned on, it will remain on eachtime the vehicle is started.Additionally, the IntelliBeam systemmust be enabled.

To enable the IntelliBeam system,turn the exterior lamp control toAUTO, with the turn signal/multifunction lever in its neutralposition. The High-Beam On Lightwill appear on the instrument panelcluster when the high-beams are on.

Driving with IntelliBeam

IntelliBeam will only activate yourhigh-beams when driving over32 km/h (20 mph).

The high-beam headlamps willremain on, under the automaticcontrol of IntelliBeam, until any ofthe following situations occur:. The system detects an

approaching vehicle'sheadlamps.

. The system detects a precedingvehicle's taillamps.

. The outside light is brightenough that high-beamheadlamps are not required.

. The vehicle's speed drops below24 km/h (15 mph).

. The headlamp stalk is movedforward to the high-beamposition.

When either of these conditionsoccur, the IntelliBeam featurewill be disabled and theIntelliBeam light in the mirror willturn off until the high-beam stalkis returned to the neutralposition.

. If IntelliBeam was usinglow-beams prior to this action,the IntelliBeam feature will betemporarily disabled until thestalk is returned to the neutralposition.

. The exterior lamp control isturned to any settingexcept AUTO.

When this occurs, IntelliBeamwill be disabled until the controlis turned back to the AUTOposition.

. The IntelliBeam system is turnedoff at the inside rearview mirror.

IntelliBeam may not turn off thehigh-beams if the system cannotdetect other vehicle's lampsbecause of any of the following:. The others vehicle's lamp(s) are

missing, damaged, obstructedfrom view or otherwiseundetected.

. The other vehicle's lamp(s) arecovered with dirt, snow and/orroad spray.


6-4 Lighting

. The other vehicle's lamp(s)cannot be detected due to denseexhaust, smoke, fog, snow, roadspray, mist or other airborneobstructions.

. Your vehicle's windshield is dirty,cracked or obstructed bysomething that blocks the viewof the IntelliBeam light sensor.

. Your vehicle's windshield iscovered with ice, dirt, haze orother obstructions.

. Your vehicle is loaded such thatthe front end of the vehiclepoints upward, causing theIntelliBeam sensor to aim highand not detect headlamps andtaillamps.

. You are driving on winding orhilly roads.

You may need to manually disableor cancel the high-beam headlampsby turning the low-beam headlampson, if any of the above conditionsexist.

Disabling and ResettingIntelliBeam at the Rearview Mirror

IntelliBeam can be disabled byusing the controls on the insiderearview mirror.

AUTO3 (On/Off): To disable thesystem, press this button on theinside rearview mirror. TheIntelliBeam indicator will turn off andwill not come back on until theIntelliBeam button is pressed again.

(Stalk Disable): When IntelliBeamhas turned on the high-beams, pullor push the high-beam stalk. Thiswill disable IntelliBeam. TheIntelliBeam indicator on the mirrorwill turn off. To re-enableIntelliBeam, press the IntelliBeambutton on the mirror.

A different sensitivity setting isavailable for dealer diagnostics.This is done by pushing and holdingthis button for 20 seconds until theIntelliBeam indicator light flashesthree times. If you accidentallyactivate this, the vehicle's setting

will automatically be reset each timethe ignition is turned off and then onagain.

Cleaning the IntelliBeam LightSensor

The light sensor is located on theinside of the vehicle in front of theinside rearview mirror.

Clean the light sensor window,periodically, using glass cleaner ona soft cloth. Gently wipe the sensorwindow. Do not spray glass cleanerdirectly on the surface of the sensorwindow.


Lighting 6-5

Exterior Lamps OffReminderIf a door is open, a reminder chimesounds when the headlamps orparking lamps are manually turnedon and the key is out of the ignition.To turn off the chime, turn theheadlamp switch to off or AUTO andthen back on, or close and re-openthe door. In the AUTO mode, theheadlamps turn off once the ignitionis in LOCK/OFF or remains on untilthe headlamp delay ends (if enabledin the DIC). See “Exit Lighting”under Vehicle Personalization onpage 5‑38.

Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer53 (Headlamp High/Low BeamChanger): To change theheadlamps from low to high beam,push the lever toward the instrumentpanel. To return to low-beamheadlamps, pull the multifunctionlever toward you. Then release it.

When the high beams are on, thisindicator light on the instrumentpanel cluster will also be on.

Flash-to-PassUse your high-beam headlamps tosignal to a driver in front that youwant to pass. It works even if theheadlamps are in the automaticposition.

To use it, pull the turn signal levertoward you, then release it.

If the headlamps are in theautomatic position or on low beam,the high-beam headlamps turn on.They stay on as long as the lever isheld. The high-beam indicator onthe instrument panel cluster comeson. Release the lever to return tonormal operation.

Daytime RunningLamps (DRL)Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) canmake it easier for others to see thefront of your vehicle during the day.Fully functional daytime runninglamps are required on all vehiclesfirst sold in Canada.

The DRL system comes on whenthe following conditions are met:. The ignition is on.. The exterior lamps control is

in AUTO.. The transmission is not in Park.. The light sensor determines it is

daytime.

When the DRL system is on, onlythe DRL lamps are on. Thetaillamps, sidemarker, instrumentpanel lights, and other lamps will notbe on.

When it begins to get dark, theautomatic headlamp systemswitches from DRL to theheadlamps.


6-6 Lighting

To turn off the DRL lamps, turn theexterior lamps control to the OFFposition and then release. Forvehicles first sold in Canada, thetransmission must be in the P (Park)position before the DRL lamps canbe turned off.

Automatic HeadlampSystemWhen it is dark enough outside, theautomatic headlamp system turnson the headlamps at the normalbrightness, along with the taillamps,sidemarker, parking lamps, and theinstrument panel lights. The radiolights will also be dim.

To turn off the automatic headlampsystem, turn the exterior lampsswitch to the off position and thenrelease it.

The vehicle has a light sensorlocated on the top of the instrumentpanel which regulates when theautomatic headlamps turn on. Donot cover the sensor, otherwise theheadlamps will come on wheneverthe ignition is on.

The system may also turn on theheadlamps when driving through aparking garage, heavy overcastweather, or a tunnel. This is normal.

There is a delay in the transitionbetween the daytime and nighttimeoperation of the automaticheadlamp system so that drivingunder bridges or bright overheadstreet lights does not affect thesystem. The automatic headlampsystem is only affected when the

light sensor detects a change inlighting lasting longer than thedelay.

If the vehicle is started in a darkgarage, the automatic headlampsystem will come on immediately.Once the vehicle leaves the garage,it takes approximately one minutefor the automatic headlamp systemto change if it is bright enoughoutside. During that delay, theinstrument panel cluster may not beas bright as usual. Make sure theinstrument panel brightness controlis in the full bright position. SeeInstrument Panel IlluminationControl on page 6‑8.

To idle the vehicle with theautomatic headlamp system off,turn the control to the off position.

The headlamps will also stay onafter you exit the vehicle. Thisfeature can be programmed usingthe Driver Information Center (DIC).See Vehicle Personalization onpage 5‑38.


Lighting 6-7

The regular headlamp system canbe turned on when needed.

Hazard Warning Flashers

| (Hazard Warning Flashers):Press this button located on top ofthe steering column, to make thefront and rear turn signal lampsflash on and off. This warns othersthat you are having trouble. Pressagain to turn the flashers off.

When the hazard warning flashersare on, the vehicle's turn signals willnot work.

Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals

An arrow on the instrument panelcluster flashes in the direction of theturn or lane change.

Move the turn signal lever all theway up or down to signal a turn.

Raise or lower the lever until thearrow starts to flash to signal a lanechange. The turn signalsautomatically flash three times.It will flash six times if the tow-haulmode is active. Holding the turnsignal lever for more thanone second causes the turn signalsto flash until the lever is released.

The lever returns to its startingposition when it is released.

If after signaling a turn or a lanechange the arrows flash rapidly ordo not come on, a signal bulb maybe burned out.

Have the bulbs replaced. If the bulbis not burned out, check the fuse.See Instrument Panel Fuse Blockon page 10‑43 and EngineCompartment Fuse Block onpage 10‑39.

Turn Signal On Chime

If the turn signal is left on for morethan 1.2 km (0.75 mi), a chimesounds at each flash of the turnsignal and the message TURNSIGNAL ON also appears in theDIC. See Lamp Messages onpage 5‑32. To turn the chime andmessage off, move the turn signallever to the off position.


6-8 Lighting

Fog LampsFor vehicles with fog lamps, theycan be used for better vision infoggy or misty conditions. Theparking lamps and/or low-beamheadlamps must be on for the foglamps to work.

The fog lamp button is located onthe left side of the instrument panel.

# (Fog Lamps): Press to turn thefog lamps on or off. An indicatorlight comes on in the instrumentpanel cluster to show that the foglamps are on.

Remember, fog lamps alone willnot give off as much light as theheadlamps. Never use the foglamps in the dark without turning onthe headlamps.

The fog lamps will go off wheneverthe high-beam headlamps come on.When the high beams go off, the foglamps will come on again.

The fog lamps will be cancelledafter the ignition is turned off. To usethe fog lamps after restarting thevehicle, press the fog lamp buttonagain.

Some localities have laws thatrequire the headlamps to be onalong with the fog lamps.

Interior Lighting

Instrument PanelIllumination Control

D (Instrument PanelBrightness): This feature controlsthe brightness of the instrumentpanel lights and is located next tothe exterior lamps control.

Push the knob to extend out andthen it can be turned.

Turn the knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to brighten or dimthe instrument panel lights. Turningthe knob to the farthest clockwiseposition turns on the dome lamps.


Lighting 6-9

Dome LampsThe dome lamps are located in theoverhead console.

They come on when any door isopened and turn off after all thedoors are closed.

Turn the instrument panelbrightness knob located below thedome lamp override button,clockwise to the farthest position tomanually turn on the dome lamps.The dome lamps remain on until theknob is turned counterclockwise.

Dome Lamp Override

The dome lamp override button islocated next to the exterior lampscontrol.

k (Dome Off): Press the buttonin and the dome lamps remain offwhen a door is opened. Press thebutton again to return it to theextended position so that the domelamps come on when a door isopened.

Reading LampsFor vehicles with front readinglamps in the overhead console,press the button located next to thelamp to turn it on or off.

The vehicle may also have readinglamps in other locations. The lampscannot be adjusted.

Lighting Features

Entry LightingThe vehicle has an illuminated entryfeature.

When the doors are opened, thedome lamps will come on if thedome override button is in theextended position. If the domeoverride button is pressed in, thelamps will not come on.

Exit LightingThe interior lamps come on whenthe key is removed from the ignition.They turn off automatically in20 seconds. The lights do not comeon if the dome override button ispressed in.


6-10 Lighting

Battery LoadManagementThe vehicle has Electric PowerManagement (EPM) that estimatesthe battery's temperature and stateof charge. It then adjusts the voltagefor best performance and extendedlife of the battery.

When the battery's state of chargeis low, the voltage is raised slightlyto quickly bring the charge back up.When the state of charge is high,the voltage is lowered slightly toprevent overcharging. If the vehiclehas a voltmeter gauge or a voltagedisplay on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC), you may see thevoltage move up or down. This isnormal. If there is a problem, analert will be displayed.

The battery can be discharged atidle if the electrical loads are veryhigh. This is true for all vehicles.This is because the generator(alternator) may not be spinning fastenough at idle to produce all thepower that is needed for very highelectrical loads.

A high electrical load occurs whenseveral of the following are on, suchas: headlamps, high beams, foglamps, rear window defogger,climate control fan at high speed,heated seats, engine cooling fans,trailer loads, and loads plugged intoaccessory power outlets.

EPM works to prevent excessivedischarge of the battery. It does thisby balancing the generator's outputand the vehicle's electrical needs.It can increase engine idle speed togenerate more power, wheneverneeded. It can temporarily reducethe power demands of someaccessories.

Normally, these actions occur insteps or levels, without beingnoticeable. In rare cases at thehighest levels of corrective action,this action may be noticeable to thedriver. If so, a Driver InformationCenter (DIC) message might bedisplayed, such as BATTERY LOWSTART VEHICLE. If this messagedisplays, it is recommended that thedriver reduce the electrical loads asmuch as possible and restart thevehicle. See Battery Voltage andCharging Messages on page 5‑29.

Battery Power ProtectionThis feature shuts off the domelamps if they are left on for morethan 10 minutes when the ignition isin LOCK/OFF. This helps to preventthe battery from running down.


Infotainment System 7-1

InfotainmentSystem

IntroductionInfotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . 7-3Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

RadioAM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17Rear Side WindowAntenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17

Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . 7-18

Audio PlayersCD/DVD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30

Rear Seat InfotainmentRear Seat Entertainment(RSE) System(Overhead) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31

Rear Seat Entertainment(RSE) System(Headrest DVD) . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41

Rear Seat Audio (RSA)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-60

NavigationUsing the NavigationSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-62

Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-63Navigation Symbols . . . . . . . . . 7-65Destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-70Configure Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-84Global PositioningSystem (GPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-96

Vehicle Positioning . . . . . . . . . . 7-97Problems with RouteGuidance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-98

If the System NeedsService . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-98

Map Data Updates . . . . . . . . . . . 7-98Database CoverageExplanations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-99

Voice RecognitionVoice Recognition . . . . . . . . . . 7-100

PhoneBluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-103


7-2 Infotainment System

Introduction

InfotainmentRead this manual thoroughly tobecome familiar with how thenavigation system operates.

The navigation system includesnavigation and audio functions.

Keeping your eyes on the road andyour mind on the drive is importantfor safe driving. The navigationsystem has built-in featuresintended to help with this bydisabling some features whendriving. A grayed-out function is notavailable when the vehicle ismoving.

All functions are available when thevehicle is parked. Do the followingbefore driving:. Become familiar with the

navigation system operation,buttons on the faceplate, andtouch-sensitive screen buttons.

. Set up the audio by presettingfavorite stations, setting thetone, and adjusting thespeakers.

. Set up the navigation features,such as entering an address or apreset destination.

. Set up phone numbers inadvance so they can be calledeasily by pressing a singlebutton or a single voicecommand for navigation systemsequipped with phone capability.

{ WARNING

Taking your eyes off the road toolong or too often while using thenavigation system could cause acrash and you or others could beinjured or killed. Focus yourattention on driving and limitglances at the moving map on thenavigation screen. Use voiceguidance whenever possible.

Use the navigation system to:. Plan a route.. Select a destination using

various methods and choices.. Follow turn-by-turn route and

map guidance with voiceprompts, only if permitted bytraffic laws, controls, andconditions.

. Receive RDS broadcastannouncements.



Always be alert and obey traffic androadway laws and instructions,regardless of the guidance from thenavigation system. Because thenavigation system uses street mapinformation that does not include alltraffic restrictions or the latest roadchanges, it may suggest using aroad that is now closed forconstruction or a turn that isprohibited by signs at theintersection. Always evaluatewhether following the system'sdirections is safe and legal for thecurrent conditions.

When the navigation system isturned on, a screen may appearwith information that must be readand acknowledged before accessingsome navigation features.

After acknowledging the start upinformation, the NAV (Navigation)and DEST (Destination) functionsare accessible. Information can nowbe entered or deleted, and otherfunctions accessed. Seeinstructions later in this section.

Every 50 times the vehicle is startedand the navigation system is turnedon, the Caution screen appears.After reading the caution, select OKto load the map DVD information.If OK is not selected, all controlbuttons except for NAV (Navigation)and DEST (Destination) can beaccessed.

When getting started, set yourpreferences or delete information inthe navigation system using variousoptions.

Theft-Deterrent FeatureTheftLock® is designed todiscourage theft of the vehicle'sradio by learning a portion of theVehicle Identification Number (VIN).The radio does not operate if it isstolen or moved to a differentvehicle.



Overview A. O /n (Power/Volume)

B. Z (Eject)

C. Mark Touch Screen Button

D. 0 (Zoom In) Touch ScreenButton

E. Map Scale

F. North Up/Heading Up Symbol

G. No GPS Symbol

H. Full map Touch Screen Button

I. Source (AM, FM, XM, CD, etc.)

J. Clock Touch Screen Button

K. POI (Point of Interest) TouchScreen Button

L. 1 (Zoom Out) Touch ScreenButton

M. Auxiliary Jack

N. y / © or ¨ /z (Seek/Scan)Key (Previous/Next)

O. w (Tuning) Knob

P. y /z (Scan Up/Down)



Q. AUDIO

R. FAV (Favorite)

S. 5 (Phone)

T. e (Sound)

U. CONFIG (Configure)

V. DEST (Destination)

W. RPT (Repeat)

X. NAV (Navigation)

Language — English/Metric

To change the language of thenavigation screens or to change thenavigation screens from English ormetric, see Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5‑23 for moreinformation.

Deleting Personal Information

This navigation system can recordand store personal information suchas names and addresses. Deletethis information when selling yourvehicle or returning a leasedvehicle. See “Edit Address

Book — Edit/View” under ConfigureMenu on page 7‑84 for deletinginformation from the address book.

Limit Features While Driving

The navigation system may havethis feature.

Touch the Limit Features WhileDriving screen button to turn theability to limit functions on and offwhile driving. When this screenbutton is highlighted, the followingfunctions are limited while driving:. Music Navigator Scrolling. Radio Category Scrolling. Navigation Menu Scrolling and

some functions

See “Category” under AM-FM Radioon page 7‑9 for more information.See “From Map” under Destinationon page 7‑70 for more information.

Some functions will remain limitedregardless of the setting.

Storing Radio Station Presets

To set preset radio stations, do thefollowing:

1. Press O to turn the system on.

2. Press AUDIO and select thedesired band (AM, FM, or XM(if equipped)).

3. Use thew (tuning) knob,y / © , or ¨ /z (Seek) arrowsto tune to the desired station.

4. Press and hold one of the fivepreset screen buttons, at thebottom of the screen, until abeep is heard.

5. Repeat the steps for eachpreset.

See “Storing Radio Station Presets”under AM-FM Radio on page 7‑9 formore information.



Setting the Clock

The navigation system time and theanalog clock operate independently.Changing the time through thenavigation system does not changethe time on the analog clock. SeeClock on page 5‑7 to change theanalog clock time.

To set the time for the navigationsystem:

1. Press CONFIG to enter theconfigure menu options, thenpress CONFIG again, repeatedlyuntil the time is selected or touchthe time screen button.

2. Press the Hours and Minutes −and + to decrease or to increasethe time.

See “Setting the Clock” underConfigure Menu on page 7‑84 formore information.

Entering an Address and Pointof Interest, and Storing PresetDestinations

Entering an Address

Enter a destination by inputting thecity name first:


2. A caution may appear. Press OKto proceed.

3. Press DEST.

4. Press2 (Address Entry).

5. Select the state/province screenbutton, if needed, to change thecurrent state or province. A listof all of the available states andprovinces appear. Select thestate or province.

6. Once a state or province hasbeen selected the City namecategory is automaticallyselected for entry.

If five or fewer names areavailable, a list displays. If morethan five are available, the List

screen button displays anumber. This number representsthe number of available cities.Press this button to view the listand select a city.

7. Once a city has been selectedthe Street name category isautomatically selected for entry.

If five or fewer streets areavailable for the selected city,the system displays the list ofstreets. If more than five streetsare available the systemdisplays the alpha keyboard.Start entering the street name.If five or fewer names areavailable, a list displays. If morethan five are available, the Listscreen button displays anumber. This button representsthe number of available streets.Select this button to view the listand select a street.

8. Once a street has beenselected, select the House #screen button to enter the house



number. The system displays thehouse number range that isavailable for the street.

9. Press GO. A map screen, withthe destination marked appears.

10. Select the route preference forFastest, Shortest, or Other. Thesystem calculates andhighlights the route.

11. Press Start Guidance. You arenow ready to start your route.

See “Address Entry” underDestination on page 7‑70 for moreinformation.

Entering a Point of Interest (POI)

To set a destination by entering aPoint of Interest (POI), do thefollowing:



3. Press DEST.

4. Pressi Point of Interest.


6. Enter the specific title of thePOI in the POI name space(e.g. Washington Monument).

If five or fewer names areavailable, a list displays. If morethan five are available, the Listscreen button displays anumber. This button representsthe number of available POIs.Press this button to view the list.

7. Press GO next to the POI.A map screen, with thedestination marked appears.

8. Select the route preference forFastest, Shortest, or Other. Thesystem calculates and highlightsthe route.

9. Press Start Guidance. The routeis now ready to be started.

See “Point of Interest (POI)” underDestination on page 7‑70 for moreinformation.

Storing Preset Destinations



3. Press DEST.

Enter a destination. SeeDestination on page 7‑70 formore information on how toenter a destination.

4. Press DEST, the Route screendisplays. Press Final Destinationor Stopover. The informationscreen displays for that location.Press Add to Address Book. Theaddress book screen appears.

5. Press the Name screen button.An alpha-keyboard displays.Enter the name. Press the Backscreen button.



6. Press and hold one of thescreen buttons at the bottomof the screen until the nameappears in the screen button onthe display.

The name appears in that presetdestination screen button and isnow available to select from theDestination Entry screen. See“Using Your Stored PresetDestinations” in this section toselect it as a destination.

See Destination on page 7‑70for more information on how toadd or change presetdestinations.

Using Your Stored PresetDestinations

These destinations are available forselection while driving.



3. Press DEST.

4. Select one of the availablepreset destination screenbuttons. A map screen, with thedestination marked appears.



See “Preset Destination” underDestination on page 7‑70 for moreinformation.

Canceling Guidance

Guidance is canceled once the finaldestination is reached. To cancelguidance prior to arrival at the finaldestination:

1. Press DEST.

2. Press Cancel Guidance.

3. Press OK to confirm.

Guidance Volume

Adjust the volume of voice guidanceprompts:

1. Press CONFIG to enter themenu options, then pressCONFIG again, repeatedly untilNav is selected or press the Navscreen button.

2. Press Voice Prompt.

3. Press + or – screen buttons toincrease or to decrease thevolume of the voice prompts.The system responds with theadjusted voice level.

See “Voice Prompt” under ConfigureMenu on page 7‑84 for moreinformation.

Cleaning the Display Screen

Use a soft clean cotton clothdampened with clean water.



Radio

AM-FM RadioNotice: Before adding any soundequipment to the vehicle, suchas an audio system, CD player,CB radio, mobile telephone,or two-way radio, make sure thatit can be added by checking withyour dealer. Also, check federalrules covering mobile radio andtelephone units. If soundequipment can be added, it isvery important to do it properly.Added sound equipment caninterfere with the operation of thevehicle's engine, radio, or othersystems, and even damage them.The vehicle's systems caninterfere with the operation ofsound equipment that has beenadded.

Notice: The chime signals relatedto safety belts, parking brake, andother functions of the vehicleoperate through the navigationsystem. If that equipment isreplaced or additional equipmentis added to the vehicle, thechimes may not work. Make surethat replacement or additionalequipment is compatible with thevehicle before installing it. See“Accessories and Modifications”in the vehicle's owner manual.

Playing the Radio

O /n (Power/Volume):

1. Press to turn the audio systemon and off.

2. Turn to increase or to decreasethe volume.

3. Press and hold for more thantwo seconds to turn off thenavigation system, the RearSeat Entertainment (RSE) videoscreen, and Rear Seat Audio(RSA). If the vehicle has notbeen turned off, press this knobto turn RSE and RSA back onand to continue playback of thelast active source.

w (Tuning Knob): Turn to go tothe next or previous frequency ordisc track or chapter. See CD/DVDPlayer on page 7‑18 or MP3 onpage 7‑27 for more information.

AUDIO: Press to display the audioscreen. Press to switch betweenAM, FM, or XM, if equipped, Disc,or AUX (Auxiliary), or press thescreen button. See CD/DVD Playeron page 7‑18, MP3 on page 7‑27,and Auxiliary Devices on page 7‑30for more information.



Finding a Station

AM Source Shown, Other SourcesSimilar

If viewing a map screen, press thesource screen (AM, FM, XM (ifequipped), CD, etc.) button. Thedisplay splits between the audioscreen and the map screen. Allstation-changing functions can beperformed from this screen.

FM Source Shown, Other SourcesSimilar

If you do not want to view a splitscreen or you are not on a mapscreen, press AUDIO.

AM/FM/XM: Press the source(AM, FM, or XM, if equipped) screenbutton or press AUDIO repeatedlyuntil the desired source ishighlighted.

FM Source Shown, Other SourcesSimilar

Category: Press the screen button,located in the middle of the screen,to get a list of all the selected bandstations in the area. Use the upand down arrows to scroll thefrequencies. Press the desiredfrequency.

XM (if equipped) lists also contain acategory to select and the stationsor channels that have broadcaststhat relate to that category. For XM(if equipped), press the left and rightarrow screen buttons to change



categories. The station informationappears on the display. See “RadioMenu” in this section to add andremove XM categories from thecategory list. Removed categoriesdo not appear on the category listscreen or when the right and leftarrow category screen buttonsare used.

FM lists may also contain acategory to select if stations in thebroadcast area support Radio DataSystems (RDS).

2 Refresh List: Press to refreshthe list of AM or FM stations.

When viewing a map screen, thename of the station or channeldisplays.

y / © or ¨ /z (Seek/Scan):

1. To seek stations, press the up ordown arrows to go to the next orprevious station.

2. To scan stations, press and holdeither arrow for more thantwo seconds. The radio goes to

a station, plays for afew seconds, then goesto the next station.

3. To stop scanning, press eitherarrow again.

Press the AUDIO button on thefaceplate to display the audioscreen. Press again to switchbetween the audio sources. SelectXM (if equipped).

XM Tune Select (If Equipped)

While the XM audio screen isdisplaying and a song is beinglistened to, press Tune Select tosave that particular song.

The XM Tune Select menu displayswith options to store by the songtitle or the artist's name. Up to10 favorites by song title or artistcan be saved.

Add Song: Press to save the songthat is currently playing by the songtitle.



Add Artist: Press to save the songthat is currently playing by theartist's name.

Clear All: Press and Hold theClear All screen button to clear thestored favorite songs.

Del: Press the Del screen button todel the song that is associated tothat button.

Popup Notifications: Once a songor songs are stored, a notificationpopup alerts the listener if a storedsong is playing. Press to turnnotification on or off.

While a notification popup alertscreen displays, press the screenbutton showing the station or pressIgnore.

Storing Radio Station Presets

This feature stores a mix of up to30 AM, FM, and XM (if equipped)preset stations. To store presets:


2. If viewing a map screen, pressAUDIO, FAV or press the sourcescreen button.

3. Select the band.

4. y / ©, ¨ /z, or tune to thedesired station, to select thestation.

5. Press and hold one of the presetscreen buttons for more thantwo seconds or until a beep isheard.

6. Repeat the steps for eachpreset.

Sound Menu

e (Sound): Press this key or pressCONFIG to access the Sound menuto adjust the treble, midrange, bass,fade, balance, and Digital SignalProcessing (DSP). The systemautomatically stores audioadjustment settings as changes aremade for each audio sourceincluding AM, FM, XM (if equipped),CD, and AUX.



Setting the Tone

TREBLE: Press + or − to increaseor decrease the treble. If a station isweak or has static, decrease thetreble.

MID (Midrange): Press + or − toincrease or decrease the midrange.

BASS: Press + or − to increase ordecrease the bass.

Adjusting the Speakers

L/R (Left/Right) (Balance): Toadjust the balance between the leftand the right speakers, press andhold the L or R screen buttons.

Front/Rear (Fade): To adjust thefade between the front and the rearspeakers, press and hold the Frontor Rear screen buttons.

Digital Signal Processing (DSP)

The system has Digital SignalProcessing (DSP). DSP provides achoice of four different listeningexperiences. DSP can be usedwhile listening to the audio system.Not all DSP modes are available forall source types. The type of DSPselected is displayed on thestatus line.

Select from the following DSPsettings:

Normal: Adjusts the audio fornormal mode. This provides thebest sound quality for all seatingpositions.

Surround (Centerpoint®): EnablesBose® Centerpoint signalprocessing that produces asurround sound listening experiencefrom a CD or XM (if equipped)stereo digital audio source.

Centerpoint delivers fiveindependent audio channels fromconventional two channel stereorecordings (not available for AMor FM).

Driver: Adjusts the audio to givethe driver the best possible soundquality.

Rear: Adjusts the audio to give therear seat occupants the bestpossible sound quality.

2 CH. (Channel): Enhancessurround sound.

5.1 CH. (Channel): Gives a fullaffect of surround sound listening.This button is only available whenplaying DVD video discs thatsupport 5.1 audio and if the RSAis off.



Radio Menu

Press CONFIG to enter theconfigure menu screen, then pressCONFIG repeatedly until Radio isselected or press the Radio screenbutton to make changes for radioinformation displayed or to limitfeatures while driving, number ofpreset pages, XM (if equipped)categories, and Bose AudioPilot®.

Limit Features While Driving

Press the Limit Features WhileDriving screen button to turn on andoff the ability to limit functions whiledriving. When this screen button ishighlighted, the following functionsare limited while driving:. Music Navigator Scrolling. Radio Category Scrolling. Navigation Menu Scrolling and

some functions

Number of Preset Pages

Press the Number of Preset Pagesscreen button to change the numberof preset pages, 1 through 6. Eachpreset page can contain five presetstations. Press the desirednumbered screen button.

Bose AudioPilot

AudioPilot: The Bose AudioPilotnoise compensation technology.

To use AudioPilot®:

1. Press CONFIG to enter themenu screen, then pressCONFIG repeatedly until Radiois selected or press the Radioscreen button

2. Press Automatic Volume Controlto access the AudioPilot menu.

3. Press ON.

To turn it off, press OFF. When on,AudioPilot continuously adjusts theaudio system equalization, tocompensate for background noise,so that the music sound isconsistent at the set volume level.

This feature is most effective atlower volume settings wherebackground noise can affect howwell the music being played is heardthrough the vehicle's audio system.



At higher volume settings, wherethe music is much louder than thebackground noise, there may belittle or no adjustments byAudioPilot. For more information onAudioPilot, visit www.bose.com/audiopilot.

Remove/Add XM Categories(US and Canada)

Press the Remove/Add XMCategories screen button to removeor add XM categories whenselecting XM categories from thecategory list screen. The list of XMcategories appear on the screen.Use the arrow screen buttons toscroll through the list. Thecategories to remove are highlightedand the categories to add are darkin color. Press the category to beadded or removed. Press theRestore All Categories screenbutton to add all categories thathave been removed.

Radio Data System (RDS)

The audio system has a Radio DataSystem (RDS). RDS features areavailable for use only on FMstations that broadcast RDSinformation. With RDS, the radiocan do the following:. Receive announcements

concerning local and nationalemergencies

. Display messages from radiostations

This system relies on receivingspecific information from thesestations and only works when theinformation is available. In rarecases, a radio station maybroadcast incorrect information thatcauses the radio features to workimproperly. If this happens, contactthe radio station.

The RDS system is always on.When information is broadcast fromthe FM station that is playing, thestation name or call letters displayson the audio screen.

Satellite Radio

XM™ Satellite Radio Service

XM™ is a satellite radio service thatis based in the 48 contiguous UnitedStates and 10 Canadian provinces.XM Satellite Radio has a widevariety of programming andcommercial-free music,coast-to-coast, and in digital-qualitysound. A service fee is required toreceive the XM service. If theservice needs to be reactivated, theradio will display “No SubscriptionPlease Renew on channel XM1.”For more information, contact XM atwww.xmradio.com or call1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. andwww.xmradio.ca or call1-877-438-9677 in Canada.

When XM is active, the channelname and number, song title, andartist displays on the screen.



XM™ Radio Messages

XL (Explicit LanguageChannels): XL on the radio display,after the channel name, indicatescontent with explicit language.These channels, or any others, canbe blocked at a customer's requestby calling 1‐800‐929-2100.

XM Updating: The encryption codein the receiver is being updated andno action is required.

No XM signal: The vehicle is in alocation that is blocking the XMsignal. When the vehicle is movedinto an open area, the signal shouldreturn.

Loading XM: The audio system isprocessing audio and text datareceived. No action is needed.

Channel Off Air: This channel isnot currently in service.

Channel Unauth: This channel isblocked or cannot be received withyour XM Subscription package.

Channel Unavail: This previouslyassigned channel is no longerassigned.

No Artist Info: No artistinformation is available. The systemis working properly.

No Title Info: No song titleinformation is available. The systemis working properly.

No CAT Info: No categoryinformation is available. The systemis working properly.

CAT Not Found: There are nochannels available for the selectedcategory. The system is workingproperly.

No Information: No text orinformational messages areavailable. The system is workingproperly.

XM Theftlocked: The XM receivermay have previously been inanother vehicle. For securitypurposes, XM receivers cannot beswapped between vehicles. If this

message is received after havingyour vehicle serviced, check withyour dealer.

XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0,this message will alternate with theXM Radio eight digit radio ID label.This label is needed to activate theservice.

Unknown: If this message isreceived when tuned to channel 0,there may be a receiver fault.Consult with your dealer.

Check XM Receiver: If thismessage does not clear within ashort period of time, the receivermay have a fault. Consult with yourdealer.

No Subscription PleaseRenew: The XM subscriptionneeds to be reactivated. ContactXM at www.xmradio.com orcall 1-800-929-2100.



Radio ReceptionFrequency interference and staticcan occur during normal radioreception if items such as cell phonechargers, vehicle convenienceaccessories, and external electronicdevices are plugged into theaccessory power outlet. If there isinterference or static, unplug theitem from the accessory poweroutlet.

AM

The range for most AM stations isgreater than for FM, especially atnight. The longer range can causestation frequencies to interfere witheach other. For better radioreception, most AM radio stationsboost the power levels during theday, and then reduce these levelsduring the night. Static can alsooccur when things like storms andpower lines interfere with radioreception. When this happens, tryreducing the treble on the radio.

FM Stereo

FM signals only reach about16 to 65 km (10 to 40 mi). Althoughthe radio has a built-in electroniccircuit that automatically works toreduce interference, some staticcan occur, especially around tallbuildings or hills, causing the soundto fade in and out.

XM™ Satellite Radio Service

XM Satellite Radio Service givesdigital radio reception from coast tocoast in the 48 contiguous UnitedStates, and in Canada. Just as withFM, tall buildings or hills caninterfere with satellite radio signals,causing the sound to fade in andout. In addition, traveling or standingunder heavy foliage, bridges,garages, or tunnels may cause lossof the XM signal for a period of time.

Cellular Phone Usage

Cellular phone usage may causeinterference with the vehicle's radio.This interference may occur whenmaking or receiving phone calls,charging the phone's battery,or simply having the phone on. Thisinterference causes an increasedlevel of static while listening to theradio. If static is received whilelistening to the radio, unplug thecellular phone and turn it off.

Rear Side WindowAntennaThe AM-FM antenna is located inthe passenger rear side windows.Make sure the inside surfaces of therear side windows are not scratchedand that the lines on the glass arenot damaged. If the inside surfacesare damaged, they could interferewith radio reception.



If a cellular telephone antennaneeds to be attached to the glass,make sure that the grid lines for theAM-FM antenna are not damaged.There is enough space between thegrid lines to attach a cellulartelephone antenna withoutinterfering with radio reception.

Notice: Using a razor blade orsharp object to clear the inside ofthe rear side windows may affectradio reception or damage therear side window antenna.Repairs would not be covered bythe warranty. Do not clear theinside of the rear side windowswith sharp objects.

Notice: Do not apply aftermarketglass tinting with metallic film.The metallic film in some tintingmaterials will interfere with ordistort the incoming radioreception. Any damage caused tothe antenna due to metallic tintingmaterials will not be covered bythe warranty.

Satellite Radio AntennaThe XM Satellite Radio antenna islocated on the roof of the vehicle.Keep the antenna clear ofobstructions for clear radioreception.

If the vehicle has a sunroof, theperformance of the XM system(if equipped) may be affected ifthe sunroof is open.

Audio Players

CD/DVD PlayerThe player can be used for CD,MP3, and as a DVD video player.Read this section for moreinformation about DVD video.

When playing an audio CD the rearseat operator can power on theRSE video screen and use theremote control to navigate throughthe tracks on the CD.

CD Player

While playing a CD, the navigationsystem is available.

When you insert a CD, the CD tabdisplays. If a DSP setting isselected for the CD, it activateseach time you play a CD.

If the ignition or radio is turned offwith a CD in the player, it stays inthe player. When the ignition orradio is turned on, the CD startsplaying where it stopped, if it wasthe last selected audio source.



As each new track starts to play, thetrack number displays.

If an error appears on the display,see “CD/DVD Messages” in thissection.

If viewing a map screen, press theCD screen button. The display splitsbetween the audio screen and themap screen. If you do not want toview a split screen or you are not ona map screen, press AUDIO thenpress AUDIO again, repeatedly untilCD is selected or press the CDscreen button.

Z (Eject): To eject a disc:

1. PressZ.

2. The system displays“Ejecting Disc.”

Playing an Audio CD

j / r (Pause/Play): Press to pausethe CD. This button will then changeto the play button. Press the playbutton to play the CD.

Random:

1. Press to hear the tracks inrandom, rather than sequential,order.

2. Press Random again to turn offrandom play.

r (Rewind):

1. Press and hold this screenbutton to rewind quickly througha track selection. You will hearsound at a reduced volume.

2. Release this screen button tostop rewinding. The display willshow the elapsed time of thetrack.

[ (Forward):

1. Press and hold this screenbutton to fast forward quicklythrough a track selection. Youwill hear sound at a reducedvolume.

2. Release this screen button tostop fast forwarding. The displaywill show the elapsed time of thetrack.




1. To seek tracks, press the uparrow to go to the next track.

2. Press the down arrow to go tothe start of the current track,if more than eight seconds haveplayed.

3. If either arrow is pressed morethan once, the player continuesmoving backward or forwardthrough the CD. The soundmutes while seeking.

w (Tuning Knob):

1. Turn counterclockwise one notchto go to the start of the currenttrack, turn it again to go to theprevious track.

2. Turn clockwise to go to the nexttrack.

Playing a DVD

DVD video does not display on thenavigation screen unless the vehicleis in P (Park). It will operate on therear seat entertainment screenswhile the vehicle is moving. The

Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)video screen starts play of the DVDwhen a DVD video has beeninserted into the CD/DVD slot. TheDVD player can be controlled by thebuttons on the navigation system,the Rear Seat Audio (RSA) system,and the remote control. The DVDplayer can also be used for the rearseat passengers with the radio off.The rear seat passengers canpower on the video screen and usethe remote control to navigate thedisc. See the Rear SeatInfotainment user guide for moreinformation.

The DVD player is only compatiblewith DVDs of the appropriate regioncode that is printed on the jacket ofmost DVDs.

The CD/DVD slot is compatible withmost audio CDs, CD-R, CD-RW,DVD-Video, DVD-R/RW,DVD+R/RW media along withMP3 and WMA formats.


Once a DVD starts to play, themenu options and cursor screenbuttons will automatically appear. Todisplay the menu Options screenbutton while a DVD is playing, touchanywhere on the screen.

There are three ways to playa DVD:. Once a DVD is inserted, the

system will automatically startplay of the DVD.

. If you are on a map screen,press the DVD screen button.

. Press AUDIO, then press theDVD screen button.

When a DVD is loaded, the rearseat passengers can power on theRSE video screen and use theremote control to navigate throughthe DVD.



O /3 (Power/Volume):

1. Press to turn the system onand off.

2. Turn the knob to increase ordecrease the volume of theaudio system.

3. Press and hold for more thantwo seconds to turn off thenavigation system, RSE videoscreen, and RSA. If the vehiclehas not been tuned off, the RSEand the RSA can be turned backon by pressing this knob and willcontinue play of the last activesource.

DVD Menu Options

Options: Press to view the menuoption screen buttons. Menu optionsare available when they arehighlighted. Some menu options areonly available when the DVD is notplaying.

Cursor: Press to access the cursormenu. The arrows and other cursoroptions allow you to navigate theDVD menu options. The cursor

menu options are only available if aDVD has a menu. Use the cursormenu to start a DVD video from thedisc main menu.

q, Q, r, R (Arrow Buttons): Pressthe arrows to move around theDVD menu.

Enter: Press to select thehighlighted option.

Return: Press to go back to theprevious DVD menu.

Back: Press to go back to the mainDVD display screen.

Move: Press to move the cursorbuttons back and forth from thebottom-right corner to the top-leftcorner of the screen.

j / r (Pause/Play):

1. Press to pause the DVD. Thisbutton will then change to theplay button.

2. Press the play button to playthe DVD.

3. Press this button in a DVD discmain menu to start the movie.

c (Stop):

1. Press to stop play of the DVD.

2. Press the play button to continueplaying the DVD from where theDVD was stopped.

3. Press this button twice to returnto the beginning of the DVD.

Hide Options: Press to remove allmenu options from the display,except Options and Cursor.



Top Menu: Press to display thefirst menu of the DVD. This is notavailable on all DVDs.

Menu: Press to display the DVDmenu of the current area of the DVDthat is playing. This button is notavailable for DVD audio.

Audio: Press to display the audiooptions. Select the audio optionsthat best improve sound quality.This is not available on all DVDs orwhen the DVD is stopped. Thisbutton is not available for DVDaudio.

Subtitle: Press to playback thevideo with subtitles. This is notavailable on all DVDs or when theDVD is stopped. This button is notavailable for DVD audio.

Angle: Press to adjust the viewingangle of the DVD. Repeatedly pressthis button to toggle through theangles. This is not available on allDVDs or when the DVD is stopped.This button is not available for DVDaudio.

Search: Press to display thesearch screen. Select Title orChapter Search for DVD video andGroup or Track for DVD audio. Thekeyboard allows you to type in thetitle/chapter/group/track number thatyou would like to watch or listen to.This button does not work when theDVD is stopped.

Setup: Press to display the DVDSetup screen. This button is onlyavailable when the DVD is notplaying. The DVD Setup screenallows you to change thebrightness, contrast, and mode,change the viewing on the monitorand to change the initial settings;language, parental level, andaspect.

! (Brightness): Press the up ordown screen arrows to increase ordecrease the brightness of thenavigation screen.

_ (Contrast): Press the up ordown screen arrows to increase ordecrease the contrast of thenavigation screen.

Auto (Automatic): Press so thesystem can automatically adjust thenavigation screen backgrounddepending on exterior lightingconditions.

Night: Press to make thenavigation screen backgroundbrighten.

Day: Press to make the navigationscreen background darken.

Monitor: From the DVD Setupscreen, press to adjust the viewingangle of the DVD on the navigationscreen. This is not available on allDVDs. This button is not availablefor DVD audio

Presse to close the screen in fromthe left and right sides.

PressJ to fill the screen on theleft and right sides.

Pressd to fill the screen on thetop and bottom.

Settings: From the DVD Setupscreen, press to change the defaultaudio, subtitle, and menu



languages, parental level, audio,and to view the aspect of the DVD.These settings are not available onall DVDs. This button is notavailable for DVD audio.

Audio Language: Press English,French, or Spanish to change thedefault language that the DVDplayer uses for each disc. The audiolanguage must be available on thedisc. The audio language may varyfor each DVD.

Subtitle Language: Press English,French, or Spanish to change thedefault language of the subtitles thatthe DVD player uses for each disc.The subtitle language must beavailable on the disc. The subtitlelanguage may vary for each DVD.

Menu Language: Press English,French, or Spanish to change thedefault language of the DVD videomenus. The menu language mustbe available on the disc. The menulanguage may vary for each DVD.

Parental Level: Press to changethe rating level to only allow the playof DVDs with a certain rating. Therating selection is 1 through 8,with 1 Kids Safe being a G rating.If the 1 is selected, any DVD with arating above G will not be able to beviewed without entering a password.

When the parental level is firstentered a keyboard will appear onthe display and a four-digitpassword will need to be created.

Type in a password that you willbe able to remember. Once thepassword is created, you can thenselect a rating level.

If you would like to change therating level, press the ParentalLevel button, then press thePassword button. Type in thepassword and then change therating level.

If the password has been forgotten,contact your dealer.

This may not be available onall DVDs.

Aspect: Press to change theaspect ratio of the DVD. This maynot be available on all DVDs.

y (Next Track/Chapter): Press togo to the next track or chapter. Thisbutton may not work when the DVDis playing the copyright informationor the previews.



z (Previous Track/Chapter):

1. Press to return to the start of thecurrent track or chapter.

2. Press again to go to theprevious track or chapter. Thisbutton may not work when theDVD is playing the copyrightinformation or the previews.

w (Tuning Knob):

1. Turn counterclockwise one notchto go to the start of the currentchapter/track, turn it again to goto the previous chapter/track.

2. Turn clockwise to go to the nextchapter/track.

Care of Your CDs and DVDs

Sound quality can be reduced dueto disc quality, recording method,quality of the music recorded, andhow the disc has been handled.Handle discs carefully and storethem in their original cases or otherprotective cases away from directsunlight and dust. If the bottom

surface of a disc is damaged, thedisc may not play properly or at all.Do not touch the bottom surface ofa disc while handling it; this coulddamage the surface. Pick up discsby grasping the outer edges or theedge of the hole and the outer edge.

If the bottom surface of a disc isdirty, take a soft lint free cloth,or dampen a clean soft cloth in amild neutral detergent solutionmixed with water, and clean it. Wipethe disc from the center to theouter edge.

Notice: If a label is added to a CDor DVD, or more than one CD orDVD is inserted into the slot at atime, or an attempt is made toplay scratched or damaged CDsor DVDs, the player could bedamaged. While using the CD orDVD player, use only CDs orDVDs in good condition withoutany label, load one CD or DVD ata time, and keep the player andthe loading slot free of foreignmaterials, liquids, and debris.

Do not add any label to a CD orDVD, it could get caught in theplayer. If a CD or DVD is recordedon a personal computer and adescription label is needed, trylabeling the top of the recorded CDor DVD with a soft marker.

CD/DVD Messages

If Disc Read Error appears on thedisplay and/or the CD/DVD comesout, it could be for one of thefollowing reasons:. If a CD was inserted with an

invalid or unknown format.. If a DVD is not from a correct

region.. It is very hot. When the

temperature returns to normal,the CD should play.

. You are driving on a very roughroad. When the road becomessmoother, the CD/DVDshould play.

. The CD/DVD is dirty, scratched,wet, or upside down.



. The air is very humid. If so, waitabout an hour and try again.

. There may have been a problemwhile burning the CD/DVD.

. The label may be caught in theCD/DVD player.

If the CD/DVD is not playingcorrectly, for any other reason, try aknown good CD/DVD.

If any error occurs repeatedly or ifan error cannot be corrected,contact your dealer.

Connecting a USB StorageDevice or iPod®

The USB Port, located on theinstrument panel or in the centerconsole, can be used to control aniPod or a USB storage device.

To avoid connection problems,extension cords are notrecommended. Use only the cablethat came with the device.

To connect a USB storage device,connect the device to the USB portlocated on the instrument panel orin the center console.

To connect an iPod, connect oneend of the USB cable that camewith the iPod to the iPod’s dockconnector and connect the otherend to the USB port. If the vehicle ison and the USB connection works,“OK to disconnect” and a GM logomay appear on the iPod and iPodappears on the radio's display. TheiPod music appears on the radio’sdisplay and begins playing.

The iPod charges while it isconnected to the vehicle if thevehicle is in the ACC/ACCESSORYor ON/RUN position. When thevehicle is turned off, the iPodautomatically powers off and will notcharge or draw power from thevehicle's battery.

USB Supported File and FolderStructure

The guidelines that must be metwhile using USB supported files andfolders are:. Up to 700 folders.. Up to 8 folders in depth.. Up to 65,535 files.. Folder and file names up to

64 bytes.. Files with an .mp3 or .wma file

extension.. AAC files stored on an iPod.. FAT16. FAT32



Using the Navigation AudioSystem to Control a USBStorage Device or iPod®

The navigation audio system cancontrol a USB storage device or aniPod by using the radio touchscreens and steering wheelcontrols.

1. Press AUX and then the USBbutton.

2. Press the center screen buttonto enter the music navigatormain screen.

3. Press or tap the left or rightarrow to select desired Categorysuch as: Artist, Album, Genre,etc. A list of that category willdisplay.

4. Select an Artist, Album, or Trackfrom that list.

5. Press the up or down arrowslocated on the side of the screento select one item at a time,or press the top or bottom arrowto jump 10 percent up or downthe list.

6. Press the Back button to goback to the previous screen.

7. Press the Exit button to go backto the main audio screen.

8. Press the left or right arrow toselect desired Category suchas: Artist, Album, Genre, etc.A list of that category willdisplay.

The iPod or USB storage deviceshould not be pulled out from theUSB dock. To safely remove it,press Eject.



A warning message will display for afew seconds.

A message to safely remove thedevice displays.

MP3

Using an MP3 CD

MP3 Format

There are guidelines that must bemet, when creating an MP3 disc.If the guidelines are not met whenrecording a CD-R(W), the CD maynot play. The guidelines are:. Sampling rate: 16 kHz,

22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, and44.1 kHz.

. Bit rates supported: 32, 40, 48,56, 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 160,192, 224, 256, and 320 kbps.

. ID3 tag information is displayedby the radio if it is available. Theradio supports ID3 taginformation v1.0, v1.1, or v2.0.The radio will display a filename,song name, artist name, albumname, and directory name.

. Maximum 32 characters,including spaces, in a file orfolder name.



. Maximum number of folders is100 with a maximum hierarchyof eight folders.

. Create a folder structure thatmakes it easy to find songswhile driving. Organize songs byalbums using one folder for eachalbum. Each folder or albumshould contain 18 songs orfewer.

. It is recommended that there is amaximum of 192 files on a disc.

. The files can be recorded on aCD-R or CD-RW with amaximum capacity of 700MB.

. DVD with MP3 are not playableon this system.

Root Directory

The root directory is treated as afolder. If the root directory hascompressed audio files, thedirectory displays as No Folderor ALL.

Empty Directory or Folder

If a root directory or a folder existssomewhere in the file structure thatcontains only folders/subfolders andno compressed files directlybeneath them, the player advancesto the next folder in the file structurethat contains compressed audiofiles and the empty folder is notdisplayed or numbered.

No Folder

When the CD contains onlycompressed files, the files arelocated under the root folder. Thenext and previous folder functionswill have no function on a CD thatwas recorded without folders orplaylists. When displaying the nameof the folder the radio will display NoFolder.

Order of Play

Play begins from the first trackunder the root directory. When alltracks from the root directory havebeen played, play continues fromfiles according to their numerical

listing. After playing the last trackfrom the last folder, play beginsagain at the first track of the firstfolder or root directory.

When play enters a new folder, thedisplay does not automatically showthe new folder name. The new trackname appears on the display.

File System and Naming

The song name that displays is thesong name that is contained in theID3 tag. If the song name is notpresent in the ID3 tag, then theradio displays the file name withoutthe extension (such as .mp3) as thetrack name.

Track names longer than32 characters or four pages areshortened. The display does notshow parts of words on the lastpage of text and the extension ofthe filename does not display.



Playing an MP3

While playing a CD, the navigationsystem is available.

When you insert a CD, the CD tabdisplays. If a DSP setting isselected for the CD, it will beactivated each time you play a CD.

If you turn off the ignition or radiowith a CD in the player, it stays inthe player. When you turn on theignition or radio, the CD startsplaying where it stopped, if it wasthe last selected audio source.

As each new track starts to play,the track number appears on thedisplay.


If viewing a map screen, press theCD screen button. The display splitsbetween the audio screen and themap screen. If you do not want toview a split screen or you are not ona map screen, press AUDIO, then

press AUDIO again, repeatedly untilCD is selected or press the CDscreen button.

j / r (Pause/Play): Press to pausethe CD. This button will then changeto the play button. Press the playbutton to play the CD.

Random:

1. Press to hear the tracks inrandom, rather than sequential,order.

2. Press Random again to turn offrandom play.

r (Rewind):

1. Press and hold to rewind quicklythrough a track selection. Youwill hear sound at a reducedvolume.

2. Release to stop rewinding. Thedisplay will show the elapsedtime of the track.

[ (Forward):

1. Press and hold to fast forwardquickly through a track selection.You will hear sound at a reducedvolume.

2. Release to stop fast forwarding.The display shows the elapsedtime of the track.

q r (Folder/Artist/Album):

1. Select the left or right arrow togo to the previous or next folder,artist, or album on the disc.

2. Press the middle screen button,with the folder, artist, or albumname, to sort the MP3 by folder,



artist, or album. It may take afew minutes for the system tosort the MP3.


1. To seek tracks, press the uparrow to go to the next track.

2. Press the down arrow to go tothe start of the current track,if more than eight seconds haveplayed.

3. If either arrow is pressed morethan once, the player continuesmoving backward or forwardthrough the CD. The soundmutes while seeking.

w (Tuning Knob):

1. Turn counterclockwise one notchto go to the start of the currenttrack, turn it again to go to theprevious track.

2. Turn clockwise to go to the nexttrack.

When playing an MP3 the rear seatoperator can power on the RSEvideo screen and use the remotecontrol to navigate through the MP3.

Auxiliary Devices

Using the Auxiliary Input Jack

The navigation system has anauxiliary input jack located on thefaceplate and in the center console.This is not an audio output; do notplug the headphone set into thefront auxiliary input jack. An externalaudio device such as an iPod,laptop computer, MP3 player, CDplayer, or cassette tape player, etc.can be connected to the auxiliaryinput jack for use as another audiosource.

Drivers are encouraged to set upany auxiliary device while thevehicle is in P (Park). See DefensiveDriving on page 9‑3 for moreinformation on driver distraction.

To use a portable audio player,connect a 1/8 in (3.5 mm) cable tothe radio's front auxiliary input jack.When a device is connected, pressAUDIO, then press AUDIO againuntil AUX is selected or press theAUX screen button to begin playingaudio from the device over thevehicle speakers.

For optimal sound quality, increasethe portable audio device's volumeto the loudest level.

It is always best to power theportable audio device through itsown battery while playing.

The vehicle may have a rearentertainment system (RSE) with asecond and third row screen. TheRSE has audio adapters to allowyou to connect auxiliary devices.The audio can be heard through thespeakers or through the wireless orwired headphones. See the RearSeat Infotainment user guide formore information.



Drivers are encouraged to set upany auxiliary device while thevehicle is in P (Park). SeeDefensive Driving on page 9‑3 formore information on driverdistraction.

To switch the RSE system to use anauxiliary device:

1. Connect the auxiliary device tothe RSE system, for the secondor third row.

2. Press AUDIO then press AUDIOagain, repeatedly until AUX(auxiliary) is selected or press

the AUX screen button. Anauxiliary device must beconnected for the AUX screenbutton to appear as an option toselect.

3. For the second row displayselect the Rear AUX screenbutton next to Rear Display 1and for the third row displayselect the Rear AUX screenbutton next to Rear Display 2.Each screen worksindependently of the other. Thesecond row screen can watch aDVD while the third row screencan use the auxiliary device.

The rear seat passengers can alsouse the remote control to changethe functions of the RSE. See theRear Seat Infotainment user guidefor more information.

Rear SeatInfotainment

Rear Seat Entertainment(RSE) System (Overhead)The vehicle may have an OverheadDVD Rear Seat Entertainment(RSE) system. The RSE systemworks with the vehicle's audiosystem. The DVD player is part ofthe front radio. The RSE systemincludes a radio with a DVD player,a video display screen, and if thevehicle has a third row seat, it couldhave a second video display screen,audio/video jacks, two wirelessheadphones, and a remote control.See CD/DVD Player on page 7‑18for more information on the vehicle'sDVD system.



Before Driving

The RSE is designed for rear seatpassengers only. The driver cannotsafely view the video screen whiledriving and should not try to do so.

In severe or extreme weatherconditions, the RSE system mightnot work until the temperature iswithin the operating range. Theoperating range for the RSE systemis above −20°C (−4°F) or below60°C (140°F). If the temperature ofthe vehicle is outside this range,heat or cool the vehicle until thetemperature is within the operatingrange of the RSE system.

Parental Control

The RSE system may have aParental Control feature, dependingon which radio the vehicle has. Tostart Parental Control, press andhold the radio power button for morethan two seconds to stop all systemfeatures such as: radio, videoscreen, Rear Seat Audio (RSA),

DVD, and/or CD. While ParentalControl is on, a padlock icondisplays.

The radio can be turned back onwith a single press of the powerbutton, but the RSE system willremain under Parental Control.

To turn Parental Control off, pressand hold the radio power button formore than two seconds. The RSEreturns from where it was previouslyleft and the padlock icon disappearsfrom the radio display.

Parental Control can also be turnedoff by inserting or ejecting any disc,pressing the play icon on the radioDVD display menu, or changing anignition position.

Headphones

A. Battery cover

B. Channel 1 or 2 switch

C. Power button

D. Volume control

E. Power indicator light

The RSE includes two 2-channelwireless headphones that arededicated to this system. Channel 1is dedicated to the video screen,while Channel 2 is dedicated toRear Seat Audio (RSA) selections.



These headphones can be used tolisten to the radio, CDs, DVDs,MP3s, DVD‐As, or any auxiliarysource connected to A/V jacks orthe auxiliary input jack, if the vehiclehas this feature. The wirelessheadphones have a power button,channel 1 or 2 switch, and a volumecontrol.

If the vehicle has a third row videoscreen display, it has two additionalheadphones.

Push the power button to turn onthe headphones. An indicator lightlocated on the headphones comeson. If the light comes on, but thereis intermittent sound and/or static onthe headphones, or if the indicatorlight does not come on, the batteriesmight need to be replaced. See“Battery Replacement” later in thissection for more information. Switchthe headphones to Off when notin use.

Infrared transmitters are located atthe rear of the overhead console.The headphones shut offautomatically to save the batterypower if the RSE system and RSAare shut off, or if the headphonesare out of range of the transmittersfor more than three minutes. If youmove too far forward or step out ofthe vehicle, the headphones losethe audio signal.

To adjust the volume on theheadphones, use the volume controllocated on the right side.

For optimal audio performance, theheadphones must be worn correctly.Headphones should be worn withthe headband over the top of thehead for best audio reception. Thesymbol L (Left) appears on theoutside bottom edge of the ear cupand should be positioned on the leftear. The symbol R (Right) appearson the outside bottom edge of theear cup and should be positioned onthe right ear.

Notice: Do not store theheadphones in heat or directsunlight. This could damage theheadphones and repairs will notbe covered by the warranty.Storage in extreme cold canweaken the batteries. Keep theheadphones stored in a cool, dryplace.

If the foam ear pads attached to theheadphones become worn ordamaged, the pads can be replacedseparately from the headphone set.To purchase replacement ear pads,call 1‐888‐293‐3332, then promptzero (0), or contact your dealer.



Battery Replacement

To change the batteries on theheadphones:

1. Turn the screw to loosen thebattery door located on the leftside of the headphones. Slidethe battery door open.

2. Replace the two batteries in thecompartment. Make sure thatthey are installed correctly, usingthe diagram on the inside of thebattery compartment.

3. Replace the battery door andtighten the door screw.

If the headphones are to be storedfor a long period of time, remove thebatteries and keep them in a cool,dry place.

Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks

Yellow: Video Input

White: Left Audio Input

Red: Right Audio Input

The A/V jacks, located on the rearof the floor console, allow audio orvideo signals to be connected froman auxiliary device such as acamcorder or a video game unit tothe RSE system. Adapterconnectors or cables (not included)may be required to connect the

auxiliary device to the A/V jacks.Refer to the manufacturer’sinstructions for proper usage.

Power for auxiliary devices is notsupplied by the radio system.

To use the auxiliary inputs of theRSE system, connect an externalauxiliary device to the color-codedA/V jacks and turn both the auxiliarydevice and the video screen poweron. If the video screen is in the DVDplayer mode, pressing the AUX(auxiliary) button on the remotecontrol switches the video screenfrom the DVD player mode to theauxiliary device. The audio of theconnected source can be listened toover the speakers by sourcing theradio to the auxiliary device or bysourcing the RSA to the Rear Auxand listening with the wirelessheadphones on Channel 2 or withthe wired headphones. See “Usingthe Auxiliary Input Jack” underAuxiliary Devices on page 7‑30 formore information about changingthe source.



How to Change the RSE VideoScreen Settings

The screen display mode (normal,full, and zoom), screen brightness,and setup menu language can bechanged from the on screen setupmenu. To change any feature:

1. Press the z (display menu)button on the remote control.

2. Use the remote control n,q,p,o (navigation) arrows andther (enter) button to use thesetup menu.

3. Press the z button again toremove the setup menu from thescreen.

Audio Output

Audio from the DVD player orauxiliary inputs can be heardthrough the following possiblesources:. Wireless headphones. Vehicle speakers

. Vehicle‐wired headphone jackson the RSA system, if thevehicle has this feature.

The RSE system always transmitsthe audio signal to the wirelessheadphones, if there is audioavailable. See “Headphones” earlierin this section for more information.

The DVD player is capable ofoutputting audio to the wiredheadphone jacks on the RSAsystem, if the vehicle has thisfeature. The DVD player can beselected as an audio source on theRSA system. See Rear Seat Audio(RSA) System on page 7‑60 formore information.

When a device is connected to theA/V jacks, or the radio's auxiliaryinput jack if the vehicle has thisfeature, the rear seat passengersare able to hear audio from theauxiliary device through the wirelessor wired headphones. The front seatpassengers are able to listen toplayback from this device throughthe vehicle speakers by selectingAUX as the source on the radio.

Video Screen(s)

The video screen(s) are located inthe overhead console.

To use the video screen(s):

1. Push the release button locatedon the overhead console.

2. Move the screen to the desiredposition.

When the video screen is not inuse, push it up into its lockedposition.

If a DVD is playing and the screenis raised to its locked position, thescreen remains on. This is normal,and the DVD continues to playthrough the previous audio source.Use the remote control power buttonor eject the disc to turn off thescreen.

The overhead console contains theinfrared transmitters for the wirelessheadphones and the infraredreceivers for the remote control.They are located at the rear of theconsole.



Notice: Avoid directly touchingthe video screen, as damage mayoccur. See “Cleaning the VideoScreens” later in this section formore information.

Remote Control

To use the remote control, aim it atthe transmitter window at the rear ofthe RSE overhead console andpress the desired button. Directsunlight or very bright light couldaffect the ability of the RSEtransmitter to receive signals fromthe remote control. If the remote

control does not seem to beworking, the batteries might need tobe replaced. See “BatteryReplacement” later in this section.Objects blocking the line of sightcould also affect the function of theremote control.

If a CD or DVD is in the Radio DVDslot, the remote control O (power)button can be used to turn on thevideo screen display and start thedisc. The radio can also turn on thevideo screen display. See CD/DVDPlayer on page 7‑18 for moreinformation.

Notice: Storing the remotecontrol in a hot area or in directsunlight can damage it, and therepairs will not be covered by thewarranty. Storage in extreme coldcan weaken the batteries. Keepthe remote control stored in acool, dry place.

If the remote control becomes lostor damaged, a new universalremote control can be purchased.

If this happens, make sure theuniversal remote control uses acode set of Toshiba®.

Remote Control Buttons

O (Power): Press this button toturn the video screen on and off.

P (Illumination): Press this buttonto turn the remote control backlighton. The backlight automaticallytimes out after 7 to 10 seconds if noother button is pressed while thebacklight is on.

v (Title): Press this button toreturn the DVD to the main menu ofthe DVD. This function could varyfor each disc.

y (Main Menu): Press this buttonto access the DVD menu. The DVDmenu is different on every DVD.Use the navigation arrows to movethe cursor around the DVD menu.After making a selection press theenter button. This button onlyoperates when using a DVD.



n,q, p,o (Menu NavigationArrows): Use the arrow buttons tonavigate through a menu.

r (Enter): Press this button toselect the choice that is highlightedin any menu.

z (Display Menu): Press thisbutton to adjust the brightness,screen display mode (normal, full,or zoom), and display thelanguage menu.

q (Return): Press this button toexit the current active menu andreturn to the previous menu. Thisbutton operates only when thedisplay menu or a DVD menu isactive.

c (Stop): Press this button to stopplaying, fast reversing, or fastforwarding a DVD. Press this buttontwice to return to the beginning ofthe DVD.

s (Play/Pause): Press thisbutton to start playing a DVD. Pressthis button while a DVD is playing topause it. Press it again to continueplaying the DVD.

While the DVD is playing, the DVDcan be played slowly by pressingthe play/pause button then pressingthe fast forward button. The DVDcontinues playing in a slow playmode. Also, reverse can be playedslowly by pressing the play/pausebutton and then pressing the fastreverse button. To cancel slow playmode, press the play/pause button.

t (Previous Track/Chapter):Press this button to return to thestart of the current track or chapter.Press this button again to go to theprevious track or chapter. Thisbutton might not work when theDVD is playing the copyrightinformation or the previews.

u (Next Track/Chapter): Pressthis button to go to the beginning ofthe next chapter or track. This

button might not work while theDVD is playing the copyrightinformation or the previews.

r (Fast Reverse): Press thisbutton to quickly reverse the DVD orCD. To stop fast reversing a DVDvideo, press the play/pause button.To stop fast reversing a DVD audioor CD, release the fast reversebutton. This button might not workwhen the DVD is playing thecopyright information or thepreviews.

[ (Fast Forward): Press thisbutton to fast forward the DVD orCD. To stop fast forwarding a DVDvideo, press the play/pause button.To stop fast forwarding a DVD audioor CD, release the fast forwardbutton. This button might not workwhile the DVD is playing thecopyright information or thepreviews.



e (Audio): Press this button tochange audio tracks on DVDs thathave this feature when the DVD isplaying. The format and content ofthis function vary for each disc.

{ (Subtitles): Press this button toturn on or off subtitles and to movethrough subtitle options when aDVD is playing. The format andcontent of this function vary foreach disc.

AUX (Auxiliary): Press this buttonto switch the system between theDVD player and an auxiliary source.

If the vehicle has a third row videoscreen, the AUX button controls thesource display on the second rowvideo screen, and the third rowvideo screen as described in thetable below:

AuxButtonPress

SecondRow

Screen

Third RowScreen

DefaultState (NoPress)

DVDMedia

DVDMedia

AuxButtonPress

SecondRow

Screen

Third RowScreen

FirstPress

Aux VideoSource

Aux VideoSource

SecondPress

DVDMedia

Aux VideoSource

ThirdPress

Aux VideoSource

DVDMedia

FourthPress

Return toDefaultState

Return toDefaultState

2 (Camera): Press this button tochange camera angles on DVDsthat have this feature while a DVD isplaying. The format and content ofthis function vary for each disc.

1 through 0 (Numeric Keypad):The numeric keypad provides thecapability of direct chapter or tracknumber selection.

\ (Clear): Press this button withinthree seconds after entering anumeric selection, to clear allnumerical inputs.

} 10 (Double Digit Entries): Pressthis button to select chapter or tracknumbers greater than nine. Pressthis button before entering thenumber.

Battery Replacement

To change the remote controlbatteries:

1. Slide the rear cover back on theremote control.

2. Replace the two batteries in thecompartment. Make sure theyare installed correctly using thediagram on the inside of theremote control.

3. Replace the battery cover.

If the remote control is to be storedfor a long period of time, remove thebatteries and keep them in a cool,dry place.



Tips and Troubleshooting Chart

Problem Recommended Action

There is no power. The ignition might not be turned to ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY.

The picture does not fill the screen. There are blackborders on the top and bottom or on both sides, or thepicture looks stretched out.

Check the display mode settings in the setup menu bypressing the display menu button on the remote control.

In auxiliary mode, the picture moves or scrolls. Check the auxiliary input connections at both devices.

The remote control does not work. Check to make sure there is no obstruction between theremote control and the transmitter window.Check the batteries to make sure they are not dead orinstalled incorrectly.

After stopping the player, and pushing Play, sometimesthe DVD starts where it left off and sometimes at thebeginning.

If the stop button was pressed one time, the DVD playerresumes playing where the DVD was stopped. If thestop button was pressed two times, the DVD playerbegins to play from the beginning of the DVD.

The auxiliary source is running, but there is no picture orsound.

Check that the RSE video screen is in the auxiliarysource mode.Check the auxiliary input connections at both devices.



Tips and Troubleshooting Chart (cont'd)

Problem Recommended Action

Sometimes the wireless headphone audio cuts out orbuzzes.

Check for obstructions, low batteries, reception range,and interference from cellular telephone towers, or usea cellular telephone in the vehicle.Check that the headphones are on correctly using theL (left) and R (right) on the headphones.

The remote and/or the headphones are lost. See your dealer for assistance.

The DVD is playing, but there is no picture or sound. Check that the RSE video screen is sourced to the DVDplayer.

DVD Display Error Messages

The DVD display error messagedepends on the radio that is in thevehicle. The video screen candisplay one of the following:

Disc Load/Eject Error: Thismessage displays when there aredisc load or eject problems.

Disc Format Error: This messagedisplays if the disc is inserted withthe disc label wrong side up, or ifthe disc is damaged.

Disc Region Error: This messagedisplays if the disc is not from acorrect region.

No Disc Inserted: This messagedisplays if no disc is present whenZ is pressed on the radio.

DVD Distortion

Video distortion can occur whenoperating cellular phones, scanners,CB radios, Global PositioningSystems (GPS)*, two-way radios,mobile fax machines, or walkietalkies.

It might be necessary to turn off theDVD player when operating one ofthese devices in or near the vehicle.

*Excludes the OnStar® System.

Cleaning the RSE OverheadConsole

When cleaning the RSE overheadconsole surface, use only a cleancloth dampened with clean water.



Cleaning the Video Screen

When cleaning the video screen,use only a clean cloth dampenedwith clean water. Use care whendirectly touching or cleaning thescreen, as damage could result.

Rear Seat Entertainment(RSE) System(Headrest DVD)Vehicles with an RSE systeminclude two head restraint videodisplay screens with integrated DVDplayers, auxiliary inputs, twowireless headphones, and a remotecontrol. This system worksindependently from the vehicle'sOverhead DVD RSE system. SeeRear Seat Entertainment (RSE)System (Headrest DVD) onpage 7‑41 or Rear SeatEntertainment (RSE) System(Overhead) on page 7‑31 forinformation about the OverheadDVD RSE system.

The vehicle has a feature calledRetained Accessory Power (RAP).With RAP, the RSE system can beplayed even after the ignition isturned off. See Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) on page 9‑26 for moreinformation.

Video Display Screens

The video display screens arelocated on the back of each headrestraint.

Notice: Avoid directly touchingthe video screen, as damage canoccur. See “Cleaning the VideoScreens” later in this section formore information.

Overview RSE Base System

Some DVDs do not allow fastforwarding or skipping of thecopyright information or previews.If the DVD does not begin playing atthe main title, refer to the on-screeninstructions.

The DVD player can be controlledby using the buttons located belowthe video display screen or by usingthe buttons on the system’s remotecontrol. See “Remote Control” laterfor more information.

The following discs are compatiblewith the DVD player:. DVD-Video: A DVD that has

video.. CD-DA: A CD that has music or

sound content only.



. CD-Video: A CD that has amovie.

. CD-R/RW: A disc that has audiofiles such as CD-R withdownloaded MP3 files, MPEG,or JPEG files.

The DVD player and discs arecoded by global region. The DVDplayers are set to Region 1. Discswith other region codes will not workin the players.

If an error message displays on thevideo screen, see “DVD Messages”later in this section.

While the vehicle is moving,passengers should not unfastentheir safety belts to makeadjustments to the video screencontrol buttons. See Safety Belts onpage 3‑15. Use the remote controlfor any necessary adjustments. See“Remote Control” later in thissection.

A. Video Screen. Located behind the front

seat headrest.

B. CD/DVD Slot. The loading slot for the

DVD player is located atthe top of the headrestraint. Insert the discpartially into the loadingslot with the printed sidefacing the rear of thevehicle. The DVD playerautomatically draws thedisc in, “Loading” displayson the screen along with a

disc indicator, andplayback starts. If the discis inserted incorrectly, theDVD player ejects the discand No Disc displays.

C. Level Lock and Release Latch. The viewing angle of the

video screen can beadjusted by releasing thelatch and gently movingthe screen. Then lock itinto a secure position.

D. POWER O. Press to turn the power on

or off. Each video screencan be powered on or offindependently.

E. SOURCE. Press to select between

Monitor 3, Monitor 4, or theAV INPUT.

Each video display screencan be adjustedindependently, as well as



display information fromboth DVD players and bothA/V inputs.

F. AV OUTPUT (Audio/VideoOutput Jack). Wired headphones or

video output can beplugged in with a 3.5 mm(1/8 in) jack to listen tomusic or show the videoon another device.

G. Video Input. The yellow connector is

used for video input.

H. Left Audio Input. The white connector is

used for the left side audio.

I. Right Audio Input. The red connector is used

for the right side audio.

J. 3.5 mm (1/8 in) Output Jack. Wired headphones can be

plugged in with a 3.5 mm(1/8 in) jack.

K. PLAY r. Press this button located

below the video displayscreen to start playbackof a disc. On DVDs andvideo CDs with playbackcontrol (PBC), menuscreens can displayautomatically. It might benecessary to press theplay button again tobegin play.

There is a play positionmemory feature for DVDand video CD only. If theDVD player is turned offand then turned back on,the DVD player resumesplayback where the discstopped. The play positionmemory is erased if thedisc is removed.

L. STOP c. Press once to stop playing

a DVD.

There is a pre-stop featurefor DVD and video CDonly. This feature resumesplayback of the disc whereit was stopped. Press thestop button once duringdisc playback and cdisplays on the DVDstartup screen. This icondisappears after a fewseconds. Press the stopbutton a second time,or eject the disc, to cancelthe pre-stop feature and toclear the disc positionmemory.



M. EJECTX. Press to eject a disc from

the DVD slot.

If a disc is ejected from theplayer, but not removed, itwill automatically reloadinto the player. Anotherway to reload a disc thathas been ejected, but notremoved from the DVDplayer, is to press the ejectbutton or the play button.

Infrared Remote Sensor: Locatedin the top center of the video displayscreen. Do not block the signal fromthe remote to the sensor.

Infrared Transmitters: Located inthe top center of the video displayscreen. Do not block the signal fromthe headphones to the transmitter.

Using the Base RSEOn-Screen Display (OSD)Menus

Use the OSD setup displaymenus for:. Initial setup. Display setup. Parental control setup. Adjusting the picture quality. Setting the various outputs. On-screen display language

To use the OSD menus while usingthe DVD player or an auxiliarydevice:

1. Press the SETUP button on theremote control to display theicons and pages on the displayscreen.

2. Select the desired page by usingthe left/right navigation arrows tomove the cursor.

3. Press the SETUP button againon the remote control to canceluse of the setup display.

Not all DVDs support all of thefeature defaults in the setup menus.If a feature is not supported, thedefaults are provided by the DVDmedia.

To set the language for the OSD:

1. Press the SETUP button on theremote control.

2. Use the left/right navigationarrows to navigate the GeneralSetup Page, then use the downnavigation arrow to select theOSD language.

3. Press the right navigation arrowand then use the up/downnavigation arrows to selectEnglish, French, or Spanish.



To set the TV display:


2. Use the left/right navigationarrows to navigate the GeneralSetup Page.

3. Press the down navigation arrowto select TV Display sub-menuand to adjust the screen setting.

4. Press the right navigation arrowand then use the up/downnavigation arrows to select adisplay option.

The display options are:. Normal/PS (Pan and

Scan): This displays thewide picture on the screenwith a portion of the left andright sides removed.

. Normal/LB (Letter-Box):This displays the widepicture with black bands onthe upper and lowerportions of the screen.

. Wide (16:9): This option ischosen if the video screenpanel is wide screen.

5. Press ENTER on the remotecontrol to confirm the screen.

To reset all options to factorydefaults:


2. Use the left/right and downnavigation arrows on the remotecontrol to select the Defaultsub-menu under thePreference Page.

3. Press the right navigation arrow,then press ENTER to reset.

This function will not affect theparental setting.



Settings for Parental Control

Use the SETUP MENU to accessthe parental control feature. It allowsfor control of the type of movierating content (from G to Adult) thatcan be viewed and is onlyaccessible when no disc is loaded.

To setup the Parental Control:


2. Use the left/right and downnavigation arrows on the remotecontrol to select the Parentalsub-menu under thePreference Page.

3. Press the SETUP button, anduse the right and up/downnavigation arrows to select anyone of the available Ratingsettings from the display menu.

The Rating settings are:. Kid SAF. G. PG 13. PG R. R. NC 17. ADULT

4. Press the ENTER button toconfirm the selection.

If a disc is inserted into the DVDcompartment slot and it exceeds theParental Setting, the followingmessage appears on display:

The Parental Setting of this playerprohibits play. Would you like toallow this disc to play?

If yes if selected, the six digitpassword must be entered for thedisc to play. If the wrong passwordis entered, the following messageappears:

This movie will not play due to theParental Setting of the player.



To create a six digit password, usethe numeric keypad on the remotecontrol. Press the ENTER button toconfirm. The default password is136900.

To change the Parental ControlPassword:

1. Press the SETUP button on theremote control

2. Navigate to the Passwordsub-menu under the PasswordSetup Page.

3. Press the right navigation arrow,then press ENTER.

4. At the Old Password option,enter the old password or thedefault password (136900).

5. At the New Password option,enter the new password (sixdigits) using numeric buttons.

6. At the Confirm PWD option,confirm the new password byentering the new passwordagain.

7. Scroll to the OK button andpress ENTER. The message“Your password has beenchanged” displays.

RSE Overview Uplevel System

The loading slot for the DVD playeris located at the top of the headrestraint. Insert the disc partially intothe loading slot with the printed sidefacing the rear of the vehicle. TheDVD player automatically draws thedisc in, “Loading” displays on thescreen along with a disc indicator,and playback starts. If the disc isinserted incorrectly, the DVD playerejects the disc and No Discdisplays.

Some DVDs do not allow fastforwarding or skipping of thecopyright information or previews.If the DVD does not begin playing atthe main title, refer to the on-screeninstructions.

The DVD player can be controlledby using the buttons located belowthe video display screen or by usingthe buttons on the system’s remotecontrol. See “Remote Control” laterfor more information.



The following discs are compatiblewith the DVD player:. DVD-Video: A DVD that has

video.. CD-DA: A CD that has music or

sound content only.. CD-Video: A CD that has a

movie.. CD-R/RW: A disc that has audio

files such as CD-R withdownloaded MP3 files, MPEG,or JPEG files.

The DVD player and discs arecoded by global region. The DVDplayers are set to Region 1. Discswith other region codes will not workin the players.

If an error message displays on thevideo screen, see “DVD Messages”later in this section.

While the vehicle is moving,passengers should not unfastentheir safety belts to makeadjustments to the video screencontrol buttons. See Safety Belts onpage 3‑15. Use the remote control

for any necessary adjustments. See“Remote Control” later in thissection.

A. Video Screen. Located behind the front

seat headrest.

B. CD/DVD Slot. The loading slot for the

DVD player is located atthe top of the headrestraint. Insert the discpartially into the loadingslot with the printed sidefacing the rear of the

vehicle. The DVD playerautomatically draws thedisc in, “Loading” displayson the screen along with adisc indicator, andplayback starts. If the discis inserted incorrectly, theDVD player ejects the discand No Disc displays.

C. Level Lock and Release Latch. The viewing angle of the

video screen can beadjusted by releasing thelatch and gently movingthe screen. Then lock itinto a secure position.

D. POWER O. Press to turn the power on

or off. Each video screencan be powered on or offindependently.

E. SOURCE. Press to select between

Monitor 3, Monitor 4, or theAV INPUT. Each videodisplay screen can be



adjusted independently, aswell as display informationfrom both DVD players andboth A/V inputs.

F. USB Port. Connect USB drive to

listen to music or viewpictures. To chargedevices, connect it to theUSB port. Not all devicesare able to be charged. Forplayback, the formatsavailable are:

‐ JPEG

‐ JPG

‐ M2V

‐ MP3

‐ MPE

‐ MPEG-1

‐ MPEG-2

‐ MPEG-4

‐ MPG

‐ OGG

‐ WMA

‐ MWA

G. Video Input. The yellow connector is

used for video input.

H. Left Audio Input. The white connector is

used for the left side audio.

I. Right Audio Input. The red connector is used

for the right side audio.

J. 3.5 mm (1/8 in) Output Jack. Wired headphones can be

plugged in with a 3.5 mm(1/8 in) jack.

K. PLAY r. Press this button located

below the video displayscreen to start playback ofa disc. On DVDs and videoCDs with playbackcontrol (PBC), menuscreens can displayautomatically. It might be

necessary to press theplay button again to beginplay. There is a playposition memory featurefor DVD and video CDonly. If the DVD player isturned off and then turnedback on, the DVD playerresumes playback wherethe disc stopped. The playposition memory is erasedif the disc is removed.

L. STOP c. Press once to stop playing

a DVD.

There is a pre-stop featurefor DVD and video CDonly. This feature resumesplayback of the disc whereit was stopped. Press thestop button once duringdisc playback and cdisplays on the DVDstartup screen. Thisicon disappears after afew seconds. Press thestop button a second time,



or eject the disc, to cancelthe pre-stop feature and toclear the disc positionmemory.

M. EJECTX. Press to eject a disc from

the DVD slot.

If a disc is ejected from theplayer, but not removed, itwill automatically reloadinto the player. Anotherway to reload a disc thathas been ejected, but notremoved from the DVDplayer, is to press the ejectbutton or the play button.

Infrared Remote Sensor: Locatedin the top center of the video displayscreen. Do not block the signal fromthe remote to the sensor.

Infrared Transmitters: Located inthe top center of the video displayscreen. Do not block the signal fromthe headphones to the transmitter.

Using the Uplevel RSEOn-Screen Display (OSD)Menus

Use the OSD setup displaymenus for:. General Setup. Audio Setup. Quality Setup. Preference Setup

To use the OSD menus while usingthe DVD player or an auxiliarydevice:

1. Press the SETUP button on theremote control to display theicons and pages on the displayscreen.

2. Select the desired page by usingthe left/right navigation arrows tomove the cursor.

3. Press the SETUP button againon the remote control to canceluse of the setup display.

Not all DVDs support all of thefeature defaults in the setup menus.If a feature is not supported, thedefaults are provided by the DVDmedia.

General Setup Menu

To set the language for the OSD:



3. Press the ENTER button andthen use the right or leftnavigation arrows to selectEnglish, Simple/TraditionalChinese, French, German,Italian, Spanish, Portuguese,or Korean. Press the leftnavigation arrow to go back tothe previous menu.



The angle mark allows differentviewing angles on the DVD player.To set the angle mark:



3. Press the ENTER button andthen use the right or leftnavigation arrows to select Onor Off. Press the left navigationarrow to go back to theprevious menu.

Audio Setup Menu

The Audio Setup Menu is availablewhen a disc is not loaded.

To set the speaker setup:


2. Use the left/right navigationarrows to navigate the AudioSetup Page.

3. Press the down navigation arrowto select Speaker Setupsub-menu and to adjust thespeakers setting. Choose fromLT/RT, Stereo, V SURR,and OFF

4. Press the ENTER button andthen use the left or rightnavigation arrows to select aspeaker option. Press the leftnavigation arrow to go back tothe previous menu.

The Dolby Digital Setup Menuspeaker options are L-Mono,R-Mono, and Mix-Mono.

Quality Setup Menu

To setup the video qualitysetup menu:


2. Use the left/right and downnavigation arrows on the remotecontrol to select the VideoQuality Setup sub-menu.

3. Press the ENTER button, usethe left or right navigation arrowsto adjust the following:

Sharpness: Adjust to soften orsharpen the picture. Use the right orleft navigation arrows to choosefrom Low, Med, or High.

Brightness: Adjust to brighten ordarken the picture. Use the right orleft navigation arrows to choosefrom −20 to +20.

Contrast: Adjust to increase ordecrease the picture contrast. Usethe right or left navigation arrows tochoose from −16 to +16.

Hue: Adjust to increase ordecrease the color hue. Use theright or left navigation arrows tochoose from −9 to +9.

Saturation: Adjust to increase ordecrease color intensity. Use theright or left navigation arrows tochoose from −9 to +9



Preference Setup Menu

To set the audio playback language:


2. Use the left/right and downnavigation arrows on the remotecontrol to select the Audiosub-menu under thePreference Page.

To turn the Subtitles on or off:


2. Use the left/right and downnavigation arrows on the remotecontrol to select the Subtitlesub-menu under the PreferencePage and use the left or rightnavigation arrows to choose Onor Off. Press the left navigationarrow to go back to theprevious menu.

To set the disc menu language:


2. Use the left/right and downnavigation arrows on the remotecontrol to select the Discsub-menu under the PreferencePage and use the left or rightnavigation arrows to select thelanguage. Press the leftnavigation arrow to go back tothe previous menu.

To setup the Parental Control:


2. Use the left/right and downnavigation arrows on the remotecontrol to select the Parentalsub-menu under thePreference Page.

3. Press the SETUP button, anduse the right and up/downnavigation arrows to select anyone of the available Ratingsettings from the display menu.

The Rating settings are:. Kid SAFE (Children). G

. PG

. PG 13

. PG R

. R

. NC 17

. ADULT

4. Press the left navigation arrow toconfirm the selection.

If a disc is inserted into the DVDcompartment slot and it exceeds theParental Setting, the followingmessage appears on display:

The Parental Setting of this playerprohibits play. Would you like toallow this disc to play?

If yes if selected, the six digitpassword must be entered for thedisc to play. If the wrong passwordis entered, the following messageappears:

This movie will not play due to theParental Setting of the player.



To create a six digit password, usethe numeric keypad on the remotecontrol. Press the ENTER button toconfirm. The default password is136900.

To change the Parental ControlPassword:

1. Press the SETUP button on theremote control

2. Navigate to the Passwordsub-menu under the PreferenceMenu and press enter.

3. At the Old Password option,enter the old password or thedefault password (136900).

4. At the New Password option,enter the new password (sixdigits) using numeric buttons.

5. At the Confirm PWD option,confirm the new password byentering the new passwordagain.

6. Scroll to the OK button andpress ENTER. The message“Your password has beenchanged” displays.

To reset the system back to thefactory default settings:


2. Use the left/right and downnavigation arrows on the remotecontrol to select the Defaultsub-menu under the PreferencePage and press the ENTERbutton to reset the settings. Theparental settings will not beaffected.

Vehicle Speakers

Audio from the DVD player or anauxiliary device can be heardthrough the vehicle speakers or thewireless/wired headphones, whilethe radio is tuned to one of the sixfrequencies selected on the SoundAround portion of the system’sremote control. See “RemoteControl” later in this section.

Only one audio source can be heardthrough the vehicle’s speakers at atime. The audio source being used

is specified by the A/V (audio/video)source selected on the driver sidehead restraint video display screen.

To turn the RSE system audiooutput to the vehicle’s speakers,press Sound Around ON, on thesystem’s remote control. The audiofrom the RSE system can be heardthrough the wireless/wiredheadphones and the vehicle’sspeakers at the same time. Thevolume on the radio can vary whenswitching between the radio, CD,DVD, MP3, or an auxiliary device.

Wireless Headphones

The two wireless headphonesincluded with the Headrest DVDRSE system will only work with theHeadrest DVD RSE system and aremarked for channel 3 and 4. Thewireless headphones must be usedwithin a line of sight of thetransmitter that is located above thevideo display screen.



3-4 Channel Selector: This islocated on the right earpiece. EitherChannel 3 or 4 can be selected withthe channel selector. The driver sidemonitor is designated as Channel 3,and the passenger side asChannel 4. Set the channel selectorswitch according to the videodisplay screen being viewed. Themessage, “To listen to this monitortune your headphones to Channel 3(or 4)” displays for five seconds thendisappears when the video displayscreen is turned on.

OFF/ON (Power): Turn the powerswitch located on the earpiece toturn the wireless headphones on oroff. Each headphone has a light toindicate ON. If the light does notcome on, the batteries may need tobe replaced. See “BatteryReplacement” under Rear SeatEntertainment (RSE) System(Headrest DVD) on page 7‑41 orRear Seat Entertainment (RSE)System (Overhead) on page 7‑31for more information.

The headphones shut offautomatically if the RSE system isturned off or if the headphones areout of range of the transmitter formore than three minutes.

VOL0 (Volume): Use to adjustthe volume on the headphones.

Notice: Do not store theheadphones in heat or directsunlight. This could damage theheadphones and repairs will notbe covered by the warranty.Storage in extreme cold canweaken the batteries. Keep theheadphones stored in a cool, dryplace.

Remote Control

To use the remote control, aim atthe remote sensor located on topcenter of the video display screenand press the desired button.

Objects blocking the line-of-sightcan affect the function of the remotecontrol. Direct or very bright lightcan affect the ability of thetransmitter to receive signals fromthe remote control. If the remotecontrol does not seem to beworking, the batteries might need tobe replaced. See “BatteryReplacement” following this section.

The remote control provided withthe Headrest DVD RSE system, isnot a universal remote control andwill not control other equipment.

Notice: Storing the remotecontrol in a hot area or in directsunlight can damage it, and therepairs will not be covered by thewarranty. Storage in extreme coldcan weaken the batteries. Keepthe remote control stored in acool, dry place.



Remote Control Buttons

POWER: Press to turn theHeadrest DVD RSE system onand off.

SOURCE: Press to select betweenMonitor 3, Monitor 4, or AV INPUT.Any video equipment connected tothe AV inputs automaticallyoverrides the source selection.

SETUP: Press to change thedefault settings, see “Using the RSEOn-Screen Display (OSD) Menus”later in this manual. There are fourmain menu screens, each screendisplays a menu to select differentsetting options. The screens are:

1. General Setup — adjusts screensettings.

2. Audio Setup — sets thelanguage.

3. Preference Screen — sets thesubtitles and parental controls.

4. Password Setup — allows apassword to be set.

Press SETUP again to exit.

EJECTX : Press to eject orreload a disc.

DVD-Video Screen 3: Press theDVD button located under 3 totransmit IR codes for DVD mode onVideo Screen 3.

TV-Video Screen 3: This button isnot used with the system.

DVD-Video Screen 4: Press theDVD button located under 4 totransmit IR codes for DVD mode onVideo Screen 4.

TV-Video Screen 4: This button isnot used with the system.

SOUND AROUND ON/OFF: Pressto turn the FM Transmitter power onor off.

MUTE > (For DVD Only): Press toturn off the headphone sound. Pressagain to turn the sound on again.

PIX (Picture Selection): Press toadjust the picture’s On ScreenDisplay (OSD). Each time thisbutton is pressed, the pictureadjustment OSD, cycles throughbars for BRIGHTNESS,CONTRAST, COLOR, and TINT.Use the right/left navigation arrowsto adjust the setting. This featureautomatically shuts off id anotherbutton is pressed or adjustmentsare not made within six seconds.



SOUND AROUND SELECT: Pressto select an FM transmitter channel.The SOUND AROUND SELECTlets the DVD audio play over thevehicle’s sound system by tuningthe radio to one of the six FMfrequencies listed below.. CH1 : 88.3MHz. CH2 : 88.7MHz. CH3 : 89.1MHz. CH4 : 89.5MHz. CH5 : 89.9MHz. CH6 : 90.3MHz

MENU: Press to enter the DVDdisc menu while the disc is playing.

Q, R, q, r (Navigation Arrows):Press to navigate through menus.

ENTER: Press to enter a selectedfunction or to begin playback ofthe disc.

REPEAT7 : Press to repeat partor all of a chapter, title, track, or theentire disc after using the A-Bbutton to setup repeat presetsections.

RETURN 8 : This button is notused with the system.

A-B: This button is used to setuprepeat preset sections. Press thisbutton once while the disc is playingto select the starting position. Pressa second time to select the endposition. Press a third time to turnthe function off. To view the presetsection, press7.

AUTO MEMORY: This button is notused with the system.

SEARCH/SKIP: This button is notused with the system.

ERASE/ADD: This button is notused with the system.

R-S: This button is not used withthe system.

TITLE: Press to enter the disc titlemode. The title feature isdisc-specific, and may not beavailable on all discs.

SUBTITLE: Press to change thesubtitle language to anotheravailable language or to turnsubtitles off.

ANGLE: Press to select a differentviewing angle for discs that arerecorded with different cameraangles.

AUDIO: Press to select a differentlanguage for discs that are recordedwith different languages.

0-9 (Numbers): The numberslocated on the lower left side of theremote control can be used to enternumbered menu options, channels,or track numbers.

GOTO: Press to enter the GOTOmenu to choose a desired title,chapter, track, or song insidethe disc.



DISPLAY: Press to scroll throughdisplay information on the upper leftcorner of the screen, such as title,chapter/track, time elapsed, andtime remaining, or to turn off thedisplay

PROGRAM: Press to edit aplayback program containingdesired titles in the DVD or tracks inthe CD-DA.

3D: Press to change betweendifferent 3D audio modes for DVDor CD.

The options for DVD are: Off, Rock,Pop, Live, Dance, Techno, Classic,and Soft.

The options for CD are: Off,Concert, Living room, Hall,Bathroom Cave, Arena, and Church.

RANDOM: Press to play titlesrandomly.

PLAY/PAUSE r / j : Press to startplayback of the disc, or to pauseplayback.

STOP c : Press to stop playbackof a disc.. To resume disc playback,

press PLAY.. To start playback from the

beginning of the disc, pressSTOP, STOP, then PLAY .

ZOOM: Press to either enlarge theviewed image by 2X, 3X, and 4X,or reduce the image by 1/2X, 1/3X,and 1/4X.

PBC (Playback Control): Press toturn video CD playback control onor off.

FRr (Fast Reverse): Press tofast reverse the disc. Press multipletimes to choose between 2X, 4X,8X, 16X, and 32X speeds.

FF[ (Fast Forward): Press tofast forward the disc. Press multipletimes to choose between 2X, 4X,8X, 16X, and 32X speeds.

PREVg (Previous): Press toplay the previous chapter or track.To return to previous chapters ortracks one at a time, press andrelease multiple times until thedesired chapter or track is reached.

NEXTl : Press to play the nextchapter or track. To go to the nextchapter or track one at a time, pressand release multiple times until thedesired chapter or track is reached.

Battery Replacement

To change batteries in the remotecontrol:

1. Turn the remote controlface down.

2. Press down on the ridged areaof the battery cover and slideit off.

3. Install two AAA batteries into thebattery compartment.

4. Slide the cover back on until itclicks.



If the remote control is to be storedfor a long period of time, remove thebatteries and keep it in a cool, dryplace.

Playing Audio CD

When an audio CD is playing, thedisplay shows the current track andthe amount of time that track hasbeen playing, the total amount oftime on the disc, and the currenttime running on the disc.

DISPLAY: Press to choose fromthe following display options:

1. Press DISPLAY once and SingleElapsed appears along with thecurrent track playing and thelength of time for that track.

2. Press DISPLAY twice and SingleRemain appears along with thecurrent track playing and theamount of time left on the track.

3. Press DISPLAY three times andTotal Elapsed appears alongwith the current track playingand the total time that hasplayed on the CD.

4. Press DISPLAY four times andTotal Remain appears along withthe current track playing and theamount of time left on the CD.

REPEAT: Press to toggle betweenTrack and All. The default for repeatis OFF.. Track repeats the track that is

playing.. All repeats the disc that is

playing.

Playing MP3 CD

MP3 is the format for storing digitalaudio. An audio CD quality songcan be compressed into the MP3format with very little loss of quality,while taking up much less space.CD-R/RW discs that have beenencoded in MP3 format can beplayed on the DVD player. See MP3on page 7‑27 for more information.

Selecting Folders and Songs

When an MP3 disc is inserted in theplayer, the navigation screenappears. The folders and songs can

be changed by navigating throughthe file system. The DVD playerplays the songs in the order theywere burned to the disc.

1. Press STOP if a disc is playing.Press the up or down navigationarrows on the remote control togo through the folder list on theleft side of the screen.

2. Press ENTER when the desiredfolder is highlighted.

3. Press the up or down navigationarrows to go through the songlist and highlight the desiredsong. Press ENTER to begin theplayback of the selected song.

Skipping a Song

NEXT: Press to go to thenext song.

PREV (Previous): Press to returnto the beginning of the song that iscurrently playing. Press PREV twiceto go to the previous song.



Selecting a Play Mode

The order the songs are played canbe temporarily chosen on a disc.The FOLDER play mode is thedefault. Press the REPEAT button toaccess the play mode options.

The play mode options are:. Single — Play a selected song.. Folder — Play the folder in the

order the songs were recorded.. Shuffle — Play the songs in

random order, from within theselected folder.

Using the REPEAT Feature

REPEAT: Press to change betweenRepeat One and Repeat Folder.. Repeat One — Repeats the

song that is playing.. Repeat Folder — Repeats the

folder that is playing.

Tips and Troubleshooting

IR Sensor Inoperative: Check thatthe batteries are good in the remotecontrol. Check that the remoteControl IR Sensor is not blocked.Aim the remote control toward theIR Sensor being controlled. Selectthe correct screen, 3 or 4.

No picture: Check that the correctvideo input mode is selected. Checkthat the video cable is plugged intothe jack securely.

No Sound: Check that the correctaudio input mode is selected. Checkthat the audio cable is securelyplugged into the jack.

Cleaning the Video Screens

The video display screens are madeof a specially coated glass and canbe scratched or damaged byabrasive products, solvents,or ammonia-based windowcleaners. Clean with a soft, lint-free,cotton cloth that has been slightly

dampened with warm water. Dry thescreens by wiping with a clean drycotton cloth.

Cleaning the Components

Use care when touching or cleaningthe components such as the DVDplayer or the discs.

Do not use DVD lens cleaners forDVD players because the lens ofthe DVD optics can becomecontaminated by lubricants.

Handle CDs and DVDs carefully.Store them in their original cases orother protective cases and awayfrom direct sunlight and dust. TheDVD player scans the bottomsurface of the disc. If the surface ofa CD or DVD is damaged, such ascracked, broken, or scratched, theCD or DVD may not play properly ornot at all. If the surface of a CD orDVD is soiled, take a soft, lint freecloth or dampen a clean, soft clothin a mild, neutral detergent solutionmixed with water, and clean it. Makesure the wiping process starts fromthe center to the edge.



Do not touch the bottom side of aCD or DVD while handling it; thiscould damage the surface. Pick upCDs or DVDs by grasping the outeredges or the edge of the hole andthe outer edge.

Rear Seat Audio (RSA)SystemVehicles with this feature allow therear seat passengers to listen toand control any of the musicsources: radio, CD, DVD, or otherauxiliary sources. The rear seatpassengers can control the samemusic sources the front seatpassengers are listening to (dualcontrol) or a different source. Forexample, rear seat passengers canlisten to and control a CD throughthe headphones, while the driverlistens to the radio through thespeakers. The rear seat passengershave control of the volume for eachset of headphones.

The radio functionality is controlledby both the RSA and the front radio,only one band can be tuned to atone time. Changing the band on theRSA or the front radio will changeband on the other system.

RSA functions can be operatedeven when the main radio is off.

Audio can be heard through wiredheadphones (not included) pluggedinto the jacks on the RSA. If thevehicle has this feature, audio canalso be heard on Channel 2 of thewireless headphones.

The audio system allows the rearspeakers to continue playing evenwhen the RSA audio is activethrough the headphones.

To listen to an iPod or portableaudio device through the RSA,attach the iPod or portable audiodevice to the auxiliary input (ifavailable), located below the RSA.

Turn the iPod on, then choose theauxiliary input with the RSA SRCEbutton. An iPod® or portable audiodevice can be connected to the frontauxiliary jack or the USB port.

P (Power): Press theP button toturn RSA on and off.

Volume: Turn this knob to increaseor to decrease the volume of thewired headphones. The left knobcontrols the left headphones andthe right knob controls the rightheadphones.

SRCE (Source): Press this buttonto switch between the radio (AM/FM), XM™ (if equipped), CD, and ifthe vehicle has these features,DVD, USB, auxiliary jack, and rearauxiliary.



© ¨ (Seek): When listening to FM,AM, or XM (if equipped), presseither the left © or right ¨ seekarrow to go to the previous or to thenext station or channels and staythere. This function is inactive, withsome radios, if the front seatpassengers are listening to theradio.

Press and hold either the left © or

right ¨ seek arrow until the displayflashes, to tune to an individualstation. The display stops flashingafter the buttons have not beenpushed for more than two seconds.This function is inactive, with someradios, if the front seat passengersare listening to the radio.

While listening to a disc, press theright ¨ seek arrow to go to the nexttrack or chapter on the disc. Pressthe left © seek arrow to go back tothe start of the current track orchapter (if more than ten secondshave played). This function isinactive, with some radios, if thefront seat passengers are listeningto the disc.

When a DVD video menu is beingdisplayed, press either the left © or

right ¨ seek arrow to perform acursor up or down on the menu.Hold the left © or right ¨ seek arrowto perform a cursor left or right onthe menu.

When a USB device is playing, theright or left seek button can be usedto control the device.

PROG (Program): Press thisbutton to go to the next preset radiostation or channel set on the mainradio. This function is inactive, withsome radios, if the front seatpassengers are listening to theradio.

When a CD or DVD audio disc isplaying, press this button to go tothe beginning of the CD or DVDaudio. This function is inactive, withsome radios, if the front seatpassengers are listening to the disc.

When a DVD video menu is beingdisplayed, press the PROG buttonto perform the menu function, enter.



Navigation

Using the NavigationSystemThis section presents basicinformation needed to operate thenavigation system.

Use the buttons located on thenavigation system along with theavailable touch-sensitive screenbuttons on the navigation screen tooperate the system. See Overviewon page 7‑4 for more information.

Once the vehicle is moving, variousfunctions are disabled to reducedriver distractions.

Navigation Control Buttons

The following control buttons arelocated on the navigation system:

O /n (Power/Volume):

1. Press to turn the system onand off.

2. Turn to increase or decrease thevolume to the audio system.

3. Press and hold for more thantwo seconds to turn off thenavigation system, the RearSeat Entertainment (RSE), andRear Seat Audio (RSA). If thevehicle has not been tuned off,the RSE and the RSA can beturned back on by pressing thisknob and continues play of thelast active source.

Z (Eject): Press to eject theCD/DVD Disc. See CD/DVD Playeron page 7‑18.

w (Tuning Knob): Turn to go tothe next or previous frequency ordisc track or chapter. See CD/DVDPlayer on page 7‑18 or MP3 onpage 7‑27 for more information.

AUDIO: Press to display the audioscreen. Press to switch betweenAM, FM, or XM, if equipped, DISC,or AUX (Auxiliary), or press on thescreen button. See CD/DVD Playeron page 7‑18, MP3 on page 7‑27,and Auxiliary Devices on page 7‑30for more information.

FAV (Favorite): Press to accessthe preset stations. See “StoringRadio Station Presets” under,Overview on page 7‑4.

5 (Phone): See OnStar Overviewon page 14‑1 (if equipped) andBluetooth on page 7‑103 (ifequipped) for more information.

e (Sound): Press to access theSound menu to adjust the treble,midrange, bass, fade, balance, andDigital Signal Processing (DSP).

y /z (Scan Up/Down): Press toscan the tracks/chapters up or downon a disc.

y / © or ¨ /z (Seek/Scan)(Previous/Next): Press the up ordown arrows to go to the next orprevious station. Press and holdeither arrow for more thantwo seconds. The radio goes to astation, plays for a few seconds,then goes to the next station.

NAV (Navigation): Press to viewthe vehicle's current position on themap screen. Each press of this



button cycles through Full Map andthe tab that displays the currentaudio source (AM, FM, XM (ifequipped), CD, etc.). Full Mapdisplays the screen in full map view.Selecting the audio tab splits thescreen between the map screen andthe current audio sourcescreen menu.

RPT (Repeat): Press to repeat thelast voice guidance prompt.

DEST (Destination): Press toaccess the Destination Entryscreen. From this screen, you canselect from several options to plan aroute by entering destination points.

CONFIG (Configure): Press toadjust several of the system'sfeatures and preferences.

Touch-Sensitive ScreenButtons

Touch-sensitive screen buttons arelocated on the screen. When ascreen button has been selected, a

beep sounds. Screen buttons arehighlighted when a feature isavailable.

Alpha-Numeric Keyboard

Letters of the alphabet, symbols,punctuation, and numbers, whenavailable, displays on the navigationscreen as an alpha or numerickeyboard. The alpha keyboarddisplays when the system requiresentry of a city or street name.

All characters are touch-sensitivescreen buttons. Press a character toselect it.

A-Y (Accent Alphabet): Select toenter letters with accent symbols.This button may toggle to A-Z.

A-Z (Alphabet): Select to enterletters from the alphabet. Thisbutton may toggle to A-Y.

0-9 (Numbers): Select to enternumbers.

U (Space): Select to enter aspace between characters or thewords of a name.

Backspace: Select if an incorrectcharacter has been entered.

To make name entries easier, thesystem only highlights thecharacters that can follow the lastone entered. For example, if a Z isentered, a T may not be availablefor selection.

If a name does not display afterentry, it may need to be entereddifferently or the map DVD disc maynot contain that information. SeeMaps on page 7‑63 for moreinformation.

MapsThis section includes basicinformation that you need to knowabout the map database.

The maps are stored on a compactflash drive that is built into thenavigation system.

Detailed Areas

Road network attributes arecontained in the map database fordetailed areas. Attributes include



information such as street names,street address, turn restrictions, etc.A detailed area includes all majorhighways, service roads, andresidential roads. The detailed areasinclude points of interest (POI) suchas: restaurants, airports, banks,hospitals, police stations, gasstations, tourist attractions, historicalmonuments, etc. The map databasemay not include data for newlyconstructed areas or map databasecorrections that are completed afterthe production of the compact flashdrive. The navigation systemprovides full route guidance in thedetailed map areas.

Limited Guidance Areas

Any area that is not classified asdetailed, is a limited guidance area.Limited guidance streets aredisplayed on the map but routeguidance may not be given on thesestreets. Some POI categories, suchas the city center POI category, andsome street addresses are includedin the limited guidance areas.

The navigation system informsthrough voice prompts when you aretraveling into a limited guidancearea where route guidance is notavailable. The street maps and thedirectional arrow displayed on thenavigation system can then be usedto determine the remaining route toyour destination.

Map Adjustments

The system lets you adjust the scaleof view on the map. Also, as youdrive, the map scrolls automaticallybased on the direction of travel.

Map Scales

+ / − (Zoom In/Zoom Out): Pressthe zoom in or out screen buttons orthe scale on the bar to change thelevel of map detail. The scaleappears on the screen once thezoom in or zoom out screen buttonsare selected. The system adjuststhe map accordingly. The scale of amap can range from 1/32 mi (50 m)to 256 mi (400 km). To change

English or metric, see DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5‑23 for more information.

Scrolling the Map

Press anywhere on the map screenand the scroll symbol appears. Usethis feature to scroll across the map.

Move your finger in any direction onthe map screen and the mapcontinues to scroll in that directionuntil you remove your finger fromthe screen.

If scrolling while the vehicle is inP (Park), the system scrolls initiallyat a slower rate. It increases if youcontinue pressing on the mapscreen.



If scrolling while the vehicle is inmotion, there is one scroll speedand a limited distance to scroll.Keep pressing on the map screen toscroll for a longer distance.

If you have used the scroll feature toscroll the map and the vehicle icondisappears off the screen, pressNAV to return to the current vehiclelocation on the map.

The scroll feature on the map canbe used to set a destination. See“From Map” under Destination onpage 7‑70 for more information.

While scrolling on the map, pressGO to calculate the route from thecurrent position to thedestination mark.

Navigation SymbolsThe following symbols are the mostcommon symbols that appear on amap screen.

The vehicle is shown as thissymbol. It indicates the currentposition and the direction thevehicle is traveling on the map.

The destination symbol appears onthe map, after a route has beenplanned, marking the finaldestination.

The stopover symbol displays onthe map after a stopover has beenadded to the route.

The stopover symbols arenumbered one through three,depending on how many stopovershave been set.

The distance to destination symbolindicates the distance to the finaldestination.

This symbol appears when the timeto the destination is not available orwhile you are scrolling on the map.



The distance and time to destinationsymbol indicates the distance andthe estimated time remaining to thefinal destination, depending on theoption selected.

The straight line to distance symbolindicates the straight-line distanceto the destination.

This symbol appears before youstart driving on the route or if on aroad where navigation guidancecannot be given.

The north up symbol indicates themap with North Up, known as NorthUp mode.

While in North Up mode, the vehicleicon follows the north direction onthe map regardless of whichdirection the vehicle is traveling.Press this screen symbol to switchbetween North Up, Heading Up, and3-D view modes.

The heading up symbol indicatesthat the vehicle is traveling up onthe map and is known as HeadingUp mode.



The shaded triangle indicates theNorth direction. While in HeadingUp mode the direction at the top ofthe screen and the way the vehicleicon is heading indicates thedirection the vehicle is traveling.Press this screen symbol to switchbetween Heading Up, North Up, and3-D view modes.

Three-dimensional (3-D) view modechanges the appearance of the mapdisplay to a road level view.

The No GPS symbol appears whenthe vehicle is acquiring or notreceiving a Global PositioningSystem (GPS) satellite signal.

See Global Positioning System(GPS) on page 7‑96 for moreinformation.

Press the Mark screen button tostore the location on the screen inthe address book.

The system automatically stores thepoint in the address book. See“Adding Destinations to the AddressBook” under Destination onpage 7‑70 for more information.

Displaying Points of Interest (POI)on the Map Screen

Select the POI screen button todisplay or delete POI icons fromthe map.

Displaying POI icons on the mapshows where POIs (e.g. restaurants,gas stations, etc.) are located. Thisscreen appears after selecting thePOI screen button.

1. Select one of the POI categoriesto display the POI icon at the topof the map screen. Select thePOI category again to delete thePOI icon.

2. Up to five categories can displayon the map screen.

3. Press the Show POI screenbutton to add more POI icons.



More: Press to view more POIcategories.

Franchise Search:

1. Press to display a list of pre-setfranchise categories near thevehicle's current location.

2. Press the desired franchisecategory.

3. Press Search SelectedCategories. A list of franchiseswith location information willdisplay.

POI Close to:

1. Once a category has beenselected, press this button todisplay the list of available POIsfor the selected POI category.The list provides the POI icon,the name, the direction, and thedistance to the POI from thevehicle's current position.

2. Use the scroll arrows to move upand down the list.

3. Use the sorting screen buttons:Dist (distance), Icon, Name, andon Route as needed.

GO: Press this screen button, nextto the desired POI, to make this POIa destination or a stopover.

Select a POI name to receiveinformation about the POI. From thisscreen you can select: AddressBook, Go, Map, or Call (ifBluetooth® or OnStar personalcalling is activated).

Address Book: Press to add thisPOI to the address book. See “Nav”under Configure Menu on page 7‑84for information on editing addressbook entries.

GO: Press to make this POI adestination or a stopover.

Map: Press to display the mapshowing the location of the POI.

Call: Press to dial the phonenumber using your Bluetooth®

phone (if “paired” with the vehicle)or the OnStar Hands-Free Callingsystem (if equipped). For moreinformation about Bluetooth calling,see Bluetooth on page 7‑103.

OK: Press to display the mapscreen.

Show POI: Press to display orremove the POI icons from the mapscreen.

List all Categories: Press to list allPOIs sorted alphabetically.

Delete: To delete a specific POIcategory, select the category.



Clear All: Press this screen buttonto clear all selected POI categories.

Driving on a Route

When driving on a routeddestination, the map screenautomatically displays the nextmaneuver.

The pop-up displays the nextmaneuver direction and the distancefrom it.

When approximately 400 m (1/4 mi)from the next maneuver, the screendisplays the name and a detailedview of it.

3-D Lane Guidance

Some major metropolitan areas mayinclude a 3-D lane guidance featurefor highway exits and junctions. Thisfeature gives you an enhancedrepresentation of the exits andjunctions on the route.



Dual Mode

This dual screen symbol displayswhen the screen is in dual mode.

Dual mode displays the route onhalf of the screen and a maneuveror Interstate Exit list on the otherhalf. The Interstate Exit list advisesof approaching exits. Press thisscreen button to switch betweendual screen and full screen whichdisplays the entire route.

Auto Reroute

When a destination is set but is offthe planned route, the systemautomatically plans a new route andbegins to reroute. The new route ishighlighted on the screen.

DestinationPress DEST to access theDestination Entry screen. From thisscreen, you can select from severaloptions to plan a route by enteringdestination points.

To enter a destination, choose fromone of the following destinationentry methods:

Address Entry

2 Address Entry: Enter either acity or street to use the addressentry destination method.

To enter a destination by inputtingthe city name first:

1. Press DEST.

2. Select2 (Address Entry).


4. Once a state or province hasbeen selected the City namecategory is automaticallyselected for entry.



Enter the City Name or press theLast 5 Cities screen button.

The Last 5 Cities screendisplays a list of the last five citynames that had been entered.Select a city from the list and itappears in the City name area.

If using the alpha keyboard,finish entering the city name.If five or fewer names areavailable, a list displays. If morethan five are available, the Listscreen button displays anumber. This number representsthe number of available cities.Press this button to view the listand select a city.

5. Once a city has been selectedthe Street name category isautomatically selected for entry.

Start entering the street name.If five or fewer names areavailable, a list displays. If morethan five are available, the Listscreen button displays a

number. This number representsthe number of available streets.Press this button to view the list.

6. Once a street has beenselected, press House to enterthe house number. The systemdisplays the house numberrange that is available for thestreet.

7. Press GO. The map screen, withthe destination marked displays.



See “Getting Started on YourRoute” in this section for moreinformation.

To enter a destination by enteringthe street name first:

1. Press DEST.

2. Select2.


4. Select Street and start enteringthe street name or press theLast 5 Streets screen button.

If the street name is common,the city might need to be enteredfirst.

The Last 5 Streets screendisplays a list of the last fivestreet names that had beenentered. Select a street from thelist and it appears in the Streetname area.

If using the alpha keyboard,finish entering the street name.If five or fewer names areavailable, a list displays. If morethan five are available, the Listscreen button displays anumber. This number represents



the number of available streets.Press this button to view the listand select a street.

5. Once a street has beenselected, select House to enterthe house number. The systemdisplays the house numberrange that is available for thestreet.

6. Once the house number isselected, the city nameautomatically populates. If thereis more than one city availablefor selection, a list of citiesdisplay. Select the city.





To enter a destination by entering across street:

1. Press DEST.

2. Press2.


4. Select Street and start enteringthe street name or press theLast 5 Streets screen button.

If the street name is common,the city might need to be enteredfirst.

The Last 5 Streets screendisplays a list of the last fivestreet names that had beenentered. Select a street from thelist and it appears in the Streetname area.

If using the alpha keyboard,finish entering the street name.If five or fewer names are

available, a list displays. If morethan five are available, the Listscreen button displays anumber. This number representsthe number of available streets.Press this button to view the listand select a street.

5. Once a street has beenselected, select Cross Streetand start entering the crossstreet name. If five or fewernames are available, a listdisplays. If more than five areavailable, the List screen buttondisplays a number. This numberrepresents the number ofavailable streets. Press thisbutton to view the list and selecta street.







Point of Interest (POI)

The Point of Interest (POI)destination entry method lets youselect a destination from thePOI list.

i Point of Interest: Press toaccess the POI (Point of Interest)screen. From this screen you havethree options to select/enter adestination. Enter the name using

the alpha keyboard, select acategory from the category list,or select the Franchise Searchscreen button to do a franchisesearch.

To use the point of interestdestination entry method by enteringthe name:

1. Press DEST.

2. Pressi.


4. Enter the POI name.

If five or fewer names areavailable, a list displays. If morethan five are available, the Listscreen button displays anumber. This number representsthe number of available POIs.Press this button to view the list.

5. Press GO, located next to thePOI. The map screen, with thedestination marked displays.




To use the point of interestdestination entry method byselecting a category:

1. Press DEST.

2. Pressi.

3. Press Browse POI Categories toview the list of POI categories.

4. Select a category.

The system displays availablePOI names in the selectedcategory.







To use the point of interestdestination entry method byselecting to do a franchise search:

1. Press DEST.

2. Pressi.

3. Press Franchise Search to viewa list of franchise categories.

4. Select a category.

The system displays availablePOI names in the selectedcategory.





Address Book

The address book entry method letsyou select a destination by selectingan address that has been stored inthe address book.

g Address Book: Press toaccess the Address Book screen.From this screen an address thatalready exists can be selected asthe destination.



To use the address book entrymethod:

1. Press DEST.

2. Pressg.

A list of the address bookaddresses display.

3. Press GO, located next to thedestination. The map screen,with the destination markeddisplays.




See “Adding Destinations to theAddress Book” in this section.

Previous Destination

The previous destination entrymethod lets you select a destinationfrom a list of previous destinationpoints.

/ Previous Destination: Press toaccess the Previous Destinationscreen. The system stores up to20 points that have been previouslyentered. As new destinations areentered, the system automaticallydeletes the oldest destinations andadds the new destinations.

To use the previous destinationentry method:

1. Press DEST.

2. Press /.

3. Select a previous destinationfrom the list. Use the arrow tothe right of the destination toview the entire destination nameas necessary. Use the scrollarrows to the left to scrollthrough the list.

4. Press GO, located next to thedestination. The map screen,with the destination markeddisplays.






From Map

This destination entry method allowsyou to select a destination byscrolling on the map.

) From Map: Press to enter theFrom Map destination entry method.

To use this destination entrymethod:

1. Press DEST.

2. Press ). A map screen displayswith the scrolling symbol.

3. Use 0 / 1 and press on themap to find the area that youwould like to select as yourdestination.

Pressing/holding and draggingyour finger on the map activatesfast scrolling.

4. Press once on the area that youwould like to set as yourdestination.

The map screen displays theaddress information.





Map Coordinates

The coordinates destination entrymethod lets you select a destinationby entering latitude and longitudecoordinates.

Map Coordinates: Press to accessthe Coordinates Entry screen.

To use the coordinates destinationentry method:

1. Press DEST.

2. Press From Map.

3. Press Map Coordinates.



4. Press Latitude and select eitherN (North) or S (South) to enterthe direction of the latitudecoordinate. Enter the numericportion of the latitude coordinate.

5. Press Longitude and selecteither E (East) or W (West) nextto enter the direction of thelongitude coordinate. Enter thenumeric portion of the longitudecoordinate.

6. Once both coordinates areentered, press GO. The mapscreen, with the destinationmarked displays.




Preset Destination

The preset destination entry methodlets you set a destination byselecting from one of five previouslystored destinations. Besides voicetagged destinations, these are theonly destinations available to setwhile the vehicle is moving. If adestination is not set for one of thescreen buttons, the button isdimmed and not available for use.See “Adding or Changing PresetDestinations” in this section forinformation on how to add a presetdestination.

To use the preset destination entrymethod:

1. Press DEST.

2. Select the desired presetdestination screen button. Thescreen buttons are labeled withthe name that was selected forthe destination when it wasstored. The map screen, with thedestination marked displays.






Map Destination Screen Functions

If the map screen is used to showdestination, it will have map screencapabilities such as GO, Mark,Zoom, Scroll, etc. The address isshown at the top of the screen.

Destination Map Screen

Low Fuel Warning

When the fuel in the vehiclebecomes low, a pop-up displays“Fuel is low. Search for nearby Gasstation?”

1. Press OK to show a list ofnearby gas stations.

2. Press GO next to the desiredgas station for locationinformation.

3. Press Cancel if the list of NearGas Station is not needed.

For more information, see DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5‑23.

OnStar® Destination Download(US and Canada)

OnStar Destination Download (ifequipped) is a service available forOnStar subscribers that makesoperating your navigation systemmuch simpler. It allows subscribersto request and receive navigationassistance on-the-go.

Using OnStar® DestinationDownload (US and Canada)

Press the blue OnStar button andan Advisor can locate apoint-of-interest or an address anddownload the necessary informationor coordinates to your navigationsystem. Once the destination isdownloaded, the navigation systemwill search for the address in themapping disc's database. When theaddress is found, it will be shown onyour navigation system's screenalong with the buttons describedbelow.



OnStar Destination DownloadScreen

. Press GO, the navigation systemcalculates route(s). Select aroute (i.e. Shortest Route), andStart Guidance.

. Press Map, the navigationsystem displays the DestinationMap Screen.

. Press Call, the navigationsystem initiates a call to yourdestination with your Bluetoothphone (if available) or OnStarHands-Free Calling (if minutesare available).

. Press Add to Address Book, thenavigation system copies thedownloaded destination to theaddress book and displays thenew address book entry.

. Press Back, the navigationsystem cancels your OnStarDestination Download andreturns to the previous screen.The downloaded address will notbe added to the previousdestinations

Route Guidance Not Active

If an OnStar destination isdownloaded while route guidance isnot active, the navigation systemdisplays an OnStar DestinationDownload Screen and operationswill continue as outlined in theUsing OnStar Destination Downloadsection:

Route Guidance Active

If OnStar downloads a destinationwhile route guidance is alreadyactive, the navigation system addsthe downloaded destination as the

next waypoint in the existing route.All features such as Call and Add toAddress Book will be available forthe waypoint. Refer to the sectionon Waypoints for more information.

Previous Destinations

Previous OnStar DestinationDownloads are saved underPrevious Destinations in thenavigation system where they canbe accessed or saved to theaddress book.

Important Notes regarding OnStarDestination Download:. If the navigation system is

turned off when the destinationdownload is attempted, thenavigation system willautomatically turn on and displaythe OnStar DestinationDownload Screen. The radio willremain on after the downloadoccurs.

. If OnStar downloads adestination and the address isnot found in the mapping disc’s



database and routing bycoordinates is not available, theGO and Map buttons gray outand routing will not be available.Press the blue OnStar button forfurther assistance.

. The Call button grays out whenthere is no phone numberavailable for your destinationand while connected to OnStar.

Map Destination Screen Functions

If the map screen is used to showdestination, it will have map screencapabilities such as GO, Mark,Zoom, Scroll, etc. The address isshown at the top of the screen.

Destination Map Screen

Getting Started on Your Route

Once a destination has beenentered, there are several functionsthat can be performed. Press DESTto access the Route screen.



Turn List

Press to view the list of turnmaneuvers for the entire route andto avoid turns on the route.

r /q (Scroll Arrows): Press thearrows to scroll through the list ofmaneuvers.

Avoid: Press this screen button,next to the adjacent street name, toavoid the maneuver.

The map screen displays. The routerecalculates without this maneuver.

Route Preview: Press to previewthe entire route in either direction.

t (Reverse Skip): Press to goback to the start point or previousstopover.

q /r (Reverse Scroll): Press toscroll to the start point or previousstopover. The t (reverse skip)button changes to a fast reversescreen button.

j (Pause): Press to pause theroute preview, while in reverse orfast forward scroll.

r /[ (Fast Forward Scroll):Press to scroll to the next stopoveror to the final destination. The u(fast forward skip) button changesto a fast speed fast forward.

u (Fast Forward Skip): Press togo to the next stopover or to thefinal destination.

Detour

Press this screen button from theRoute screen, then select to detour2 km, 5 km, 10 km (1 mile, 3 miles,or 5 miles) around the current route.This can also be selected to detourthe whole route if necessary. Thedetour option is only available whiledriving on a current planned route.

Voice Volume

Press this screen button from theRoute screen to turn voice guidanceon or off and to change the volumeof voice prompts. See “Nav” underConfigure Menu on page 7‑84 formore information.



Add Stopover

Press this screen button from theRoute screen. This feature allowsup to three stopovers to be added tothe current route between the startpoint and final destination. Once astopover has been added, thepoints can be edited or deleted.

To add a stopover:

1. Press DEST.

2. Press the Add Stopover screenbutton. This button only appearsif a route has been calculated.

3. Using the desired method ofentering a destination, enter thestopover. See “Destination”previously for more information.



6. To add the second and thirdstopovers, press DEST, thenpress the Add screen button,where the next waypoint shouldappear on the route.



To delete a stopover from thecurrent route:

1. Press DEST.

2. Press Delete for the desiredstopover to delete.

3. The system displays a pop-upconfirmation message. PressYes to delete the stopover; pressNo to cancel this operation.



Suspend Guidance

Press this screen button, from theRoute screen, to put the currentroute on hold.

Resume Guidance

Press this screen button, from theRoute screen, to resume guidanceon the current route.

Cancel Guidance

Press this screen button, from theRoute screen, to cancel the currentroute.



Adding Destinations to theAddress Book

There are two ways to add adestination to the address book:. To add the current vehicle

position to the address book,press the Mark screen buttonfrom the map screen. Thesystem automatically saves thecurrent vehicle information in theaddress book. When scrolling onthe map the Mark screen buttonautomatically adds the currentscrolled position information inthe address book.

. Press the Add to Address Bookscreen button when available onPOI information screens,Destination Entry screens,or POI screens. The systemautomatically saves thisinformation in the address book.

See “Nav” under Configure Menu onpage 7‑84 for information on editingaddress book entries.

Adding or Changing PresetDestinations

This feature allows additions orchanges one of five presetdestinations. When a destinationhas been added as a presetdestination, it is available to selectfrom the Destination Entry screen.See “Preset Destination” previouslyfor information on how to select apreset destination as a finaldestination.

To store the current vehicle positionas a preset destination:

1. Press Mark from the map screento add the current vehicleposition to the address book.The Address Book screenappears.

2. Press Name. An alpha-keyboarddisplays. Enter the name. PressOK then press Back to return tothe address book informationscreen.

3. Press and hold one of thebuttons at the bottom of thescreen until the name appears inthat preset destination screenbutton. It is now available toselect from the Destination Entryscreen.

To store an address book entry as apreset destination:

1. Press CONFIG.

2. Press the Nav screen button.

3. Press Edit/View.

4. Select the address book entry tobe stored as the presetdestination. Press Name to adda name, if needed.

5. Press and hold one of thebuttons at the bottom of thescreen until the name appears inthat preset destination screenbutton. It is now available toselect from the Destination Entryscreen.



Configure Menu

Press CONFIG to adjust several ofthe system's features andpreferences. The last selectedCONFIG screen is the screen thatdisplays: Sound, Radio, Nav(navigation), Display, or Time.

Sound

Press CONFIG to enter theconfigure menu options, then pressCONFIG again, repeatedly untilSound is selected or press theSound screen button to makespeaker and DSP (Digital SignalProcessing) adjustments. See“Sound Menu” under, AM-FM Radioon page 7‑9 for more information.

Radio

Press CONFIG to enter theconfigure menu options, then pressCONFIG again, repeatedly untilRadio is selected or press the Radioscreen button to make changes forradio information displayed, presetpages, XM (if equipped) categories,and Bose AudioPilot. See “RadioMenu” under, AM-FM Radio onpage 7‑9 for more information.

Nav (Navigation)

Press CONFIG to enter theconfigure menu options, then pressCONFIG again, repeatedly until Navis selected or press the Nav screenbutton.

Voice Prompt

Press the Voice Prompt screenbutton to change the volume of thevoice prompts or to turn voiceguidance on and off.



Volume: Press + or − to increaseor to decrease the volume of thevoice prompts. The system willrespond with the adjusted voicelevel.

Voice Guidance: Press On or Offto turn voice instructions on and offwhile traveling on a planned route.

Route Preference

Press the Route Preference screenbutton to change route optionswhen the system calculates a route.

Allow Major Roads: This featureallows the system to use majorroads when calculating a plannedroute.

Allow Toll Roads: This featureallows the system to use toll roadswhen calculating a planned route.

Allow Ferrys: This feature allowsthe system to use ferries whencalculating a planned route.

Allow Time and SeasonalRestricted Roads: This featureallows the system to use timerestricted and seasonal roads whencalculating a planned route.

Edit Address Book — How to Add

To add an address to the addressbook, see “Adding Destinations tothe Address Book” underDestination on page 7‑70.

Edit Address Book — Edit/View

To edit the name of anaddress book:

1. Press CONFIG.


3. Press Edit/View Address Book.

4. Select the Address book entry.

5. Press the Name screen buttonand use the alpha keyboard toedit or add the name.

6. Press OK to save your changes,then press Back to return to theAddress Book informationscreen.

To add or change the phone numberof an address book entry:

1. Press CONFIG.



4. Select the address book entry tochange.



5. Press the Phone # screen buttonand use the numeric keyboard toinput or change the phonenumber.

6. Press OK to save your changes,then press Back to return to theAddress Book informationscreen.

To change the map icon of anaddress book entry:

1. Press CONFIG.



4. Select the address book entry tochange.

5. Press the Icon screen button.

6. Select an icon from the list.

To add a voice tag to an addressbook entry:

1. Press CONFIG.



4. Press Add Voice Tag.

5. The system will ask for you tostate the name. You will havefour seconds to state the name.The system will respond backwith the name and prompt you torepeat the name forconfirmation.

To delete an address book entry:

1. Press CONFIG.



4. Select the address book entry todelete.

5. Press Delete to delete theaddress book entry.

6. A confirmation pop-up willdisplay. Press OK to delete;press Cancel to cancel theoperation.

To delete the entire address book:

1. Press CONFIG.



4. A list of all the address bookentries will display. Press andhold Clear All.

5. A confirmation pop-up willdisplay. Press OK to delete;press Cancel to cancel theoperation.

Map Database Information

Use the Map Database Information/Remove Map Data screen button toview the coverage areas of the mapdatabase or to replace the mapdatabase.



1. Press the Map DatabaseInformation/Remove Map Datascreen button to display the MapCoverage Area screen.

2. Press the Remove Map Datascreen button to remove themap data. A screen showing,“The Map can now be safelyremoved” displays.

3. Press the confirmation screenbutton to safely remove themap data.

If the map data is not removed, themap database will not be availablefor that ignition cycle. Map databasefunctionality can be restored bycycling the ignition.

Off-Road Mode

To turn the Off-road mode on or off:

1. Press CONFIG.


3. Press Off-Road mode. Thebutton will be highlighted whenthe feature is on.

When the off-road mode is turnedon, the navigation system will showthe path being traveled by thevehicle when not on a marked road.This path will be a simulation sincethe map database coverage will nothave these roads on the DVD. Thispath will be stored in the navigationsystem's memory, see “PreviousDestination” under Destination onpage 7‑70 for more information.

See Defensive Driving on page 9‑3for more information about off-roaddriving.

Traffic Options (US andCanada)

Read the following Optionsdescriptions to understand how theXM NavTraffic™ operates.

XM NavTraffic (USA andCanada)

Vehicles with the navigation systemhave an XM NavTraffic receiver. XMNavTraffic is a subscription serviceprovided via XM Satellite Radio. XMNavTraffic provides real-time trafficinformation fully integrated to thenavigation system to display currenttraffic conditions for a driver’schosen route. XM NavTraffic allowsdrivers to make the most informed,timesaving routing decisions.

If the Traffic screen button ispressed or if an attempt is made toturn on the traffic display in theNavigation Setup Menu without asubscription, a Caution screendisplays indicating that XM traffic isnot activated.



Three types of traffic information formajor roadways are displayed onthe navigation system:. Unscheduled traffic incident

data, such as accidents anddisabled vehicles

. Scheduled traffic incident data,such as road construction androad closures

. Traffic flow information (rate ofspeed data)

Traffic information is delivered to thevehicle by the XM Radio satellites.XM NavTraffic makes it possible forthe navigation system to providecontinuously updated trafficinformation personalized for adriver’s needs.

XM NavTraffic currently broadcaststhe traffic information for manymarkets nationally, and theservice may be available inmore cities in the future. Visitwww.xmnavtraffic.com for moredetails on local coverage.

A service fee is required in order toreceive the XM NavTraffic service.

Turning XM NavTraffic On and Off

To turn traffic on or off:

1. Press CONFIG, then pressCONFIG repeatedly until Nav isselected or press the Navscreen button.

2. Press the Traffic Options button.

3. Press the Traffic button. Thisbutton is highlighted when it isactive.

Selecting Alert for ApproachingTraffic Events enables thesystem to show a pop-up screenthat notifies of possible trafficissues ahead.

When this feature is highlighted,while traveling on a route,accidents located on the routeare indicated and can beavoided.



Traffic Icon

The Traffic Icon appears on theTraffic Tab, next to the word Traffic,when traffic is found in thelocal area.

The Traffic Icon has three differentcondition displays. These are:

ConditionTraffic

Status Icon. No XM

NavTraffic™subscription.

. No Traffic isfound in thelocal area.

. The TrafficFeature isturned off.

ConditionTraffic

Status Icon

Traffic events arein the area, butnone are onroute.

Traffic events areon route.

Locations and Information ofTraffic Conditions

The system may take some time tosort the information. The list oftraffic conditions display in the orderof distance from the vehicle, up toapproximately 125 km (75 mi). Witha route planned, the system defaultsto list traffic events on your route.

Without a route planned, if travellingon a major interstate, the systemlists events immediately ahead onthe interstate first. Then all othertraffic events follow. Not all trafficconditions may be listed.

To view the traffic condition locationand information on the map:

1. Press NAV, then press NAVrepeatedly until Traffic isselected, or press the Trafficscreen button. A list of trafficconditions with distance from thevehicle's current positiondisplays.



An arrow may appear before thedistance. The arrow indicatesthe distance is a straight linedistance and it shows thedirection of the event from thecurrent vehicle's position. If noarrow appears, the distanceindicates how far the event isahead on current Interstatehighway or route. While thevehicle is moving, the traffic listup or down, scroll arrows arelimited to a maximum offour pages. No more thanfour pages of traffic events maybe viewed while the vehicle ismoving.

2. Select a traffic condition to getmore detailed information of theevent.

Options

Press the Options screen button.A Traffic Options menu displays.Select the desired traffic relatedoption.

Traffic: Press to enable or disablethe traffic function.

Show Traffic ICONS: Press todisplay traffic icons on the mapscreen. This function allows whichtraffic information displays.

Traffic Flow Status — This screenbutton is used to enable or disablethe green, yellow, red and orangearrows shown beside the roads andused to show the traffic flow orextent of a traffic event.. Black indicates a closed road

segment.. Red indicates significantly

impaired traffic flow with averagespeed of fewer than 40 km/h(25 mph).



. Yellow indicates slightly impairedtraffic flow with average speedbetween 40 km/h (25 mph) and72 km/h (45 mph).

. Green indicates normal trafficflow with average speed above72 km/h (45 mph).

. Orange indicates construction.

Traffic flow data arrows display onthe map when scaled up toeight miles.

Closed Road, Traffic Delays,Incidents, and Advisories — Thesefour screen buttons are used toselect the traffic event ICONS thatappear on the map screens.

Alert for Approaching TrafficEvents: When On, if anapproaching traffic event is withinthe alert range, one of two trafficalert pop-up screens display:. With no route planned, while on

expressways, ApproachingTraffic Event without Avoidscreen displays.

. With route planned, Traffic Eventon Route screen displays.

If the Alert for Approaching TrafficEvents is Off, the alert pop-upscreen does not display.

On-Route

Select the On Route screen buttonto display all events ahead on thecurrent active route. If no trafficevents have been reported on route,No Traffic Events Reported Onroute displays.

Name

Press the Name screen button todisplay traffic events in the order ofdistance. The closest event isshown first.

Refresh

Press the Refresh screen button toupdate the screen with all of thelatest traffic events, miles, etc.

Traffic events update approximatelyevery two minutes. To update theevents immediately, press theRefresh screen button.



Scrolling to Traffic Events onthe Map

While scrolling the map, trafficcondition icons may appear. Trafficevents may appear up to 75 mi(125 km) from your current position.To receive information about thetraffic condition, place the crosshairs over the traffic condition icon.

After pressing the INFO(information) screen button, the typeof traffic condition, the street name,and a description of the traffic

condition displays. See “Scrollingthe Map” under Maps on page 7‑63for more information.

To display traffic events in anotherstate or a great distance away,scroll to the desired area, and thenstop scrolling. Wait for the traffic toupdate. It may take up totwo minutes before traffic in this newarea can be received and displayed.

Traffic Event Display Categories

The following are traffic conditioncategories and symbols that canappear on the display:

Category 1, Road Closure:

q (Road Closed): Road and/orramps closed.

Category 2, Traffic Delayed:

o (Stopped Traffic): Trafficstopped, stop and go traffic, delayedand congested traffic.

Category 3, Incidents:

p (Alert): Object in the roadway,disabled vehicle, or dangerous roadconditions.

t (Accident): Roadway obstructeddue to accident.

s (Road Works): Delayed trafficdue to construction.

Category 4, Advisories:

j / r (Road Condition): Delayedor stopped traffic, lane blocked orclosed due to a road condition.

k (Weather): Heavy rain, snow,or fog weather condition.

m (Parking): Availableparking area.

l (Information): Special event,general information, or warning.



Detailed Traffic Event Screens

Traffic Event Screen

The detailed Traffic Event screensare used to display additional detailsof a traffic event condition. Thisscreen may display if:. Scrolling to an event on the map

and then pressing INFO.. Selecting a traffic event listed on

the Traffic Event List screen.

The Traffic Event screen maydisplay when approaching a trafficevent.

Back, Map, More, and Avoid

These buttons have commonfunctions across all three DetailedTraffic Event screens.

Back: Press to return to theprevious screen.

Map: If available, press to displaythe related traffic event on the map.

Map Traffic Event Icon with BackScreen

More: Press to display more of thetraffic event description, if the wholeevent does not fit in the givendisplay.

Avoid: This button is used to avoidthe location of an event on theroute. If pressed, a new route iscalculated and the related trafficevent is avoided. After the newroute has been calculated, thenavigation system goes to the fullmap screen and shows the newroute.

The Avoid button is only available ifthe event is on the route ahead.

Traffic Voice Prompts

The traffic voice prompts are part ofthe current navigation voiceprompts. If the navigation voiceprompts are turned off, all trafficprompts are also turned off.

If the voice prompts are on,whenever an Alert for ApproachingTraffic is displayed, the systemgives the related voice prompt. Thecontent of the voice promptdepends on actual traffic event data.



The RPT (Repeat) button is fornavigation traffic maneuvers only.It is not used to repeat trafficprompts. During a traffic voiceprompt, if RPT is pressed, thecurrent prompt playback cancels.

Traffic prompts are disabled duringOnStar (if equipped) or VoiceRecognition activity.

XM Weather (If Equipped)

Press the Weather screen button todisplay the Current or ExtendedForecast Weather.

The Extended Forecast Weatherscreen displays five days of theforecasted weather at the vehicle’scurrent position.

Press the Location button locatednear the top leftside of the screen tochange the current location to a newlocation from a list of 156 supportedcities. The display will then updatethe extended forecast for the newchosen location.

Press the Current Weather buttonlocated near the bottom leftside ofthe Extended Forecast Screen todisplay the current weather at thevehicle’s current position. Weatheralerts will also be displayed in theAlerts nearby area. These alertsinclude Flash Flood Warning, FloodWarning, Special Marine Warning,Tornado Warning, andThunderstorm Warning.

Alert Notification: Press the AlertNotification button located at thebottom rightside of the CurrentWeather screen turns on or offWeather alert pop-ups. The WeatherAlert Pop-up, when turned on, willappear briefly in any audio source,providing alert notification duringextreme weather warnings close tothe vehicle’s current position.



Display

Press CONFIG to enter theconfigure menu options, then pressCONFIG repeatedly until Display isselected or press the Display screenbutton.

Display OFF

Press this screen button to turn thedisplay off. Press any control buttonto view the display.

Brightness/Contrast/Mode

Press this screen button to changethe brightness, contrast, and modeof the display.

] (Brightness): Press + or − toincrease or decrease the brightnessof the screen.

_ (Contrast): Press + or − toincrease or decrease the contrast ofthe screen.

Auto (Automatic): Press so thesystem can automatically adjust thescreen background depending onexterior lighting conditions.

Night: Press to make the mapbackground darker.

Day: Press to make the mapbackground brighter.

Rear Vision Camera (If Equipped)

Rear Camera Options: Press todisplay options available.

The available options are:

Video: Press to turn on or off.

Symbols: Press to turn on or off.

Guiding Lines: Press to turn onor off.



For more information about the RearVision Camera, see Rear VisionCamera (RVC) on page 9‑48 in thevehicle owner manual.

Rear Display(s)

Press the Rear Display(s) screenbutton to allow the choice ofsources for rear display betweenfront disc, rear aux, or usb,if connected.

Setting the Clock

The navigation system time and theanalog clock operate independently.Changing the time through thenavigation system does not changethe time on the analog clock. SeeClock on page 5‑7 to change theanalog clock time.

Press CONFIG to enter theconfigure menu options, then pressCONFIG repeatedly until the time isselected or press the time screenbutton.

Hours: Press − or + to decrease orincrease the hours.

Minutes: Press − or + to decreaseor increase the minutes.

12/24 Format: Select the12 screen button for standard time;select the 24 screen button formilitary time.

Global PositioningSystem (GPS)The navigation system determinesthe position of the vehicle by usingsatellite signals, various vehiclesignals, and map data.

At times, other interferences suchas the satellite condition, roadconfiguration, the condition of thevehicle and/or other circumstancescan interfere with the navigationsystem's ability to determine theaccurate position of the vehicle.

The GPS shows the current positionof the vehicle using signals sent bythe GPS Satellites of the UnitedStates Department of Defense.When the vehicle is not receivingsignals from the satellites, a symbolappears on the map screen. Referto Global Positioning System (GPS)on page 7‑96.



This system may not be available orinterferences may occur if any of thefollowing are true:. Signals are obstructed by tall

buildings, trees, large trucks,or a tunnel.

. Objects are located on the frontdash of the vehicle.

. Satellites are being repaired orimproved.

. After-market glass tinting hasbeen applied to the vehicle'swindshield.

Notice: Do not apply after-marketglass tinting to the vehicle'swindows. Glass tinting interfereswith the system's ability toreceive GPS signals and causesthe system to malfunction. Thewindow might have to bereplaced to correct the problem.This would not be covered by thewarranty.

For more information if the GPS isnot functioning properly, see VehiclePositioning on page 7‑97 andProblems with Route Guidance onpage 7‑98.

Vehicle PositioningAt times, the position of the vehicleon the map may be inaccurate dueto one or more of the followingreasons:. Road system has changed.. Vehicle is driving on slippery

road surfaces such as in sand,gravel, and/or snow.

. Vehicle is traveling on windingroads.

. Vehicle is on a longstraight road.

. Vehicle is approaching a tallbuilding or a large vehicle.

. Surface streets run parallel to afreeway.

. Vehicle has just been transferredby a vehicle carrier or a ferry.

. Current position calibration is setincorrectly.

. Vehicle is traveling at highspeed.

. Vehicle changes directions morethan once, or when the vehicle isturning on a turn table in aparking lot.

. Vehicle is entering and/or exitinga parking lot or a garage.

. GPS signal is not received.

. Roof carrier is installed on thevehicle.

. Vehicle is being driven with tirechains.

. Tires are replaced.

. Tire pressure for the tires isincorrect.

. Tires are worn.

. First time the map DVD isinserted.

. Battery is disconnected forseveral days.



. Vehicle is driving in heavy trafficwhere driving is at low speeds,and the vehicle is stopped andstarted repeatedly.

See your dealer if other problemsoccur.

Problems with RouteGuidanceInappropriate route guidance mayoccur under one or more of thefollowing conditions:. You have not turned onto the

road indicated.. Route guidance may not be

available when using automaticrerouting for the next right orleft turn.

. The route may not be changedwhen using automatic rerouting.

. There is no route guidance whenturning at an intersection.

. Plural names of places may beannounced occasionally.

. It may take a long time tooperate automatic reroutingduring high-speed driving.

. Automatic rerouting may displaya route returning to the setstopover if you are heading for adestination without passingthrough a set stopover.

. The route prohibits the entry of avehicle due to a regulation bytime or season or any otherregulation which may be given.

. Some routes may not besearched.

. The route to the destination maynot be shown if there are newroads, if roads have recentlychanged, or if certain roads arenot listed on the map DVD. SeeDatabase CoverageExplanations on page 7‑99

To recalibrate the vehicle's positionon the map, see your dealer.

If the System NeedsServiceIf the navigation system needsservice and the steps listed herehave been followed but there arestill problems, see your dealer forassistance.

Map Data UpdatesThe navigation map database isstored on a compact flash card. It isusable only in this type of navigationsystem, and will not function in otherelectronic devices.

The map in the vehicle was installedby the factory and is the mostup-to-date information available asthe vehicle was produced. This mapmay have to be updatedperiodically, provided that the mapinformation has changed. See yourdealer for service.



Ordering Map Data Updates

The map database in the vehicle isthe most up-to-date informationavailable when the vehicle wasproduced. The map database isupdated periodically, provided thatthe map information has changed.

United States and Canada

For any questions about the systemor the update process, contact theGM Nav Disc Center toll-free phonenumber, 1-877-NAV-DISC(1-877-628-3472) or go to thecenter's website,www.gmnavdisc.com. For anyupdates or replacements, call theGM Nav Disc Center or order thenew database online. Have theVehicle Identification Number (VIN)available when ordering to ensurethe correct and most up-to-date mapdatabase for the vehicle is sent. See“Vehicle Identification Number(VIN)” in the index of the vehicleowner manual for more information.

Mexico

For any questions about theoperation of the navigation systemor the update process, contactGeneral Motors of Mexico,Customer Care Center Cadillactoll-free phone number,01-800-466-0805 or write [email protected]. Have theVehicle Identification Number (VIN)available when ordering to ensurethe correct and most up-to-dateDVD map disc for the vehicle issent. See “Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN)” in the Index of thevehicle owner manual for moreinformation.

After receiving the updated mapdatabase, see your dealer forreplacement.

Database CoverageExplanationsCoverage area depends upon themap detail available. Some areashave greater map detail than others.The navigation system works onlyas well as the information providedon the stored map data. See MapData Updates on page 7‑98 on howto obtain updated map information.



Voice RecognitionThe navigation system's voicerecognition allows for hands-freeoperation of the navigation system,audio system, and OnStar (ifequipped) features.

Voice recognition can be used whenthe ignition is on or when RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) is active.See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) on page 9‑26 for moreinformation.

To use voice recognition:

1. Press and hold SRCE locatedon the steering wheel until youhear a beep. The audio systemmutes.

2. Clearly state one of thecommands listed on thefollowing pages.

Helpful Hints for StatingCommands. When a multiple command is

available, choose the commandthat works best.

. Words that are in brackets areoptional. For example, for thecommand Radio [band] [select]FM, stating Radio FM or Radioselect FM are both validcommands.

. When the system recognizes thecommand the system does oneof the following:

‐ Perform the function.

‐ Ask you to confirm yourchoice.

‐ Issue an error message “Didnot recognize. VoiceRecognition Canceled.”

. If you experience difficulty withthe system recognizing acommand, try saying it moresoftly, and wait for a fewseconds after the beep,or repeat the command.



. Background noise may causevoice commands to bemisunderstood, including airflownoise from wind.

. To use the voice recognitionsystem, the map DVD must beloaded and the navigationsystem must be on.

This system is able to recognizecommands in three differentlanguages. The system onlyrecognizes commands based on thelanguage selected from the DriverInformation Center (DIC). SeeDriver Information Center (DIC) onpage 5‑23 for more information.

Voice Recognition Commands

The following list shows all of thevoice commands available for thenavigation system with a briefdescription of each. The commandsare listed with the optional words inbrackets. To use the voicecommands, refer to the instructionslisted previously.

Voice Tag Commands

The following are voice tagcommands that can be accessed byclearly stating the commandsexactly as they are written. Thereare up to 40 voice tag entries fordestinations.

Navigation go to [destination],navigation select: Thesecommands instruct the system toselect a destination saved under thevoice tag you have stored. Thesystem prompts for a destinationname then waits for you to statethe name.

If not currently driving on a route,the system automatically creates thevoice tag destination as the finaldestination. If driving on a route, thesystem automatically creates thevoice tag destination as a stopover.Up to three stopovers can becreated.

Storing Voice Tags

From the address book entryinformation page, press the AddVoice tag screen button. Thesystem responds “Name Please?”and you will have four seconds torecord a name. The system asks forconfirmation of the name beforesaving it as a voice tag.

Navigation Help

This command instructs the systemto assist with navigation commands.

Display Commands

Use the following display commandsto set the display mode.

Display [set] day [mode]: Sets thedisplay to daytime mode.

Display [set] night [mode]: Setsthe display to night mode.

Display [set] auto [mode]: Setsthe display to automatic mode. Thesystem changes between day andnight mode automatically.



System help: Instructs the systemto assist with display commands.

Radio Commands

The following are radio commandsthat can be accessed by clearlystating the commands exactly asthey are written.

Radio [band] [select] AM, radio[band] [select] FM, radio [band][select] XM (if equipped), radio[band] [select] satellite (ifequipped): Instructs the systemto go to either the AM, FM, or XM(if equipped).

Radio [select] (frequency) AM,radio [select] (frequency) FM:Instructs the system to go to aspecific frequency on either AMor FM.

Radio [select] (channel) XM(if equipped), radio [select](channel) satellite (if equipped):Instructs the system to go to aspecific channel on the XM band(if equipped).

Radio help: Instructs the system toassist with radio commands.

CD Commands

The following are CD, MP3, andDVD commands that can beaccessed by clearly stating thecommands exactly as they arewritten.

CD, DVD, Disc: Use this commandto select a CD, DVD, or disc that iscurrently loaded.

CD, DVD, Disc, [select] track (one,two, three, etc.): Instructs thesystem to select a specific tracknumber.

CD, DVD, Disc select nextfolder: Use this command to selectthe next folder on the MP3 oraudio DVD.

CD, DVD, Disc select previousfolder: Use this command to selectthe previous folder on the MP3 oraudio DVD.

CD help, DVD help, Disc help:Instructs the system to assist withCD and DVD commands.

Auxiliary Commands

The following auxiliary commandscan be accessed by clearly statingthe commands exactly as they arewritten. The commands areavailable when the auxiliary sourceis available.

Aux, Auxiliary: Use this commandto select the auxiliary device, whena device is connected.

Voice Help

Provides a description of helpcommands that can be used.



Phone

BluetoothFor vehicles equipped withBluetooth capability, the system caninteract with many cell phones,allowing:. Placement and receipt of calls in

a hands-free mode.. Sharing of the cell phone’s

address book or contact list withthe vehicle.

To minimize driver distraction,before driving, and with the vehicleparked:. Become familiar with the

features of the cell phone.Organize the phone book andcontact lists clearly and deleteduplicate or rarely used entries.If possible, program speed dialor other shortcuts.

. Review the controls andoperation of the infotainmentsystem.

. Pair cell phone(s) to the vehicle.The system may not work withall cell phones. See “Pairing” inthis section for more information.

. If the cell phone has voicedialing capability, learn to usethat feature to access theaddress book or contact list. See“Voice Pass-Thru” in this sectionfor more information.

. See “Storing and Deleting PhoneNumbers” in this section formore information.

{ WARNING

When using a cell phone, it canbe distracting to look too long ortoo often at the screen of thephone or the infotainment(navigation) system. Taking youreyes off the road too long or toooften could cause a crashresulting in injury or death. Focusyour attention on driving.

A Bluetooth system can use aBluetooth‐capable cell phone with aHands‐Free Profile to make andreceive phone calls. The systemcan be used while the key is in theON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORYposition. The range of the Bluetoothsystem can be up to 9.1 m (30 ft).Not all phones support all functions,and not all phones work with thein-vehicle Bluetooth system. Seewww.gm.com/bluetooth for moreinformation on compatible phones.

Voice Recognition

The Bluetooth system uses voicerecognition to interpret voicecommands to dial phone numbersand name tags.

For additional information, say“Help” while you are in a voicerecognition menu.

Noise: Keep interior noise levels toa minimum. The system may notrecognize voice commands if thereis too much background noise.



When to Speak: A short tonesounds after the system respondsindicating when it is waiting for avoice command. Wait until the toneand then speak.

How to Speak: Speak clearly in acalm and natural voice.

Audio System

When using the in‐vehicle Bluetoothsystem, sound comes through thevehicle's front audio systemspeakers and overrides the audiosystem. Use the audio systemvolume knob, during a call, tochange the volume level. Theadjusted volume level remains inmemory for later calls. To preventmissed calls, a minimum volumelevel is used if the volume is turneddown too low.

Bluetooth Controls

Use the buttons located on thesteering wheel to operate thein‐vehicle Bluetooth system. SeeSteering Wheel Controls onpage 5‑2 for more information.

b / g (Push To Talk): Press toanswer incoming calls, confirmsystem information, and startspeech recognition.

c /x (End): Press to end a call,reject a call, or cancel an operation.

Pairing

A Bluetooth enabled cell phonemust be paired to the Bluetoothsystem and then connected to thevehicle before it can be used. Seethe cell phone manufacturer's userguide for Bluetooth functions beforepairing the cell phone. If a Bluetoothphone is not connected, calls will bemade using OnStar Hands‐FreeCalling, if equipped. See OnStarOverview on page 14‑1 for moreinformation.

Pairing Information. A Bluetooth phone with MP3

capability cannot be paired tothe vehicle as a phone and anMP3 player at the same time.

. Up to five cell phones can bepaired to the Bluetooth system.

. The pairing process is disabledwhen the vehicle is moving.

. Pairing only needs to becompleted once, unless thepairing information on the cellphone changes or the cell phoneis deleted from the system.

. Only one paired cell phone canbe connected to the Bluetoothsystem at a time.

. If multiple paired cell phones arewithin range of the system, thesystem connects to the firstavailable paired cell phone in theorder that they were first pairedto the system. To connect to adifferent paired phone, see“Connecting to a DifferentPhone” later in this section.



Pairing a Phone

1. Press and hold b / g fortwo seconds.

2. Say “Bluetooth.” This commandcan be skipped.

3. Say “Pair.” The system respondswith instructions and a four‐digitPersonal Identification Number(PIN). The PIN is used in Step 5.

4. Start the pairing process on thecell phone that you want to pair.For help with this process, seethe cell phone manufacturer'suser guide.

5. Locate the device named “YourVehicle” in the list on the cellphone. Follow the instructionson the cell phone to enter thePIN provided in Step 3. After thePIN is successfully entered, thesystem prompts you to provide aname for the paired cell phone.This name will be used toindicate which phones arepaired and connected to thevehicle. The system responds

with “<phone name> has beensuccessfully paired” after thepairing process is complete.

6. Repeat Steps 1 through 5 to pairadditional phones.

Listing All Paired and ConnectedPhones

The system can list all cell phonespaired to it. If a paired cell phone isalso connected to the vehicle, thesystem responds with “is connected”after that phone name.


2. Say “Bluetooth.”

3. Say “List.”

Deleting a Paired Phone

If the phone name you want todelete is unknown, see “Listing AllPaired and Connected Phones.”



3. Say “Delete.” The system askswhich phone to delete.

4. Say the name of the phone youwant to delete.

Connecting to a Different Phone

To connect to a different cell phone,the Bluetooth system looks for thenext available cell phone in theorder in which all the available cellphones were paired. Depending onwhich cell phone you want toconnect to, you may have to usethis command several times.



3. Say “Change phone.”. If another cell phone is

found, the response will be“<Phone name> is nowconnected.”

. If another cell phone is notfound, the original phoneremains connected.



Storing and Deleting PhoneNumbers

The system can store up to30 phone numbers as name tags inthe Hands‐Free Directory that isshared between the Bluetooth andOnStar systems, if equipped.

The following commands are usedto delete and store phone numbers.

Store: This command will store aphone number, or a group ofnumbers as a name tag.

Digit Store: This command allowsa phone number to be stored as aname tag by entering the digits oneat a time.

Delete: This command is used todelete individual name tags.

Delete All Name Tags: Thiscommand deletes all stored nametags in the Hands‐Free CallingDirectory and the OnStarTurn‐by‐Turn Destinations Directory,if equipped.

Using the “Store” Command


2. Say “Store.”

3. Say the phone number or groupof numbers you want to store allat once with no pauses, thenfollow the directions given by thesystem to save a name tag forthis number.

Using the “Digit Store” Command

If an unwanted number isrecognized by the system, say“Clear” at any time to clear the lastnumber.

To hear all of the numbersrecognized by the system, say“Verify” at any time.


2. Say “Digit Store.”

3. Say each digit, one at a time,that you want to store. Aftereach digit is entered, the system

repeats back the digit it heardfollowed by a tone. After the lastdigit has been entered, say“Store,” and then follow thedirections given by the system tosave a name tag for this number.

Using the “Delete” Command


2. Say “Delete.”

3. Say the name tag you want todelete.

Using the “Delete All Name Tags”Command

This command deletes all storedname tags in the Hands‐FreeCalling Directory and the OnStarTurn‐by‐Turn Destinations Directory,if equipped.

To delete all name tags:


2. Say “Delete all name tags.”



Listing Stored Numbers

The list command will list all storednumbers and name tags.

Using the “List” Command


2. Say “Directory.”

3. Say “Hands‐Free Calling.”

4. Say “List.”

Making a Call

Calls can be made using thefollowing commands.

Dial or Call: The dial or callcommand can be usedinterchangeably to dial a phonenumber or a stored name tag.

Digit Dial: This command allows aphone number to be dialed byentering the digits one at a time.

Re‐dial: This command is used todial the last number used on the cellphone.

Using the “Dial” or “Call”Command


2. Say “Dial” or “Call.”

3. Say the entire number withoutpausing, or say the name tag.

Once connected, the person calledwill be heard through the audiospeakers.

Using the “Digit Dial” Command

The digit dial command allows aphone number to be dialed byentering the digits one at a time.After each digit is entered, thesystem repeats back the digit itheard followed by a tone.

If an unwanted number isrecognized by the system, say“Clear” at any time to clear the lastnumber.

To hear all of the numbersrecognized by the system, say“Verify” at any time.


2. Say “Digit Dial.”

3. Say each digit, one at a time,that you want to dial. After eachdigit is entered, the systemrepeats back the digit it heardfollowed by a tone. After the lastdigit has been entered,say “Dial.”


Using the “Re‐dial” Command


2. After the tone, say “Re‐dial.”




Receiving a Call

When an incoming call is received,the audio system mutes and a ringtone is heard in the vehicle.

. Press b / g to answer the call.

. Pressc /x to ignore a call.

Call Waiting

Call waiting must be supported onthe cell phone and enabled by thewireless service carrier.

. Press b / g to answer anincoming call when another callis active. The original call isplaced on hold.

. Press b / g again to return tothe original call.

. To ignore the incoming call, noaction is required.

. Pressc /x to disconnect thecurrent call and switch to the callon hold.

Three‐Way Calling

Three‐way calling must besupported on the cell phone andenabled by the wireless servicecarrier.

1. While on a call, press b / g.2. Say “Three‐way call.”

3. Use the dial or call command todial the number of the third partyto be called.

4. Once the call is connected,press b / g to link all callerstogether.

Ending a Call

Pressc /x to end a call.

Muting a Call

During a call, all sounds from insidethe vehicle can be muted so that theperson on the other end of the callcannot hear them.

. To mute a call, press b / g , andthen say “Mute call.”

. To cancel mute, press b / g ,and then say “Un‐mute call.”

Transferring a Call

Audio can be transferred betweenthe Bluetooth system and the cellphone.

The cell phone must be paired andconnected with the Bluetoothsystem before a call can betransferred. The connection processcan take up to two minutes after theignition is turned to ON/RUN.



Transferring Audio from theBluetooth System to a Cell Phone

During a call with the audio in thevehicle:

1. Press b / g.2. Say “Transfer Call.”

Transferring Audio to theBluetooth System from a CellPhone

During a call with the audio on thecell phone, press b / g. The audiotransfers to the vehicle. If the audiodoes not transfer to the vehicle, usethe audio transfer feature on thecell phone. See your cell phonemanufacturer's user guide for moreinformation.

Voice Pass-Thru

Voice pass‐thru allows access to thevoice recognition commands on thecell phone. See your cell phonemanufacturer's user guide to see ifthe cell phone supports this feature.

To access contacts stored in the cellphone:


2. Say “Bluetooth.” This commandcan be skipped.

3. Say “Voice.” The systemresponds “OK, accessing<phone name>.”

The cell phone's normal promptmessages will go through their cycleaccording to the phone's operatinginstructions.

Dual Tone Multi-Frequency(DTMF) Tones

The Bluetooth system can sendnumbers and the numbers stored asname tags during a call. You canuse this feature when calling amenu‐driven phone system.Account numbers can also bestored for use.

Sending a Number or Name TagDuring a Call

1. Press b / g. The systemresponds “Ready,” followed bya tone.

2. Say “Dial.”

3. Say the number or name tagto send.



Clearing the System

Unless information is deleted out ofthe in‐vehicle Bluetooth system, itwill be retained indefinitely. Thisincludes all saved name tags in thephone book and phone pairinginformation. For information on howto delete this information, see theprevious section “Deleting a PairedPhone” and the previous sectionson deleting name tags.

Other Information

The Bluetooth® word mark andlogos are owned by the Bluetooth®

SIG, Inc. and any use of such marksby General Motors is under license.Other trademarks and trade namesare those of their respective owners.

See Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑21 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.


Climate Controls 8-1

Climate Controls

Climate Control SystemsDual Automatic Climate ControlSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Rear Climate Control System(Rear Climate with Rear SeatAudio) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

Air VentsAir Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7

Climate Control Systems

Dual Automatic Climate Control SystemThe heating, cooling, and ventilation in the vehicle can be controlled withthis system. The vehicle also has a flow-through ventilation systemdescribed later in this section.

Climate Control with Heated and Cooled Seats Shown

A. Driver and PassengerTemperature Controls

B. AUTO (Automatic Operation)

C. Defrost

D. Recirculation

E. Rear Window Defogger

F. Air Conditioning

G. Heated and Cooled Seats

H. Fan Control


8-2 Climate Controls

I. REAR (Rear Climate Control)

J. Air Delivery Mode Control

Off: Press the driver sidetemperature knob to turn the climatecontrol system off. Outside air stillenters the vehicle, and is directed tothe floor. This direction can bechanged by pressing the modebutton. The temperature can also beadjusted using either temperatureknob. Press the up or down arrowson the fan switch, the defrost button,the AUTO button, driver sidetemperature knob, or the airconditioning button to turn thesystem on when it is off.

Driver and Passenger SideTemperature Knob

The driver and passenger sidetemperature knobs are used toadjust the temperature of the aircoming through the system on thedriver or passenger side of thevehicle. The temperature can beadjusted even if the system is

turned off. This is possible sinceoutside air always flows through thesystem as the vehicle is movingforward unless it is set torecirculation mode. See“Recirculation” later in this section.

Turn the knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase ordecrease the cabin temperature.The display will show thetemperature setting increasing ordecreasing.

Set the passenger temperaturesetting to match the drivertemperature setting by pressing thepassenger temperature knob.

When in defrost mode thepassenger temperature settingcannot be changed.

Automatic Operation

AUTO (Automatic): Whenautomatic operation is active thesystem will control the insidetemperature, the air delivery, andthe fan speed.

Use the steps below to place theentire system in automatic mode:

1. Press the AUTO button.

When AUTO is selected, thedisplay will change to show thecurrent temperature(s) andAUTO come on the display. Thecurrent delivery mode and fanspeed will also be displayed forapproximately 5 seconds.

When AUTO is selected, the airconditioning operation and airinlet will be automaticallycontrolled. The air conditioningcompressor will run when theoutside temperature is overabout 4°C (40°F). The air inletwill normally be set to outsideair. If it is hot outside, the airinlet may automatically switch torecirculate inside air to helpquickly cool down the vehicle.The light on the button comes onin recirculation.



2. Set the driver and passengertemperature.

To find your comfort setting, startwith a 23°C (74°F) temperaturesetting and allow about20 minutes for the system toregulate. Use the driver orpassenger temperature buttonsto adjust the temperature settingas necessary. If a temperaturesetting of 15°C (60°F) is chosen,the system remains at themaximum cooling setting. If atemperature setting of 32°C(90°F) is chosen, the systemremains at the maximum heatsetting. Choosing eithermaximum setting will not causethe vehicle to heat or cool anyfaster.

Be careful not to cover the sensorlocated on the top of the instrumentpanel near the windshield. Thissensor regulates air temperaturebased on sun load and also turnson the headlamps.

To avoid blowing cold air in coldweather, the system will delayturning on the fan until warm air isavailable. The length of delaydepends on the engine coolanttemperature. Pressing the fanswitch will override this delay andchange the fan to a selected speed.

Manual Operation

y9z (Fan Control): Press theup or down arrows to increase ordecrease the fan speed

Pressing this button when thesystem is off will turn the system on.

Pressing either arrow while usingautomatic operation will place thefan in manual operation. The fansetting will display and the AUTOlight will turn off. The air delivery willremain in automatic operation.

yNz (Air Delivery ModeControl): Press to change thedirection of the airflow in the vehicle.Repeatedly press the button untilthe desired mode appears on thedisplay.

When the system is turned off, thedisplay goes blank after displayingthe current status of the system.

H (Vent): Air is directed to theinstrument panel outlets.

) (Bi-Level): Air is dividedbetween the instrument panel andfloor outlets. Some air is directedtowards the windshield and sidewindow outlets. Cooler air isdirected to the upper vents andwarmer air to the floor vents.

6 (Floor): Air is directed to thefloor outlets, with some to thewindshield, side window outlets, andsecond row floor outlets. In thismode, the system automaticallyselects outside air.

- (Defog): This mode clears thewindows of fog or moisture. Air isdirected to the windshield, flooroutlets, and side window vents. Inthis mode, the system turns offrecirculation and runs the airconditioning compressor unless theoutside temperature is close to



freezing. The recirculation modecannot be selected while in thedefog mode.

0 (Defrost): This mode removesfog or frost from the windshieldmore quickly. Air is directed to thewindshield and side window vents,with some directed to the floorvents. In this mode, the systemautomatically forces outside air intothe vehicle and runs the airconditioning compressor unless theoutside temperature is close tofreezing. The recirculation modecannot be selected while in thedefrost mode.

The passenger temperature controlcannot be activated while in defrostmode. If the passenger control knobis pressed, the passengertemperature flashes three times andwill not work. If the passengercontrol knob is adjusted, the drivertemperature indicator changes. Thepassenger temperature will not bedisplayed.

If vent, bi-level, or floor mode isselected again, the climate controlsystem displays the previoustemperature settings.

Do not drive the vehicle until all thewindows are clear.

# (Air Conditioning): Press toturn the air conditioning (A/C)compressor on and off. An indicatorlight comes on to show that the airconditioning is on.

Pressing this button when theoutside temperature is too cool forair conditioning will make the airconditioning indicator flash 3 timesand then turn off indicating the airconditioning mode is not available.If the air conditioning is on and theoutside temperature drops below atemperature which is too cool for airconditioning to be effective, the airconditioning light turns off to showthat the air conditioning mode hasbeen canceled.

On hot days, open the windows longenough to let hot inside air escape.This helps to reduce the time ittakes for the vehicle to cool down.It also helps the system to operatemore efficiently.

The air conditioning systemremoves moisture from the air, so asmall amount of water might dripunder the vehicle while idling orafter turning off the engine. This isnormal.

@ (Recirculation): Press to turnthe recirculation mode on or off. Anindicator light comes on to showthat the recirculation is on.

This mode recirculates and helps toquickly cool the air inside thevehicle. It can be used to helpprevent outside air and odors fromentering the vehicle.

The recirculation mode cannot beused with floor, defog, or defrostmodes. If recirculation is selectedwith one of those modes, theindicator light flashes three timesand then turns off. The air



conditioning compressor also comeson when this mode is activated.While in recirculation mode thewindows may fog when the weatheris cold and damp. To clear the fog,select either the defog or defrostmode and increase the fan speed.

The recirculation mode can also beturned off by turning off the ignition.

REAR (Rear Climate Control): Forvehicles with the rear heating andair conditioning controls. Press theREAR button to turn the rear climatecontrol system on or off. See RearClimate Control System (RearClimate with Rear Seat Audio) onpage 8‑6.

Rear Window Defogger

The rear window defogger uses awarming grid to remove fog from therear window.

1 (Rear Window Defogger):Press to turn the rear windowdefogger on or off. It automaticallyturns off after it has been activated.The defogger can also be turned offby turning off the engine. Do notdrive the vehicle until all thewindows are clear.

Notice: Do not use a razor bladeor sharp object to clear the insiderear window. Do not adhereanything to the defogger gridlines in the rear glass. Theseactions may damage the reardefogger. Repairs would not becovered by your warranty.

Heated Mirrors: Press1 to helpclear fog or frost from the surface ofthe outside mirror. See “OutsideHeated Mirrors” in Heated Mirrorson page 2‑17.

Heated or Cooled Seats: Forvehicles with heated and cooledseats, see Heated and VentilatedFront Seats on page 3‑7.



Rear Climate Control System (Rear Climate with RearSeat Audio)For vehicles with the rear heat and air conditioning controls, they areintegrated with the rear seat audio controls located in the center console.The system can be controlled from the front controls as well as the rearcontrols.

Rear Climate Control with Rear Seat Audio Controls

A. Fan Control

B. Air Delivery Mode Control

C. Temperature Control

REAR: Press the REAR button onthe front climate control system toturn the rear climate control systemon or off. An indicator comes onwhen the rear system is on.

The rear climate control system canalso be turned off by pressing andholding the C button. To turn thesystem on from the rear seats,press any rear climate controlbutton, except the C button.

Mimic Mode: This mode matchesthe rear climate control to the frontclimate control airflow settings.It comes on when REAR is pressedthe first time.

Independent Mode: This modedirects rear seating airflowaccording to the settings of the rearcontrols.

To turn the system on from the rear,press any rear climate controlbutton, except the C button.



Automatic Operation, IfEquipped

AUTO: Press the air delivery modebutton until this setting is selected tocontrol the inside temperature, airdelivery, and fan speed. AUTOappears in the display whenautomatic operation is active.

+ or − (Increase/DecreaseTemperature): Press the + or −buttons to increase or decrease thecabin temperature. The rear controltemperature display will show thetemperature setting increasing ordecreasing.

The display only indicates climatecontrol functions when the systemis in rear independent mode.

Manual Operation

D C (Fan Control): Press thesebuttons on the rear seat audiocontrol panel to increase ordecrease the airflow. Pressing thefan up button when the system is offwill turn the system on. The airdelivery mode will remain underautomatic control.

+ or − (Temperature Control):Press these buttons to adjust thetemperature of the air flowing intothe passenger area. Press the+ button for warmer air and pressthe − button for cooler air.

N (Air Delivery Mode Control):Press the mode button to changethe direction of the airflow in thevehicle. Repeatedly press thebutton until the desired modeappears on the display. Multiplepresses will cycle through thedelivery selections.

Air VentsUse the air outlets located in thecenter and on the side of theinstrument panel to direct theairflow.

Operation Tips. Keep the hood and front air

inlets free of ice, snow, or anyother obstruction (such asleaves). The heater anddefroster will work far better,reducing the chance of foggingthe inside of the windows.

. When you enter a vehicle incold weather, press the fan upbutton to the maximum fan levelbefore driving. This helps clearthe intake ducts of snow andmoisture, and reduces thechance of fogging the inside ofthe window.



. Keep the air path under the frontseats clear of objects. This helpsair to circulate throughout thevehicle.

. Adding outside equipment to thefront of the vehicle, such ashood-air deflectors, may affectthe performance of the heatingand air conditioning system.Check with your dealer beforeadding equipment to the outsideof the vehicle.


Driving and Operating 9-1

Driving andOperating

Driving InformationDistracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Off-Road Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . 9-11Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . 9-12Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13If the Vehicle Is Stuck . . . . . . . . 9-15Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . 9-16

Starting and OperatingNew Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . 9-21Adjustable Throttle and BrakePedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22

Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . 9-24Engine Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26

Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26Shifting out of Park . . . . . . . . . . 9-27Parking over ThingsThat Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28

Active Fuel Management® . . . 9-28

Engine ExhaustEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30

Automatic TransmissionAutomatic Transmission . . . . . 9-30Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33

Drive SystemsAll-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34

BrakesAntilock BrakeSystem (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35

Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . 9-36

Ride Control SystemsStabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . 9-37Locking Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40Road Sensing Suspension . . . 9-40Continuous DampingControl (CDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40

Automatic Level Control . . . . . 9-40

Cruise ControlCruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41

Object Detection SystemsUltrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 9-44Side Blind ZoneAlert (SBZA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-45

Rear VisionCamera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48


9-2 Driving and Operating

FuelFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-51Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . 9-52Gasoline Specifications(U.S. and Canada Only) . . . . 9-52

California FuelRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52

Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 9-52Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-53Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . 9-54Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-55Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-56

TowingGeneral TowingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-57

Driving Characteristics andTowing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-57

Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-61Towing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . 9-65Trailer SwayControl (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-69

Conversions and Add-OnsAdd-On ElectricalEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-69

Driving Information

Distracted DrivingDistraction comes in many formsand can take your focus from thetask of driving. Exercise goodjudgment and do not let otheractivities divert your attention awayfrom the road. Many localgovernments have enacted lawsregarding driver distraction. Becomefamiliar with the local laws inyour area.

To avoid distracted driving, alwayskeep your eyes on the road, handson the wheel, and mind on the drive.. Do not use a phone in

demanding driving situations.Use a hands-free method toplace or receive necessaryphone calls.

. Watch the road. Do not read,take notes, or look upinformation on phones or otherelectronic devices.

. Designate a front seatpassenger to handle potentialdistractions.

. Become familiar with vehiclefeatures before driving, such asprogramming favorite radiostations and adjusting climatecontrol and seat settings.Program all trip information intoany navigation device prior todriving.

. Wait until the vehicle is parkedto retrieve items that have fallento the floor.

. Stop or park the vehicle to tendto children.

. Keep pets in an appropriatecarrier or restraint.

. Avoid stressful conversationswhile driving, whether with apassenger or on a cell phone.



{ WARNING

Taking your eyes off the road toolong or too often could cause acrash resulting in injury or death.Focus your attention on driving.

Refer to the Infotainment section formore information on using thatsystem, including pairing and usinga cell phone.

Refer to the Navigation section forinformation on that system,including pairing and using a cellphone.

Defensive DrivingDefensive driving means “alwaysexpect the unexpected.” The firststep in driving defensively is to wearthe safety belt. See Safety Belts onpage 3‑15.. Assume that other road users

(pedestrians, bicyclists, andother drivers) are going to becareless and make mistakes.Anticipate what they might doand be ready.

. Allow enough following distancebetween you and the driver infront of you.

. Focus on the task of driving.

Drunk DrivingDeath and injury associated withdrinking and driving is a globaltragedy.

{ WARNING

Drinking and then driving is verydangerous. Your reflexes,perceptions, attentiveness, andjudgment can be affected by evena small amount of alcohol. Youcan have a serious — or evenfatal — collision if you drive afterdrinking.

Do not drink and drive or ride witha driver who has been drinking.Ride home in a cab; or if you arewith a group, designate a driverwho will not drink.



Control of a VehicleBraking, steering, and acceleratingare important factors in helping tocontrol a vehicle while driving.

BrakingBraking action involves perceptiontime and reaction time. Deciding topush the brake pedal is perceptiontime. Actually doing it isreaction time.

Average driver reaction time isabout three-quarters of a second. Inthat time, a vehicle moving at100 km/h (60 mph) travels 20 m(66 ft), which could be a lot ofdistance in an emergency.

Helpful braking tips to keep in mindinclude:. Keep enough distance between

you and the vehicle in frontof you.

. Avoid needless heavy braking.

. Keep pace with traffic.

If the engine ever stops while thevehicle is being driven, brakenormally but do not pump thebrakes. Doing so could make thepedal harder to push down. If theengine stops, there will be somepower brake assist but it will beused when the brake is applied.Once the power assist is used up, itcan take longer to stop and thebrake pedal will be harder to push.

Steering

Hydraulic Power Steering

Your vehicle has hydraulic powersteering. It may requiremaintenance. See Power SteeringFluid Power Steering Fluid onpage 10‑22.

If power steering assist is lostbecause the engine stops or thepower steering system is notfunctioning, the vehicle can besteered but may required increasedeffort. See your dealer if there is aproblem.


Curve Tips. Take curves at a reasonable

speed.. Reduce speed before entering a

curve.. Maintain a reasonable steady

speed through the curve. Wait until the vehicle is out of

the curve before acceleratinggently into the straightaway.

Steering in Emergencies. There are some situations when

steering around a problem maybe more effective than braking.

. Holding both sides of thesteering wheel allows you to turn180 degrees without removinga hand.

. Antilock Brake System (ABS)allows steering while braking.



Off-Road Recovery

The vehicle's right wheels can dropoff the edge of a road onto theshoulder while driving. Followthese tips:

1. Ease off the accelerator andthen, if there is nothing in theway, steer the vehicle so that itstraddles the edge of thepavement.

2. Turn the steering wheel aboutone-eighth of a turn, until theright front tire contacts thepavement edge.

3. Then turn the steering wheel togo straight down the roadway.

Loss of Control

Skidding

There are three types of skids thatcorrespond to the vehicle's threecontrol systems:. Braking Skid — wheels are not

rolling.. Steering or Cornering

Skid — too much speed orsteering in a curve causes tiresto slip and lose cornering force.

. Acceleration Skid — too muchthrottle causes the drivingwheels to spin.

Defensive drivers avoid most skidsby taking reasonable care suited toexisting conditions, and by notoverdriving those conditions. Butskids are always possible.

If the vehicle starts to slide, followthese suggestions:. Ease your foot off the

accelerator pedal and quicklysteer the way you want thevehicle to go. The vehicle maystraighten out. Be ready for asecond skid if it occurs.

. Slow down and adjust yourdriving according to weatherconditions. Stopping distancecan be longer and vehiclecontrol can be affected whentraction is reduced by water,snow, ice, gravel, or othermaterial on the road. Learn torecognize warning clues — suchas enough water, ice, or packedsnow on the road to make amirrored surface — and slowdown when you have any doubt.

. Try to avoid sudden steering,acceleration, or braking,including reducing vehicle speedby shifting to a lower gear. Anysudden changes could causethe tires to slide.



Remember: Antilock brakes helpavoid only the braking skid.

Off-Road DrivingAll-wheel-drive vehicles can beused for off-road driving. Vehicleswithout all-wheel drive and vehiclesnot equipped with All Terrain (AT) orOn-Off Road (OOR) tires must notbe driven off-road except on a level,solid surface. To contact the tiremanufacturer for more informationabout the original equipment tires,see the Limited Warranty andOwner Assistance Informationmanual.

Controlling the vehicle is the key tosuccessful off-road driving. One ofthe best ways to control the vehicleis to control the speed.

{ WARNING

When driving off-road, bouncingand quick changes in directioncan easily throw you out ofposition. This could cause you tolose control and crash. You andyour passengers should alwayswear safety belts.

Before Driving Off-Road. Have all necessary maintenance

and service work completed.. Fuel the vehicle, fill fluid levels,

and check inflation pressure inall tires, including the spare,if equipped.

. Read all the information aboutall-wheel-drive vehicles in thismanual.

. Make sure all underbodyshields, if equipped, are properlyattached.

. Know the local laws that apply tooff-road driving.

To gain more ground clearance ifneeded, it may be necessary toremove the front fascia lowerair dam.

Notice: Operating the vehicle forextended periods without thefront fascia lower air daminstalled can cause improper airflow to the engine. Re‐attach thefront fascia air dam after off-roaddriving.



Loading the Vehicle forOff-Road Driving

{ WARNING

. Unsecured cargo on the loadfloor can be tossed aboutwhen driving over roughterrain. You or yourpassengers can be struck byflying objects. Secure thecargo properly.

. Keep cargo in the cargo areaas far forward and as low aspossible. The heaviest thingsshould be on the floor,forward of the rear axle.

. Heavy loads on the roof raisethe vehicle's center of gravity,making it more likely to rollover. You can be seriously orfatally injured if the vehiclerolls over. Put heavy loadsinside the cargo area, not onthe roof.

For more information about loadingthe vehicle, see Vehicle Load Limitson page 9‑16.

Environmental Concerns. Always use established trails,

roads, and areas that have beenset aside for public off-roadrecreational driving and obey allposted regulations.

. Do not damage shrubs, flowers,trees, or grasses or disturbwildlife.

. Do not park over things thatburn. See Parking over ThingsThat Burn on page 9‑28.

Driving on Hills

Driving safely on hills requires goodjudgment and an understanding ofwhat the vehicle can and cannot do.

{ WARNING

Many hills are simply too steepfor any vehicle. Driving up hillscan cause the vehicle to stall.Driving down hills can cause lossof control. Driving across hills cancause a rollover. You could beinjured or killed. Do not drive onsteep hills.

Before driving on a hill, assessthe steepness, traction, andobstructions. If the terrain aheadcannot be seen, get out of thevehicle and walk the hill beforedriving further.



When driving on hills:. Use a low gear and keep a firm

grip on the steering wheel.. Maintain a slow speed.. When possible, drive straight up

or down the hill.. Slow down when approaching

the top of the hill.. Use headlamps even during the

day to make the vehicle morevisible.

{ WARNING

Driving to the top of a hill at highspeed can cause an accident.There could be a drop-off,embankment, cliff, or evenanother vehicle. You could beseriously injured or killed. As younear the top of a hill, slow downand stay alert.

. Never go downhill forward orbackward with the transmissionin N (Neutral). The brakes couldoverheat and you could losecontrol.

. When driving down a hill, keepthe vehicle headed straightdown. Use a low gear becausethe engine will work with thebrakes to slow the vehicle andhelp keep the vehicle undercontrol.

{ WARNING

Heavy braking when going downa hill can cause your brakes tooverheat and fade. This couldcause loss of control and you orothers could be injured or killed.Apply the brakes lightly whendescending a hill and use a lowgear to keep vehicle speed undercontrol.

If the vehicle stalls on a hill:

1. Apply the brakes to stop thevehicle, and then apply theparking brake.

2. Shift into P (Park) and thenrestart the engine.. If driving uphill when the

vehicle stalls, shift toR (Reverse), release theparking brake, and backstraight down.

. Never try to turn the vehiclearound. If the hill is steepenough to stall the vehicle,it is steep enough to causeit to roll over.

. If you cannot make it up thehill, back straight downthe hill.

. Never back down a hill inN (Neutral) using only thebrake.



. The vehicle can rollbackward quickly andyou could lose control.

. If driving downhill when thevehicle stalls, shift to alower gear, release theparking brake, and drivestraight down the hill.

3. If the vehicle cannot be restartedafter stalling, set the parkingbrake, shift an automatictransmission into P (Park), andturn the vehicle off.

3.1. Leave the vehicle andseek help.

3.2. Stay clear of the path thevehicle would take if itrolled downhill.

. Avoid turns that take the vehicleacross the incline of the hill.A hill that can be driven straightup or down might be too steep todrive across. Driving across anincline puts more weight on thedownhill wheels which couldcause a downhill slide or arollover.

. Surface conditions can be aproblem. Loose gravel, muddyspots, or even wet grass cancause the tires to slip sideways,downhill. If the vehicle slipssideways, it can hit somethingthat will trip it – a rock, a rut,etc. – and roll over.

. Hidden obstacles can make thesteepness of the incline moresevere. If a rock is driven acrosswith the uphill wheels, or if thedownhill wheels drop into a rutor depression, the vehicle can tilteven more.

. If an incline must be drivenacross, and the vehicle starts toslide, turn downhill. This shouldhelp straighten out the vehicleand prevent the side slipping.

{ WARNING

Getting out of the vehicle on thedownhill side when stoppedacross an incline is dangerous.If the vehicle rolls over, you couldbe crushed or killed. Always getout on the uphill side of thevehicle and stay well clear of therollover path.



Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow,or Ice

Use a low gear when driving inmud – the deeper the mud, thelower the gear. Keep the vehiclemoving to avoid getting stuck.

Traction changes when driving onsand. On loose sand, such as onbeaches or sand dunes, the tirestend to sink into the sand. Thisaffects steering, accelerating, andbraking. Drive at a reduced speedand avoid sharp turns or abruptmaneuvers.

Traction is reduced on hard packedsnow and ice and it is easy to losecontrol. Reduce vehicle speed whendriving on hard packed snowand ice.

{ WARNING

Driving on frozen lakes, ponds,or rivers can be dangerous. Iceconditions vary greatly and the

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

vehicle could fall through the ice;you and your passengers coulddrown. Drive your vehicle on safesurfaces only.

Driving in Water

{ WARNING

Driving through rushing water canbe dangerous. Deep water cansweep your vehicle downstreamand you and your passengerscould drown. If it is only shallowwater, it can still wash away theground from under your tires.Traction could be lost, and thevehicle could roll over. Do notdrive through rushing water.

Notice: Do not drive throughstanding water if it is deepenough to cover the wheel hubs,axles or exhaust pipe. Deep watercan damage the axle and othervehicle parts.

If the standing water is not too deep,drive slowly through it. At fasterspeeds, water splashes on theignition system and the vehicle canstall. Stalling can also occur if youget the exhaust pipe under water.While the exhaust pipe is underwater, you will not be able to startthe engine. When going throughwater, the brakes get wet, and itmight take longer to stop. SeeDriving on Wet Roads on page 9‑11.

After Off-Road Driving

Remove any brush or debris thathas collected on the underbody orchassis, or under the hood. Theseaccumulations can be a fire hazard.

After operation in mud or sand,have the brake linings cleaned andchecked. These substances cancause glazing and uneven braking.



Check the body structure, steering,suspension, wheels, tires, andexhaust system for damage andcheck the fuel lines and coolingsystem for any leakage.

More frequent maintenance serviceis required. Refer to theMaintenance Schedule onpage 11‑3 for more information.

Driving on Wet RoadsRain and wet roads can reducevehicle traction and affect yourability to stop and accelerate.Always drive slower in these typesof driving conditions and avoiddriving through large puddles anddeep‐standing or flowing water.

{ WARNING

Wet brakes can cause crashes.They might not work as well in aquick stop and could causepulling to one side. You couldlose control of the vehicle.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

After driving through a largepuddle of water or a car/vehiclewash, lightly apply the brakepedal until the brakes worknormally.

Flowing or rushing water createsstrong forces. Driving throughflowing water could cause thevehicle to be carried away. If thishappens, you and other vehicleoccupants could drown. Do notignore police warnings and bevery cautious about trying to drivethrough flowing water.

Hydroplaning

Hydroplaning is dangerous. Watercan build up under the vehicle'stires so they actually ride on thewater. This can happen if the road iswet enough and you are going fastenough. When the vehicle ishydroplaning, it has little or nocontact with the road.

There is no hard and fast rule abouthydroplaning. The best advice is toslow down when the road is wet.

Other Rainy Weather Tips

Besides slowing down, other wetweather driving tips include:. Allow extra following distance.. Pass with caution.. Keep windshield wiping

equipment in good shape.. Keep the windshield washer fluid

reservoir filled.. Have good tires with proper

tread depth. See Tires onpage 10‑46.

. Turn off cruise control.



Highway HypnosisAlways be alert and pay attention toyour surroundings while driving.If you become tired or sleepy, find asafe place to park the vehicleand rest.

Other driving tips include:. Keep the vehicle well ventilated.. Keep the interior

temperature cool.. Keep your eyes moving — scan

the road ahead and to the sides.. Check the rearview mirror and

vehicle instruments often.

Hill and Mountain RoadsDriving on steep hills or throughmountains is different than drivingon flat or rolling terrain. Tips fordriving in these conditions include:. Keep the vehicle serviced and in

good shape.. Check all fluid levels and brakes,

tires, cooling system, andtransmission.

. Shift to a lower gear when goingdown steep or long hills.

{ WARNING

If you do not shift down, thebrakes could get so hot that theywould not work well. You wouldthen have poor braking or evennone going down a hill. You couldcrash. Shift down to let the engineassist the brakes on a steepdownhill slope.

{ WARNING

Coasting downhill in N (Neutral)or with the ignition off isdangerous. The brakes will haveto do all the work of slowing downand they could get so hot thatthey would not work well. Youwould then have poor braking oreven none going down a hill. Youcould crash. Always have theengine running and the vehicle ingear when going downhill.

. Stay in your own lane. Do notswing wide or cut across thecenter of the road. Drive atspeeds that let you stay in yourown lane.

. Be alert on top of hills;something could be in your lane(stalled car, accident).



. Pay attention to special roadsigns (falling rocks area, windingroads, long grades, passing orno-passing zones) and takeappropriate action.

Winter Driving

Driving on Snow or Ice

Drive carefully when there is snowor ice between the tires and theroad, creating less traction or grip.Wet ice can occur at about 0°C(32°F) when freezing rain begins tofall, resulting in even less traction.Avoid driving on wet ice or infreezing rain until roads can betreated with salt or sand.

Drive with caution, whatever thecondition. Accelerate gently sotraction is not lost. Accelerating tooquickly causes the wheels to spinand makes the surface under thetires slick, so there is even lesstraction.

Try not to break the fragile traction.If you accelerate too fast, the drivewheels will spin and polish thesurface under the tires even more.

The Antilock Brake System (ABS)on page 9‑35 improves vehiclestability during hard stops onslippery roads, but apply the brakessooner than when on dry pavement.

Allow greater following distance onany slippery road and watch forslippery spots. Icy patches canoccur on otherwise clear roads inshaded areas. The surface of acurve or an overpass can remain icywhen the surrounding roads areclear. Avoid sudden steeringmaneuvers and braking whileon ice.

Turn off cruise control, if equipped,on slippery surfaces.



Blizzard Conditions

Being stuck in snow can be aserious situation. Stay with thevehicle unless there is help nearby.If possible, use the RoadsideService (U.S. and Canada) onpage 13‑7 or Roadside Service(Mexico) on page 13‑9. To get helpand keep everyone in thevehicle safe:. Turn on the hazard warning

flashers.. Tie a red cloth to an outside

mirror.

{ WARNING

Snow can trap engine exhaustunder the vehicle. This maycause exhaust gases to getinside. Engine exhaust containscarbon monoxide (CO) whichcannot be seen or smelled. It cancause unconsciousness and evendeath.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:. Clear away snow from aroundthe base of your vehicle,especially any that is blockingthe exhaust pipe.

. Check again from time totime to be sure snow doesnot collect there.

. Open a window about 5 cm(2 in) on the side of thevehicle that is away from thewind to bring in fresh air.


. Adjust the climate controlsystem to a setting thatcirculates the air inside thevehicle and set the fan speedto the highest setting. See“Climate Control Systems” inthe Index.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)


Run the engine for short periodsonly as needed to keep warm, butbe careful.

To save fuel, run the engine for onlyshort periods as needed to warmthe vehicle and then shut the engineoff and close the window most ofthe way to save heat. Repeat thisuntil help arrives but only when youfeel really uncomfortable from thecold. Moving about to keep warmalso helps.

If it takes some time for help toarrive, now and then when you runthe engine, push the acceleratorpedal slightly so the engine runsfaster than the idle speed. Thiskeeps the battery charged to restartthe vehicle and to signal for helpwith the headlamps. Do this as littleas possible to save fuel.



If the Vehicle Is StuckSlowly and cautiously spin thewheels to free the vehicle whenstuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.See “Rocking Your Vehicle to Get ItOut” later in this section.

If the vehicle has a traction system,it can often help to free a stuckvehicle. Refer to the vehicle'straction system in the Index. If stucktoo severely for the traction systemto free the vehicle, turn the tractionsystem off and use the rockingmethod.

{ WARNING

If the vehicle's tires spin at highspeed, they can explode, and youor others could be injured. Thevehicle can overheat, causing anengine compartment fire or otherdamage. Spin the wheels as littleas possible and avoid goingabove 56 km/h (35 mph).

For information about using tirechains on the vehicle, see TireChains on page 10‑65.

Rocking Your Vehicle to GetIt Out

Turn the steering wheel left andright to clear the area around thefront wheels. Turn off any traction orstability system. Shift back and forthbetween R (Reverse) and a forwardgear, spinning the wheels as little aspossible. To prevent transmissionwear, wait until the wheels stopspinning before shifting gears.Release the accelerator pedal whileshifting, and press lightly on theaccelerator pedal when thetransmission is in gear. Slowlyspinning the wheels in the forwardand reverse directions causes arocking motion that could free thevehicle. If that does not get thevehicle out after a few tries, it mightneed to be towed out. Recoveryhooks can be used, if the vehicle

has them. If the vehicle does needto be towed out, see Towing theVehicle on page 10‑93.

Recovery Hooks

{ WARNING

Never pull on recovery hooksfrom the side. The hooks couldbreak and you and others couldbe injured. When using recoveryhooks, always pull the vehiclestraight out.



Notice: Never use recoveryhooks to tow the vehicle. Yourvehicle could be damaged and itwould not be covered bywarranty.

For vehicles with recovery hooks atthe front of the vehicle, you can usethem if you are stuck off-road andneed to be pulled to some placewhere you can continue driving.

Vehicle Load LimitsIt is very important to know howmuch weight your vehicle cancarry. This weight is called thevehicle capacity weight andincludes the weight of alloccupants, cargo, and allnonfactory-installed options.

Two labels on your vehicle showhow much weight it wasdesigned to carry, the Tire andLoading Information label andthe Certification/Tire label.

{ WARNING

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the GrossVehicle Weight Rating(GVWR), or either themaximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR).This can cause systems tobreak and change the way thevehicle handles. This couldcause loss of control and acrash. Overloading can alsoshorten the life of the vehicle.

Tire and Loading InformationLabel

Label Example

A vehicle specific Tire andLoading Information label isattached to the center pillar(B-pillar). With the driver dooropen, you will find the labelattached below the door lockpost (striker). The tire and



loading information label showsthe number of occupant seatingpositions (A), and the maximumvehicle capacity weight (B) inkilograms and pounds.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label also shows thesize of the original equipmenttires (C) and the recommendedcold tire inflation pressures (D).For more information on tiresand inflation see Tires onpage 10‑46 and Tire Pressureon page 10‑52.

There is also important loadinginformation on the vehicleCertification/Tire label. It tellsyou the Gross Vehicle WeightRating (GVWR) and the GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR) forthe front and rear axles. See“Certification/Tire Label” later inthis section.

Steps for Determining CorrectLoad Limit

1. Locate the statement “Thecombined weight ofoccupants and cargo shouldnever exceed XXX kg orXXX lbs” on your vehicle'splacard.

2. Determine the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers that will be ridingin your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers from XXX kg orXXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equalsthe available amount of cargoand luggage load capacity.For example, if the “XXX”amount equals 1400 lbs andthere will be five 150 lbpassengers in your vehicle,

the amount of available cargoand luggage load capacity is650 lbs (1400−750 (5 x 150)= 650 lbs).

5. Determine the combinedweight of luggage and cargobeing loaded on the vehicle.That weight may not safelyexceed the available cargoand luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towinga trailer, the load from yourtrailer will be transferred toyour vehicle. Consult thismanual to determine how thisreduces the available cargoand luggage load capacity ofyour vehicle. See TrailerTowing on page 9‑61 forimportant information ontowing a trailer, towing safetyrules and trailering tips.



Example 1

A. Maximum Vehicle CapacityWeight for Example 1 = 453 kg(1,000 lbs)

B. Subtract Occupant Weight @68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 = 136 kg(300 lbs)

C. Available Occupant and CargoWeight = 317 kg (700 lbs)

Example 2

A. Vehicle Capacity Weight forExample 2 = 453 kg (1,000 lbs)

B. Subtract Occupant Weight @68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 = 136 kg(750 lbs)

C. Available Cargo Weight =113 kg (250 lbs)

Example 3

A. Maximum Vehicle CapacityWeight for Example 3 = 453 kg(1,000 lbs)

B. Subtract Occupant Weight @91 kg (200 lbs) × 5 = 453 kg(1,000 lbs)

C. Available Cargo Weight =0 kg (0 lbs)

Refer to your vehicle's tire andloading information label forspecific information about yourvehicle's capacity weight andseating positions. The combined



weight of the driver, passengers,and cargo should never exceedyour vehicle's capacity weight.

Certification/Tire Label

A vehicle specific Certification/Tire label is attached to the rearedge of the driver door. Thelabel shows the size of yourvehicle's original tires and theinflation pressures needed toobtain the gross weight capacityof your vehicle. This is calledGross Vehicle Weight

Rating (GVWR). The GVWRincludes the weight of thevehicle, all occupants, fuel, andcargo.

The Certification/Tire label alsotells you the maximum weightsfor the front and rear axles,called Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR). To find out theactual loads on your front andrear axles, you need to go to aweigh station and weigh yourvehicle. Your dealer can helpyou with this. Be sure to spreadout your load equally on bothsides of the center line.

Never exceed the GVWR foryour vehicle, or the GAWR foreither the front or rear axle.

And, if you do have a heavyload, you should spread it out.

{ WARNING

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the GrossVehicle Weight Rating(GVWR), or either themaximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR).This can cause systems tobreak and change the way thevehicle handles. This couldcause loss of control and acrash. Overloading can alsoshorten the life of the vehicle.

Your warranty does not coverparts or components that failbecause of overloading.

The label will help you decidehow much cargo and installedequipment your truck can carry.

Using heavier suspensioncomponents to get addeddurability might not change your



weight ratings. Ask your dealerto help you load your vehicle theright way.

If you put things inside yourvehicle— like suitcases, tools,packages, or anythingelse— they will go as fast as thevehicle goes. If you have to stopor turn quickly, or if there is acrash, they will keep going.

{ WARNING

Things you put inside thevehicle can strike and injurepeople in a sudden stop orturn, or in a crash.

. Put things in the cargoarea of the vehicle. Try tospread the weight evenly.

. Never stack heavierthings, like suitcases,

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

inside the vehicle so thatsome of them are above thetops of the seats.

. Do not leave anunsecured child restraintin the vehicle.

. When you carry somethinginside the vehicle, secureit whenever you can.

. Do not leave a seat foldeddown unless you need to.

There is also important loadinginformation for off-road driving inthis manual. See “Loading YourVehicle for Off-Road Driving”under Off-Road Driving onpage 9‑6.

Add-On Equipment

When you carry removableitems, you may need to put alimit on how many people youcan carry inside your vehicle. Besure to weigh your vehiclebefore you buy and install thenew equipment.

Notice: Overloading thevehicle may cause damage.Repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Donot overload the vehicle.

Remember not to exceed theGross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR) of the front or rear axle.



Automatic Level Control

The automatic level control rearsuspension comes as a part ofthe Road Sensing Suspension.See Road Sensing Suspensionon page 9‑40.

This type of level control is fullyautomatic and will provide abetter leveled riding position aswell as better handling under avariety of passenger and loadingconditions. An air compressorconnected to the rear shockswill raise or lower the rear of thevehicle to maintain propervehicle height. The system isactivated when the ignition keyis turned to RUN and will

automatically adjust vehicleheight thereafter. The systemmay exhaust (lower vehicleheight) for up to 10 minutes afterthe ignition key has been turnedto LOCK. You may hear the aircompressor operating when theheight is being adjusted.

If a weight-distributing hitch isbeing used, it is recommendedto allow the shocks to inflate,thereby leveling the vehicle priorto adjusting the height. See“Weight distributing Hitches andWeight Carrying Hitches” underTowing Equipment onpage 9‑65.

Starting andOperating

New Vehicle Break-InNotice: The vehicle does notneed an elaborate break-in. But itwill perform better in the long runif you follow these guidelines:. Keep the vehicle speed at88 km/h (55mph) or less forthe first 805 km (500miles).

. Do not drive at any oneconstant speed, fast or slow,for the first 805 km(500miles). Do not makefull-throttle starts. Avoiddownshifting to brake orslow the vehicle.

. Avoid making hard stops forthe first 322 km (200miles) orso. During this time the newbrake linings are not yetbroken in. Hard stops with



new linings can meanpremature wear and earlierreplacement. Follow thisbreaking-in guideline everytime you get new brakelinings.

. Do not tow a trailer duringbreak-in. See Trailer Towingon page 9‑61 for the trailertowing capabilities of thevehicle and moreinformation.

Following break‐in, engine speedand load can be graduallyincreased.

Adjustable Throttle andBrake PedalThe vehicle has adjustable throttleand brake pedals that allow you tochange their positions.

The feature will not operate whenthe vehicle is in R (Reverse) orwhile using the cruise control.

The switch used to adjust thepedals is located on the centerconsole below the climate controlsystem.

Press the right and left arrows tomove the pedals either closer orfurther from your body.

Before you start driving, fully pressthe brake pedal to confirm theadjustment is right for you. Whiledriving, make only smalladjustments.

The vehicle has a memory functionwhich allows the pedal positions tobe saved and recalled. See MemorySeats on page 3‑5.

Ignition Positions

The ignition switch has four differentpositions.

To shift out of P (Park), the ignitionmust be in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY and the regular brakepedal must be applied.

A (STOPPING THE ENGINE/LOCK/OFF): When the vehicle isstopped, turn the ignition switch toLOCK/OFF to turn the engine off.



Retained Accessory Power (RAP)will remain active. See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) onpage 9‑26.

This position locks the ignition.It may also lock the steering wheeland automatic transmission. Thekey can be removed in LOCK/OFF.

Do not turn the engine off when thevehicle is moving. This will cause aloss of power assist in the brakeand steering systems and disablethe airbags.

If the vehicle must be shut off In anemergency:

1. Brake using a firm and steadypressure. Do not pump thebrakes repeatedly. This maydeplete power assist, requiringincreased brake pedal force.

2. Shift the vehicle to N (Neutral).This can be done while thevehicle is moving. After shiftingto N (Neutral), firmly apply thebrakes and steer the vehicle to asafe location.

3. Come to a complete stop, shiftto P (Park), and turn the ignitionto LOCK/OFF. On vehicles withan automatic transmission, theshift lever must be in P (Park) toturn the ignition switch to theLOCK/OFF position.

4. Set the parking brake. SeeParking Brake on page 9‑36.

{ WARNING

Turning off the vehicle whilemoving may cause loss of powerassist in the brake and steeringsystems and disable the airbags.While driving, only shut thevehicle off in an emergency.

If the vehicle cannot be pulled over,and must be shut off while driving,turn the ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY.

The steering may bind with thewheels turned off center. If thishappens, move the steering wheelfrom right to left while turning the

key to ACC/ACCESSORY. If thisdoesn't work, then the vehicle needsservice.

Notice: Using a tool to force thekey to turn in the ignition couldcause damage to the switch orbreak the key. Use the correctkey, make sure it is all the way in,and turn it only with your hand.If the key cannot be turned byhand, see your dealer.

B (ACC/ACCESSORY): Thisposition lets things like the radioand the windshield wipers operatewhile the engine is off. Use thisposition if the vehicle must bepushed or towed.

C (ON/RUN): This position can beused to operate the electricalaccessories and to display someinstrument panel cluster warningand indicator lights. This positioncan also be used for service anddiagnostics, and to verify the properoperation of the malfunctionindicator lamp as may be requiredfor emission inspection purposes.



The switch stays in this positionwhen the engine is running. Thetransmission is also unlocked in thisposition on automatic transmissionvehicles.

If you leave the key in the ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN positionwith the engine off, the battery couldbe drained. You may not be able tostart the vehicle if the battery isallowed to drain for an extendedperiod of time.

D (START): This is the position thatstarts the engine. When the enginestarts, release the key. The ignitionswitch returns to ON/RUN fordriving.

A warning tone will sound when thedriver door is opened, the ignition isin ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFFand the key is in the ignition.

Starting the EngineIf the vehicle is a hybrid, see thehybrid supplement for moreinformation.

Move the shift lever to P (Park) orN (Neutral). The engine will not startin any other position. To restart theengine when the vehicle is alreadymoving, use N (Neutral) only.

Notice: Do not try to shift toP (Park) if the vehicle is moving.If you do, you could damage thetransmission. Shift to P (Park)only when the vehicle is stopped.

Starting Procedure

1. With your foot off the acceleratorpedal, turn the ignition to START.When the engine starts, let go ofthe key. The idle speed will godown as the engine warms. Donot race the engine immediatelyafter starting it. Operate theengine and transmission gentlyto allow the oil to warm up andlubricate all moving parts.

The vehicle has aComputer-Controlled CrankingSystem. This feature assists instarting the engine and protectscomponents. If the ignition key isturned to the START position,and then released when theengine begins cranking, theengine will continue cranking fora few seconds or until thevehicle starts. If the engine doesnot start and the key is held inSTART, cranking will be stoppedafter 15 seconds to preventcranking motor damage. Toprevent gear damage, thissystem also prevents cranking ifthe engine is already running.Engine cranking can be stoppedby turning the ignition switch tothe ACC/ACCESSORY orLOCK/OFF position.

When the Low Fuel warninglamp is on and the FUEL LEVELLOW message is displayed inthe Driver Information Center(DIC), the Computer-ControlledCranking System is disabled to



prevent possible vehiclecomponent damage. When thishappens, hold the ignition switchin the START position tocontinue engine cranking.

Notice: Cranking the engine forlong periods of time, by returningthe key to the START positionimmediately after cranking hasended, can overheat and damagethe cranking motor, and drain thebattery. Wait at least 15 secondsbetween each try, to let thecranking motor cool down.

2. If the engine does not start after5-10 seconds, especially in verycold weather (below −18°C or0°F), it could be flooded with toomuch gasoline. Try pushing theaccelerator pedal all the way tothe floor and holding it there asyou hold the key in START forup to a maximum of 15 seconds.

Wait at least 15 secondsbetween each try, to allow thecranking motor to cool down.When the engine starts, let go ofthe key and accelerator. If thevehicle starts briefly but thenstops again, repeat these steps.This clears the extra gasolinefrom the engine. Do not race theengine immediately after startingit. Operate the engine andtransmission gently until the oilwarms up and lubricates allmoving parts.

Notice: If you add electrical partsor accessories, you could changethe way the engine operates. Anyresulting damage would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.See Add-On Electrical Equipmenton page 9‑69.

Engine HeaterThe engine coolant heater canprovide easier starting and betterfuel economy during enginewarm-up in cold weather conditionsat or below −18°C (0°F). Vehicleswith an engine heater should beplugged in at least four hours beforestarting. An internal thermostat inthe plug-end of the cord may existwhich will prevent engine coolantheater operation at temperaturesabove −18°C (0°F).

To Use the Engine CoolantHeater

1. Turn off the engine.

2. Open the hood and unwrap theelectrical cord. The cord issecured to the enginecompartment fuse block with aclip. Carefully remove the wiretie which secures the electricalcord. Do not cut theelectrical cord.



3. Plug the cord into a normal,grounded 110-volt AC outlet.

{ WARNING

Plugging the cord into anungrounded outlet could cause anelectrical shock. Also, the wrongkind of extension cord couldoverheat and cause a fire. Youcould be seriously injured. Plugthe cord into a properly groundedthree-prong 110-volt AC outlet.If the cord will not reach, use aheavy-duty three-prong extensioncord rated for at least 15 amps.

4. Before starting the engine, besure to unplug and store thecord as it was before to keep itaway from moving engine parts.If you do not, it could bedamaged.

The length of time the heater shouldremain plugged in depends onseveral factors. Ask a dealer in thearea where you will be parking thevehicle for the best advice on this.

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP)The following vehicle accessoriescan be used for up to 10 minutesafter the engine is turned off:. Audio System. Power Windows. OnStar System (if equipped). Sunroof (if equipped)

These features work when the keyis in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY. Once the key isturned from ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF,the windows and sunroof continueto work up to 10 minutes until anydoor is opened. The radio continuesto work for up to 10 minutes or untilthe driver door is opened.

Shifting Into Park

{ WARNING

It can be dangerous to get out ofthe vehicle if the shift lever is notfully in P (Park) with the parkingbrake firmly set. The vehicle canroll. If you have left the enginerunning, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could beinjured. To be sure the vehicle willnot move, even when you are onfairly level ground, use the stepsthat follow. If you are pulling atrailer, see Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips on page 9‑57.

1. Hold the brake pedal down, thenset the parking brake.

2. Move the shift lever into theP (Park) position by pulling theshift lever toward you andmoving it up as far as it will go.

3. Turn the ignition key toLOCK/OFF.



4. Remove the key and take it withyou. If you can leave the vehiclewith the ignition key in yourhand, the vehicle is in P (Park).

Leaving the Vehicle with theEngine Running

{ WARNING

It can be dangerous to leave thevehicle with the engine running.The vehicle could move suddenlyif the shift lever is not fully inP (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. And, if you leave thevehicle with the engine running, itcould overheat and even catchfire. You or others could beinjured. Do not leave the vehiclewith the engine running.

If you have to leave the vehicle withthe engine running, be sure thevehicle is in P (Park) and theparking brake is firmly set. After theshift lever is moved into P (Park),hold the regular brake pedal down.

Then, see if you can move the shiftlever away from P (Park) withoutfirst pulling it toward you. If you can,it means that the shift lever was notfully locked into P (Park).

Torque Lock

If you are parking on a hill and youdo not shift the transmission intoP (Park) properly, the weight of thevehicle can put too much force onthe parking pawl in thetransmission. It might be difficult topull the shift lever out of P (Park).This is called torque lock. Toprevent torque lock, set the parkingbrake and then shift into P (Park)properly before you leave the driverseat. To find out how, see ShiftingInto Park on page 9‑26.

When you are ready to drive, movethe shift lever out of P (Park) beforereleasing the parking brake.

If torque lock does occur, you mightneed to have another vehicle pushyours a little uphill to take some ofthe pressure from the parking pawl

in the transmission. Then youshould be able to pull the shift leverout of P (Park).

Shifting out of ParkThis vehicle is equipped with anelectronic shift lock release system.The shift lock release isdesigned to:. Prevent ignition key removal

unless the shift lever is inP (Park) with the shift leverbutton fully released.

. Prevent movement of the shiftlever out of P (Park), unless theignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY and the regularbrake pedal is applied.

The shift lock release is alwaysfunctional except in the case of anuncharged or low voltage (less than9 volt) battery.



If the vehicle has an unchargedbattery or a battery with low voltage,try charging or jump starting thebattery. See Jump Starting onpage 10‑88 for more information.

To shift out of P (Park) use thefollowing:

1. Apply the brake pedal.

2. Move the shift lever to thedesired position.

If you still are unable to shift out ofP (Park):

1. Ease the pressure on the shiftlever.

2. While holding down the brakepedal, press the shift lever allthe way into P (Park).

3. Move the shift lever to thedesired position.

If you are still having a problemshifting, then have the vehicleserviced soon.

Parking over ThingsThat Burn

{ WARNING

Things that can burn could touchhot exhaust parts under thevehicle and ignite. Do not parkover papers, leaves, dry grass,or other things that can burn.

Active Fuel Management®

Vehicles with V8 engines may haveActive Fuel Management™. Thissystem allows the engine to operateon either all or half of its cylinders,depending on the driving conditions.

When less power is required, suchas cruising at a constant vehiclespeed, the system will operate inthe half cylinder mode, allowing thevehicle to achieve better fueleconomy. When greater powerdemands are required, such asaccelerating from a stop, passing,or merging onto a freeway, thesystem will maintain full-cylinderoperation.

If the vehicle has an Active FuelManagement™ indicator, see DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5‑23 for more information onusing this display.



Engine Exhaust

{ WARNING

Engine exhaust contains carbonmonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. Exposure to COcan cause unconsciousness andeven death.

Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:. The vehicle idles in areaswith poor ventilation (parkinggarages, tunnels, deep snowthat may block underbodyairflow or tail pipes).

. The exhaust smells orsounds strange or different.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. The exhaust system leaksdue to corrosion or damage.

. The vehicle exhaust systemhas been modified, damagedor improperly repaired.

. There are holes or openingsin the vehicle body fromdamage or aftermarketmodifications that are notcompletely sealed.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

If unusual fumes are detected orif it is suspected that exhaust iscoming into the vehicle:

. Drive it only with the windowscompletely down.

. Have the vehicle repairedimmediately.

Never park the vehicle with theengine running in an enclosedarea such as a garage or abuilding that has no fresh airventilation.



Running the VehicleWhile ParkedIt is better not to park with theengine running. But if you ever haveto, here are some things to know.

{ WARNING

Idling a vehicle in an enclosedarea with poor ventilation isdangerous. Engine exhaust mayenter the vehicle. Engine exhaustcontains carbon monoxide (CO)which cannot be seen or smelled.It can cause unconsciousnessand even death. Never run theengine in an enclosed area thathas no fresh air ventilation. Formore information, see EngineExhaust on page 9‑29.

{ WARNING

It can be dangerous to get out ofthe vehicle if the automatictransmission shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll. Donot leave the vehicle when theengine is running unless youhave to. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle canmove suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure thevehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground,always set the parking brake andmove the shift lever to P (Park).

Follow the proper steps to be surethe vehicle will not move. SeeShifting Into Park on page 9‑26.

If parking on a hill and pulling atrailer, see Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips on page 9‑57.

AutomaticTransmissionIf the vehicle is a hybrid, see thehybrid supplement for moreinformation.

The vehicle has aHydra-Matic® 6L80 automatictransmission, and has an electronicshift position indicator within theinstrument panel cluster. Theelectronic shift position indicatordisplays when the shift lever ismoved out of P (Park).

There are several different positionsfor the shift lever.



P (Park): This position locks therear wheels. It is the best position touse when you start the enginebecause the vehicle cannot moveeasily.

When parked on a hill, especiallywhen the vehicle has a heavy load,you may notice an increase in theeffort to shift out of P (Park). See“Torque Lock” under Shifting IntoPark on page 9‑26 for moreinformation.

{ WARNING

It is dangerous to get out of thevehicle if the shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll.

Do not leave the vehicle when theengine is running unless youhave to. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle canmove suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure the

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

vehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground,always set the parking brake andmove the shift lever to P (Park).See Shifting Into Park onpage 9‑26. If you are pulling atrailer, see Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips on page 9‑57.

R (Reverse): Use this gear toback up.

Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse)while the vehicle is movingforward could damage thetransmission. The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Shift to R (Reverse) onlyafter the vehicle is stopped.

To rock the vehicle back and forth toget out of snow, ice, or sand withoutdamaging the transmission, see Ifthe Vehicle Is Stuck on page 9‑15.

N (Neutral): In this position, theengine does not connect with thewheels. To restart when you arealready moving, use N (Neutral)only. Also, use N (Neutral) when thevehicle is being towed.

{ WARNING

Shifting into a drive gear while theengine is running at high speed isdangerous. Unless your foot isfirmly on the brake pedal, thevehicle could move very rapidly.You could lose control and hitpeople or objects. Do not shiftinto a drive gear while the engineis running at high speed.

Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) orN (Neutral) with the enginerunning at high speed maydamage the transmission. Therepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Be sure theengine is not running at highspeed when shifting the vehicle.



D (Drive): This position is fornormal driving. It provides the bestfuel economy. If you need morepower for passing, and you are:. Going less than about 55 km/h

(35 mph), push the acceleratorpedal about halfway down.

. Going about 55 km/h (35 mph) ormore, push the accelerator allthe way down.

By doing this, the vehicle shiftsdown to the next gear and has morepower.

D (Drive) can be used when towinga trailer, carrying a heavy load,driving on steep hills, or for off-roaddriving. You may want to shift thetransmission to a lower gearselection if the transmission shiftstoo often.

Downshifting the transmission inslippery road conditions could resultin skidding, see “Skidding” underLoss of Control on page 9‑5.

M (Manual Mode): This positionlets drivers select the range of gearsappropriate for current drivingconditions. See “Driver Shift Control(DSC)” under Manual Mode onpage 9‑33.

Notice: Spinning the tires orholding the vehicle in one placeon a hill using only theaccelerator pedal may damagethe transmission. The repair willnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. If you are stuck, do notspin the tires. When stopping ona hill, use the brakes to hold thevehicle in place.

The vehicle has a shift stabilizationfeature that adjusts the transmissionshifting to the current drivingconditions in order to reduce rapidupshifts and downshifts. This shiftstabilization feature is designed todetermine, before making anupshift, if the engine will be able tomaintain vehicle speed by analyzingthings such as vehicle speed,throttle position and vehicle load.

If the shift stabilization featuredetermines that a current vehiclespeed cannot be maintained, thetransmission does not upshift andinstead holds the current gear. Insome cases, this may appear to bea delayed shift, however thetransmission is operating normally.

The vehicle's transmission usesadaptive shift controls thatcompares key shift parameters topre-programmed ideal shifts storedin the transmissions computer. Thetransmission constantly makesadjustments to improve vehicleperformance according to how thevehicle is being used, such as witha heavy load or when temperaturechanges. During this adaptive shiftcontrols process, shifting may feeldifferent as the transmissiondetermines the best settings.

When temperatures are very cold,the Hydra-Matic® 6L80 automatictransmission's gear shifting may bedelayed providing more stable shiftsuntil the engine warms up. Shifts



may be more noticeable with a coldtransmission. This difference inshifting is normal.

Manual Mode

Driver Shift Control (DSC)

The vehicle has Driver ShiftControl (DSC). DSC controls thevehicle's transmission and vehiclespeed while driving down hill ortowing a trailer by allowing you toselect a desired range of gears.

To use this feature, do the following:

1. Move the shift lever to theM (Manual Mode).

2. Press the plus/minus button, toupshift or downshift selecting thedesired range of gears forcurrent driving conditions.

The DIC display will show themessage MANUAL SHIFT on thefirst line and the current gear will bedisplayed on the second line. Thenumber displayed in the DIC is thehighest gear that can be used.However, the vehicle canautomatically shift to lower gears asit adjusts to driving conditions. Thismeans that all gears below thatnumber are available. When 5 (Fifth)is selected, 1 (First) through 5 (Fifth)gears are automatically shifted bythe vehicle, but 6 (Sixth) cannot beused until the plus/minus buttonlocated on the steering column leveris used to change to the gear.

Grade Braking is not available whenthe Driver Shift Control is active.See Tow/Haul Mode on page 9‑33for more information.

While using the DSC, CruiseControl and the Tow/Haul Mode canbe used.

Tow/Haul Mode

The vehicle has a Tow/Haul Mode.The Tow/Haul Mode adjusts thetransmission shift pattern to reduceshift cycling, providing increasedperformance, vehicle control, andtransmission cooling when drivingdown steep hills and mountaingrades, towing, or hauling heavyloads.

Press the button located on the endof the shift lever to turn the tow/haulon or off. When the tow/haul is on, alight on the instrument panel clusterwill come on.

See Tow/Haul Mode Light onpage 5‑20 and Hill and MountainRoads on page 9‑12 for moreinformation.



Also see “Tow/Haul Mode” underTowing Equipment on page 9‑65 formore information.

The Tow/Haul Mode works with theAutoride® feature, if the vehicle hasthis, to enhance the ride whentrailering or with a loaded vehicle.See Continuous Damping Control(CDC) on page 9‑40.

Grade Braking

The Grade Braking shift modes canbe activated by pressing the buttonon the end of the shift control lever.While in Range Selection Mode,Grade Braking is deactivatedallowing the driver to select adesired range of gears.

Grade Braking is only active whilethe Tow/Haul Mode is selected andyou are not in the Range SelectionMode. See “Tow/Haul Mode” listed

previously and Manual Mode onpage 9‑33 for more information onthe Range Selection Mode. GradeBraking assists in maintainingdesired vehicle speeds when drivingon downhill grades by automaticallyimplementing a shift schedule thatutilizes the engine and transmissionto slow the vehicle. This reduceswear on the braking system andincreases control of the vehicle.Grade Braking monitors vehiclespeed, acceleration, engine torqueand brake pedal usage. Using thisinformation, it detects when thevehicle is on a downhill grade andthe driver desires to slow the vehicleby pressing the brake.

Also see Towing Equipment onpage 9‑65 for more information.

Drive Systems

All-Wheel DriveIf the vehicle has this feature,engine power is sent to all fourwheels when extra traction isneeded. This is like four-wheeldrive, but there is no separate leveror switch to engage or disengagethe front axle. It is fully automatic,and adjusts itself as needed for roadconditions.

If the vehicle is a hybrid, see“Four-Wheel Drive” in the hybridsupplement.



Brakes

Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS)This vehicle has the Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS), an advancedelectronic braking system that helpsprevent a braking skid.

When the engine is started and thevehicle begins to drive away, ABSchecks itself. A momentary motor orclicking noise might be heard whilethis test is going on, and it mighteven be noticed that the brakepedal moves a little. This is normal.

If there is a problem with ABS, thiswarning light stays on. See AntilockBrake System (ABS) Warning Lighton page 5‑20.

If driving safely on a wet road and itbecomes necessary to slam on thebrakes and continue braking toavoid a sudden obstacle, acomputer senses that the wheelsare slowing down. If one of thewheels is about to stop rolling, thecomputer will separately work thebrakes at each wheel.

ABS can change the brake pressureto each wheel, as required, fasterthan any driver could. This can helpthe driver steer around the obstaclewhile braking hard.

As the brakes are applied, thecomputer keeps receiving updateson wheel speed and controlsbraking pressure accordingly.

Remember: ABS does not changethe time needed to get a foot up tothe brake pedal or always decreasestopping distance. If you get tooclose to the vehicle in front of you,there will not be enough time toapply the brakes if that vehicle

suddenly slows or stops. Alwaysleave enough room up ahead tostop, even with ABS.

Using ABS

Do not pump the brakes. Just holdthe brake pedal down firmly and letABS work. You might hear the ABSpump or motor operating and feelthe brake pedal pulsate, but this isnormal.

Braking in Emergencies

ABS allows the driver to steer andbrake at the same time. In manyemergencies, steering can helpmore than even the very bestbraking.



Parking Brake

Set the parking brake by holding theregular brake pedal down, thenpushing down the parking brakepedal.

If the ignition is on, the brakesystem warning light will come on.See Brake System Warning Light onpage 5‑19.

Notice: Driving with the parkingbrake on can overheat the brakesystem and cause prematurewear or damage to brake systemparts. Make sure that the parking

brake is fully released and thebrake warning light is off beforedriving.

To release the parking brake, holdthe regular brake pedal down, thenpush down momentarily on theparking brake pedal until you feelthe pedal release. Slowly pull yourfoot up off the parking brake pedal.If the parking brake is not releasedwhen you begin to drive, the brakesystem warning light will flash and achime will sound warning you thatthe parking brake is still on.

If you are towing a trailer and areparking on a hill, see DrivingCharacteristics and Towing Tips onpage 9‑57.

Brake AssistThis vehicle has a brake assistfeature designed to assist the driverin stopping or decreasing vehiclespeed in emergency drivingconditions. This feature uses thestability system hydraulic brakecontrol module to supplement the

power brake system underconditions where the driver hasquickly and forcefully applied thebrake pedal in an attempt to quicklystop or slow down the vehicle. Thestability system hydraulic brakecontrol module increases brakepressure at each corner of thevehicle until the ABS activates.Minor brake pedal pulsation orpedal movement during this time isnormal and the driver shouldcontinue to apply the brake pedal asthe driving situation dictates. Thebrake assist feature willautomatically disengage when thebrake pedal is released or brakepedal pressure is quicklydecreased.

Hill Start Assist (HSA)Non‐hybrid vehicles with StabiliTrakhave a Hill Start Assist (HSA)feature, which may be useful whenthe vehicle is stopped on a grade.This feature is designed to preventthe vehicle from rolling, eitherforward or rearward, during vehicle



drive off. After the driver completelystops and holds the vehicle in acomplete standstill on a grade, HSAwill be automatically activated.During the transition period betweenwhen the driver releases the brakepedal and starts to accelerate todrive off on a grade, HSA holds thebraking pressure for a maximum oftwo seconds to ensure that there isno rolling. The brakes willautomatically release when theaccelerator pedal is applied withinthe two‐second window. It will notactivate if the vehicle is in a drivegear and facing downhill or if thevehicle is facing uphill and inR (Reverse). There may besituations on minor hills (less than5% grade) with a loaded vehicle orwhile pulling a trailer where HSA willnot activate.

Ride Control Systems

StabiliTrak® SystemThe vehicle has a vehicle stabilityenhancement system calledStabiliTrak. It is an advancedcomputer-controlled system thatassists the driver with directionalcontrol of the vehicle in difficultdriving conditions.

StabiliTrak activates when thecomputer senses a discrepancybetween the intended path and thedirection the vehicle is actuallytraveling. StabiliTrak selectivelyapplies braking pressure at any oneof the vehicle's brakes to assist thedriver with keeping the vehicle onthe intended path.

StabiliTrak is on automaticallywhenever the vehicle is started. Toassist with directional control of thevehicle, the system should alwaysbe left on. Trailer Sway Control(TSC) is also on automatically when

the vehicle is started. See TrailerSway Control (TSC) on page 9‑69for more information.

When the vehicle is started andbegins to move, the systemperforms several diagnostic checksto insure there are no problems.The system may be heard or feltwhile it is working. This is normaland does not mean there is aproblem with the vehicle. Thesystem should initialize before thevehicle reaches 32 km/h (20 mph).In some cases, it may takeapproximately 3.2 km (2 mi) ofdriving before the system initializes.

If cruise control is being used whenStabiliTrak activates, the cruisecontrol automatically disengages.The cruise control can bere-engaged when road conditionsallow. See Cruise Control onpage 9‑41.

If the system fails to turn on oractivate, the StabiliTrak light alongwith a message will be displayed onthe Driver Information Center (DIC).



If a DIC message appears, makesure the StabiliTrak system has notbeen turned off using the TractionControl System (TCS)/StabiliTrakbutton. Then turn the vehicle off,wait 15 seconds, and then turn itback on again to reset the system.If any of the messages still appearon the DIC, the vehicle should betaken in for service. For moreinformation on the DIC messages,see Ride Control System Messageson page 5‑34.

The StabiliTrak light will flash on theinstrument panel cluster when thesystem or the TSC feature is bothon and activated.

The system may be heard or feltwhile it is working; this is normal.

The TCS/StabiliTrak button islocated on the instrument panel.

The traction control part ofStabiliTrak can be turned off bypressing and releasing the TCS/StabiliTrak button if both systems(traction control and StabiliTrak)were previously on.

To disable both TCS andStabiliTrak, press and hold theTCS/StabiliTrak button until theStabiliTrak OFF light illuminates and

the appropriate DIC messagedisplays. This will also disable theTSC feature.

Traction control and StabiliTrak canbe turned on by pressing andreleasing the TCS/StabiliTrak buttonif they are not automatically shut offfor any other reason. This will alsoenable the TSC feature.

When the TCS or StabiliTrak systemis turned off, the StabiliTrak lightand the appropriate TCS off orStabiliTrak off message will bedisplayed on the DIC to warn thedriver. The vehicle will still havebrake-traction control when tractioncontrol is off, but will not be able touse the engine speed managementsystem. See “Traction ControlOperation” next for moreinformation.

When TCS has been turned off,system noises may still be heard asa result of the brake-traction controlcoming on.



It is recommended to leave thesystem on for normal drivingconditions, but it may be necessaryto turn the system off if the vehicleis stuck in sand, mud, ice or snow,and you want to “rock” the vehicle toattempt to free it. It may also benecessary to turn off the systemwhen driving in extreme off-roadconditions where high wheel spin isrequired. See If the Vehicle Is Stuckon page 9‑15.

Traction Control Operation

TCS is part of the StabiliTraksystem. Traction control limits wheelspin by reducing engine power tothe wheels (engine speedmanagement) and by applyingbrakes to each individual wheel(brake-traction control) asnecessary.

TCS is enabled automatically whenthe vehicle is started. It will activateand the StabiliTrak light will flash if itsenses that any of the wheels arespinning or beginning to losetraction while driving. If traction

control is turned off, only thebrake-traction control portion oftraction control will work. Theengine speed management will bedisabled. In this mode, enginepower is not reduced automaticallyand the driven wheels can spinmore freely. This can cause thebrake-traction control to activateconstantly.

Notice: If the wheel(s) of one axleis allowed to spin excessivelywhile the StabiliTrak®, ABS, brakewarning lights, and any relevantDIC messages are displayed, thetransfer case could be damaged.The repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Reduceengine power and do not spin thewheel(s) excessively while theselights and messages aredisplayed.

TCS may activate on dry or roughroads or under conditions such asheavy acceleration while turning orabrupt upshifts/downshifts of thetransmission. When this happens, a

reduction in acceleration may benoticed, or a noise or vibration maybe heard. This is normal.

If cruise control is being used whenthe system activates, the StabiliTraklight will flash and cruise control willautomatically disengage. Cruisecontrol may be reengaged whenroad conditions allow. See CruiseControl on page 9‑41.

StabiliTrak may also turn offautomatically if it determines that aproblem exists with the system.If the problem does not clear itselfafter restarting the vehicle, see yourdealer for service.

Non-hybrid vehicles with StabiliTrakhave a Trailer Sway Control (TSC)feature. See Trailer Sway Control(TSC) on page 9‑69.

Non-hybrid vehicles with StabiliTrakhave a Hill Start Assist (HSA)feature. See Hill Start Assist (HSA)on page 9‑36.



Adding non‐dealer accessories canaffect the vehicle's performance.See Accessories and Modificationson page 10‑3.

Locking Rear AxleVehicles with a locking rear axle cangive more traction on snow, mud,ice, sand, or gravel. It works like astandard axle most of the time, butwhen traction is low, this feature willallow the rear wheel with the mosttraction to move the vehicle.

Road SensingSuspensionThe Road Sensing Suspension(RSS) feature provides superiorvehicle ride and handling under avariety of passenger and loadingconditions.

The system is fully automatic anduses a computer controller tocontinuously monitor vehicle speed,wheel to body position, lift/dive andsteering position of the vehicle. Thecontroller then sends signals to

each shock absorber toindependently adjust the dampinglevel to provide the optimumvehicle ride.

RSS also interacts with the tow/haulmode that, when engaged, willprovide additional control of theshock absorbers. This additionalcontrol results in better ride andhandling characteristics when thevehicle is loaded or towing a trailer.See “Tow/Haul Mode” under TowingEquipment on page 9‑65.

Continuous DampingControl (CDC)This vehicle may have a continuousdamping control system calledAutoride® or MagneRide™. Withthis feature, improved vehicle rideand handling is provided under avariety of passenger and loadingconditions.

Autoride and MagneRide are fullyautomatic and use a computercontroller to continuously monitorvehicle speed, wheel to body

position, lift/dive and steeringposition of the vehicle. Thecontroller then sends signals toeach shock absorber toindependently adjust the dampinglevel to provide the optimumvehicle ride.

Autoride and MagneRide alsointeract with the tow/haul mode that,when activated, will provideadditional control of the shockabsorbers. This additional controlresults in better ride and handlingcharacteristics when the vehicle isloaded or towing a trailer. See “Tow/Haul Mode” under Trailer Towing onpage 9‑61 for more information.

Automatic Level ControlThe automatic level control rearsuspension is available on light‐dutyvehicles and comes as a part of theContinuous Damping Control (CDC)suspension, if equipped.

This type of level control is fullyautomatic and will provide a betterleveled riding position as well as



better handling under a variety ofpassenger and loading conditions.An air compressor connected to therear shocks will raise or lower therear of the vehicle to maintainproper vehicle height. The system isactivated when the ignition key isturned to ON/RUN and willautomatically adjust vehicle heightthereafter. The system may exhaust(lower vehicle height) for up toten minutes after the ignition keyhas been turned off. You may hearthe air compressor operating whenthe height is being adjusted.

If a weight‐distributing hitch is beingused, it is recommended to allowthe shocks to inflate, therebyleveling the vehicle prior to adjustingthe hitch.

Cruise Control

{ WARNING

Cruise control can be dangerouswhere you cannot drive safely ata steady speed. So, do not usethe cruise control on windingroads or in heavy traffic.

Cruise control can be dangerouson slippery roads. On such roads,fast changes in tire traction cancause excessive wheel slip, andyou could lose control. Do not usecruise control on slippery roads.

With cruise control, a speed ofabout 40 km/h (25 mph) or more canbe maintained without keeping yourfoot on the accelerator. Cruisecontrol does not work at speedsbelow about 40 km/h (25 mph).

When the brakes are applied, cruisecontrol is turned off.

This vehicle has a Hydra‐Matic6‐speed automatic transmission,see Grade Braking under Tow/HaulMode on page 9‑33 for anexplanation of how cruise controlinteracts with the Range SelectionMode, tow/haul and grade brakingsystems.

This vehicle has StabiliTrak andwhen the system begins to limitwheel spin, the cruise control willautomatically disengage. SeeStabiliTrak® System on page 9‑37.When road conditions allow thecruise control to be safely usedagain, it can be turned back on.



Cruise Control Shown with HeatedSteering Wheel Button

(If Equipped)

The cruise control buttons arelocated on the left side of thesteering wheel.

I (On/Off): Press to turn thesystem on or off. The indicator lightis on when cruise control is on andturns off when cruise control is off.

+ RES (Resume/Accelerate):Press briefly to make the vehicleresume to a previously set speed,or press and hold to accelerate.

SET − (Set/Coast): Press to setthe speed and activate cruisecontrol or make the vehicledecelerate.

[ (Cancel): Press to disengagecruise control without erasing theset speed from memory.

Setting Cruise Control

If the cruise button is on when not inuse, it could get bumped and go intocruise when not desired. Keep thecruise control switch off when cruiseis not being used.

The cruise control light on theinstrument panel cluster comes onafter the cruise control has been setto the desired speed.

1. Press theI button.

2. Get up to the desired speed.

3. Press the SET− button locatedon the steering wheel andrelease it.

4. Take your foot off theaccelerator.

Resuming a Set Speed

If the cruise control is set at adesired speed and then the brakesare applied, the cruise control isdisengaged without erasing the setspeed from memory.

Once the vehicle speed reachesabout 40 km/h (25 mph) or more,press the +RES button on thesteering wheel. The vehicle returnsto the previous set speed and staysthere.

Increasing Speed While UsingCruise Control

If the cruise control system isalready activated,. Press and hold the +RES button

on the steering wheel until thedesired speed is reached, thenrelease it.

. To increase vehicle speed insmall amounts, press the +RESbutton. Each time this is done,the vehicle goes about 1.6 km/h(1 mph) faster.



Reducing Speed While UsingCruise Control

If the cruise control system isalready activated,. Press and hold the SET– button

on the steering wheel until thedesired lower speed is reached,then release it.

. To slow down in small amounts,press the SET– button on thesteering wheel briefly. Each timethis is done, the vehicle goesabout 1.6 km/h (1 mph) slower.

Passing Another Vehicle WhileUsing Cruise Control

Use the accelerator pedal toincrease the vehicle speed. Whenyou take your foot off the pedal, thevehicle will slow down to theprevious set cruise speed.

Using Cruise Control on Hills

How well the cruise control workson hills depends on the vehiclespeed, the load, and the steepnessof the hills. When going up steephills, pressing the accelerator pedalmay be necessary to maintainvehicle speed.

While going downhill, the CruiseGrade Braking feature mayautomatically shift to a lower gear tokeep the vehicle's speed down.It may be necessary to apply thebrake or manually shift thetransmission to a lower gear. Thevehicle may shift to a higher gearwhen grade braking assistance isno longer required. Cruise GradeBraking is not available while inRange Selection Mode. See "RangeSelection Mode" under ManualMode on page 9‑33.

When the brakes are manuallyapplied the cruise control isdisengaged.

Ending Cruise Control

There are three ways to end cruisecontrol:. To disengage cruise control,

step lightly on the brake pedal.

. Press [ on the steering wheel.

. To turn off the cruise control,pressI on the steering wheel.

Erasing Speed Memory

The cruise control set speed iserased from memory by pressingtheI button or if the ignition isturned off.



Object DetectionSystems

Ultrasonic Parking AssistIf available, the Ultrasonic RearParking Assist (URPA) system usessensors on the rear bumper toassist with parking and avoidingobjects while in R (Reverse).

{ WARNING

The URPA system does notdetect pedestrians, bicyclists,animals, or objects below thebumper or that are too close ortoo far from the vehicle. Toprevent injury, death, or vehicledamage, even with URPA, alwayscheck the area around the vehicleand check all mirrors beforebacking.

How the System Works

URPA comes on automatically whenthe shift lever is moved intoR (Reverse). A single tone soundsto indicate the system is working.

URPA operates only at speeds lessthan 8 km/h (5 mph).

An obstacle is indicated by audiblebeeps. The interval between thebeeps becomes shorter as thevehicle gets closer to the obstacle.A continuous tone is heard whenthe distance is less than30 cm (12 in).

To be detected, objects must be atleast 25 cm (10 in) off the groundand below liftgate level. Objectsmust also be within 2.5 m (8 ft) fromthe rear bumper. This distance maybe less during warmer or humidweather.

Turning the System On and Off

Press this button, located next tothe radio, to disable URPA.

The indicator light will come on andPARK ASSIST OFF displays on theDriver Information Center (DIC). SeeObject Detection System Messageson page 5‑33.

When the System Does NotSeem to Work Properly

The following messages may bedisplayed on the DIC:

SERVICE PARKING ASSIST: Ifthis message occurs, take thevehicle to your dealer for repair.



PARKING ASSIST OFF: Thismessage occurs if the driverdisables the system or if the vehicleis driven above 8 km/h (5 mph) inR (Reverse).

PARKING ASSIST BLOCKED SEEOWNERS MANUAL: Thismessage can occur under thefollowing conditions:. The ultrasonic sensors are not

clean. Keep the vehicle's rearbumper free of mud, dirt, snow,ice, slush, and frost. Themessage may not clear untilfrost or ice has melted all aroundand inside the sensor.

. A trailer is attached to thevehicle, or a bicycle or an objectwas hanging out of the liftgateduring the current or last drivecycle. URPA will return to normaloperation after it is determinedthe object is removed. Thiscould take a few drive cycles.

. A tow bar is attached to thevehicle.

Other conditions may affect systemperformance, such as vibrationsfrom a jackhammer or thecompression of air brakes on a verylarge truck.

Side Blind ZoneAlert (SBZA)If available, the Side Blind ZoneAlert system is a lane changing aidthat assists drivers with avoidingcrashes that occur with vehicles inthe side blind zones.

{ WARNING

SBZA does not detect vehiclesrapidly approaching outside of theside blind zones, pedestrians,bicyclists, or animals. Failure touse proper care when changinglanes may result in injury, death,or vehicle damage. Always checkfor other vehicles and use theturn signals when changing lanes.

SBZA Detection Zones

The SBZA sensor covers a zone ofapproximately one lane over fromboth sides of the vehicle, 3.5 m(11 ft). This zone starts at each sidemirror and goes back approximately5.0 m (16 ft). The height of the zoneis approximately between0.5 m (1.5 ft) and 2.0 m (6 ft) off theground.

Use caution while changing laneswhen towing a trailer, as the SBZAdetection zones do not changewhen a trailer is towed.



How the System Works

The SBZA symbol lights up in theside mirrors when the systemdetects a vehicle in the side blindzone, indicating it may be unsafe tochange lanes. Before making a lanechange, check the SBZA display,check all mirrors, glance over yourshoulder, and use the turn signals.

Left Side MirrorDisplay

Right Side MirrorDisplay

When the vehicle is started, bothoutside mirror SBZA displays willbriefly come on to indicate thesystem is operating. When thevehicle is moving forward, the left orright side mirror display will light upif a vehicle is detected in that blind

zone. If the turn signal is activatedand a vehicle is also detected onthe same side, the display will flashto give you extra warning not tochange lanes.

At speeds greater then 32 km/h(20 mph), SBZA displays may comeon when approaching or passingother vehicles. SBZA displays maycome on when a passed vehicleremains in or drops back into thedetection zone. SBZA can bedisabled through the DriverInformation Center (DIC). See DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5‑23. If SBZA is disabled bythe driver, the SBZA mirror displayswill not light up.

When the System Does Not SeemTo Work Properly

Missed alerts can occur undernormal circumstances and willincrease in wet conditions. Thesystem does not need to beserviced. SBZA is designed to

ignore stationary objects; however,the system may occasionally lightup due to guard rails, signs, trees,shrubs, and other stationary objects.This is normal system operation, thevehicle does not need service.

If the SBZA displays do not light upwhen the system is on and vehiclesare in the blind zone, the systemmay need service. Take the vehicleto your dealer.

SBZA does not operate when theSBZA sensors in the left or rightcorners of the rear bumper arecovered with mud, dirt, snow, ice,slush, or in heavy rainstorms. Forcleaning instructions, see “Washingthe Vehicle” under Exterior Care onpage 10‑96. If the DIC still displaysthe SIDE BLIND ZONE SYSTEMUNAVAILABLE message aftercleaning the bumper, see yourdealer.



The SBZA displays may remain onif a trailer is attached to the vehicle,or a bicycle or object is extendingout to either side of the vehicle.

When SBZA is disabled for anyreason other than the driver turningit off, it cannot be turned back on.The SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT ONoption will not be selectable if theconditions for normal systemoperation are not met.

SBZA Error Messages

The following messages mayappear in the DIC:

SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERTSYSTEM OFF: This messageindicates that the driver has turnedthe system off.

SIDE BLIND ZONE SYSTEMUNAVAILABLE: This messageindicates that the SBZA system isdisabled either because the sensoris blocked and cannot detectvehicles in your blind zone, or thevehicle is passing through an openfield of view area, such as thedesert, where there is insufficientdata for operation. This messagemay also activate during heavy rainor due to road spray. The vehicledoes not need service. For cleaning,see “Washing the Vehicle” underExterior Care on page 10‑96.

SERVICE SIDE BLIND ZONEALERT SYSTEM: If this messageappears, both SBZA displays willremain on indicating there is aproblem with the SBZA system.If these displays remain on aftercontinued driving, the system needsservice. Take the vehicle to yourdealer.

FCC Information


Frequency of operation:24.05GHz – 24.25GHz

Field Strength: Not greater than2.5V/m peak (0.25V/m average) at adistance of 3m

The manufacturer is not responsiblefor any radio or TV interferencecaused by unauthorizedmodifications to this equipment.Such modifications could void theuser's authority to operate theequipment.



Rear VisionCamera (RVC)If available, the Rear Vision Camera(RVC) system displays part of thescene behind the vehicle.

{ WARNING

The RVC system does not displaypedestrians, bicyclists, animals,or any other object locatedoutside the camera's field of view,below the bumper, or under thevehicle. Do not back the vehicleusing only the RVC screen, suchas during longer, higher speedbacking maneuvers, or wherethere could be cross-traffic.Perceived distances may bedifferent from actual distances.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Failure to use proper care beforebacking may result in injury,death, or vehicle damage. Alwayscheck behind and around thevehicle before backing.

Turning the RVC System Onor Off

The RVC system is designed tohelp the driver when backing up bydisplaying a view of the area behindthe vehicle. When the vehicle isshifted into R (Reverse), the videoimage appears on the navigationscreen. After a delay, the navigationscreen displays the last screen afterthe vehicle is shifted out ofR (Reverse).

To turn the RVC system on or off:

1. Shift into P (Park).

2. Press the CONFIG hard key toenter the configure menuoptions, then press the CONFIGhard key to select Display ortouch the Display screen button.

3. Select the Rear Camera Optionsscreen button. The Rear CameraOptions screen displays.

4. Select the Video screen button.When the Video screen button ishighlighted the RVCsystem is on.



The delay that is received aftershifting out of R (Reverse) isapproximately 10 seconds. Thedelay can be canceled byperforming one of the following:. Pressing a hard key on the

navigation system.. Shifting in to P (Park).. Reach a vehicle speed of

8 km/h (5 mph).

Adjusting the Brightness andContrast of the Screen

To adjust the brightness andcontrast of the screen, press theCONFIG hard key while the RVCimage is on the display. Anyadjustments made will only affectthe RVC screen.

] (Brightness): Touch the + (plus)or – (minus) screen buttons toincrease or decrease the brightnessof the screen.

_ (Contrast): Touch the + (plus) or– (minus) screen buttons to increaseor decrease the contrast of thescreen.

Symbols

The navigation system may have afeature that allows for viewingparking assist symbols on thenavigation screen while using theRVC. The Ultrasonic Rear ParkAssist (URPA) system must not bedisabled to use the caution symbols.If URPA has been disabled and thesymbols have been turned on, theRear Parking Assist SymbolsUnavailable error message maydisplay. See Ultrasonic ParkingAssist on page 9‑44.

The symbols appear near objectsdetected by the URPA system. Thesymbol may cover the object whenviewing the navigation screen.

To turn the symbols on or off:

1. Make sure that URPA has notbeen disabled.




5. Touch the Symbols screenbutton. The screen button will behighlighted when on.

Guidelines

The RVC system has a guidelineoverlay that can help the driver alignthe vehicle when backing into aparking spot.

To turn the guidelines on or off:

1. Make sure that URPA has notbeen disabled.






5. Touch the Guidelines screenbutton. The screen button will behighlighted when on.

RVC Location

The camera is located above thelicense plate.

This shows the field of view that thecamera provides.

A. View displayed by the camera

A. View displayed by the camera

B. Corners of the rear bumper

Displayed images may be further orcloser than they appear. The areadisplayed is limited and objectswhich are close to either corner ofthe bumper or under the bumper donot display.



When the System Does NotSeem To Work Properly

The RVC system might not workproperly or display a clear image if:. The RVC is turned off. See

“Turning the RVC System On orOff” earlier in this section.

. It is dark.

. The sun or the beam ofheadlamps is shining directlyinto the camera lens.

. Ice, snow, mud, or anything elsebuilds up on the camera lens.Clean the lens, rinse it withwater, and wipe it with a softcloth.

. The back of the vehicle is in anaccident, the position andmounting angle of the cameracan change or the camera canbe affected. Be sure to have thecamera and its position andmounting angle checked at yourdealer.

FuelUse of the recommended fuel isan important part of the propermaintenance of this vehicle. To helpkeep the engine clean and maintainoptimum vehicle performance, werecommend the use of gasolineadvertised as TOP TIER DetergentGasoline.

Look for the TOP TIER label on thefuel pump to ensure gasoline meetsenhanced detergency standardsdeveloped by auto companies. A listof marketers providing TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline can be found atwww.toptiergas.com.

Vehicles that have a FlexFuel badgeand a yellow fuel cap can use eitherunleaded gasoline or ethanol fuelcontaining up to 85% ethanol (E85).See Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) onpage 9‑54. For all other vehicles,use only the unleaded gasolinedescribed under RecommendedFuel on page 9‑52.



Recommended FuelUse premium unleaded gasolinewith a posted octane rating of 91 orhigher. You can also use regularunleaded gasoline rated at87 octane or higher, but thevehicle's acceleration could beslightly reduced, and a slight audibleknocking noise, commonly referredto as spark knock, might be heard.If the octane is less than 87, youmight notice a heavy knocking noisewhen you drive. If this occurs, use agasoline rated at 87 octane orhigher as soon as possible.Otherwise, you could damage theengine. If heavy knocking is heardwhen using gasoline rated at91 octane or higher, the engineneeds service.

Gasoline Specifications(U.S. and Canada Only)At a minimum, gasoline should meetASTM specification D 4814 in theUnited States or CAN/CGSB‐3.5or 3.511 in Canada. Somegasolines contain anoctane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT). We recommendagainst the use of gasolinescontaining MMT. See Fuel Additiveson page 9‑53 for additionalinformation.

California FuelRequirementsIf the vehicle is certified to meetCalifornia Emissions Standards, it isdesigned to operate on fuels thatmeet California specifications. Seethe underhood emission controllabel. If this fuel is not available instates adopting California EmissionsStandards, the vehicle will operate

satisfactorily on fuels meetingfederal specifications, but emissioncontrol system performance mightbe affected. The malfunctionindicator lamp could turn on and thevehicle might fail a smog‐check test.See Malfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 5‑16. If this occurs, return toyour authorized dealer for diagnosis.If it is determined that the conditionis caused by the type of fuel used,repairs might not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Fuels in ForeignCountriesNever use leaded gasoline or anyother fuel not recommended in theprevious text on fuel. Costly repairscaused by use of improper fuelwould not be covered by the vehiclewarranty.

To check the fuel availability, ask anauto club, or contact a major oilcompany that does business in thecountry where you will be driving.



Fuel AdditivesTo provide cleaner air, all gasolinesin the United States are nowrequired to contain additives thathelp prevent engine and fuel systemdeposits from forming, allowing theemission control system to workproperly. In most cases, nothingshould have to be added to the fuel.However, some gasolines containonly the minimum amount ofadditive required to meet U.S.Environmental Protection Agencyregulations. To help keep fuelinjectors and intake valves cleanand avoid problems due to dirtyinjectors or valves, look for gasolinethat is advertised as TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline. Look for theTOP TIER label on the fuel pump toensure gasoline meets enhanceddetergency standards developed bythe auto companies. A list ofmarketers providing TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline can be found atwww.toptiergas.com.

For customers who do not use TOPTIER Detergent Gasoline regularly,one bottle of GM Fuel SystemTreatment PLUS, added to the fueltank at every engine oil change, canhelp clean deposits from fuelinjectors and intake valves. GM FuelSystem Treatment PLUS is the onlygasoline additive recommended byGeneral Motors. It is available atyour dealer.

Gasolines containing oxygenates,such as ethers and ethanol, andreformulated gasolines might beavailable in your area. Werecommend that you use thesegasolines, if they comply with thespecifications described earlier.However, E85 (85% ethanol) andother fuels containing more than15% ethanol must not be used invehicles that were not designed forthose fuels.

Notice: This vehicle was notdesigned for fuel that containsmethanol. Do not use fuelcontaining methanol. It cancorrode metal parts in the fuelsystem and also damage plasticand rubber parts. That damagewould not be covered under thevehicle warranty.

Some gasolines that arenot reformulated for lowemissions can contain anoctane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendantwhere you buy gasoline whether thefuel contains MMT. We recommendagainst the use of such gasolines.Fuels containing MMT can reducespark plug life and affect emissioncontrol system performance. Themalfunction indicator lamp mightturn on. If this occurs, return to yourdealer for service.



Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol)Vehicles that have a FlexFuel badgeand a yellow fuel cap can use eitherunleaded gasoline or ethanol fuelcontaining up to 85% ethanol (E85).For all other vehicles, use only theunleaded gasoline described underRecommended Fuel on page 9‑52.

We encourage the use of E85 invehicles that are designed to use it.The ethanol in E85 is a “renewable”fuel, meaning it is made fromrenewable sources such as cornand other crops.

Many service stations will not havean 85% ethanol fuel (E85) pumpavailable. The U.S. Department ofEnergy has an alternative fuelswebsite (www.afdc.energy.gov/afdc/locator/stations/) that can help youfind E85 fuel. Those stations that dohave E85 should have a labelindicating ethanol content. Do notuse the fuel if the ethanol content isgreater than 85%.

At a minimum, E85 should meetASTM Specification D 5798 orCGSB Specification 3.512. Fillingthe tank with fuel mixtures that donot meet ASTM or CGSBspecifications can affect driveabilityand could cause the malfunctionindicator lamp to come on. As theoutside temperature approachesfreezing, ethanol fuel distributorsshould supply winter grade ethanol,the same as with unleadedgasoline.

It is best not to alternate repeatedlybetween gasoline and E85. If youdo switch fuels, it is recommendedthat you add as much fuel aspossible — do not add less than11 L (3 gal) when refueling. Youshould drive the vehicle immediatelyafter refueling for at least 11 km(7 mi) to allow the vehicle to adaptto the change in ethanolconcentration.

E85 has less energy per liter(gallon) than gasoline, so you willneed to refill the fuel tank moreoften when using E85 than whenyou are using gasoline. See Fillingthe Tank on page 9‑55.

Notice: Some additives are notcompatible with E85 fuel and canharm the vehicle's fuel system.Do not add anything to E85.Damage caused by additiveswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Notice: This vehicle was notdesigned for fuel that containsmethanol. Do not use fuelcontaining methanol. It cancorrode metal parts in the fuelsystem and also damage plasticand rubber parts. That damagewould not be covered under thevehicle warranty.



Filling the Tank

{ WARNING

Fuel vapor burns violently and afuel fire can cause bad injuries.To help avoid injuries to you andothers, read and follow all theinstructions on the fuel pumpisland. Turn off the engine whenrefueling. Do not smoke near fuelor when refueling the vehicle. Donot use cellular phones. Keepsparks, flames, and smokingmaterials away from fuel. Do notleave the fuel pump unattendedwhen refueling the vehicle. This isagainst the law in some places.Do not re-enter the vehicle whilepumping fuel. Keep children awayfrom the fuel pump; never letchildren pump fuel.

The tethered fuel cap is locatedbehind a hinged fuel door on thedriver side of the vehicle. If thevehicle has E85 fuel capability, thefuel cap will be yellow and state thatE85 or gasoline can be used. SeeFuel E85 (85% Ethanol) onpage 9‑54.

To open the fuel door, push therearward center edge in and releaseand it will open.

To remove the fuel cap, turn itslowly counterclockwise. The fuelcap has a spring in it; if the cap isreleased too soon, it will spring backto the right.

While refueling, hang the tetheredfuel cap from the hook on thefuel door.

{ WARNING

Fuel can spray out on you if youopen the fuel cap too quickly.If you spill fuel and thensomething ignites it, you could bebadly burned. This spray canhappen if the tank is nearly full,and is more likely in hot weather.Open the fuel cap slowly and waitfor any hiss noise to stop. Thenunscrew the cap all the way.



Be careful not to spill fuel. Do nottop off or overfill the tank and wait afew seconds after you have finishedpumping before removing thenozzle. Clean fuel from paintedsurfaces as soon as possible. SeeExterior Care on page 10‑96.

When replacing the fuel cap, insertthe tether in its hole beforetightening the cap. Turn the fuel capclockwise until it clicks. It will requiremore effort to turn the fuel cap onthe last turn as you tighten it. Makesure the cap is fully installed. Thediagnostic system can determine ifthe fuel cap has been left off orimproperly installed. This wouldallow fuel to evaporate into theatmosphere. See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp on page 5‑16.

If the vehicle has a DriverInformation Center (DIC), theTIGHTEN GAS CAP messagedisplays if the fuel cap is notproperly installed.

{ WARNING

If a fire starts while you arerefueling, do not remove thenozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel byshutting off the pump or bynotifying the station attendant.Leave the area immediately.

Notice: If you need a new fuelcap, be sure to get the right type.Your dealer can get one for you.If you get the wrong type, it maynot fit properly. This may causethe malfunction indicator lamp tolight and may damage the fueltank and emissions system. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 5‑16.

Filling a Portable FuelContainer

{ WARNING

Never fill a portable fuel containerwhile it is in the vehicle. Staticelectricity discharge from thecontainer can ignite the fuelvapor. You can be badly burnedand the vehicle damaged if thisoccurs. To help avoid injury to youand others:

. Dispense fuel only intoapproved containers.

. Do not fill a container while itis inside a vehicle, in avehicle's trunk, pickup bed,or on any surface other thanthe ground.

(Continued)



WARNING (Continued)

. Bring the fill nozzle in contactwith the inside of the fillopening before operating thenozzle. Contact should bemaintained until the filling iscomplete.

. Do not smoke whilepumping fuel.

. Do not use a cellular phonewhile pumping fuel.

Towing

General TowingInformationOnly use towing equipment that hasbeen designed for the vehicle.Contact your dealer or traileringdealer for assistance with preparingthe vehicle for towing a trailer.

See the following trailer towinginformation in this section:. For information on driving while

towing a trailer, see “DrivingCharacteristics andTowing Tips.”

. For maximum vehicle and trailerweights, see “Trailer Towing.”

. For information on equipment totow a trailer, see “TowingEquipment.”

For information on towing a disabledvehicle, see Towing the Vehicle onpage 10‑93. For information ontowing the vehicle behind another

vehicle such as a motor home, seeRecreational Vehicle Towing onpage 10‑93.

Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips

Pulling a Trailer

Here are some important points:. There are many different laws,

including speed limit restrictions,having to do with trailering.Make sure the rig will be legal,not only where you live but alsowhere you will be driving.

. Consider using a sway control.See “Hitches” later in thissection.

. Do not tow a trailer at all duringthe first 800 km (500 miles) thenew vehicle is driven. Theengine, axle or other parts couldbe damaged.

. Then, during the first 800 km(500 miles) that a trailer istowed, do not drive over 80 km/h



(50 mph) and do not make startsat full throttle. This helps theengine and other parts of thevehicle wear in at the heavierloads.

. Vehicles can tow in D (Drive).Shift the transmission to a lowergear if the transmission shiftstoo often under heavy loads and/or hilly conditions.

. If the vehicle has the Side BlindZone Alert (SBZA) system and itdoesn't seem to be workingproperly while pulling a trailer,turn the system off. See SideBlind Zone Alert (SBZA) onpage 9‑45 for more information.

Important considerations that haveto do with weight:. The weight of the trailer. The weight of the trailer tongue. The weight on the vehicle's tires. And the weight of the trailering

combination

Driving with a Trailer

{ WARNING

When towing a trailer, exhaustgases may collect at the rear ofthe vehicle and enter if theliftgate, trunk/hatch, or rear-mostwindow is open.

Engine exhaust contains CarbonMonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. It can causeunconsciousness and even death.

To maximize safety when towinga trailer:

. Have the exhaust systeminspected for leaks and makenecessary repairs beforestarting a trip.

. Never drive with the liftgate,trunk/hatch, or rear-mostwindow open.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)


. Adjust the Climate Controlsystem to a setting thatbrings in only outside air andset the fan speed to thehighest setting. See ClimateControl System in the Index.

For more information aboutCarbon Monoxide, see EngineExhaust on page 9‑29.

Towing a trailer requires a certainamount of experience. Thecombination you are driving islonger and not as responsive as thevehicle itself. Get acquainted withthe handling and braking of the rigbefore setting out for the open road.



Before starting, check all trailer hitchparts and attachments, safetychains, electrical connectors,lamps, tires and mirrors. If thetrailer has electric brakes, start thecombination moving and then applythe trailer brake controller by handto be sure the brakes work.

During the trip, check occasionallyto be sure that the load is secureand the lamps and any trailerbrakes still work.

Following Distance

Stay at least twice as far behind thevehicle ahead as you would whendriving the vehicle without a trailer.This can help to avoid heavybraking and sudden turns.

Passing

More passing distance is neededwhen towing a trailer. Thecombination will not accelerate asquickly and is longer so it isnecessary to go much fartherbeyond the passed vehicle beforereturning to the lane.

Backing Up

Hold the bottom of the steeringwheel with one hand. Then, to movethe trailer to the left, move that handto the left. To move the trailer to theright, move your hand to the right.Always back up slowly and,if possible, have someoneguide you.

Making Turns

Notice: Making very sharp turnswhile trailering could cause thetrailer to come in contact with thevehicle. The vehicle could bedamaged. Avoid making verysharp turns while trailering.

When turning with a trailer, makewider turns than normal. Do this sothe trailer will not strike softshoulders, curbs, road signs, treesor other objects. Avoid jerky orsudden maneuvers. Signal well inadvance.

If the trailer turn signal bulbs burnout, the arrows on the instrumentpanel will still flash for turns. It isimportant to check occasionally tobe sure the trailer bulbs are stillworking.

Driving on Grades

Reduce speed and shift to a lowergear before starting down a long orsteep downgrade. If thetransmission is not shifted down, thebrakes might get hot and no longerwork well.

Vehicles can tow in D (Drive). Shiftthe transmission to a lower gear ifthe transmission shifts too oftenunder heavy loads and/or hillyconditions.



The tow/haul mode may be used ifthe transmission shifts too often.See Tow/Haul Mode on page 9‑33.

When towing at high altitude onsteep uphill grades, consider thefollowing: Engine coolant will boil ata lower temperature than at normalaltitudes. If the engine is turned offimmediately after towing at highaltitude on steep uphill grades, thevehicle may show signs similar toengine overheating. To avoid this,let the engine run while parked,preferably on level ground, with theautomatic transmission in P (Park)for a few minutes before turning theengine off. If the overheat warningcomes on, see Engine Overheatingon page 10‑19.

Parking on Hills

{ WARNING

Parking the vehicle on a hill withthe trailer attached can bedangerous. If something goeswrong, the rig could start to move.People can be injured, and boththe vehicle and the trailer can bedamaged. When possible, alwayspark the rig on a flat surface.

If parking the rig on a hill:

1. Press the brake pedal, but donot shift into P (Park) yet. Turnthe wheels into the curb if facingdownhill or into traffic if facinguphill.

2. Have someone place chocksunder the trailer wheels.

3. When the wheel chocks are inplace, release the regular brakesuntil the chocks absorb the load.

4. Reapply the brake pedal. Thenapply the parking brake and shiftinto P (Park).

5. Release the brake pedal.

{ WARNING

It can be dangerous to get out ofthe vehicle if the shift lever is notfully in P (Park) with the parkingbrake firmly set. The vehiclecan roll.

If the engine has been leftrunning, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could beinjured. To be sure the vehicle willnot move, even when on fairlylevel ground, always put the shiftlever fully in P (Park) with theparking brake firmly set.

Leaving After Parking on a Hill

1. Apply and hold the brake pedal.

2. Start the engine.

3. Shift into a gear.



4. Release the parking brake.

5. Let up on the brake pedal.

6. Drive slowly until the trailer isclear of the chocks.

7. Stop and have someone pick upand store the chocks.

Maintenance When TrailerTowing

The vehicle needs service moreoften when pulling a trailer. See theMaintenance Schedule for moreinformation. Things that areespecially important in traileroperation are automatictransmission fluid, engine oil, axlelubricant, belts, cooling system andbrake system. It is a good idea toinspect these before and duringthe trip.

Check periodically to see that allhitch nuts and bolts are tight.

Trailer TowingIf the vehicle is a hybrid, see thehybrid supplement for moreinformation.

Do not tow a trailer during break‐in.See New Vehicle Break-In onpage 9‑21 for more information.

{ WARNING

The driver can lose control whenpulling a trailer if the correctequipment is not used or thevehicle is not driven properly. Forexample, if the trailer is tooheavy, the brakes may not workwell— or even at all. The driverand passengers could beseriously injured. The vehicle mayalso be damaged; the resultingrepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Pull a traileronly if all the steps in this sectionhave been followed. Ask your

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

dealer for advice and informationabout towing a trailer with thevehicle.

Notice: Pulling a trailerimproperly can damage thevehicle and result in costlyrepairs not covered by the vehiclewarranty. To pull a trailercorrectly, follow the advice in thissection and see your dealer forimportant information abouttowing a trailer with the vehicle.

To identify the trailering capacity ofthe vehicle, read the information in“Weight of the Trailer” that appearslater in this section.

Trailering is different than justdriving the vehicle by itself.Trailering means changes inhandling, acceleration, braking,durability and fuel economy.Successful, safe trailering takescorrect equipment, and it has to beused properly.



The following information has manytime-tested, important trailering tipsand safety rules. Many of these areimportant for your safety and that ofyour passengers. So please readthis section carefully before pulling atrailer.

Weight of the Trailer

How heavy can a trailer safely be?

It depends on how the rig is used.Speed, altitude, road grades,outside temperature and how muchthe vehicle is used to pull a trailerare all important. It can depend on

any special equipment on thevehicle, and the amount of tongueweight the vehicle can carry. See“Weight of the Trailer Tongue” laterin this section for more information.

Trailer weight rating (TWR) iscalculated assuming the tow vehiclehas only the driver but all requiredtrailering equipment. Weight ofadditional optional equipment,passengers and cargo in the towvehicle must be subtracted from thetrailer weight rating.



Use the following chart to determine how much the vehicle can weigh, based upon the vehicle model and options.

Vehicle Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR*

Escalade 2WD 6.2LV8 3.42 3 765 kg (8,300 lbs) 6 350 kg (14,000 lbs)

Escalade AWD 6.2LV8 3.42 3 674 kg (8,100 lbs) 6 350 kg (14,000 lbs)

Escalade ESV 2WD 6.2LV8 3.42 3 629 kg (8,000 lbs) 6 350 kg (14,000 lbs)

Escalade ESV AWD 6.2LV8 3.42 3 493 kg (7,700 lbs) 6 350 kg (14,000 lbs)

*The Gross Combination Weight Rating™(GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicleand trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for the vehicle should not beexceeded.

Ask your dealer for traileringinformation or advice, or write us atour Customer Assistance Offices.See Customer Assistance Offices(U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑4 orCustomer Assistance Offices(Mexico) on page 13‑5 for moreinformation.

Weight of the Trailer Tongue

The tongue load (A) of any trailer isvery important because it is alsopart of the vehicle weight. TheGross Vehicle Weight (GVW)

includes the curb weight of thevehicle, any cargo carried in it, andthe people who will be riding in thevehicle as well as trailer tongueweight. Vehicle options, equipment,passengers and cargo in the vehiclereduce the amount of tongue weightthe vehicle can carry, which will alsoreduce the trailer weight the vehiclecan tow. See Vehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑16 for more informationabout the vehicle's maximum loadcapacity.



Trailer tongue weight (A) should be 10 percent to 15 percent and fifth wheelor gooseneck kingpin weight should be 15 to 25 percent of the loaded trailerweight (B) up to the maximums for vehicle series and hitch type.

Vehicle SeriesHitch Type Maximum Tongue

Weight

1500 Weight Carrying 272 kg (600 lbs)

1500 Weight Distributing 499 kg (1,100 lbs)

Do not exceed the maximumallowable tongue weight for thevehicle. Choose the shortest hitchextension that will position the hitchball closest to the vehicle. This willhelp reduce the effect of trailertongue weight on the rear axle.

Trailering may be limited by thevehicle's ability to carry tongueweight. Tongue or kingpin weightcannot cause the vehicle to exceedthe GVWR (Gross Vehicle WeightRating) or the RGAWR (Rear GrossAxle Weight Rating). See “TotalWeight on the Vehicle's Tires” laterin this section for more information.

After loading the trailer, weigh thetrailer and then the tongue,separately, to see if the weights areproper. If they are not, adjustmentsmight be made by moving someitems around in the trailer.

Total Weight on the Vehicle'sTires

Be sure the vehicle's tires areinflated to the inflation pressuresfound on the Certification label onthe driver door or see Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑16 for moreinformation. Make sure not toexceed the GVWR limit for the

vehicle, or the RGAWR, with the towvehicle and trailer fully loaded forthe trip including the weight of thetrailer tongue. If using a weightdistributing hitch, make sure not toexceed the RGAWR before applyingthe weight distribution spring bars.

Weight of the TraileringCombination

It is important that the combinationof the tow vehicle and trailer doesnot exceed any of its weightratings — GCWR, GVWR, RGAWR,Trailer Weight Rating or TongueWeight. The only way to be sure it isnot exceeding any of these ratingsis to weigh the tow vehicle andtrailer combination, fully loaded forthe trip, getting individual weightsfor each of these items.



Towing Equipment

Hitches

The correct hitch equipment helpsmaintain combination control. Manytrailers can be towed with a weightcarrying hitch which simply featuresa coupler latched to the hitch ball,or a tow eye latched to a pintlehook. Other trailers may require aweight distributing hitch that usesspring bars to distribute the trailertongue weight among the twovehicle and trailer axles. See“Weight of the Trailer Tongue” inTrailer Towing on page 9‑61 forrating limits with various hitch types.

If a step-bumper hitch will be used,the bumper could be damaged insharp turns. Make sure thereis ample room when turning to avoidcontact between the trailer and thebumper.

Consider using sway controls withany trailer. Ask a traileringprofessional about sway controls orrefer to the trailer manufacturer'srecommendations and instructions.

Weight‐Distributing HitchAdjustment

A. Body to Ground Distance

B. Front of Vehicle

When using a weight-distributinghitch, the spring bars should beadjusted so the distance (A) is thesame after coupling the trailer to thetow vehicle and adjusting the hitch.

Hitch Cover (without DualExhaust)

The vehicle may have a hitch cover.To remove the hitch cover:

1. Turn the fasteners onthe lower tabs 90 degreescounterclockwise.

2. Lift the lower edge of the coverabout 45 degrees.

3. Pull the cover downward todisengage the upperattachments.



To reinstall the hitch cover:

1. Hold the cover at a 45 degreeangle to the vehicle and pushthe upper tabs in the hitch coverinto the chrome slots in thefascia.

2. Move the bottom of the coverforward until the lower tabs lineup with the lower fascia slots.

3. Snap the hitch cover into placeby pushing the upper cornersforward.

4. Turn the fasteners on the lowertabs 90 degrees clockwise tolock the cover in place.

Hitch Cover (with DualExhaust)

To remove the hitch cover:

1. Turn the fasteners onthe lower tabs 90 degreescounterclockwise.

2. Pull the lower edge of the coverout slightly.

3. Lift the cover up off the upperbracket.

To reinstall the hitch cover:

1. Insert the tabs on the hitch coverinto the slots in the upperbracket.

2. Move the bottom of the coverforward.

3. Turn the fasteners on the lowertabs 90 degrees clockwise tolock the cover in place.

Safety Chains

Always attach chains between thevehicle and the trailer. Cross thesafety chains under the tongue ofthe trailer to help prevent the tonguefrom contacting the road if itbecomes separated from the hitch.Instructions about safety chainsmay be provided by the hitchmanufacturer or by the trailermanufacturer. Safety chains shouldbe attached to holes on the trailerhitch platform. Always leave justenough slack so the combinationcan turn. Never allow safety chainsto drag on the ground.



Trailer Brakes

A loaded trailer that weighs morethan 900 kg (2,000 lbs) needs tohave its own brake system that isadequate for the weight of thetrailer. Be sure to read and followthe instructions for the trailer brakesso they are installed, adjusted andmaintained properly.

Do not tap into the vehicle'shydraulic system.

Trailer Wiring Harness

Heavy-Duty Trailer Wiring HarnessPackage

The vehicle has a seven-pinuniversal heavy-duty trailerconnector attached to the rearbumper beam next to the integratedtrailer hitch.

The seven-wire harness containsthe following trailer circuits:. Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal. Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn

Signal. Brown: Taillamps. White: Ground. Light Green: Back-up Lamps. Red: Battery Feed*. Dark Blue: Trailer Brake*

*The fuses for these two circuits areinstalled in the underhood electricalcenter, but the wires are notconnected. They should beconnected by your dealer or aqualified service center.

If charging a remote (non-vehicle)battery, press the tow/haul modebutton located at the end of the shiftlever. This will boost the vehiclesystem voltage and properly chargethe battery. If the trailer is too lightfor tow/haul mode, turn on the



headlamps as a second way toboost the vehicle system andcharge the battery.

Electric Brake Control WiringProvisions

These wiring provisions areincluded with the vehicle as part ofthe trailer wiring package. Theseprovisions are for an electric brakecontroller. The instrument panelcontains blunt cut wires near thedata link connector for the trailerbrake controller. The harnesscontains the following wires:. Dark Blue: Brake Signal to

Trailer Connector. Red/Black: Battery. Light Blue/White: Brake Switch. White: Ground

It should be installed by your dealeror a qualified service center.

Tow/Haul Mode

Pressing this button at the end ofthe shift lever turns on and off thetow/haul mode.

This indicator light on the instrumentpanel cluster comes on when thetow/haul mode is on.

Tow/Haul is a feature that assistswhen pulling a heavy trailer or alarge or heavy load. See Tow/HaulMode on page 9‑33 for moreinformation.

Tow/Haul is designed to be mosteffective when the vehicle andtrailer combined weight is at least75 percent of the vehicle's GrossCombined Weight Rating (GCWR).See “Weight of the Trailer” in TrailerTowing on page 9‑61. Tow/Haul ismost useful under the followingdriving conditions:. When pulling a heavy trailer or a

large or heavy load throughrolling terrain.

. When pulling a heavy trailer or alarge or heavy load in stop andgo traffic.

. When pulling a heavy trailer or alarge or heavy load in busyparking lots where improved lowspeed control of the vehicle isdesired.



Operating the vehicle in Tow/Haulwhen lightly loaded or with no trailerat all will not cause damage.However, there is no benefit to theselection of Tow/Haul when thevehicle is unloaded. Such aselection when unloaded may resultin unpleasant engine andtransmission driving characteristicsand reduced fuel economy. Tow/Haul is recommended only whenpulling a heavy trailer or a large orheavy load.

Trailer SwayControl (TSC)Non-hybrid vehicles with StabiliTrakhave a Trailer Sway Control (TSC)feature. If the vehicle is towing atrailer and the system detects thatthe trailer is swaying, the vehiclebrakes are applied without the driverpressing the brake pedal. The TCS/StabiliTrak warning light will flash onthe instrument panel cluster to notifythe driver to reduce speed. If thetrailer continues to sway, StabiliTrakwill reduce engine torque to helpslow the vehicle. See StabiliTrak®

System on page 9‑37 for moreinformation.

Adding non‐dealer accessories canaffect the vehicle performance. SeeAccessories and Modifications onpage 10‑3 for more information.

Conversions andAdd-Ons

Add-On ElectricalEquipmentNotice: Do not add anythingelectrical to the vehicle unlessyou check with your dealer first.Some electrical equipment candamage the vehicle and thedamage would not be covered bythe vehicle's warranty. Someadd-on electrical equipment cankeep other components fromworking as they should.

Add-on equipment can drain thevehicle's 12‐volt battery, even if thevehicle is not operating.

The vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to add anythingelectrical to the vehicle, seeServicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 3‑38 and AddingEquipment to the Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 3‑38.



2 NOTES


Vehicle Care 10-1

Vehicle Care

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2California Proposition 65Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

California PerchlorateMaterials Requirements . . . . 10-3

Accessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

Vehicle ChecksDoing Your OwnService Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4Engine CompartmentOverview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6

Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 10-9Automatic TransmissionFluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . 10-13Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15

Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . 10-19Overheated EngineProtectionOperating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22

Engine Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . 10-22Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27Front Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . 10-30Automatic Transmission ShiftLock Control FunctionCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30

Ignition Transmission LockCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-31

Wiper BladeReplacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32

Glass Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-33

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . 10-33

Bulb ReplacementBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-35High Intensity Discharge(HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36

LED Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36Back-Up Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . 10-37Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . 10-37

Electrical SystemElectrical SystemOverload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38

Fuses and CircuitBreakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39

Engine Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39

Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43


10-2 Vehicle Care

Wheels and TiresTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . 10-47Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48Tire Terminology andDefinitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49

Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52Tire Pressure for High-SpeedOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53

Tire Pressure MonitorSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53

Tire Pressure MonitorOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55

Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60Different Size Tires andWheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62

Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62

Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-64Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-65Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67

Storing the Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73

Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74Secondary Latch System . . . 10-85Full-Size Spare Tire . . . . . . . . 10-87

Jump StartingJump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-88

TowingTowing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 10-93Recreational VehicleTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-93

Appearance CareExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-96Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-99Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-102

General InformationFor service and parts needs, visityour dealer. You will receivegenuine GM parts and GM-trainedand supported service people.

Genuine GM parts have one ofthese marks:


Vehicle Care 10-3

California Proposition 65WarningMost motor vehicles, including thisone, contain and/or emit chemicalsknown to the State of California tocause cancer and birth defects orother reproductive harm. Engineexhaust, many parts and systems,many fluids, and some componentwear by-products contain and/oremit these chemicals.

California PerchlorateMaterials RequirementsCertain types of automotiveapplications, such as airbaginitiators, safety belt pretensioners,and lithium batteries contained inRemote Keyless Entry transmitters,may contain perchlorate materials.Special handling may be necessary.For additional information, seewww.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Accessories andModificationsAdding non‐dealer accessories ormaking modifications to the vehiclecan affect vehicle performance andsafety, including such things asairbags, braking, stability, ride andhandling, emissions systems,aerodynamics, durability, andelectronic systems like antilockbrakes, traction control, and stabilitycontrol. These accessories ormodifications could even causemalfunction or damage not coveredby the vehicle warranty.

Damage to vehicle componentsresulting from modifications or theinstallation or use of non‐GMcertified parts, including controlmodule or software modifications, isnot covered under the terms of thevehicle warranty and may affectremaining warranty coverage foraffected parts.

GM Accessories are designed tocomplement and function with othersystems on the vehicle. See yourdealer to accessorize the vehicleusing genuine GM Accessoriesinstalled by a dealer technician.

Also, see Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3‑38.


10-4 Vehicle Care

Vehicle Checks

Doing Your OwnService WorkIf the vehicle is a hybrid, see thehybrid supplement for moreinformation.

{ WARNING

It can be dangerous to work onyour vehicle if you do not havethe proper knowledge, servicemanual, tools, or parts. Alwaysfollow owner manual proceduresand consult the service manualfor your vehicle before doing anyservice work.

If doing some of your own servicework, use the proper servicemanual. It tells you much moreabout how to service the vehiclethan this manual can. To order theproper service manual, see ServicePublications Ordering Informationon page 13‑17.

This vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to do your ownservice work, see Airbag SystemCheck on page 3‑40.

Keep a record with all parts receiptsand list the mileage and the date ofany service work performed. SeeMaintenance Records onpage 11‑16.

HoodTo open the hood:

1. Pull the handle with this symbolon it. It is located inside thevehicle to the lower left of thesteering wheel.


Vehicle Care 10-5

2. Then go to the front of thevehicle and locate the secondaryhood release, near the center ofthe grille.

3. Push the secondary hoodrelease to the right.

4. Lift the hood.

Before closing the hood, be sureall the filler caps are on properly.Then bring the hood from fullopen to within 152 mm (6 in)from the closed position, pause,then push the front center of thehood with a swift, firm motion tofully close the hood.


10-6 Vehicle Care

Engine Compartment Overview

6.2L V8 Engine


Vehicle Care 10-7

A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 10‑13.

B. Coolant Surge Tank andPressure Cap. See CoolingSystem on page 10‑15.

C. Remote Positive (+) Terminal.See Jump Starting onpage 10‑88.

D. Battery on page 10‑27.

E. Remote Negative (−) Terminal(Out of View). See JumpStarting on page 10‑88.

F. Automatic TransmissionDipstick (Out of View). See“Checking the Fluid Level”under Automatic TransmissionFluid on page 10‑10.

G. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “Whento Add Engine Oil” underEngine Oil on page 10‑7.

H. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out ofView). See “Checking EngineOil” under Engine Oil onpage 10‑7.

I. Engine Cooling Fans (Out ofView). See Cooling System onpage 10‑15.

J. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir.See Power Steering Fluid onpage 10‑22.

K. Brake Master CylinderReservoir. See “Brake Fluid”under Brake Fluid onpage 10‑25.

L. Engine Compartment FuseBlock on page 10‑39.

M. Windshield Washer FluidReservoir. See “Adding WasherFluid” under Washer Fluid onpage 10‑23.


Engine OilTo ensure proper engineperformance and long life, carefulattention must be paid to engine oil.Following these simple, butimportant steps will help protectyour investment:. Always use engine oil approved

to the proper specification and ofthe proper viscosity grade. See“Selecting the Right Engine Oil”in this section.

. Check the engine oil levelregularly and maintain theproper oil level. See “CheckingEngine Oil” and “When to AddEngine Oil” in this section.

. Change the engine oil at theappropriate time. See Engine OilLife System on page 10‑9.

. Always dispose of engine oilproperly. See “What to Do withUsed Oil” in this section.


10-8 Vehicle Care

Checking Engine Oil

It is a good idea to check the engineoil level at each fuel fill. In order toget an accurate reading, the vehiclemust be on level ground. Theengine oil dipstick handle is a yellowloop. See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 10‑6 for thelocation of the engine oil dipstick.

Obtaining an accurate oil levelreading is essential:

1. If the engine has been runningrecently, turn off the engine andallow several minutes for the oilto drain back into the oil pan.Checking the oil level too soonafter engine shutoff will notprovide an accurate oil levelreading.

2. Pull out the dipstick and clean itwith a paper towel or cloth, thenpush it back in all the way.Remove it again, keeping the tipdown, and check the level.

When to Add Engine Oil

If the oil is below the cross-hatchedarea at the tip of the dipstick, add1 L (1 qt) of the recommended oiland then recheck the level. See“Selecting the Right Engine Oil” inthis section for an explanation ofwhat kind of oil to use. For engineoil crankcase capacity, seeCapacities and Specifications onpage 12‑2.

Notice: Do not add too much oil.Oil levels above or below theacceptable operating rangeshown on the dipstick are harmfulto the engine. If you find that youhave an oil level above theoperating range, i.e., the enginehas so much oil that the oil levelgets above the cross-hatched

area that shows the properoperating range, the engine couldbe damaged. You should drainout the excess oil or limit drivingof the vehicle and seek a serviceprofessional to remove theexcess amount of oil.

See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑6 for the location of theengine oil fill cap.

Add enough oil to put the levelsomewhere in the proper operatingrange. Push the dipstick all the wayback in when through.

Selecting the Right Engine Oil

Selecting the right engine oildepends on both the proper oilspecification and viscosity grade.See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑13.

Specification

Use and ask for licensed engine oilswith the dexos1™ approvedcertification mark. Engine oilsmeeting the requirements for thevehicle should have the dexos1


Vehicle Care 10-9

approved certification mark. Thiscertification mark indicates that theoil has been approved to the dexos1specification.

Notice: Failure to use therecommended engine oil orequivalent can result in enginedamage not covered by thevehicle warranty. Check with yourdealer or service provider onwhether the oil is approved to thedexos1 specification.

Viscosity Grade

SAE 5W‐30 is the best viscositygrade for the vehicle. Do not useother viscosity grade oils such asSAE 10W‐30, 10W‐40, or 20W‐50.

If in an area of extreme cold, wherethe temperature falls below −20°F(−29°C), an SAE 0W‐30 oil should

be used. An oil of this viscositygrade will provide easier coldstarting for the engine at extremelylow temperatures. When selectingan oil of the appropriate viscositygrade, always select an oil thatmeets the dexos1 specification orequivalent. See “Specification” formore information.

Engine Oil Additives/EngineOil Flushes

Do not add anything to the oil. Therecommended oils with the dexosspecification and displaying thedexos certification mark are all thatis needed for good performance andengine protection.

Engine oil system flushes are notrecommended and could causeengine damage not covered by thevehicle warranty.

What to Do with Used Oil

Used engine oil contains certainelements that can be unhealthy foryour skin and could even causecancer. Do not let used oil stay on

your skin for very long. Clean yourskin and nails with soap and water,or a good hand cleaner. Wash orproperly dispose of clothing or ragscontaining used engine oil. See themanufacturer's warnings about theuse and disposal of oil products.

Used oil can be a threat to theenvironment. If you change yourown oil, be sure to drain all the oilfrom the filter before disposal. Neverdispose of oil by putting it in thetrash or pouring it on the ground,into sewers, or into streams orbodies of water. Recycle it by takingit to a place that collects used oil.

Engine Oil Life System

When to Change Engine Oil

This vehicle has a computer systemthat indicates when to change theengine oil and filter. This is basedon a combination of factors whichinclude engine revolutions, enginetemperature, and miles driven.Based on driving conditions, themileage at which an oil change is


10-10 Vehicle Care

indicated can vary considerably. Forthe oil life system to work properly,the system must be reset every timethe oil is changed.

When the system has calculatedthat oil life has been diminished, itindicates that an oil change isnecessary. A CHANGE ENGINEOIL SOON message comes on. SeeEngine Oil Messages on page 5‑31.Change the oil as soon as possiblewithin the next 1 000 km (600 mi).It is possible that, if driving underthe best conditions, the oil lifesystem might indicate that an oilchange is not necessary for up to ayear. The engine oil and filter mustbe changed at least once a yearand, at this time, the system mustbe reset. Your dealer has trainedservice people who will perform thiswork and reset the system. It is alsoimportant to check the oil regularlyover the course of an oil draininterval and keep it at the properlevel.

If the system is ever resetaccidentally, the oil must bechanged at 5 000 km (3,000 mi)since the last oil change.Remember to reset the oil lifesystem whenever the oil is changed.

How to Reset the Engine OilLife System

Reset the system whenever theengine oil is changed so that thesystem can calculate the nextengine oil change. Always reset theengine oil life to 100% after every oilchange. It will not reset itself. Toreset the system:

1. Display OIL LIFE REMAININGon the DIC.

2. Press and hold the SET/RESETbutton on the DIC for more thanfive seconds. The oil life willchange to 100%.

If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage comes back on when thevehicle is started, the engine oil lifesystem has not reset. Repeat theprocedure.

Automatic TransmissionFluid

When to Check and ChangeAutomatic Transmission Fluid

It is usually not necessary tocheck the transmission fluid level.The only reason for fluid loss is atransmission leak or overheating thetransmission. If a small leak issuspected, then use the followingchecking procedures to check thefluid level. However, if there is alarge leak, then it may be necessaryto have the vehicle towed to adealer and have it repaired beforedriving the vehicle further.

Notice: Use of the incorrectautomatic transmission fluid maydamage the vehicle, and thedamages may not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Always usethe automatic transmission fluidlisted in Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 11‑13.


Vehicle Care 10-11

Change the fluid and filter at thescheduled maintenance intervalslisted in Maintenance Schedule onpage 11‑3. Be sure to use thetransmission fluid listed inRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑13.

How to Check AutomaticTransmission Fluid

Notice: Too much or too littlefluid can damage thetransmission. Too much canmean that some of the fluid couldcome out and fall on hot engineparts or exhaust system parts,starting a fire. Too little fluidcould cause the transmission tooverheat. Be sure to get anaccurate reading if checking thetransmission fluid.

Before checking the fluid level,prepare the vehicle as follows:

1. Start the engine and park thevehicle on a level surface. Keepthe engine running.

2. Apply the parking brake andplace the shift lever in P (Park).

3. With your foot on the brakepedal, move the shift leverthrough each gear range,pausing for about three secondsin each range. Then, move theshift lever back to P (Park).

4. Allow the engine to idle(500 – 800 rpm) for at leastone minute. Slowly release thebrake pedal.

5. Keep the engine running andpress the Trip/Fuel button or tripodometer reset stem untilTRANS TEMP (TransmissionTemperature) displays on theDriver Information Center (DIC).

6. Using the TRANS TEMPreading, determine and performthe appropriate checkprocedure. If the TRANS TEMPreading is not within the requiredtemperature ranges, allow thevehicle to cool, or operate thevehicle until the appropriatetransmission fluid temperature isreached.

Cold Check Procedure

Use this procedure only as areference to determine if thetransmission has enough fluid to beoperated safely until a hot checkprocedure can be made. The hotcheck procedure is the mostaccurate method to check the fluidlevel. Perform the hot checkprocedure at the first opportunity.Use this cold check procedure tocheck fluid level when thetransmission temperature isbetween 27°C and 32°C(80°F and 90°F).


10-12 Vehicle Care

1. Locate the transmission dipstickat the rear of the enginecompartment, on the passengerside of the vehicle.

See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 10‑6 for moreinformation.

2. Flip the handle up and then pullout the dipstick and wipe it witha clean rag or paper towel.

3. Install the dipstick by pushing itback in all the way, waitthree seconds, and then pull itback out again.

4. Check both sides of the dipstickand read the lower level. Repeatthe check procedure to verify thereading.

5. If the fluid level is below theCOLD check band, add onlyenough fluid as necessary tobring the level into the COLDband. It does not take muchfluid, generally less than 0.5 L(1 pint). Do not overfill.

6. Perform a hot check at the firstopportunity after thetransmission reaches a normaloperating temperature between71°C to 93°C (160°F to 200°F).

7. If the fluid level is in theacceptable range, push thedipstick back in all the way, thenflip the handle down to lock thedipstick in place.

Hot Check Procedure

Use this procedure to check thetransmission fluid level when thetransmission fluid temperature isbetween 71°C and 93°C (160°Fand 200°F).

The hot check is the most accuratemethod to check the fluid level. Thehot check should be performed atthe first opportunity in order to verifythe cold check. The fluid level risesas fluid temperature increases,so it is important to ensure thetransmission temperature is withinrange.

1. Locate the transmission dipstickat the rear of the enginecompartment, on the passengerside of the vehicle.


Vehicle Care 10-13

See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 10‑6 for moreinformation.

2. Flip the handle up and then pullout the dipstick and wipe it witha clean rag or paper towel.

3. Install the dipstick by pushing itback in all the way, waitthree seconds, and then pull itback out again.

4. Check both sides of the dipstickand read the lower level. Repeatthe check procedure to verify thereading.

5. Safe operating level is within theHOT cross hatch band on thedipstick. If the fluid level is notwithin the HOT band, and thetransmission temperature isbetween 71°C and 93°C (160°F

and 200°F), add or drain fluid asnecessary to bring the level intothe HOT band. If the fluid level islow, add only enough fluid tobring the level into the HOTband. It does not take muchfluid, generally less than 0.5 L(1 pint). Do not overfill.

6. If the fluid level is in theacceptable range, push thedipstick back in all the way, thenflip the handle down to lock thedipstick in place.

Consistency of Readings

Always check the fluid level at leasttwice using the proceduresdescribed. Consistency (repeatablereadings) is important to maintainingproper fluid level. If fluid is added, itmay take 15 minutes or longer toobtain an accurate reading becauseof residual fluid draining down thedipstick tube. If inconsistentreadings persist, check thetransmission breather to be sure it is

clean and not clogged. If readingsare still inconsistent, contact yourdealer.

Engine Air Cleaner/FilterSee Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑6 for the location of theengine air cleaner/filter.

Inspect the air cleaner/filter at thescheduled maintenance intervalsand replace it at the first oil changeafter each 80 000 km (50,000 mile)interval. See Maintenance Scheduleon page 11‑3 for more information.If driving on dusty/dirty conditions,inspect the filter at each engine oilchange.

How to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter

To inspect the air cleaner/filter,remove the engine air cleaner/filterfrom the vehicle by followingSteps 1 through 6. When the engineair cleaner/filter is removed, lightlyshake it to release loose dust anddirt. If the engine air cleaner/filter


10-14 Vehicle Care

remains covered with dirt, a newfilter is required. Never usecompressed air to clean the filter.

Replacing the Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

1. Locate the air cleaner/filterassembly. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10‑6.

2. Loosen the four screws on thecover of the housing and lift upthe cover.

3. Remove the engine air cleaner/filter from the housing. Careshould be taken to dislodge aslittle dirt as possible.

4. Clean the engine air cleaner/filter sealing surfaces and thehousing.

5. Inspect or replace the engine aircleaner/filter.

6. Reinstall the cover and tightenthe screws.

{ WARNING

Operating the engine with the aircleaner/filter off can cause you orothers to be burned. The aircleaner not only cleans the air; ithelps to stop flames if the enginebackfires. Use caution whenworking on the engine and do notdrive with the air cleaner/filter off.


Vehicle Care 10-15

Cooling SystemThe cooling system allows theengine to maintain the correctworking temperature.

A. Coolant Surge Tank

B. Coolant Surge TankPressure Cap

C. Engine Cooling Fan(s)(Out of View)

{ WARNING

An electric engine cooling fanunder the hood can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can cause injury. Keephands, clothing, and tools awayfrom any underhood electric fan.

{ WARNING

Heater and radiator hoses, andother engine parts, can be veryhot. Do not touch them. If you do,you can be burned.

Do not run the engine if there is aleak. If you run the engine, itcould lose all coolant. That couldcause an engine fire, and youcould be burned. Get any leakfixed before you drive the vehicle.

Notice: Using coolant other thanDEX-COOL® can cause prematureengine, heater core, or radiatorcorrosion. In addition, the enginecoolant could require changingsooner, at 50 000 km (30,000mi)or 24months, whichever occursfirst. Any repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always use DEX-COOL(silicate-free) coolant in thevehicle.


10-16 Vehicle Care

Engine CoolantThe cooling system in the vehicle isfilled with DEX-COOL enginecoolant. This coolant is designed toremain in the vehicle for 5 years or240 000 km (150,000mi), whicheveroccurs first.

The following explains the coolingsystem and how to check and addcoolant when it is low. If there is aproblem with engine overheating,see Engine Overheating onpage 10‑19.

What to Use

{ WARNING

Adding only plain water or someother liquid to the cooling systemcan be dangerous. Plain waterand other liquids, can boil beforethe proper coolant mixture will.The coolant warning system is setfor the proper coolant mixture.With plain water or the wrongmixture, the engine could get toohot but you would not get theoverheat warning. The enginecould catch fire and you orothers could be burned. Usea 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOLcoolant.

Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOLcoolant. If using this mixture,nothing else needs to be added.This mixture:. Gives freezing protection down

to −37°C (−34°F), outsidetemperature.

. Gives boiling protection up to129°C (265°F), enginetemperature.

. Protects against rust andcorrosion.

. Will not damage aluminum parts.

. Helps keep the proper enginetemperature.

Notice: If an improper coolantmixture is used, the engine couldoverheat and be badly damaged.The repair cost would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Too much water in the mixturecan freeze and crack the engine,radiator, heater core, and otherparts.


Vehicle Care 10-17

Notice: If extra inhibitors and/oradditives are used in the vehiclecooling system, the vehicle couldbe damaged. Use only the propermixture of the engine coolantlisted in this manual for thecooling system. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑13 formore information.

Never dispose of engine coolant byputting it in the trash, pouring it onthe ground, or into sewers, streams,or bodies of water. Have the coolantchanged by an authorized servicecenter, familiar with legalrequirements regarding usedcoolant disposal. This will helpprotect the environment and yourhealth.

Checking Coolant

The vehicle must be on a levelsurface when checking the coolantlevel.

Check to see if coolant is visible inthe coolant surge tank. If the coolantinside the coolant surge tank isboiling, do not do anything else untilit cools down. If coolant is visiblebut the coolant level is not at orabove the FULL COLD mark, add a50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and DEX-COOL coolant at thecoolant surge tank, but be sure thecooling system is cool before thisis done.

The coolant surge tank is located inthe engine compartment on thepassenger side of the vehicle. SeeEngine Compartment Overview onpage 10‑6 for more information onlocation.

The coolant level should be at orabove the FULL COLD mark. If it isnot, the vehicle may have a leak inthe cooling system.


10-18 Vehicle Care

How to Add Coolant to theSurge Tank

{ WARNING

You can be burned if you spillcoolant on hot engine parts.Coolant contains ethylene glycoland it will burn if the engine partsare hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

Notice: This vehicle has aspecific coolant fill procedure.Failure to follow this procedurecould cause the engine tooverheat and be severelydamaged.

{ WARNING

An electric engine cooling fanunder the hood can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can cause injury. Keephands, clothing, and tools awayfrom any underhood electric fan.

{ WARNING

Steam and scalding liquids from ahot cooling system can blow outand burn you badly. They areunder pressure, and if you turnthe surge tank pressurecap— even a little— they cancome out at high speed. Neverturn the cap when the coolingsystem, including the surge tankpressure cap, is hot. Wait for thecooling system and surge tankpressure cap to cool if you everhave to turn the pressure cap.

If no coolant is visible in the surgetank, add coolant as follows:

1. Remove the coolant surge tankpressure cap when the coolingsystem, including the coolantsurge tank pressure cap andupper radiator hose, is nolonger hot.

Turn the pressure cap slowlycounterclockwise about one fullturn. If a hiss is heard, wait forthat to stop. A hiss means thereis still some pressure left.

2. Keep turning the pressure capslowly and remove it.


Vehicle Care 10-19

3. Fill the coolant surge tank withthe proper mixture to the FULLCOLD mark.

4. With the coolant surge tankpressure cap off, start theengine and let it run until theupper radiator hose can be feltgetting hot. Watch out for theengine cooling fan.

By this time, the coolant levelinside the coolant surge tankmay be lower. If the level islower, add more of the propermixture to the coolant surge tankuntil the level reaches the FULLCOLD mark.

5. Replace the pressure cap. Besure the pressure cap ishand-tight and fully seated.

6. Verify coolant level after engineis shut off and the coolant iscold. If necessary, repeat coolantfill procedure Steps 1 through 6.

Notice: If the pressure cap is nottightly installed, coolant loss andpossible engine damage mayoccur. Be sure the cap is properlyand tightly secured.

Engine OverheatingThe vehicle has several indicatorsto warn of engine overheating.

There is a coolant temperaturegauge on your vehicle's instrumentpanel. See Engine CoolantTemperature Gauge on page 5‑13.

In addition, ENGINE OVERHEATEDSTOP ENGINE, ENGINEOVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE, anda ENGINE POWER IS REDUCEDmessage comes on in the DriverInformation Center (DIC) on the


10-20 Vehicle Care

instrument panel. See EngineCooling System Messages onpage 5‑30 and Engine PowerMessages on page 5‑32.

If the decision is made not to lift thehood when this warning appears,but instead get service help rightaway. See Roadside Service (U.S.and Canada) on page 13‑7 orRoadside Service (Mexico) onpage 13‑9.

If the decision is made to lift thehood, make sure the vehicle isparked on a level surface.

Then check to see if the enginecooling fans are running. If theengine is overheating, both fansshould be running. If they are not,do not continue to run the engineand have the vehicle serviced.

Notice: Engine damage fromrunning the engine withoutcoolant is not covered by thevehicle warranty. See OverheatedEngine Protection Operating

Mode on page 10‑22 forinformation on driving to a safeplace in an emergency.

Notice: If the engine catches firewhile driving with no coolant, thevehicle can be badly damaged.The costly repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.See Overheated EngineProtection Operating Mode onpage 10‑22 for information ondriving to a safe place in anemergency.

If Steam Is Coming from theEngine Compartment

{ WARNING

Steam from an overheated enginecan burn you badly, even if youjust open the hood. Stay awayfrom the engine if you see or hearsteam coming from it. Turn it offand get everyone away from thevehicle until it cools down. Wait

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

until there is no sign of steam orcoolant before you openthe hood.

If you keep driving when thevehicles engine is overheated,the liquids in it can catch fire. Youor others could be badly burned.Stop the engine if it overheats,and get out of the vehicle until theengine is cool.

See Overheated EngineProtection Operating Mode onpage 10‑22 for information ondriving to a safe place in anemergency.


Vehicle Care 10-21

If No Steam Is Coming fromthe Engine Compartment

The ENGINE OVERHEATEDSTOP ENGINE or the ENGINEOVERHEATED IDLE ENGINEmessage, along with a low coolantcondition, can indicate a seriousproblem.

If there is an engine overheatwarning, but see or hear no steam,the problem may not be too serious.Sometimes the engine can get alittle too hot when the vehicle:. Climbs a long hill on a hot day.. Stops after high-speed driving.. Idles for long periods in traffic.. Tows a trailer. See Trailer

Towing on page 9‑61.

If the ENGINE OVERHEATEDSTOP ENGINE or the ENGINEOVERHEATED IDLE ENGINEmessage appears with no sign ofsteam, try this for a minute or so:

If the overheat warning is displayedwith no sign of steam:

1. Turn the air conditioning off.

2. Turn the heater on to the highesttemperature and to the highestfan speed. Open the windows asnecessary.

3. In heavy traffic, let the engineidle in N (Neutral) while stopped.If it is safe to do so, pull off theroad, shift to P (Park) orN (Neutral) and let theengine idle.

If the temperature overheat gauge isno longer in the overheat zone or anoverheat warning no longerdisplays, the vehicle can be driven.Continue to drive the vehicle slowlyfor about 10 minutes. Keep a safevehicle distance from the vehicle infront. If the warning does not comeback on, continue to drive normally.

If the warning continues, pull over,stop, and park the vehicleright away.

If there is no sign of steam, idle theengine for five minutes whileparked. If the warning is stilldisplayed, turn off the engine until itcools down. Also, see “OverheatedEngine Protection Operating Mode”later in this section.


10-22 Vehicle Care

Overheated EngineProtectionOperating ModeIf an overheated engine conditionexists and the ENGINE POWER ISREDUCED message is displayed,an overheat protection mode whichalternates firing groups of cylindershelps prevent engine damage. Inthis mode, a loss in power andengine performance will be noticed.This operating mode allows thevehicle to be driven to a safe placein an emergency. Driving extendeddistances and/or towing a trailer inthe overheat protection modeshould be avoided.

Notice: After driving in theoverheated engine protectionoperating mode, to avoid enginedamage, allow the engine to coolbefore attempting any repair. Theengine oil will be severelydegraded. Repair the cause ofcoolant loss, change the oil andreset the oil life system. SeeEngine Oil on page 10‑7.

Engine FanThe vehicle has electric coolingfans. The fans spinning at lowspeed during most everyday drivingmight be heard. The fans can turnoff if no cooling is required. Underheavy vehicle loading, trailer towing,and/or high outside temperatures,or if operating the air conditioningsystem, the fans can change to highspeed and an increase in fan noisemight be heard. This is normal andindicates that the cooling system isfunctioning properly. The fanschange to low speed whenadditional cooling is no longerrequired.

Power Steering Fluid

See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑6 for reservoir location.

When to Check Power SteeringFluid

It is not necessary to regularlycheck power steering fluid unlessthere is a leak suspected in thesystem or an unusual noise isheard. A fluid loss in this systemcould indicate a problem. Have thesystem inspected and repaired.


Vehicle Care 10-23

How to Check Power SteeringFluid

Notice: Extremely small amountsof contamination can causesteering system damage andcause it to not work properly. Donot allow contaminants to contactthe fluid side of the reservoir cap/dipstick or to enter the reservoir.

To check the power steering fluid:

1. Turn the key off and let theengine compartment cool down.

2. Wipe the cap and the top of thereservoir clean.

3. Unscrew the cap and wipe thedipstick with a clean rag.

4. Replace the cap and completelytighten it.

5. Remove the cap again and lookat the fluid level on the dipstick.

The level should be at the FULLCOLD mark. If necessary, add onlyenough fluid to bring the level up tothe mark.

What to Use

To determine what kind of fluid touse, see Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑13. Alwaysuse the proper fluid.

Notice: Use of the incorrect fluidmay damage the vehicle and thedamages may not be covered bythe vehicle's warranty. Alwaysuse the correct fluid listed inRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑13.

Washer Fluid

What to Use

When windshield washer fluid needsto be added, be sure to read themanufacturer's instructions beforeuse. Use a fluid that has sufficientprotection against freezing in anarea where the temperature may fallbelow freezing.

Adding Washer Fluid

The vehicle has a low washer fluidmessage on the DIC that comeson when the washer fluid is low.The message is displayed for15 seconds at the start of eachignition cycle. When the WASHERFLUID LOW ADD FLUID messagedisplays, washer fluid will need tobe added to the windshield washerfluid reservoir.

Open the cap with the washersymbol on it. Add washer fluiduntil the tank is full. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10‑6 for reservoir location.


10-24 Vehicle Care

Notice. When using concentratedwasher fluid, follow themanufacturer's instructionsfor adding water.

. Do not mix water withready-to-use washer fluid.Water can cause the solutionto freeze and damage thewasher fluid tank and otherparts of the washer system.

. Fill the washer fluid tank onlythree-quarters full when it isvery cold. This allows forfluid expansion if freezingoccurs, which could damagethe tank if it iscompletely full.

. Do not use engine coolant(antifreeze) in the windshieldwasher. It can damage thewindshield washer systemand paint.

BrakesThis vehicle has disc brakes. Discbrake pads have built-in wearindicators that make a high-pitchedwarning sound when the brake padsare worn and new pads are needed.The sound can come and go or beheard all the time the vehicle ismoving, except when applying thebrake pedal firmly.

{ WARNING

The brake wear warning soundmeans that soon the brakes willnot work well. That could lead toa crash. When the brake wearwarning sound is heard, have thevehicle serviced.

Notice: Continuing to drive withworn-out brake pads could resultin costly brake repair.

Some driving conditions or climatescan cause a brake squeal when thebrakes are first applied or lightlyapplied. This does not meansomething is wrong with the brakes.

Properly torqued wheel nuts arenecessary to help prevent brakepulsation. When tires are rotated,inspect brake pads for wear andevenly tighten wheel nuts in theproper sequence to torquespecifications in Capacities andSpecifications on page 12‑2.

Brake linings should always bereplaced as complete axle sets.

Brake Pedal Travel

See your dealer if the brake pedaldoes not return to normal height,or if there is a rapid increase inpedal travel. This could be a signthat brake service might berequired.

Brake Adjustment

Every time the brakes are applied,with or without the vehicle moving,the brakes adjust for wear.


Vehicle Care 10-25

Replacing Brake System Parts

The braking system on a vehicle iscomplex. Its many parts have to beof top quality and work well togetherif the vehicle is to have really goodbraking. The vehicle was designedand tested with top-quality brakeparts. When parts of the brakingsystem are replaced, be sure to getnew, approved replacement parts.If this is not done, the brakes mightnot work properly. For example,installing disc brake pads that arewrong for the vehicle, can changethe balance between the front andrear brakes — for the worse. Thebraking performance expected canchange in many other ways if thewrong replacement brake parts areinstalled.

Brake Fluid

The brake master cylinder reservoiris filled with DOT 3 brake fluid. SeeEngine Compartment Overview onpage 10‑6 for the location of thereservoir.

There are only two reasons why thebrake fluid level in the reservoirmight go down:. The brake fluid level goes down

because of normal brake liningwear. When new linings areinstalled, the fluid level goesback up.

. A fluid leak in the brakehydraulic system can also causea low fluid level. Have the brakehydraulic system fixed, since aleak means that sooner or laterthe brakes will not work well.

Do not top off the brake fluid.Adding fluid does not correct a leak.If fluid is added when the linings areworn, there will be too much fluidwhen new brake linings areinstalled. Add or remove brake fluid,as necessary, only when work isdone on the brake hydraulic system.

{ WARNING

If too much brake fluid is added, itcan spill on the engine and burn,if the engine is hot enough. Youor others could be burned, andthe vehicle could be damaged.Add brake fluid only when work isdone on the brake hydraulicsystem. See “Checking BrakeFluid” in this section.

When the brake fluid falls to a lowlevel, the brake warning light comeson. See Brake System WarningLight on page 5‑19.


10-26 Vehicle Care

Refer to the Maintenance Scheduleto determine when to check thebrake fluid. See MaintenanceSchedule on page 11‑3.

Checking Brake Fluid

Check brake fluid by looking at thebrake fluid reservoir. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10‑6.

The fluid level should be aboveMIN. If it is not, have the brakehydraulic system checked to see ifthere is a leak.

After work is done on the brakehydraulic system, make sure thelevel is above the MIN but not overthe MAX mark.

What to Add

Use only new DOT 3 brake fluidfrom a sealed container. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑13.

Always clean the brake fluidreservoir cap and the area aroundthe cap before removing it. Thishelps keep dirt from entering thereservoir.

{ WARNING

With the wrong kind of fluid in thebrake hydraulic system, thebrakes might not work well. Thiscould cause a crash. Always usethe proper brake fluid.

Notice. Using the wrong fluid canbadly damage brakehydraulic system parts. Forexample, just a few drops ofmineral-based oil, such asengine oil, in the brakehydraulic system candamage brake hydraulicsystem parts so badly thatthey will have to be replaced.Do not let someone put inthe wrong kind of fluid.

. If brake fluid is spilled on thevehicle's painted surfaces,the paint finish can bedamaged. Be careful not tospill brake fluid on thevehicle. If you do, wash it offimmediately.


Vehicle Care 10-27

BatteryIf the vehicle is a hybrid, see thehybrid supplement for moreinformation.

Refer to the replacement number onthe original battery label when anew battery is needed. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10‑6 for battery location.

{ WARNING

Battery posts, terminals, andrelated accessories contain leadand lead compounds, chemicalsknown to the State of California tocause cancer and reproductiveharm. Wash hands after handling.

Vehicle Storage

{ WARNING

Batteries have acid that can burnyou and gas that can explode.You can be badly hurt if you arenot careful. See Jump Starting onpage 10‑88 for tips on workingaround a battery withoutgetting hurt.

Infrequent Usage: Remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery to keep the battery fromrunning down.

Extended Storage: Remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery or use a battery tricklecharger.

All-Wheel Drive

Transfer Case

If the vehicle is equipped withAll-Wheel Drive, be sure to performthe lubricant checks described inthis section.

When to Check Lubricant

Refer to Maintenance Schedule onpage 11‑3 to determine how often tocheck the lubricant.


10-28 Vehicle Care

How to Check Lubricant

To get an accurate reading, thevehicle should be on a levelsurface.

A. Drain Plug

B. Fill Plug

If the level is below the bottom ofthe fill plug hole, located on thetransfer case, some lubricant willneed to be added. Add enoughlubricant to raise the level to thebottom of the fill plug hole. Use carenot to overtighten the plug.

What to Use

Refer to Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑13 todetermine what kind of lubricantto use.

Front AxleWhen to Check and ChangeLubricant

It is not necessary to regularlycheck front axle fluid unless there isa leak suspected or an unusualnoise is heard. A fluid loss couldindicate a problem. Have itinspected and repaired.


To get an accurate reading, thevehicle should be on a levelsurface.

A. Fill Plug

B. Drain Plug. When the differential is cold, add

enough lubricant to raise thelevel from 0mm (0 in) to 3.2 mm(1/8 in) below the fill plug hole.

. When the differential is atoperating temperature (warm),add enough lubricant to raise thelevel to the bottom of the fillplug hole.


Vehicle Care 10-29

What to Use


Rear Axle

When to Check Lubricant

It is not necessary to regularlycheck rear axle fluid unless there isa leak suspected or an unusualnoise is heard. A fluid loss couldindicate a problem. Have itinspected and repaired.

All axle assemblies are filled byvolume of fluid during production.They are not filled to reach a certainlevel. When checking the fluid levelon any axle, variations in thereadings can be caused by factoryfill differences between the minimumand the maximum fluid volume.Also, if a vehicle has just beendriven before checking the fluidlevel, it may appear lower thannormal because fluid has traveled

out along the axle tubes and hasnot drained back to the sump area.Therefore, a reading takenfive minutes after the vehicle hasbeen driven will appear to have alower fluid level than a vehicle thathas been stationary for an hour ortwo. Remember that the rear axleassembly must be supported to geta true reading.


To get an accurate reading, thevehicle should be on a levelsurface.. For Two-Wheel-Drive vehicles,

the proper level is from 15mm to40 mm (0.6 in to 1.6 in) below thebottom of the filler plug hole,located on the rear axle. Addonly enough fluid to reach theproper level.

. For All-Wheel-Drive vehicles, theproper level is from 1.0 mm to19.0 mm (0.04 in to 0.75 in)below the bottom of the fillerplug hole, located on the rearaxle. Add only enough fluid toreach the proper level.


10-30 Vehicle Care

What to Use


Starter Switch Check

{ WARNING

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle couldmove suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle.

2. Firmly apply both the parkingbrake and the regular brake.See Parking Brake onpage 9‑36.

Do not use the acceleratorpedal, and be ready to turn offthe engine immediately if itstarts.

3. Try to start the engine in eachgear. The vehicle should startonly in P (Park) or N (Neutral).If the vehicle starts in any otherposition, contact your dealer forservice.

Automatic TransmissionShift Lock ControlFunction Check

{ WARNING

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle couldmove suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle. It should beparked on a level surface.

2. Firmly apply the parking brake.See Parking Brake onpage 9‑36.

Be ready to apply the regularbrake immediately if the vehiclebegins to move.

3. With the engine off, turn theignition on, but do not start theengine. Without applying theregular brake, try to move theshift lever out of P (Park) withnormal effort. If the shift levermoves out of P (Park), contactyour dealer for service.


Vehicle Care 10-31

Ignition TransmissionLock CheckWhile parked, and with the parkingbrake set, try to turn the ignition toLOCK/OFF in each shift leverposition.. The ignition should turn to

LOCK/OFF only when the shiftlever is in P (Park).

. The ignition key should comeout only in LOCK/OFF.

Contact your dealer if service isrequired.

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check

{ WARNING

When you are doing this check,the vehicle could begin to move.You or others could be injuredand property could be damaged.Make sure there is room in frontof the vehicle in case it begins toroll. Be ready to apply the regularbrake at once should the vehiclebegin to move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with thevehicle facing downhill. Keepingyour foot on the regular brake, setthe parking brake.. To check the parking brake's

holding ability: With the enginerunning and the transmission inN (Neutral), slowly remove footpressure from the regular brakepedal. Do this until the vehicle isheld by the parking brake only.

. To check the P (Park)mechanism's holdingability: With the engine running,shift to P (Park). Then releasethe parking brake followed bythe regular brake.

Contact your dealer if service isrequired.


10-32 Vehicle Care

Wiper Blade ReplacementWindshield wiper blades should beinspected for wear or cracking. SeeMaintenance Schedule onpage 11‑3.

Replacement blades come indifferent types and are removed indifferent ways.

Front Wiper BladeReplacement

1. Pull the windshield wiper armconnector away from thewindshield.

2. Squeeze the grooved areas oneach side of the blade, and turnthe blade assembly away fromthe arm connector.

3. Install the new blade onto thearm connector and make surethe grooved areas are fully set inthe locked position.

For the proper type and size, seeMaintenance Replacement Parts onpage 11‑15.

Rear Wiper Blade Replacement

1. Lift the wiper blade assembly upand out of the park rest position.

2. Pull the wiper blade assemblyaway from the backglass. Thebackglass wiper blade will notlock in a vertical position, socare should be used whenpulling it away from the vehicle.

3. Turn the wiper blade assembly,and pull it off of the wiper arm.Hold the wiper arm in positionand push the blade away fromthe wiper arm.


Vehicle Care 10-33

4. Replace the wiper blade.

5. Return the wiper blade assemblyto the park rest position.

Glass ReplacementIf the windshield or front side glassmust be replaced, see your dealerto determine the correctreplacement glass.

Headlamp AimingThe vehicle has a visual opticalheadlamp aiming system. The aimof the headlamps have been presetat the factory and should need nofurther adjustment.

However, if the vehicle is damagedin a crash, the aim of the headlampsmay be affected and adjustmentmay be necessary.

If oncoming vehicles flash their highbeams at you, this may mean thevertical aim of the headlamps needsto be adjusted.

It is recommended that the vehicleis taken to your dealer for service ifthe headlamps need to be adjusted.It is possible however, to re-aim theheadlamps as described.

The vehicle should:. Be placed so the headlamps are

7.6 m (25 ft.) from a light coloredwall or other flat surface.

. Have all four tires on a levelsurface which is level all the wayto the wall or other flat surface.

. Be placed so it is perpendicularto the wall or other flat surface.

. Not have any snow, ice, or mudon it.

. Be fully assembled and all otherwork stopped while headlampaiming is being performed.

. Be normally loaded with a fulltank of fuel and one person or75 kg (160 lbs) sitting on thedriver seat.

. Have the tires properly inflated.

. Have the spare tire is in itsproper location in the vehicle.


10-34 Vehicle Care

Headlamp aiming is done with thevehicle's low-beam headlamps. Thehigh-beam headlamps will becorrectly aimed if the low-beamheadlamps are aimed properly.

To adjust the vertical aim:

1. Open the hood. See Hood onpage 10‑4 for more information.

2. Locate the center of theprojector lens of the low‐beamheadlamp.

3. Record the distance from theground to the center of theprojector lens of the low‐beamheadlamp.

4. At a wall, measure from theground upward (A) to therecorded distance fromStep 3 and mark it.

5. Draw or tape a horizontal line (B)on the wall the width of thevehicle at the height of the markin Step 4.

Notice: Do not cover a headlampto improve beam cut-off whenaiming. Covering a headlamp maycause excessive heat build-upwhich may cause damage to theheadlamp.

6. Turn on the low-beamheadlamps and place a piece ofcardboard or equivalent in frontof the headlamp not beingadjusted. This allows only thebeam of light from the headlampbeing adjusted to be seen on theflat surface.


Vehicle Care 10-35

7. Locate the vertical headlampaiming screws, which are underthe hood near each headlampassembly.

8. Turn the vertical aiming screwuntil the headlamp beam isaimed to the horizontal tapeline. Turn it clockwise orcounterclockwise to raise orlower the angle of the beam.

9. Make sure that the light from theheadlamp is positioned at thebottom edge of the horizontaltape line. The lamp on theleft (A) shows the correctheadlamp aim. The lamp on theright (B) shows the incorrectheadlamp aim.

10. Repeat Steps 7 through 9 forthe opposite headlamp.

Bulb ReplacementFor the proper type of replacementbulbs, see Replacement Bulbs onpage 10‑37.

For any bulb‐changing procedurenot listed in this section, contactyour dealer.


10-36 Vehicle Care

High Intensity Discharge(HID) Lighting

{ WARNING

The low beam high intensitydischarge lighting systemoperates at a very high voltage.If you try to service any of thesystem components, you could beseriously injured. Have yourdealer or a qualified technicianservice them.

The vehicle may have HIDheadlamps. After an HID headlampbulb has been replaced, you maynotice that the beam is a slightlydifferent shade than it was originally.This is normal.

LED LightingThe vehicle may have LEDheadlamps. For replacement of theLED lighting assembly contact yourdealer.

Back-Up LampsTo replace this bulb:

1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgateon page 2‑9 for moreinformation.

2. Remove the two screws from thetaillamp assembly.

3. Pull the taillamp assemblyrearward until the inner pins onthe taillamp assembly disengagefrom the vehicle.

4. Press the release tab, if the bulbsocket has one, and turn thesocket counterclockwise toremove it from the taillampassembly.


Vehicle Care 10-37

5. Pull the old bulb straight outfrom the socket.

6. Press a new bulb into thesocket, insert the socket into thetaillamp assembly and turn thesocket clockwise into thetaillamp assembly until it clicks.

7. Reinstall the taillamp assembly.When reinstalling, make sure toline up the pins on the taillampassembly with the vehicle. If thepins do not line up correctly, thetaillamp assembly will not beable to be installed properly.

If the taillamp, stoplamp, or turnsignal need to be replaced, see yourdealer for service.

License Plate Lamp

1. Remove the two screws holdingeach of the license plate lampsto the molding that is part of theliftgate.

2. Twist and pull the license platelamp assembly forward throughthe molding opening.

3. Remove the bulb socket fromthe lamp assembly by turning itcounterclockwise.

4. Pull the bulb straight out of thesocket and install the new bulb.

5. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 toreinstall the license plate lamp.

Replacement Bulbs

Exterior LampBulb

Number

Back-up Lamp 7441

LicensePlate Lamp

168LL(W5WLL)

For replacement bulbs not listedhere, contact your dealer.


10-38 Vehicle Care

Electrical System

Electrical SystemOverloadThe vehicle has fuses and circuitbreakers to protect against anelectrical system overload.

When the current electrical load istoo heavy, the circuit breaker opensand closes, protecting the circuituntil the current load returns tonormal or the problem is fixed. Thisgreatly reduces the chance of circuitoverload and fire caused byelectrical problems.

Fuses and circuit breakers protectpower devices in the vehicle.

Replace a bad fuse with a new oneof the identical size and rating.

If there is a problem on the road anda fuse needs to be replaced, thesame amperage fuse can beborrowed. Choose some feature ofthe vehicle that is not needed to useand replace it as soon as possible.

Headlamp Wiring

An electrical overload may causethe lamps to go on and off, or insome cases to remain off. Have theheadlamp wiring checked right awayif the lamps go on and off orremain off.

Windshield Wipers

If the wiper motor overheats due toheavy snow or ice, the windshieldwipers will stop until the motor coolsand will then restart.

Although the circuit is protectedfrom electrical overload, overloaddue to heavy snow or ice maycause wiper linkage damage.Always clear ice and heavy snowfrom the windshield before using thewindshield wipers.

If the overload is caused by anelectrical problem and not snow orice, be sure to get it fixed.


Vehicle Care 10-39

Fuses and CircuitBreakersIf the vehicle is a hybrid, see thehybrid supplement for moreinformation.

The wiring circuits in the vehicle areprotected from short circuits by acombination of fuses, circuitbreakers and fusible thermal links.This greatly reduces the chance offires caused by electrical problems.

Look at the silver-colored bandinside the fuse. If the band is brokenor melted, replace the fuse. Be sureyou replace a bad fuse with a newone of the identical size and rating.

If you ever have a problem on theroad and don't have a spare fuse,you can borrow one that has thesame amperage. Just pick somefeature of your vehicle that you canget along without– like the radio oraccessory power outlet– and use itsfuse, if it is the correct amperage.Replace it as soon as you can.

Engine CompartmentFuse Block

The Engine Compartment FuseBlock is located in the enginecompartment, on the driver side ofthe vehicle. Lift the cover for accessto the fuse/relay block.


Notice: Spilling liquid on anyelectrical component on thevehicle may damage it. Alwayskeep the covers on any electricalcomponent.

To remove fuses, hold the end ofthe fuse between your thumb andindex finger and pull straight out.


10-40 Vehicle Care


Vehicle Care 10-41

The vehicle may not be equippedwith all of the fuses, relays, andfeatures shown.

Fuses Usage

1 Right Trailer Stop/Turn Lamp

2

Electronic StabilitySuspension Control,Automatic LevelControl Exhaust

3Left Trailer Stop/Turn Lamp

4 Engine Controls

5Engine ControlModule, ThrottleControl

6Trailer BrakeController

7 Front Washer

8 Oxygen Sensors

9Antilock BrakesSystem 2

Fuses Usage

10 Trailer Back-upLamps

11Driver SideLow-Beam Headlamp

12Engine ControlModule (Battery)

13Fuel Injectors, IgnitionCoils (Right Side)

14Transmission ControlModule (Battery)

15Vehicle Back-upLamps

16Passenger SideLow-Beam Headlamp

17Air ConditioningCompressor

18 Oxygen Sensors

19Transmission Controls(Ignition)

20 Fuel Pump

Fuses Usage

21 Fuel System ControlModule

22 Headlamp Washer

23Rear WindshieldWasher

24Fuel Injectors, IgnitionCoils (Left Side)

25 Trailer Parking Lamps

26Driver Side ParkingLamps

27Passenger SideParking Lamps

28 Fog Lamps

29 Horn

30Passenger SideHigh-Beam Headlamp

31Daytime RunningLamps (DRL)(If Equipped)

32Driver SideHigh-Beam Headlamp


10-42 Vehicle Care

Fuses Usage

33 Daytime RunningLamps 2 (If Equipped)

34 Sunroof

35Key Ignition System,Theft DeterrentSystem

36 Windshield Wiper

37SEO B2 UpfitterUsage (Battery)

38Electric AdjustablePedals

39 Climate Controls(Battery)

40Airbag System(Ignition)

41 Amplifier

42 Audio System

43Miscellaneous(Ignition), CruiseControl

44 Liftgate Release

Fuses Usage

45 Airbag System(Battery)

46Instrument PanelCluster

47 Not Used

48Auxiliary ClimateControl (Ignition)

49Center High-MountedStoplamp (CHMSL)

50 Rear Defogger

51 Heated Mirrors

52 SEO B1 UpfitterUsage (Battery)

53Accessory PowerOutlet, CigaretteLighter (If Equipped)

54Automatic LevelControl CompressorRelay

55Climate Controls(Ignition)

Fuses Usage

56Engine ControlModule, SecondaryFuel Pump (Ignition)

J-CaseFuses Usage

57 Cooling Fan 1

58Automatic LevelControl Compressor

59Heavy Duty AntilockBraking System

60 Cooling Fan 2

61 Antilock BrakeSystem 1

62 Starter

63Stud 2 (TrailerBrakes)

64Left Bussed ElectricalCenter 1

65Electric RunningBoards


Vehicle Care 10-43

J-CaseFuses

Usage

66 Not Used

67 Transfer Case

68Stud 1 (TrailerConnector BatteryPower)

69Mid-Bussed ElectricalCenter 1

70Climate ControlBlower

71Power LiftgateModule

72Left Bussed ElectricalCenter 2

Relays Usage

FAN HICooling Fan HighSpeed

FAN LOCooling Fan LowSpeed

Relays Usage

FANCNTRL

Cooling Fan Control

HDLPLO/HID

Low-Beam Headlamp

FOGLAMP

Front Fog Lamps

A/CCMPRSR

Air ConditioningCompressor

STRTR Starter

PWR/TRN Powertrain

FUELPMP

Fuel Pump

PRKLAMP

Parking Lamps

REARDEFOG Rear Defogger

RUN/CRNK

Switched Power

Instrument Panel FuseBlock

The instrument panel fuse blockaccess door is located on the driverside edge of the instrument panel.

Pull off the cover to access the fuseblock.


10-44 Vehicle Care

The vehicle may not be equippedwith all of the fuses, relays, andfeatures shown.

Fuses Usage

1 Rear Seats

2Rear AccessoryPower Outlet

Fuses Usage

3Steering WheelControls Backlight

4 Driver Door Module

5Dome Lamps, DriverSide Turn Signal

Fuses Usage

6 Driver Side TurnSignal, Stoplamp

7Instrument PanelBack Lighting

8Passenger Side TurnSignal, Stoplamp

9Passenger DoorModule, Driver Unlock

10Power Door Lock 2(Unlock Feature)

11Power Door Lock 2(Lock Feature)

12Stoplamps, CenterHigh‐MountedStoplamp

13 Rear Climate Controls

14 Power Mirror

15Body ControlModule (BCM)

16Accessory PowerOutlets


Vehicle Care 10-45

Fuses Usage

17 Interior Lamps

18Power Door Lock 1(Unlock Feature)

19Rear SeatEntertainment

20Ultrasonic RearParking Assist, PowerLiftgate

21Power Door Lock 1(Lock Feature)

22Driver InformationCenter (DIC)

23 Rear Wiper

24 Cooled Seats

25Driver Seat Module,Remote Keyless EntrySystem

26Driver Power DoorLock (Unlock Feature)

CircuitBreaker

Usage

LT DRDriver Side PowerWindow CircuitBreaker

HarnessConnector Usage

LT DRDriver DoorHarnessConnection

BODY Harness Connector

BODY Harness Connector

Center Instrument Panel FuseBlock

The center instrument panel fuseblock is located underneath theinstrument panel, to the left of thesteering column.

Top View


BODY 2Body HarnessConnector 2



HEADLINER 3HeadlinerHarnessConnector 3


10-46 Vehicle Care




SEO/UPFITTER

SpecialEquipment OptionUpfitter HarnessConnector

CircuitBreaker Usage

CB1Passenger SidePower Window CircuitBreaker

CB2Passenger SeatCircuit Breaker

CB3Driver Seat CircuitBreaker

CB4 Rear Sliding Window

Wheels and Tires

TiresEvery new GM vehicle hashigh-quality tires made by aleading tire manufacturer.See the warranty manual forinformation regarding the tirewarranty and where to getservice. For additionalinformation refer to the tiremanufacturer.

{ WARNING

. Poorly maintained andimproperly used tires aredangerous.

. Overloading the tires cancause overheating as a resultof too much flexing. Therecould be a blowout and aserious crash. See VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑16.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Underinflated tires pose thesame danger as overloadedtires. The resulting crashcould cause serious injury.Check all tires frequently tomaintain the recommendedpressure. Tire pressureshould be checked when thetires are cold.

. Overinflated tires are morelikely to be cut, punctured,or broken by a suddenimpact — such as whenhitting a pothole. Keep tires atthe recommended pressure.

. Worn or old tires can cause acrash. If the tread is badlyworn, replace them.

. Replace any tires that havebeen damaged by impactswith potholes, curbs, etc.

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 10-47

WARNING (Continued)

. Improperly repaired tires cancause a crash. Only thedealer or an authorized tireservice center should repair,replace, dismount, and mountthe tires.

. Do not spin the tires inexcess of 56 km/h (35 mph)on slippery surfaces such assnow, mud, ice, etc.Excessive spinning maycause the tires to explode.

See Tire Pressure forHigh-Speed Operation onpage 10‑53 for inflation pressureadjustment for high speeddriving.

22‐Inch Tires

If the vehicle has 22‐inchP285/45R22 size tires, they areclassified as touring tires andare designed for on‐road use.

The low‐profile, wide treaddesign is not recommended foroff‐road driving. See Off-RoadDriving on page 9‑6, foradditional information.

Notice: Low‐profile tires aremore susceptible to damagefrom road hazards or curbimpact than standard profiletires. Tire and/or wheelassembly damage can occurwhen coming into contactwith road hazards like,potholes, or sharp edgedobjects, or when sliding into acurb. The warranty does notcover this type of damage.Keep tires set to the correctinflation pressure and, whenpossible, avoid contact withcurbs, potholes, and otherroad hazards.

Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about a tire ismolded into the sidewall. Theexample shows a typicalpassenger vehicle tire sidewall.

Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire

(A) Tire Size: The tire sizecode is a combination of lettersand numbers used to define aparticular tire's width, height,aspect ratio, construction type,and service description. See the“Tire Size” illustration later in thissection for more detail.


10-48 Vehicle Care

(B) TPC Spec (TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification): Originalequipment tires designed toGM's specific tire performancecriteria have a TPC specificationcode molded onto the sidewall.GM's TPC specifications meet orexceed all federal safetyguidelines.

(C) DOT (Department ofTransportation): TheDepartment of Transportation(DOT) code indicates that thetire is in compliance with theU.S. Department ofTransportation Motor VehicleSafety Standards.

(D) Tire Identification Number(TIN): The letters and numbersfollowing the DOT code arethe Tire Identification Number(TIN). The TIN shows themanufacturer and plant code,tire size, and date the tire was

manufactured. The TIN ismolded onto both sides of thetire, although only one side mayhave the date of manufacture.

(E) Tire Ply Material: The typeof cord and number of plies inthe sidewall and under the tread.

(F) Uniform Tire QualityGrading (UTQG): Tiremanufacturers are required tograde tires based on threeperformance factors: treadwear,traction, and temperatureresistance. For moreinformation, see Uniform TireQuality Grading on page 10‑62.

(G) Maximum Cold InflationLoad Limit: Maximum load thatcan be carried and themaximum pressure needed tosupport that load. Forinformation on recommendedtire pressure see Tire Pressureon page 10‑52 and Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑16.

Tire Designations

Tire Size

The example shows a typicalpassenger vehicle tire size.

Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire

(A) Passenger (P‐Metric)Tire: The United States versionof a metric tire sizing system.The letter P as the firstcharacter in the tire size meansa passenger vehicle tireengineered to standards set bythe U.S. Tire and RimAssociation.

(B) Tire Width: The three‐digitnumber indicates the tire sectionwidth in millimeters fromsidewall to sidewall.


Vehicle Care 10-49

(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digitnumber that indicates the tireheight-to-width measurements.For example, if the tire sizeaspect ratio is 75, as shown initem C of the tire illustration, itwould mean that the tire'ssidewall is 75 percent as highas it is wide.

(D) Construction Code: Aletter code is used to indicatethe type of ply construction inthe tire. The letter R meansradial ply construction; theletter D means diagonal or biasply construction; and the letter Bmeans belted‐bias plyconstruction.

(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter ofthe wheel in inches.

(F) Service Description: Thesecharacters represent the loadindex and speed rating of thetire. The load index represents

the load carrying capacity a tireis certified to carry. The speedrating is the maximum speed atire is certified to carry a load.

Tire Terminology andDefinitionsAir Pressure: The amount ofair inside the tire pressingoutward on each square inch ofthe tire. Air pressure isexpressed in kPa (kilopascal)or psi (pounds per square inch).

Accessory Weight: Thecombined weight of optionalaccessories. Some examplesof optional accessories areautomatic transmission, powersteering, power brakes, powerwindows, power seats, and airconditioning.

Aspect Ratio: The relationshipof a tire's height to its width.

Belt: A rubber coated layer ofcords that is located betweenthe plies and the tread. Cordsmay be made from steel or otherreinforcing materials.

Bead: The tire bead containssteel wires wrapped by steelcords that hold the tire ontothe rim.

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tirein which the plies are laid atalternate angles less than90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Cold Tire Pressure: Theamount of air pressure in a tire,measured in kPa (kilopascal)or psi (pounds per square inch)before a tire has built up heatfrom driving. See Tire Pressureon page 10‑52.

Curb Weight: The weight of amotor vehicle with standard andoptional equipment including the


10-50 Vehicle Care

maximum capacity of fuel, oil,and coolant, but withoutpassengers and cargo.

DOT Markings: A code moldedinto the sidewall of a tiresignifying that the tire is incompliance with the U.S.Department of Transportation(DOT) Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards. The DOT codeincludes the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN), an alphanumericdesignator which can alsoidentify the tire manufacturer,production plant, brand, anddate of production.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle WeightRating. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9‑16.

GAWR FRT: Gross Axle WeightRating for the front axle. SeeVehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑16.

GAWR RR: Gross Axle WeightRating for the rear axle. SeeVehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑16.

Intended Outboard Sidewall:The side of an asymmetrical tire,that must always face outwardwhen mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa): The metricunit for air pressure.

Light Truck (LT‐Metric) Tire: Atire used on light duty trucks andsome multipurpose passengervehicles.

Load Index: An assignednumber ranging from 1 to 279that corresponds to the loadcarrying capacity of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure:The maximum air pressure towhich a cold tire can be inflated.The maximum air pressure ismolded onto the sidewall.

Maximum Load Rating: Theload rating for a tire at themaximum permissible inflationpressure for that tire.

Maximum Loaded VehicleWeight: The sum of curbweight, accessory weight,vehicle capacity weight, andproduction options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight: Thenumber of occupants a vehicleis designed to seat multiplied by68 kg (150 lbs). See VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑16.

Occupant Distribution:Designated seating positions.

Outward Facing Sidewall: Theside of an asymmetrical tire thathas a particular side that facesoutward when mounted on avehicle. The side of the tire thatcontains a whitewall, bearswhite lettering, or bearsmanufacturer, brand, and/or


Vehicle Care 10-51

model name molding that ishigher or deeper than the samemoldings on the other sidewallof the tire.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: Atire used on passenger cars andsome light duty trucks andmultipurpose vehicles.

Recommended InflationPressure: Vehiclemanufacturer's recommendedtire inflation pressure as shownon the tire placard. See TirePressure on page 10‑52 andVehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑16.

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatictire in which the ply cords thatextend to the beads are laid at90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Rim: A metal support for a tireand upon which the tire beadsare seated.

Sidewall: The portion of a tirebetween the tread and the bead.

Speed Rating: Analphanumeric code assigned toa tire indicating the maximumspeed at which a tire canoperate.

Traction: The friction betweenthe tire and the road surface.The amount of grip provided.

Tread: The portion of a tire thatcomes into contact withthe road.

Treadwear Indicators: Narrowbands, sometimes called wearbars, that show across the treadof a tire when only 1.6 mm(1/16 in) of tread remains. SeeWhen It Is Time for New Tireson page 10‑59.

UTQGS (Uniform Tire QualityGrading Standards): A tireinformation system that providesconsumers with ratings for a

tire's traction, temperature, andtreadwear. Ratings aredetermined by tiremanufacturers usinggovernment testing procedures.The ratings are molded into thesidewall of the tire. See UniformTire Quality Grading onpage 10‑62.

Vehicle Capacity Weight: Thenumber of designated seatingpositions multiplied by68 kg (150 lbs) plus the ratedcargo load. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑16.

Vehicle Maximum Load on theTire: Load on an individual tiredue to curb weight, accessoryweight, occupant weight, andcargo weight.

Vehicle Placard: A labelpermanently attached to avehicle showing the vehiclecapacity weight and the originalequipment tire size and


10-52 Vehicle Care

recommended inflation pressure.See “Tire and LoadingInformation Label” under VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑16.

Tire PressureIf the vehicle is a hybrid, see thehybrid supplement for moreinformation.

Tires need the correct amount ofair pressure to operateeffectively.

Notice: Neither tireunderinflation noroverinflation is good.Underinflated tires, or tiresthat do not have enough air,can result in:. Tire overloading andoverheating which couldlead to a blowout.

. Premature orirregular wear.

. Poor handling.

. Reduced fuel economy.

Overinflated tires, or tires thathave too much air, canresult in:. Unusual wear.. Poor handling.. Rough ride.. Needless damage fromroad hazards.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label on the vehicleindicates the original equipmenttires and the correct cold tireinflation pressures. Therecommended pressure is theminimum air pressure needed tosupport the vehicle's maximumload carrying capacity.

For additional informationregarding how much weight thevehicle can carry, and anexample of the Tire and LoadingInformation label, see Vehicle

Load Limits on page 9‑16. Howthe vehicle is loaded affectsvehicle handling and ridecomfort. Never load the vehiclewith more weight than it wasdesigned to carry.

When to Check

Check the tires once a monthor more.

Do not forget the spare tire.See Full-Size Spare Tire onpage 10‑87 for additionalinformation.

How to Check

Use a good quality pocket-typegauge to check tire pressure.Proper tire inflation cannot bedetermined by looking at the tire.Check the tire inflation pressurewhen the tires are cold meaningthe vehicle has not been drivenfor at least three hours or nomore than 1.6 km (1 mi).


Vehicle Care 10-53

Remove the valve cap from thetire valve stem. Press the tiregauge firmly onto the valve toget a pressure measurement.If the cold tire inflation pressurematches the recommendedpressure on the Tire andLoading Information label, nofurther adjustment is necessary.If the inflation pressure is low,add air until the recommendedpressure is reached. If theinflation pressure is high, presson the metal stem in the centerof the tire valve to release air.

Recheck the tire pressure withthe tire gauge

Return the valve caps on thevalve stems to prevent leaksand keep out dirt and moisture.

Tire Pressure forHigh-Speed Operation

{ WARNING

Driving at high speeds, 160 km/h(100mph) or higher, puts anadditional strain on tires.Sustained high-speed drivingcauses excessive heat buildupand can cause sudden tire failure.You could have a crash and youor others could be killed. Somehigh-speed rated tires requireinflation pressure adjustment forhigh-speed operation. Whenspeed limits and road conditionsare such that a vehicle can bedriven at high speeds, make surethe tires are rated for high-speedoperation, in excellent condition,and set to the correct cold tireinflation pressure for thevehicle load.

Vehicles with P265/65R18 orP285/45R22 size tires requireinflation pressure adjustment whendriving the vehicle at speeds of160 km/h (100 mph) or higher. Setthe cold inflation pressure to 20 kPa(3 psi) above the recommended tirepressure shown on the Tire andLoading Information Label. Returnthe tires to the recommended coldtire inflation pressure whenhigh-speed driving has ended. SeeVehicle Load Limits on page 9‑16and Tire Pressure on page 10‑52.

Tire Pressure MonitorSystemThe Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS) uses radio and sensortechnology to check tire pressurelevels. The TPMS sensors monitorthe air pressure in your tires andtransmit tire pressure readings to areceiver located in the vehicle.


10-54 Vehicle Care

Each tire, including the spare(if provided), should be checkedmonthly when cold and inflated tothe inflation pressure recommendedby the vehicle manufacturer on thevehicle placard or tire inflationpressure label. (If your vehicle hastires of a different size than the sizeindicated on the vehicle placard ortire inflation pressure label, youshould determine the proper tireinflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, yourvehicle has been equipped with atire pressure monitoring system(TPMS) that illuminates a low tirepressure telltale when one or moreof your tires is significantly under‐inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tirepressure telltale illuminates, youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate themto the proper pressure. Driving on asignificantly under‐inflated tirecauses the tire to overheat and canlead to tire failure. Under‐inflationalso reduces fuel efficiency and tire

tread life, and may affect thevehicle's handling and stoppingability.

Please note that the TPMS is not asubstitute for proper tiremaintenance, and it is the driver'sresponsibility to maintain correct tirepressure, even if under‐inflation hasnot reached the level to triggerillumination of the TPMS low tirepressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also beenequipped with a TPMS malfunctionindicator to indicate when thesystem is not operating properly.The TPMS malfunction indicator iscombined with the low tire pressuretelltale. When the system detects amalfunction, the telltale will flash forapproximately one minute and thenremain continuously illuminated.This sequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start‐ups aslong as the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator isilluminated, the system may not beable to detect or signal low tire

pressure as intended. TPMSmalfunctions may occur for a varietyof reasons, including the installationof replacement or alternate tires orwheels on the vehicle that preventthe TPMS from functioning properly.Always check the TPMS malfunctiontelltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement oralternate tires and wheels allow theTPMS to continue to functionproperly.

See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation on page 10‑55 foradditional information.

Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) Rules andwith Industry CanadaStandards

See Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑21 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)Rules and with Industry CanadaStandards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.


Vehicle Care 10-55

Tire Pressure MonitorOperationThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).The TPMS is designed to warn thedriver when a low tire pressurecondition exists. TPMS sensors aremounted onto each tire and wheelassembly, excluding the spare tireand wheel assembly. The TPMSsensors monitor the air pressure inthe tires and transmit the tirepressure readings to a receiverlocated in the vehicle.

When a low tire pressure conditionis detected, the TPMS illuminatesthe low tire pressure warning lightlocated on the instrument cluster.If the warning light comes on, stopas soon as possible and inflate the

tires to the recommended pressureshown on the tire loadinginformation label. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑16.

A message to check the pressure ina specific tire displays in the DriverInformation Center (DIC). The lowtire pressure warning light and theDIC warning message come on ateach ignition cycle until the tires areinflated to the correct inflationpressure. Using the DIC, tirepressure levels can be viewed. Foradditional information and detailsabout the DIC operation anddisplays see Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5‑23 and TireMessages on page 5‑36.

The low tire pressure warning lightmay come on in cool weather whenthe vehicle is first started, and thenturn off as the vehicle is driven. Thiscould be an early indicator that theair pressure is getting low andneeds to be inflated to the properpressure.

A Tire and Loading Information labelshows the size of the originalequipment tires and the correctinflation pressure for the tires whenthey are cold. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑16, for an exampleof the Tire and Loading Informationlabel and its location. Also see TirePressure on page 10‑52.

The TPMS can warn about a lowtire pressure condition but it doesnot replace normal tiremaintenance. See Tire Inspectionon page 10‑57, Tire Rotation onpage 10‑58 and Tires onpage 10‑46.

Notice: Tire sealant materials arenot all the same. A non-approvedtire sealant could damage theTPMS sensors. TPMS sensordamage caused by using anincorrect tire sealant is notcovered by the vehicle warranty.Always use only theGM-approved tire sealantavailable through your dealer orincluded in the vehicle.


10-56 Vehicle Care

Factory-installed Tire Inflator Kitsuse a GM approved liquid tiresealant. Using non-approved tiresealants could damage the TPMSsensors. See Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit on page 10‑67 forinformation regarding the inflator kitmaterials and instructions.

TPMS Malfunction Light andMessage

The TPMS will not function properlyif one or more of the TPMS sensorsare missing or inoperable. When thesystem detects a malfunction, thelow tire warning light flashes forabout one minute and then stays onfor the remainder of the ignitioncycle. A DIC warning message alsodisplays. The malfunction light andDIC warning message come on ateach ignition cycle until the problemis corrected. Some of the conditionsthat can cause these to comeon are:. One of the road tires has been

replaced with the spare tire. Thespare tire does not have a

TPMS sensor. The malfunctionlight and DIC message shouldgo off after the road tire isreplaced and the sensormatching process is performedsuccessfully. See "TPMS SensorMatching Process" later in thissection.

. The TPMS sensor matchingprocess was not done or notcompleted successfully afterrotating the tires. Themalfunction light and the DICmessage should go off aftersuccessfully completing thesensor matching process. See"TPMS Sensor MatchingProcess" later in this section.

. One or more TPMS sensors aremissing or damaged. Themalfunction light and the DICmessage should go off when theTPMS sensors are installed andthe sensor matching process isperformed successfully. Seeyour dealer for service.

. Replacement tires or wheels donot match the original equipmenttires or wheels. Tires and wheelsother than those recommendedcould prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly. See BuyingNew Tires on page 10‑60.

. Operating electronic devices orbeing near facilities using radiowave frequencies similar to theTPMS could cause the TPMSsensors to malfunction.

If the TPMS is not functioningproperly, it cannot detect or signal alow tire condition. See your dealerfor service if the TPMS malfunctionlight and DIC message comes onand stays on.

TPMS Sensor MatchingProcess

Each TPMS sensor has a uniqueidentification code. The identificationcode needs to be matched to a newtire/wheel position after rotating thevehicle’s tires or replacing one ormore of the TPMS sensors. TheTPMS sensor matching process


Vehicle Care 10-57

should also be performed afterreplacing a spare tire with a roadtire containing the TPMS sensor.The malfunction light and the DICmessage should go off at the nextignition cycle. The sensors arematched to the tire/wheel positions,using a TPMS relearn tool, in thefollowing order: driver side front tire,passenger side front tire, passengerside rear tire, and driver side rear.See your dealer for service or topurchase a relearn tool.

There are two minutes to match thefirst tire/wheel position, andfive minutes overall to match all fourtire/wheel positions. If it takeslonger, the matching process stopsand must be restarted.

The TPMS sensor matching processis outlined below:

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN withthe engine off.

3. Press Q and K on the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitterat the same time forapproximately five seconds. Thehorn sounds twice to signal thereceiver is in relearn mode andTIRE LEARNING ACTIVEmessage displays on the DICscreen.

4. Start with the driver sidefront tire.

5. Place the relearn tool againstthe tire sidewall, near the valvestem. Then press the button toactivate the TPMS sensor.A horn chirp confirms that thesensor identification code hasbeen matched to this tire andwheel position.

6. Proceed to the passenger sidefront tire, and repeat theprocedure in Step 5.

7. Proceed to the passenger siderear tire, and repeat theprocedure in Step 5.

8. Proceed to the driver side reartire, and repeat the procedure inStep 5. The horn sounds twotimes to indicate the sensoridentification code has beenmatched to the driver side reartire, and the TPMS sensormatching process is no longeractive. The TIRE LEARNINGACTIVE message on the DICdisplay screen goes off.

9. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.

10. Set all four tires to therecommended air pressurelevel as indicated on the Tireand Loading Information label.

Tire InspectionWe recommend that the tires,including the spare tire, if thevehicle has one, be inspectedfor signs of wear or damage atleast once a month.


10-58 Vehicle Care

Replace the tire if:. The indicators at three or

more places around the tirecan be seen.

. There is cord or fabricshowing through the tire'srubber.

. The tread or sidewall iscracked, cut, or snaggeddeep enough to show cord orfabric.

. The tire has a bump, bulge,or split.

. The tire has a puncture, cut,or other damage that cannotbe repaired well because ofthe size or location of thedamage.

Tire RotationTires should be rotated every12 000 km (7,500 mi). SeeMaintenance Schedule onpage 11‑3.

Tires are rotated to achieve auniform wear for all tires. Thefirst rotation is the mostimportant.

Any time unusual wear isnoticed, rotate the tires as soonas possible and check the wheelalignment. Also check fordamaged tires or wheels. SeeWhen It Is Time for New Tireson page 10‑59 and WheelReplacement on page 10‑64.

Use this rotation pattern whenrotating the tires.

Do not include the spare tire inthe tire rotation.

Adjust the front and rear tires tothe recommended inflationpressure on the Tire andLoading Information label afterthe tires have been rotated. SeeTire Pressure on page 10‑52and Vehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑16.


Vehicle Care 10-59

Reset the Tire Pressure MonitorSystem. See Tire PressureMonitor Operation onpage 10‑55.

Check that all wheel nuts areproperly tightened. See “WheelNut Torque” under Capacitiesand Specifications onpage 12‑2.

{ WARNING

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause an accident. Whenchanging a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where thewheel attaches to the vehicle. Inan emergency, a cloth or a papertowel can be used; however, usea scraper or wire brush later toremove all rust or dirt.

Lightly coat the center of thewheel hub with wheel bearinggrease after a wheel change ortire rotation to prevent corrosionor rust build-up. Do not getgrease on the flat wheelmounting surface or on thewheel nuts or bolts.

When It Is Time for NewTiresFactors, such as maintenance,temperatures, driving speeds,vehicle loading, and road conditionsaffect the wear rate of the tires.

Treadwear indicators are one way totell when it is time for new tires.Treadwear indicators appear whenthe tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in)or less of tread remaining. Somecommercial truck tires may not havetreadwear indicators. See TireInspection on page 10‑57 and TireRotation on page 10‑58 foradditional information.

The rubber in tires ages over time.This also applies to the spare tire,if the vehicle has one, even if it isnever used. Multiple conditionsincluding temperatures, loadingconditions, and inflation pressure


10-60 Vehicle Care

maintenance affect how fast agingtakes place. Tires will typically needto be replaced due to wear beforethey may need to be replaced dueto age. Consult the tiremanufacturer for more informationon when tires should be replaced.

Vehicle Storage

Tires age when stored normallymounted on a parked vehicle. Parka vehicle that will be stored for atleast a month in a cool, dry, cleanarea away from direct sunlight toslow aging. This area should be freeof grease, gasoline or othersubstances that can deterioraterubber.

Parking for an extended period cancause flat spots on the tires thatmay result in vibrations whiledriving. When storing a vehicle forat least a month, remove the tires orraise the vehicle to reduce theweight from the tires.

Buying New TiresGM has developed and matchedspecific tires for the vehicle. Theoriginal equipment tires installedwere designed to meet GeneralMotors Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification (TPC Spec) systemrating. When replacement tires areneeded, GM strongly recommendsbuying tires with the same TPCSpec rating.

GM's exclusive TPC Spec systemconsiders over a dozen criticalspecifications that impact theoverall performance of thevehicle, including brake systemperformance, ride and handling,traction control, and tire pressuremonitoring performance. GM's TPCSpec number is molded onto thetire's sidewall near the tire size.If the tires have an all‐season treaddesign, the TPC Spec number willbe followed by MS for mud andsnow. See Tire Sidewall Labeling onpage 10‑47 for additionalinformation.

GM recommends replacing all thetires at the same time. Uniform treaddepth on all tires will help tomaintain the performance of thevehicle. Braking and handlingperformance may be adverselyaffected if all the tires are notreplaced at the same time. See TireInspection on page 10‑57 and TireRotation on page 10‑58 forinformation on proper tire rotation.

{ WARNING

Tires could explode duringimproper service. Attemptingto mount or dismount a tirecould cause injury or death.Only your dealer or authorizedtire service center shouldmount or dismount the tires.


Vehicle Care 10-61

{ WARNING

Mixing tires of different sizes,brands, or types may cause lossof control of the vehicle, resultingin a crash or other vehicledamage. Use the correct size,brand, and type of tires on allwheels.

This vehicle may have a differentsize spare than the road tiresoriginally installed on the vehicle.When new, the vehicle included aspare tire and wheel assemblywith a similar overall diameter asthe road tires and wheels, so it isall right to drive on it. The sparetire was developed for use on thisvehicle and will not affect vehiclehandling.

{ WARNING

Using bias-ply tires on thevehicle may cause the wheelrim flanges to develop cracksafter many miles of driving.A tire and/or wheel could failsuddenly and cause a crash.Use only radial-ply tires withthe wheels on the vehicle.

If the vehicle tires must be replacedwith a tire that does not have a TPCSpec number, make sure they arethe same size, load range, speedrating, and construction (radial) asthe original tires.

Vehicles that have a tire pressuremonitoring system could give aninaccurate low‐pressure warning ifnon‐TPC Spec rated tires areinstalled. See Tire Pressure MonitorSystem on page 10‑53.

The Tire and Loading Informationlabel indicates the originalequipment tires on the vehicle. SeeVehicle Load Limits on page 9‑16for the label location and moreinformation about the Tire andLoading Information label.


10-62 Vehicle Care

Different Size Tires andWheelsIf wheels or tires are installed thatare a different size than the originalequipment wheels and tires, vehicleperformance, including its braking,ride and handling characteristics,stability, and resistance to rollovermay be affected. If the vehicle haselectronic systems such as antilockbrakes, rollover airbags, tractioncontrol, and electronic stabilitycontrol, the performance of thesesystems can also be affected.

{ WARNING

If different sized wheels are used,there may not be an acceptablelevel of performance and safety iftires not recommended for thosewheels are selected. Thisincreases the chance of a crashand serious injury. Only use GMspecific wheel and tire systems

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

developed for the vehicle, andhave them properly installed by aGM certified technician.

See Buying New Tires onpage 10‑60 and Accessories andModifications on page 10‑3.

Uniform Tire QualityGradingQuality grades can be foundwhere applicable on the tiresidewall between tread shoulderand maximum section width. Forexample:

Treadwear 200 Traction AATemperature A

The following information relatesto the system developed by theUnited States National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA), which grades tires by

treadwear, traction, andtemperature performance. Thisapplies only to vehicles sold inthe United States. The gradesare molded on the sidewalls ofmost passenger car tires. TheUniform Tire Quality Grading(UTQG) system does not applyto deep tread, winter tires,compact spare tires, tires withnominal rim diameters of10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm),or to some limited-productiontires.

While the tires available onGeneral Motors passenger carsand light trucks may vary withrespect to these grades, theymust also conform to federalsafety requirements andadditional General Motors TirePerformance Criteria (TPC)standards.


Vehicle Care 10-63

All Passenger Car Tires MustConform to Federal SafetyRequirements In Addition ToThese Grades.

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is acomparative rating based on thewear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on aspecified government testcourse. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one anda half (1½) times as well on thegovernment course as a tiregraded 100. The relativeperformance of tires dependsupon the actual conditions oftheir use, however, and maydepart significantly from thenorm due to variations in drivinghabits, service practices anddifferences in roadcharacteristics and climate.

Traction – AA, A, B, C

The traction grades, fromhighest to lowest, are AA, A, B,and C. Those grades representthe tire's ability to stop on wetpavement as measured undercontrolled conditions onspecified government testsurfaces of asphalt andconcrete. A tire marked C mayhave poor traction performance.Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is based onstraight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not includeacceleration, cornering,hydroplaning, or peak tractioncharacteristics.

Temperature – A, B, C

The temperature grades are A(the highest), B, and C,representing the tire's resistanceto the generation of heat and itsability to dissipate heat whentested under controlled

conditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can cause thematerial of the tire to degenerateand reduce tire life, andexcessive temperature canlead to sudden tire failure. Thegrade C corresponds to a levelof performance which allpassenger car tires must meetunder the Federal Motor SafetyStandard No. 109. Grades B andA represent higher levels ofperformance on the laboratorytest wheel than the minimumrequired by law. Warning: Thetemperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that isproperly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessiveloading, either separately or incombination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.


10-64 Vehicle Care

Wheel Alignment and TireBalanceThe tires and wheels were alignedand balanced at the factory toprovide the longest tire life and bestoverall performance. Adjustments towheel alignment and tire balancingwill not be necessary on a regularbasis. However, check thealignment if there is unusual tirewear or if the vehicle is pulling toone side or the other. If the vehiclevibrates when driving on a smoothroad, the tires and wheels mightneed to be rebalanced. See yourdealer for proper diagnosis.

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent,cracked, or badly rusted orcorroded. If wheel nuts keep comingloose, the wheel, wheel bolts, andwheel nuts should be replaced.If the wheel leaks air, replace it.Some aluminum wheels can berepaired. See your dealer if any ofthese conditions exist.

Your dealer will know the kind ofwheel that is needed.

Each new wheel should have thesame load-carrying capacity,diameter, width, offset, and bemounted the same way as the one itreplaces.

Replace wheels, wheel bolts, wheelnuts, or Tire Pressure MonitorSystem (TPMS) sensors with newGM original equipment parts.

{ WARNING

Using the wrong replacementwheels, wheel bolts, or wheelnuts can be dangerous. It couldaffect the braking and handling ofthe vehicle. Tires can lose air,and cause loss of control, causinga crash. Always use the correctwheel, wheel bolts, and wheelnuts for replacement.

Notice: The wrong wheel canalso cause problems with bearinglife, brake cooling, speedometeror odometer calibration,headlamp aim, bumper height,vehicle ground clearance, and tireor tire chain clearance to thebody and chassis.

Used Replacement Wheels

{ WARNING

Replacing a wheel with a usedone is dangerous. How it hasbeen used or how far it has beendriven may be unknown. It couldfail suddenly and cause a crash.When replacing wheels, use anew GM original equipmentwheel.


Vehicle Care 10-65

Tire Chains

{ WARNING

Do not use tire chains. There isnot enough clearance. Tire chainsused on a vehicle without theproper amount of clearance cancause damage to the brakes,suspension, or other vehicleparts. The area damaged by thetire chains could cause loss ofcontrol and a crash. Use anothertype of traction device only if itsmanufacturer recommends it forthe vehicle's tire size combinationand road conditions. Follow thatmanufacturer's instructions. Toavoid vehicle damage, driveslowly and readjust or remove thetraction device if it contacts thevehicle. Do not spin the wheels.If traction devices are used, installthem on the rear tires.

If a Tire Goes FlatIt is unusual for a tire to blow outwhile driving, especially if the tiresare maintained properly. See Tireson page 10‑46. If air goes out of atire, it is much more likely to leakout slowly. But if there is ever ablowout, here are a few tips aboutwhat to expect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tirecreates a drag that pulls the vehicletoward that side. Take your foot offthe accelerator pedal and grip thesteering wheel firmly. Steer tomaintain lane position, and thengently brake to a stop, well off theroad, if possible.

A rear blowout, particularly on acurve, acts much like a skid andmay require the same correction asused in a skid. Stop pressing theaccelerator pedal and steer tostraighten the vehicle. It may bevery bumpy and noisy. Gently braketo a stop, well off the road,if possible.

{ WARNING

Driving on a flat tire will causepermanent damage to the tire.Re-inflating a tire after it has beendriven on while severelyunderinflated or flat may cause ablowout and a serious crash.Never attempt to re-inflate a tirethat has been driven on whileseverely underinflated or flat.Have your dealer or an authorizedtire service center repair orreplace the flat tire as soon aspossible.


10-66 Vehicle Care

{ WARNING

Lifting a vehicle and getting underit to do maintenance or repairs isdangerous without theappropriate safety equipment andtraining. If a jack is provided withthe vehicle, it is designed only forchanging a flat tire. If it is used foranything else, you or others couldbe badly injured or killed if thevehicle slips off the jack. If a jackis provided with the vehicle, onlyuse it for changing a flat tire.

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tireand wheel damage by driving slowlyto a level place, well off the road,if possible. Turn on the hazardwarning flashers. See HazardWarning Flashers on page 6‑7.

{ WARNING

Changing a tire can bedangerous. The vehicle can slipoff the jack and roll over or fallcausing injury or death. Find alevel place to change the tire. Tohelp prevent the vehicle frommoving:

1. Set the parking brake firmly.

2. Put an automatictransmission in P (Park) or amanual transmission in1 (First) or R (Reverse).

3. Turn off the engine and donot restart while the vehicleis raised.

4. Do not allow passengers toremain in the vehicle.

5. Place wheel blocks on bothsides of the tire at theopposite corner of the tirebeing changed.

This vehicle may come with a jackand spare tire or a tire sealant andcompressor kit. To use the jackingequipment to change a spare tiresafely, follow the instructions below.Then see Tire Changing onpage 10‑74. To use the tire sealantand compressor kit, see TireSealant and Compressor Kit onpage 10‑67.

When the vehicle has a flat tire (B),use the following example as aguide to assist you in the placementof wheel blocks (A).

A. Wheel Block

B. Flat Tire


Vehicle Care 10-67

The following information explainshow to repair or change a tire.

Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit

{ WARNING

Idling a vehicle in an enclosedarea with poor ventilation isdangerous. Engine exhaust mayenter the vehicle. Engine exhaustcontains carbon monoxide (CO)which cannot be seen or smelled.It can cause unconsciousnessand even death. Never run theengine in an enclosed area thathas no fresh air ventilation. Formore information, see EngineExhaust on page 9‑29.

{ WARNING

Overinflating a tire could causethe tire to rupture and you orothers could be injured. Be sureto read and follow the tire sealantand compressor kit instructionsand inflate the tire to itsrecommended pressure. Do notexceed the recommendedpressure.

{ WARNING

Storing the tire sealant andcompressor kit or otherequipment in the passengercompartment of the vehicle couldcause injury. In a sudden stop orcollision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store the tiresealant and compressor kit in itsoriginal location.

If this vehicle has a tire sealant andcompressor kit, there may not be aspare tire, tire changing equipment,and on some vehicles there may notbe a place to store a tire.

The tire sealant and compressorcan be used to temporarily sealpunctures up to 6 mm (¼ inch) inthe tread area of the tire. It can alsobe used to inflate an underinflated tire.

If the tire has been separated fromthe wheel, has damaged sidewalls,or has a large puncture, the tire istoo severely damaged for the tiresealant and compressor kit to beeffective. See Roadside Service(U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑7 orRoadside Service (Mexico) onpage 13‑9.


10-68 Vehicle Care

Read and follow all of the tiresealant and compressor kitinstructions.

The kit includes:

A. Air Compressor

B. Tire Sealant Canister

C. Power Plug

D. On/Off Button

E. Pressure Gauge

F. Air Only Hose (Black)

G. Sealant/Air Hose (Clear)

Tire Sealant

Read and follow the safe handlinginstructions on the label adhered tothe sealant canister.

Check the tire sealant expirationdate on the sealant canister. Thesealant canister should be replacedbefore its expiration date.Replacement sealant canisters areavailable at your local dealer. See“Removal and Installation of theSealant Canister” following.

There is only enough sealant to sealone tire. After usage, the sealantcanister and sealant/air hoseassembly must be replaced. See“Removal and Installation of theSealant Canister” following.

Using the Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit to TemporarilySeal and Inflate aPunctured Tire

Follow the directions closely forcorrect sealant usage.

When using the tire sealant andcompressor kit during coldtemperatures, warm the kit in aheated environment for five minutes.This will help to inflate the tirefaster.


Vehicle Care 10-69

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tireand wheel damage by driving slowlyto a level place. Turn on the hazardwarning flashers.

See If a Tire Goes Flat onpage 10‑65 for other importantsafety warnings.

Do not remove any objects thathave penetrated the tire.

1. Remove the tire sealant andcompressor kit from its storagelocation. See Storing the TireSealant and Compressor Kit onpage 10‑73.

Make sure the on/off button (D)is in the off (O) position.

2. Unwrap the sealant/air hose (G)and the power plug (C).

3. Place the kit on the ground.

Make sure the tire valve stem ispositioned close to the groundso the hose will reach it.

4. Remove the valve stem cap fromthe flat tire by turning itcounterclockwise.

5. Attach the sealant/air hose (G)onto the tire valve stem. Turn itclockwise until it is tight.

6. Plug the power plug (C) into theaccessory power outlet in thevehicle. Unplug all items fromother accessory power outlets.See Power Outlets on page 5‑8in the owner manual.

If the vehicle has an accessorypower outlet, do not use thecigarette lighter.

If the vehicle only has a cigarettelighter, use the cigarette lighter.

Do not pinch the power plugcord in the door or window.

7. Start the vehicle. The vehiclemust be running while using theair compressor.

8. Press the on/off (D) button toturn the tire sealant andcompressor kit on.

The compressor will injectsealant and air into the tire.

The pressure gauge (E) willinitially show a high pressurewhile the compressor pushes thesealant into the tire. Once thesealant is completely dispersedinto the tire, the pressure willquickly drop and start to riseagain as the tire inflates withair only.

9. Inflate the tire to therecommended inflation pressureusing the pressure gauge (E).The recommended inflationpressure can be found on theTire and Loading Informationlabel. See Tire Pressure onpage 10‑52.

The pressure gauge (E) mayread higher than the actual tirepressure while the compressor ison. Turn the compressor off toget an accurate pressurereading. The compressor maybe turned on/off until the correctpressure is reached.


10-70 Vehicle Care

Notice: If the recommendedpressure cannot be reached afterapproximately 25 minutes, thevehicle should not be drivenfarther. The tire is too severelydamaged and the tire sealant andcompressor kit cannot inflate thetire. Remove the power plug fromthe accessory power outlet andunscrew the inflating hose fromthe tire valve. See RoadsideService (U.S. and Canada) onpage 13‑7 or Roadside Service(Mexico) on page 13‑9.

10. Press the on/off button (D) toturn the tire sealant andcompressor kit off.

The tire is not sealed and willcontinue to leak air until thevehicle is driven and thesealant is distributed in the tire,therefore, Steps 11 through17 must be done immediatelyafter Step 10.

Be careful while handling thetire sealant and compressor kitas it could be warm afterusage.

11. Unplug the power plug (C) fromthe accessory power outlet inthe vehicle.

12. Turn the sealant/air hose (G)counterclockwise to remove itfrom the tire valve stem.

13. Replace the tire valvestem cap.

14. Replace the sealant/air hose(G), and the power plug (C)back in their original location.

15. If the flat tire was able to inflateto the recommended inflationpressure, remove themaximum speed label from the

tire sealant canister (B) andplace it in a highly visiblelocation.

Do not exceed the speed onthis label until the damaged tireis repaired or replaced.

16. Return the equipment to itsoriginal storage location in thevehicle.

17. Immediately drive the vehicle8 km (5 mi) to distribute thesealant in the tire.

18. Stop at a safe location andcheck the tire pressure. Referto Steps 1 through 11 under“Using the Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit without Sealantto Inflate a Tire (NotPunctured).”

If the tire pressure has fallenmore than 68 kPa (10 psi)below the recommendedinflation pressure, stop drivingthe vehicle. The tire is tooseverely damaged and the tiresealant cannot seal the tire.


Vehicle Care 10-71

See Roadside Service (U.S.and Canada) on page 13‑7 orRoadside Service (Mexico) onpage 13‑9.

If the tire pressure has notdropped more than 68 kPa(10 psi) from the recommendedinflation pressure, inflate thetire to the recommendedinflation pressure.

19. Wipe off any sealant from thewheel, tire or vehicle.

20. Dispose of the used tiresealant canister (B) andsealant/air hose (G) assemblyat a local dealer or inaccordance with localregulations and practices.

21. Replace it with a new canisteravailable from your dealer.

22. After temporarily sealing a tireusing the tire sealant andcompressor kit, take thevehicle to an authorized dealer

within a 161 km (100 mi) ofdriving to have the tire repairedor replaced.

Using the Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit withoutSealant to Inflate a Tire (NotPunctured)

To use the air compressor to inflatea tire with air only and not sealant:

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tireand wheel damage by driving slowlyto a level place. Turn on the hazardwarning flashers.

See If a Tire Goes Flat onpage 10‑65 for other importantsafety warnings.

1. Remove the tire sealant andcompressor kit from its storagelocation. See Storing the TireSealant and Compressor Kit onpage 10‑73.

2. Unlock the air only hose (F) fromthe tire sealant canister (B) bypulling up on the lever.

3. Pull the air only hose (F) fromthe tire sealant canister (B).

4. Remove the power plug (C) fromthe air compressor (A).

5. Place the kit on the ground.

Make sure the tire valve stem ispositioned close to the groundso the hose will reach it.

6. Remove the tire valve stem capby turning it counterclockwise.

7. Attach the air only hose (F) ontothe tire valve stem and press thelever down to secure it.


10-72 Vehicle Care

8. Plug the power plug (C) into theaccessory power outlet in thevehicle. Unplug all items fromother accessory power outlets.See Power Outlets on page 5‑8in the owner manual.

If the vehicle has an accessorypower outlet, do not use thecigarette lighter.

If the vehicle only has a cigarettelighter, use the cigarette lighter.

Do not pinch the power plugcord in the door or window.

9. Start the vehicle. The vehiclemust be running while using theair compressor.

10. Press the on/off (D) button toturn the compressor on.

The compressor will inflate thetire with air only.

11. Inflate the tire to therecommended inflationpressure using the pressuregauge (E). The recommendedinflation pressure can be found

on the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See TirePressure on page 10‑52.

The pressure gauge (E) mayread higher than the actual tirepressure while the compressoris on. Turn the compressor offto get an accurate reading. Thecompressor may be turned on/off until the correct pressure isreached.

12. Press the on/off button (D) toturn the tire sealant andcompressor kit off.

Be careful while handling thetire sealant and compressor kitas it could be warm afterusage.

13. Unplug the power plug (C) fromthe accessory power outlet inthe vehicle.

14. Disconnect the air onlyhose (F) from the tire valvestem, by turning itcounterclockwise, and replacethe tire valve stem cap.

15. Replace the air only hose (F)and the power plug (C) back inits original location.

16. Place the equipment in theoriginal storage location in thevehicle.

Removal and Installation of theSealant Canister

To remove the sealant canister:

1. Unlock the air only hose (F) fromthe tire sealant canister (B) bypulling up on the lever.

2. Pull the air only hose (F) fromthe tire sealant canister (B).

3. Unwrap the sealant/air hose (G)from the compressor (A).


Vehicle Care 10-73

4. Turn the tire sealant canister (B)so the inflator filling hose isaligned with the slot in thecompressor.

5. Lift the tire sealant canister (B)from the compressor andreplace with a new sealantcanister. See your dealer formore information.

To install a new sealant canister:

1. Align the sealant/air hose (G)with the slot in the aircompressor.

2. Push the tire sealant canister (B)down and turn it clockwise.

3. Wrap the sealant/air hose (G)around the air compressorchannel to stow it in its originallocation.

4. Push the air only hose (F) ontothe sealant canister inlet andpush the lever down.

Storing the Tire Sealantand Compressor KitThe tire sealant and compressor kitis located under the storage tray onthe driver side trim panel (over therear wheelhouse).

To access the tire sealant andcompressor kit:

1. Remove the tray by pulling upon the finger depression toaccess the tire sealant andcompressor kit.


10-74 Vehicle Care

2. Locate the tire sealant andcompressor kit.

3. Remove the sealant andcompressor kit by pulling thevelcro strip up and back.

4. Remove the sealant andcompressor kit from its plastictray assembly.

To store the tire sealant andcompressor kit, reverse the steps.

Tire Changing

Removing the Spare Tire andTools

The equipment needed to change aflat tire is stored under the storagetray, located on the driver side trimpanel, over the rear wheelhouse.

Regular Wheelbase Shown,Extended Wheelbase Similar.

1. Remove the tray to access thetools by pulling up on the fingerdepression under the jacksymbol.

A. Jack Knob

B. Wing Nut Retaining theTool Bag

C. Wing Nut Retaining theWheel Blocks

2. Turn the wing nut retaining thetool bag (B) counterclockwise toremove it.

3. Turn the jack knob (A)counterclockwise to release thejack and wheel blocks from thebracket.

4. Turn the wing nut retaining thewheel blocks (C)counterclockwise to remove thewheel blocks and the wheelblock retainer.


Vehicle Care 10-75

Use the following tools:

A. Jack

B. Wheel Blocks

C. Jack Handle

D. Jack Handle Extensions

E. Wheel Wrench

To access the spare tire:

A. Hoist Assembly

B. Hoist Shaft

C. Hoist Shaft Access Cover/Hole


E. Wheel Wrench

F. Hoist Cable

G. Tire/Wheel Retainer

H. Spare Tire (Valve StemPointed Down)

I. Hoist Shaft Access Hole

J. Hoist End of Extension Tool

K. Spare Tire Lock

1. To reach the hoist shaft accesscover (C), remove the hitchcover by turning the twofasteners located at the bottomof the cover counterclockwiseand then pull the cover downand rotate it towards you.

2. Open the hoist shaft accesscover on the bumper to accessthe spare tire lock.


10-76 Vehicle Care

3. To remove the spare tire lockinsert the ignition key, turn itclockwise and then pull thelock out.

4. Assemble the two jack handleextensions (D) and wheelwrench (E), as shown.

5. Insert the open end of theextension (J) through the hole inthe rear bumper (I) (hoist shaftaccess hole).

Be sure the hoist end (J) of theextension connects to the hoistshaft. The ribbed square end ofthe extension is used to lowerthe spare tire.

6. Turn the wheel wrenchcounterclockwise to lower thespare tire to the ground.Continue to turn the wheelwrench until the spare tire canbe pulled out from under thevehicle.

If the spare tire does not lower tothe ground, the secondary latchis engaged causing the tire notto lower. See Secondary LatchSystem on page 10‑85 for moreinformation.

7. Use the wheel wrench hook topull the hoist cable closer toassist in reaching the spare tire.


Vehicle Care 10-77

8. Tilt the tire toward the vehiclewith some slack in the cable toaccess the tire/wheel retainer.Separate the retainer from theguide pin by sliding the retainerup the pin while pressing downon the latch.

Once the retainer is separatedfrom the pin, tilt the retainer andpull it through the center of thewheel along with the cable andlatch.

9. Put the spare tire near theflat tire.

Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare Tire

1. Do a safety check beforeproceeding. See If a Tire GoesFlat on page 10‑65 for moreinformation.

2. To remove the center cap, placethe chiseled end of the wheelwrench in the slot on the wheeland gently pry the cap out.


10-78 Vehicle Care

3. Use the wheel wrench to loosenall the wheel nuts. Turn thewheel wrench counterclockwiseto loosen the wheel nuts. Do notremove the wheel nuts yet.

Jacking Locations (Overall View)

A. Front Position

B. Rear Position

{ WARNING

Getting under a vehicle when it islifted on a jack is dangerous.If the vehicle slips off the jack,you could be badly injured orkilled. Never get under a vehiclewhen it is supported only bya jack.

{ WARNING

Raising the vehicle with the jackimproperly positioned candamage the vehicle and evenmake the vehicle fall. To helpavoid personal injury and vehicledamage, be sure to fit the jack lifthead into the proper locationbefore raising the vehicle.

4. Position the jack under thevehicle as shown.


Vehicle Care 10-79

Front Position

Front Tire Flat: If the flat tire ison a front tire of the vehicle, usethe jack handle and only onejack handle extension. Attachthe wheel wrench to the jackhandle extension. Attach thejack handle to the jack (A).Position the jack on the framebehind the flat tire where theframe sections overlap. Turn thewheel wrench clockwise to raisethe vehicle. Raise the vehicle farenough off the ground so thereis enough room for the spare tireto clear the ground.

Rear Position

Rear Tire Flat: If the flat tire ison a rear tire of the vehicle, usethe jack handle (B) and both jackhandle extensions (C). Attachthe wheel wrench (D) to the jackhandle extensions (C). Attachthe jack handle (B) to thejack (A). Use the jacking pad (E)provided on the rear axle. Turnthe wheel wrench (D) clockwiseto raise the vehicle. Raise thevehicle far enough off theground so there is enough roomfor the spare tire to clear theground.

5. Remove all of the wheel nuts.

6. Take off the flat tire.


10-80 Vehicle Care

{ WARNING

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause an accident. Whenchanging a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where thewheel attaches to the vehicle. Inan emergency, a cloth or a papertowel can be used; however, usea scraper or wire brush later toremove all rust or dirt.

7. Remove any rust or dirt from thewheel bolts, mounting surfaces,and spare wheel.

{ WARNING

Never use oil or grease on boltsor nuts because the nuts mightcome loose. The vehicle's wheelcould fall off, causing a crash.

8. Put the wheel nuts back on withthe rounded end of the nutstoward the wheel after mountingthe spare tire.

9. Tighten each wheel nut by hand.Then use the wheel wrench totighten the nuts until the wheel isheld against the hub.

10. Turn the wheel wrenchcounterclockwise to lower thevehicle. Lower the jackcompletely.


Vehicle Care 10-81

{ WARNING

Wheel nuts that are improperly orincorrectly tightened can causethe wheels to become loose orcome off. The wheel nuts shouldbe tightened with a torque wrenchto the proper torque specificationafter replacing. Follow the torquespecification supplied by theaftermarket manufacturer whenusing accessory locking wheelnuts. See Capacities andSpecifications on page 12‑2 fororiginal equipment wheel nuttorque specifications.

Notice: Improperly tightenedwheel nuts can lead to brakepulsation and rotor damage. Toavoid expensive brake repairs,evenly tighten the wheel nuts inthe proper sequence and to theproper torque specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications onpage 12‑2 for the wheel nuttorque specification.

11. Tighten the nuts firmly in acrisscross sequence as shownby turning the wheel wrenchclockwise.

When reinstalling the regular wheeland tire, also reinstall the centercap. Line the tab on the back of thecap with the slot in the wheel. Placethe cap on the wheel and press untilit snaps into place.


10-82 Vehicle Care

Storing a Flat or Spare Tireand Tools

{ WARNING

Storing a jack, a tire, or otherequipment in the passengercompartment of the vehicle couldcause injury. In a sudden stop orcollision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store all these inthe proper place.

Notice: Storing an aluminumwheel with a flat tire under yourvehicle for an extended period oftime or with the valve stempointing up can damage thewheel. Always stow the wheelwith the valve stem pointingdown and have the wheel/tirerepaired as soon as possible.

Store the tire under the rear of thevehicle in the spare tire carrier.

A. Hoist Assembly

B. Hoist Shaft

C. Hoist Shaft Access Cover/Hole


E. Wheel Wrench

F. Hoist Cable

G. Tire/Wheel Retainer

H. Spare Tire/Flat Tire (Valve StemPointed Down)

I. Hoist Shaft Access Hole

J. Hoist End of Extension Tool

K. Spare Tire Lock

1. Put the tire (H) on the ground atthe rear of the vehicle with thevalve stem pointed down and tothe rear.

2. Tilt the tire toward the vehicle.Separate the tire/wheel retainerfrom the guide pin. Pull the pinthrough the center of the wheel.Tilt the retainer down andthrough the center wheelopening.


Vehicle Care 10-83

3. Assemble the two jack handleextensions (D) and wheelwrench (E), as shown.

4. Insert the open end of theextension (J) through the hole inthe rear bumper (I) (hoist shaftaccess hole).

5. Raise the tire part way upward.Make sure the retainer is fullyseated across the underside ofthe wheel and centered in thewheel opening.

6. Raise the tire fully against theunderside of the vehicle byturning the wheel wrenchclockwise until you hear twoclicks or feel it skip twice. Youcannot overtighten the cable.

7. Make sure the tire is storedsecurely. Push, pull (A), and thentry to turn (B) the tire. If the tiremoves, use the wheel wrench totighten the cable.

8. Reinstall the spare tire lock.

9. Reinstall the hoist shaft accesscover.

10. Reinstall the hitch cover.


10-84 Vehicle Care

To store the tools:

A. Wheel Blocks

B. Tool Bag

C. Retaining Bracket

D. Wing Nut Retaining Tool Bag

E. Jack

F. Wing Nut Retaining WheelBlocks

G. Jack Knob

1. Return the tools (wheel wrench,jack handle, and jack handleextensions) to the tool bag (B).

2. Assemble wheel blocks (A) andjack (E) together with the wingnut retaining the wheelblocks (F).

3. Position the jack (E) and wheelblocks (A) in the driver side trimpanel over the wheelhouse.

4. Turn the jack knob (G) clockwiseuntil the jack is secured tight inthe mounting bracket. Be sure toposition the holes in the base ofthe jack onto the pin in themounting bracket.

5. Use the retaining bracket (C) tofasten the tool bag (B) on thestud and turn the wing nutretaining the tool bag (D)clockwise to secure.

Regular Wheelbase shown,Extended Wheelbase similar.

6. Return the storage tray to itsoriginal stored position.


Vehicle Care 10-85

Secondary Latch SystemThis vehicle has anunderbody-mounted tire hoistassembly equipped with asecondary latch system. It isdesigned to stop the spare tire fromsuddenly falling off your vehicle. Forthe secondary latch to work, thespare must be installed with thevalve stem pointing down. See“Storing a Flat or Spare Tire andTools” under Tire Changing onpage 10‑74.

{ WARNING

Before beginning this procedureread all the instructions. Failure toread and follow the instructionscould damage the hoist assemblyand you and others could gethurt. Read and follow theinstructions listed next.

To release the spare tire from thesecondary latch:

1. Check under the vehicle to see ifthe cable end is visible. If thecable is not visible proceed toStep 6.

2. If it is visible, first try to tightenthe cable by turning the wheelwrench clockwise until you heartwo clicks or feel it skip twice.You cannot overtighten thecable.

3. Loosen the cable by turning thewrench counterclockwise threeor four turns.

4. Repeat this procedure at leasttwo times. If the spare tirelowers to the ground, continuewith Step 5 under “Removing theSpare Tire and Tools” under TireChanging on page 10‑74.

5. If the spare does not lower, turnthe wrench counterclockwiseuntil approximately 15 cm (6 in)of cable is exposed.

6. Stand the wheel blocks on theirshortest ends, with the backsfacing each other.


10-86 Vehicle Care

A. Jack

B. Wheel Blocks

7. Place the bottom edge of thejack (A) on the wheel blocks (B),separating them so that the jackis balanced securely.

8. Attach the jack handle,extension, and wheel wrench tothe jack and place it (with thewheel blocks) under the vehicletoward the front of the rearbumper.

9. Position the center lift point ofthe jack under the center of thespare tire.

10. Turn the wrench clockwise toraise the jack until it lifts theend fitting.

11. Continue raising the jack untilthe spare tire stops movingupward and is held firmly inplace. The secondary latch hasreleased and the spare tire isbalancing on the jack.


Vehicle Care 10-87

12. Lower the jack by turningthe wheel wrenchcounterclockwise. Keeplowering the jack until thespare tire slides off the jack oris hanging by the cable.

{ WARNING

Someone standing too closeduring the procedure could beinjured by the jack. If the sparetire does not slide off the jackcompletely, make sure no one isbehind you or on either side ofyou as you pull the jack out fromunder the spare.

13. Disconnect the jack handlefrom the jack and carefullyremove the jack. Use one handto push against the spare whilefirmly pulling the jack out fromunder the spare tire with theother hand.

If the spare tire is hanging fromthe cable, insert the hoist endof extension, and wheelwrench into the hoist shaft holein the bumper and turn thewheel wrench counterclockwiseto lower the spare the rest ofthe way.

14. Turn the wheel wrench in thehoist shaft hole in the bumperclockwise to raise the cableback up if the cable is hangingunder the vehicle.

Have the hoist assembly inspectedas soon as you can. You will not beable to store a spare or flat tireusing the hoist assembly until it hasbeen inspected and/or replaced.

To continue changing the flat tire,see “Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare Tire” under TireChanging on page 10‑74.

Full-Size Spare TireIf this vehicle came with a full-sizespare tire, it was fully inflated whennew, however, it can lose air overtime. Check the inflation pressureregularly. See Tire Pressure onpage 10‑52 and Vehicle Load Limitson page 9‑16 for informationregarding proper tire inflation andloading the vehicle. For instructionson how to remove, install, or store aspare tire, see Tire Changing onpage 10‑74.


10-88 Vehicle Care

After installing the spare tire on thevehicle, stop as soon as possibleand check that the spare is correctlyinflated. The spare tire is made toperform well at speeds up to112 km/h (70 mph) at therecommended inflation pressure, soyou can finish your trip.

Have the damaged or flat road tirerepaired or replaced and installedback onto the vehicle as soon aspossible so the spare tire will beavailable in case it is needed again.Do not mix tires and wheels ofdifferent sizes, because they will notfit. Keep the spare tire and its wheeltogether.

Jump StartingFor more information about thevehicle battery, see Battery onpage 10‑27.


If the vehicle's battery has rundown, you may want to use anothervehicle and some jumper cables tostart your vehicle. Be sure to usethe following steps to do it safely.

{ WARNING

Batteries can hurt you. They canbe dangerous because:

. They contain acid that canburn you.

. They contain gas that canexplode or ignite.

. They contain enoughelectricity to burn you.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

If you do not follow these stepsexactly, some or all of thesethings can hurt you.

Notice: Ignoring these stepscould result in costly damage tothe vehicle that would not becovered by the warranty.

Trying to start the vehicle bypushing or pulling it will notwork, and it could damage thevehicle.

1. Check the other vehicle. It musthave a 12-volt battery with anegative ground system.

Notice: Only use a vehicle thathas a 12-volt system with anegative ground for jumpstarting. If the other vehicle doesnot have a 12-volt system with anegative ground, both vehiclescan be damaged.


Vehicle Care 10-89

2. Get the vehicles close enoughso the jumper cables can reach,but be sure the vehicles are nottouching each other. If they are,it could cause a groundconnection you do not want. Youwould not be able to start yourvehicle, and the bad groundingcould damage the electricalsystems.

To avoid the possibility of thevehicles rolling, set the parkingbrake firmly on both vehiclesinvolved in the jump startprocedure. Put the automatictransmission in P (Park) or amanual transmission inN (Neutral) before setting theparking brake. If you have afour-wheel-drive vehicle, be surethat the transfer case is in adrive gear, not in N (Neutral).

Notice: If any accessories are lefton or plugged in during the jumpstarting procedure, they could bedamaged. The repairs would notbe covered by the vehiclewarranty. Whenever possible,turn off or unplug all accessorieson either vehicle when jumpstarting the vehicle.

3. Turn off the ignition on bothvehicles. Unplug unnecessaryaccessories plugged into theaccessory power outlets. Turnoff the radio and all the lampsthat are not needed. This avoidssparks and helps save bothbatteries. And it could save theradio!

4. Open the hood on the othervehicle and locate thepositive (+) and negative (−)terminal locations on thatvehicle.

Your vehicle has a remotepositive (+) jump startingterminal and a remotenegative (−) jump startingterminal. You should always usethese remote terminals insteadof the terminals on the battery.

If the vehicle has a remotepositive (+) terminal, it is locatedunder a red plastic cover at thepositive battery post. To uncoverthe remote positive (+) terminal,open the red plastic cover.


10-90 Vehicle Care

The remote negative (−) terminalis a stud located on the rightfront of the engine, where thenegative battery cable attaches.

See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 10‑6 for moreinformation on the location of theremote positive (+) and remotenegative (−) terminals.

{ WARNING

An electric fan can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can injure you. Keep hands,clothing and tools away from anyunderhood electric fan.

{ WARNING

Using an open flame near abattery can cause battery gas toexplode. People have been hurtdoing this, and some have beenblinded. Use a flashlight if youneed more light.

Be sure the battery has enoughwater. You do not need to addwater to the battery installed inyour new vehicle. But if a batteryhas filler caps, be sure the rightamount of fluid is there. If it is low,

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

add water to take care of thatfirst. If you do not, explosive gascould be present.

Battery fluid contains acid thatcan burn you. Do not get it onyou. If you accidentally get it inyour eyes or on your skin, flushthe place with water and getmedical help immediately.

{ WARNING

Fans or other moving engineparts can injure you badly. Keepyour hands away from movingparts once the engine is running.

5. Check that the jumper cables donot have loose or missinginsulation. If they do, you couldget a shock. The vehicles couldbe damaged too.


Vehicle Care 10-91

Before you connect the cables,here are some basic things youshould know. Positive (+) will goto positive (+) or to a remotepositive (+) terminal if the vehiclehas one. Negative (−) will go to aheavy, unpainted metal enginepart or to a remote negative (−)terminal if the vehicle has one.

Do not connect positive (+) tonegative (−) or you will get ashort that would damage thebattery and maybe other partstoo. And do not connect thenegative (−) cable to thenegative (−) terminal on the deadbattery because this can causesparks.

6. Connect the red positive (+)cable to the positive (+) terminalof the vehicle with the deadbattery. Use a remotepositive (+) terminal if the vehiclehas one.

7. Do not let the other end touchmetal. Connect it to thepositive (+) terminal of the goodbattery. Use a remotepositive (+) terminal if the vehiclehas one.

8. Now connect the blacknegative (−) cable to thenegative (−) terminal of the goodbattery. Use a remotenegative (−) terminal if thevehicle has one.

Do not let the other end touchanything until the next step. Theother end of the negative (−)cable does not go to the deadbattery. It goes to a heavy,unpainted metal engine part orto the remote negative (−)terminal on the vehicle with thedead battery.

9. Connect the other end of thenegative (−) cable to the remotenegative (−) terminal, on thevehicle with the dead battery.


10-92 Vehicle Care

10. Now start the vehicle with thegood battery and run theengine for a while.

11. Try to start the vehicle that hadthe dead battery. If it will notstart after a few tries, itprobably needs service.

Notice: If the jumper cables areconnected or removed in thewrong order, electrical shortingmay occur and damage thevehicle. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always connect and remove thejumper cables in the correctorder, making sure that thecables do not touch each other orother metal.

Jumper Cable Removal

A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal EnginePart or Remote Negative (−)Terminal

B. Good Battery or RemotePositive (+) and RemoteNegative (−) Terminals

C. Dead Battery or RemotePositive (+) Terminal

To disconnect the jumper cablesfrom both vehicles do the following:

1. Disconnect the blacknegative (−) cable from thevehicle that had the bad battery.

2. Disconnect the blacknegative (−) cable from thevehicle with the good battery.

3. Disconnect the red positive (+)cable from the vehicle with thegood battery.

4. Disconnect the red positive (+)cable from the other vehicle.

5. Return the remote positive (+)terminal cover, if the vehicle hasone, to its original position.


Vehicle Care 10-93

Towing

Towing the VehicleNotice: To avoid damage, thedisabled vehicle should be towedwith all four wheels off theground. Care must be taken withvehicles that have low groundclearance and/or specialequipment. Always flatbed on acar carrier.

Consult your dealer or aprofessional towing service if thedisabled vehicle must be towed.See Roadside Service (U.S. andCanada) on page 13‑7 or RoadsideService (Mexico) on page 13‑9.

To tow the vehicle behind anothervehicle for recreational purposes,such as behind a motor home, see“Recreational Vehicle Towing” in thissection.

Recreational VehicleTowingIf the vehicle is a hybrid, see thehybrid supplement for moreinformation.

Recreational vehicle towing meanstowing the vehicle behind anothervehicle – such as behind amotorhome. The two most commontypes of recreational vehicle towingare known as “dinghy towing”(towing the vehicle with all fourwheels on the ground) and “dollytowing” (towing the vehicle with twowheels on the ground and twowheels up on a device known as a“dolly”).

Here are some important things toconsider before recreational vehicletowing:. What is the towing capacity of

the towing vehicle? Be sure toread the tow vehiclemanufacturer'srecommendations.

. What is the distance that will betravelled? Some vehicles haverestrictions on how far and howlong they can tow.

. Is the proper towing equipmentgoing to be used? See yourdealer or trailering professionalfor additional advice andequipment recommendations.

. Is the vehicle ready to betowed? Just as preparing thevehicle for a long trip, make surethe vehicle is prepared to betowed.


10-94 Vehicle Care

All-Wheel-Drive Vehicles

Dinghy and Dolly Towing

Notice: Towing an all-wheel-drivevehicle with all four wheels on theground, or even with only two ofits wheels on the ground, willdamage drivetrain components.Do not tow an all-wheel-drivevehicle with any of its wheels onthe ground.

All-wheel-drive vehicles are notdesigned to be towed with anywheels on the ground. If the vehiclemust be towed, see Towing YourVehicle previously.

Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles

Dinghy Towing

Notice: If a two-wheel-drivevehicle is towed with all fourwheels on the ground, thetransmission could be damaged.The repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Do nottow a two-wheel-drive vehiclewith all four wheels on theground.


Vehicle Care 10-95

Two-wheel-drive vehicles should notbe towed with all four wheels on theground. Two-wheel-drivetransmissions have no provisionsfor internal lubrication while beingtowed.

To dolly tow a two‐wheel‐drivevehicle, the vehicle must be towedwith the rear wheels on the dolly.See “Dolly Towing (Rear Wheels Offthe Ground)” following.

Dolly Towing (Front Wheels Offthe Ground)

Notice: If a two-wheel drivevehicle is towed with the rearwheels on the ground, thetransmission could be damaged.The repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Nevertow the vehicle with the rearwheels on the ground.

Two-wheel-drive vehicles should notbe towed with the rear wheels onthe ground. Two-wheel-drive

transmissions have no provisionsfor internal lubrication while beingtowed.

Dolly Towing (Rear Wheels Off theGround)

Use the following procedure todinghy tow a two-wheel-drivevehicle from the rear:

1. Attach the dolly to the towvehicle following the dollymanufacturer's instructions.

2. Drive the rear wheels onto thedolly.


10-96 Vehicle Care

3. Firmly set the parking brake.See Parking Brake onpage 9‑36.

4. Put the transmission in P (Park).

5. Secure the vehicle to the dollyfollowing the manufacturer'sinstructions.

6. Use an adequate clampingdevice designed for towing toensure that the front wheels arelocked into the straight position.

7. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.

Appearance Care

Exterior Care

Washing the Vehicle

To preserve the vehicle's finish,wash it often and out of directsunlight.

Notice: Do not use petroleumbased, acidic, or abrasivecleaning agents as they candamage the vehicle's paint, metal,or plastic parts. If damageoccurs, it would not be coveredby the vehicle's warranty.Approved cleaning products canbe obtained from your dealer.Follow all manufacturerdirections regarding correctproduct usage, necessary safetyprecautions, and appropriatedisposal of any vehicle careproduct.

Notice: Avoid using highpressure washes closer than30 cm (12 in) to the surface of thevehicle. Use of power washersexceeding 8,274 kPa (1,200 psi)can result in damage or removalof paint and decals.

Rinse the vehicle well, beforewashing and after, to remove allcleaning agents completely. If theyare allowed to dry on the surface,they could stain.

Dry the finish with a soft, cleanchamois or an all-cotton towel toavoid surface scratches and waterspotting.

Finish Care

Application of aftermarket clearcoatsealant/wax materials is notrecommended. If painted surfacesare damaged, see your dealer tohave the damage assessed andrepaired. Foreign materials such ascalcium chloride and other salts, icemelting agents, road oil and tar, treesap, bird droppings, chemicals fromindustrial chimneys, etc., can


Vehicle Care 10-97

damage the vehicle's finish if theyremain on painted surfaces. Washthe vehicle as soon as possible.If necessary, use non-abrasivecleaners that are marked safe forpainted surfaces to remove foreignmatter.

Occasional hand waxing or mildpolishing should be done to removeresidue from the paint finish. Seeyour dealer for approved cleaningproducts.

Notice: Machine compounding oraggressive polishing on abasecoat/clearcoat paint finishmay damage it. Use onlynon-abrasive waxes and polishesthat are made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish on thevehicle.

To keep the paint finish lookingnew, keep the vehicle garaged orcovered whenever possible.

Protecting Exterior Bright MetalParts

Regularly clean bright metal partswith water or chrome polish onchrome or stainless steel trim,if necessary.

For aluminum, never use auto orchrome polish, steam, or causticsoap to clean. A coating of wax,rubbed to high polish, isrecommended for all bright metalparts.

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses and Emblems

Use only lukewarm or cold water, asoft cloth, and a car washing soapto clean exterior lamps and lenses.Follow instructions under "Washingthe Vehicle" later in this section.

Windshield and Wiper Blades

Clean the outside of the windshieldwith glass cleaner.

Clean rubber blades using lint-freecloth or paper towel soaked withwindshield washer fluid or a milddetergent. Wash the windshieldthoroughly when cleaning theblades. Bugs, road grime, sap, anda buildup of vehicle wash/waxtreatments may cause wiperstreaking.

Replace the wiper blades if they areworn or damaged. Damage can becaused by extreme dustyconditions, sand, salt, heat, sun,snow and ice.

Weatherstrips

Apply silicone grease onweatherstrips to make them lastlonger, seal better, and not stick orsqueak. See Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 11‑13.


10-98 Vehicle Care

Tires

Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner toclean the tires.

Notice: Using petroleum-basedtire dressing products on thevehicle may damage the paintfinish and/or tires. When applyinga tire dressing, always wipe offany overspray from all paintedsurfaces on the vehicle.

Wheels and Trim—Aluminumor Chrome

Use a soft, clean cloth with mildsoap and water to clean the wheels.After rinsing thoroughly with cleanwater, dry with a soft, clean towel.A wax may then be applied.

Keep the wheels clean using a soft,clean cloth with mild soap andwater. Rinse with clean water. Afterrinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft,clean towel. A wax may then beapplied.

Notice: Chrome wheels and otherchrome trim may be damaged ifthe vehicle is not washed afterdriving on roads that have beensprayed with magnesium,calcium, or sodium chloride.These chlorides are used onroads for conditions such as iceand dust. Always wash thechrome with soap and water afterexposure.

Notice: To avoid surface damage,do not use strong soaps,chemicals, abrasive polishes,cleaners, brushes, or cleanersthat contain acid on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels. Use onlyapproved cleaners. Also, neverdrive a vehicle with aluminum orchrome-plated wheels through anautomatic car wash that usessilicone carbide tire cleaningbrushes. Damage could occurand the repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Steering, Suspension, andChassis Components

Visually inspect front and rearsuspension and steering system fordamaged, loose, or missing parts orsigns of wear. Inspect the powersteering for proper hook-up, binding,leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Visuallycheck constant velocity joints,rubber boots, and axle seals forleaks.

Body Component Lubrication

Lubricate all key lock cylinders,hood hinges, liftgate hinges, andsteel fuel door hinge unless thecomponents are plastic. Applyingsilicone grease on weatherstripswith a clean cloth will make themlast longer, seal better, and not stickor squeak.


Vehicle Care 10-99

Underbody Maintenance

Use plain water to flush dirt anddebris from the vehicle's underbody.Your dealer or an underbody carwashing system can do this. If notremoved, rust and corrosion candevelop.

Sheet Metal Damage

If the vehicle is damaged andrequires sheet metal repair orreplacement, make sure the bodyrepair shop applies anti-corrosionmaterial to parts repaired orreplaced to restore corrosionprotection.

Original manufacturer replacementparts will provide the corrosionprotection while maintaining thevehicle warranty.

Finish Damage

Quickly repair minor chips andscratches with touch-up materialsavailable from your dealer to avoidcorrosion. Larger areas of finishdamage can be corrected in yourdealer's body and paint shop.

Chemical Paint Spotting

Airborne pollutants can fall uponand attack painted vehicle surfacescausing blotchy, ring-shapeddiscolorations, and small, irregulardark spots etched into the paintsurface.

Interior CareTo prevent dirt particle abrasions,regularly clean the vehicle's interior.Immediately remove any soils. Notethat newspapers or dark garmentsthat can transfer color to homefurnishings can also permanentlytransfer color to the vehicle'sinterior.

Use a soft bristle brush to removedust from knobs and crevices on theinstrument cluster. Using a mildsoap solution, immediately removehand lotions, sunscreen, and insectrepellant from all interior surfaces orpermanent damage may result.

Your dealer may have products forcleaning the interior. Use cleanersspecifically designed for thesurfaces being cleaned to preventpermanent damage. To preventoverspray, apply all cleaners directlyto the cleaning cloth. Cleanersshould be removed quickly. Neverallow cleaners to remain on thesurface being cleaned for extendedperiods of time.

Cleaners may contain solvents thatcan become concentrated in theinterior. Before using cleaners, readand adhere to all safety instructionson the label. While cleaning theinterior, maintain adequateventilation by opening the doors andwindows.


10-100 Vehicle Care

To prevent damage, do not cleanthe interior using the followingcleaners or techniques:. Never use a razor or any other

sharp object to remove a soilfrom any interior surface.

. Never use a brush with stiffbristles.

. Never rub any surfaceaggressively or with excessivepressure.

. Do not use laundry detergents ordishwashing soaps withdegreasers. For liquid cleaners,use approximately 20 drops per3.78L (1 gal) of water.A concentrated soap solution willleave a residue that createsstreaks and attracts dirt. Do notuse solutions that contain strongor caustic soap.

. Do not heavily saturate theupholstery when cleaning.

. Do not use solvents or cleanerscontaining solvents.

Interior Glass

To clean, use a terry cloth fabricdampened with water. Wipe dropletsleft behind with a clean dry cloth.Commercial glass cleaners may beused, if necessary, after cleaningthe interior glass with plain water.

Notice: To prevent scratching,never use abrasive cleaners onautomotive glass. Abrasivecleaners or aggressive cleaningmay damage the rear windowdefogger.

Fabric/Carpet

Start by vacuuming the surfaceusing a soft brush attachment. If arotating brush attachment is beingused during vacuuming, only use iton the floor carpet. Before cleaning,gently remove as much of the soilas possible using one of thefollowing techniques:. Gently blot liquids with a paper

towel. Continue blotting until nomore soil can be removed.

. For solid soils, remove as muchas possible prior to vacuuming.

To clean:

1. Saturate a clean lint-freecolorfast cloth with water or clubsoda. Microfiber cloth isrecommended to prevent linttransfer to the fabric or carpet.

2. Remove excess moisture bygently wringing until water doesnot drip from the cleaning cloth.

3. Start on the outside edge of thesoil and gently rub toward thecenter. Rotate the cleaning clothto a clean area frequently toprevent forcing the soil in to thefabric.

4. Continue gently rubbing thesoiled area until there is nolonger any color transfer fromthe soil to the cleaning cloth.

5. If the soil is not completelyremoved, use a mild soapsolution followed only by clubsoda or plain water.


Vehicle Care 10-101

If the soil is not completelyremoved, it may be necessary touse a commercial upholsterycleaner or spot lifter. Test a smallhidden area for colorfastness beforeusing a commercial upholsterycleaner or spot lifter. If ringformation occurs, clean the entirefabric or carpet.

Following the cleaning process, apaper towel can be used to blotexcess moisture.

TEHAMA™ Leather

The leather surface on the seat wasnot designed to be aggressivelycleaned using any commercialproduct. Use a well wrung clothdampened with water to removedust. Do not use a wet cloth orsaturated the leather surface withwater. Allow the leather to dry

naturally. If a soil occurs that cannotbe completely removed, allow it tobecome part of the natural markingsof the leather. The leather isdesigned to have a naturalappearance and develop a morevintage appearance with use.

Do not use heat to dry. Never usesteam to clean leather. Never usespot lifters or spot removers onleather. It is very important not touse any commercial leathercleaners and coatings that are soldto preserve and protect leather. Notonly are those products notnecessary, they will permanentlyand adversely change theappearance and feel of the leather.Never use silicone or wax-basedproducts, or those containingorganic solvents to clean theinterior. Never use shoe polish onleather.

Instrument Panel, Leather,Vinyl, and Other PlasticSurfaces

Use a soft microfiber clothdampened with water to removedust and loose dirt. For a morethorough cleaning, use a softmicrofiber cloth dampened with amild soap solution.

Notice: Soaking or saturatingleather, especially perforatedleather, as well as other interiorsurfaces, may cause permanentdamage. Wipe excess moisturefrom these surfaces aftercleaning and allow them to drynaturally. Never use heat, steam,spot lifters or spot removers. Donot use cleaners that containsilicone or wax-based products.Cleaners containing thesesolvents can permanently changethe appearance and feel of leatheror soft trim and are notrecommended.


10-102 Vehicle Care

Do not use cleaners that increasegloss, especially on the instrumentpanel. Reflected glare can decreasevisibility through the windshieldunder certain conditions.

Notice: Use of air fresheners maycause permanent damage toplastics and painted surfaces.If an air freshener comes incontact with any plastic orpainted surface in the vehicle,blot immediately and clean with asoft cloth dampened with a mildsoap solution. Damage caused byair fresheners would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Speaker Covers

Vacuum around a speaker covergently, so that the speaker will notbe damaged. Clean spots with justwater and mild soap.

Wood Panels

Use a clean cloth moistened inwarm, soapy water (use mild dishwashing soap). Dry the woodimmediately with a clean cloth.

Keep belts clean and dry.

{ WARNING

Do not bleach or dye safety belts.It may severely weaken them. Ina crash, they might not be able toprovide adequate protection.Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.

Floor Mats

{ WARNING

If a floor mat is the wrong size oris not properly installed, it caninterfere with the pedals.Interference with the pedals cancause unintended accelerationand/or increased stoppingdistance which can cause a crashand injury. Make sure the floormat does not interfere with thepedals.

Use the following guidelines forproper floor mat usage.. The original equipment floor

mats were designed for thevehicle. If the floor mats needreplacing, it is recommendedthat GM certified floor mats bepurchased. Non-GM floor matsmay not fit properly and mayinterfere with the pedals. Alwayscheck that the floor mats do notinterfere with the pedals.

. Use the floor mat with thecorrect side up. Do not turnit over.

. Do not place anything on top ofthe driver side floor mat.

. Use only a single floor mat onthe driver side.

. Do not place one floor mat ontop of another.


Service and Maintenance 11-1

Service andMaintenance

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Cadillac Premium CareMaintenanceCadillac Premium CareMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3

Maintenance ScheduleMaintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-3

Special Application ServicesSpecial ApplicationServices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9

Additional Maintenanceand CareAdditional Maintenanceand Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9

Recommended Fluids,Lubricants, and PartsRecommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13

Maintenance ReplacementParts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15

Maintenance RecordsMaintenance Records . . . . . . 11-16

General InformationYour vehicle is an importantinvestment. This section describesthe required maintenance for thevehicle. Follow this schedule to helpprotect against major repairexpenses resulting from neglect orinadequate maintenance. It mayalso help to maintain the value ofthe vehicle if it is sold. It is theresponsibility of the owner to haveall required maintenance performed.

Your dealer has trained technicianswho can perform requiredmaintenance using genuinereplacement parts. They haveup‐to‐date tools and equipmentfor fast and accurate diagnostics.Many dealers have extendedevening and Saturday hours,courtesy transportation, and onlinescheduling to assist with serviceneeds.

Your dealer recognizes theimportance of providingcompetitively priced maintenanceand repair services. With trained


11-2 Service and Maintenance

technicians, the dealer is the placefor routine maintenance such as oilchanges and tire rotations andadditional maintenance items liketires, brakes, batteries, and wiperblades.

Notice: Damage caused byimproper maintenance can lead tocostly repairs and may not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Maintenance intervals, checks,inspections, recommended fluids,and lubricants are important tokeep the vehicle in good workingcondition.

The Tire Rotation and RequiredServices are the responsibility of thevehicle owner. It is recommended tohave your dealer perform theseservices every 12 000 km/7,500 mi.Proper vehicle maintenance helps tokeep the vehicle in good workingcondition, improves fuel economy,and reduces vehicle emissions.

Because of the way people usevehicles, maintenance needs vary.

There may need to be morefrequent checks and services. TheAdditional Required Services ‐Normal are for vehicles that:. Carry passengers and cargo

within recommended limits onthe Tire and Loading Informationlabel. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9‑16.

. Are driven on reasonable roadsurfaces within legal drivinglimits.

. Use the recommended fuel. SeeRecommended Fuel onpage 9‑52.

Refer to the information in theMaintenance Schedule AdditionalRequired Services ‐ Normal chart.

The Additional RequiredServices ‐ Severe are for vehiclesthat are:. Mainly driven in heavy city traffic

in hot weather.. Mainly driven in hilly or

mountainous terrain.

. Frequently towing a trailer.

. Used for high speed orcompetitive driving.

. Used for taxi, police, or deliveryservice.

Refer to the information in theMaintenance Schedule AdditionalRequired Services ‐ Severe chart.

{ WARNING

Performing maintenance work canbe dangerous and can causeserious injury. Performmaintenance work only if therequired information, proper tools,and equipment are available.If they are not, see your dealer tohave a trained technician do thework. See Doing Your OwnService Work on page 10‑4.



Cadillac PremiumCare MaintenanceYour vehicle comes with theCadillac Premium CareMaintenance. It is a maintenanceprogram that covers selectmaintenance services during thefirst 4 years or 80 000 km(50,000 mi), whichever comes first.

Cadillac Premium CareMaintenance covers routinemaintenance services, whenscheduled in accordance with theowner manual, including:. Oil changes based on the

vehicle's oil life monitor system.. Tire rotation every 12 000 km

(7,500 mi).. Engine air cleaner filter

replacement.. Passenger compartment air filter

replacement.. Multi‐point vehicle inspection

(MPVI) performed by a qualifiedtechnician.

Cadillac requires that all CadillacPremium Care Maintenanceservices be performed by a Cadillacauthorized service dealer.

MaintenanceScheduleOwner Checks and Services

At Each Fuel Stop. Check the engine oil level. See

Engine Oil on page 10‑7.

Once a Month. Check the tire inflation

pressures. See Tire Pressure onpage 10‑52.

. Inspect the tires for wear. SeeTire Inspection on page 10‑57.

. Check the windshield washerfluid level. See Washer Fluid onpage 10‑23.



Engine Oil Change

When the CHANGE ENGINE OILSOON message displays, have theengine oil and filter changed withinthe next 1 000 km/600 mi. If drivenunder the best conditions, theengine oil life system might notindicate the need for vehicle servicefor more than a year. The engine oiland filter must be changed at leastonce a year and the oil life systemmust be reset. Your trained dealertechnician can perform this work.If the engine oil life system is resetaccidentally, service the vehiclewithin 5 000 km/3,000 mi since thelast service. Reset the oil lifesystem when the oil is changed.See Engine Oil Life System onpage 10‑9.

Tire Rotation and RequiredServices Every 12 000 km/7,500 mi

Rotate the tires, if recommended forthe vehicle, and perform thefollowing services. See TireRotation on page 10‑58.. Check engine oil level and oil

life percentage. If needed,change engine oil and filter, andreset oil life system. See EngineOil on page 10‑7 and Engine OilLife System on page 10‑9.

. Check engine coolant level. SeeEngine Coolant on page 10‑16.

. Check windshield washer fluidlevel. See Washer Fluid onpage 10‑23.

. Visually inspect windshield wiperblades for wear, cracking,or contamination. See ExteriorCare on page 10‑96. Replaceworn or damaged wiper blades.See Wiper Blade Replacementon page 10‑32.

. Check tire inflation pressures.See Tire Pressure onpage 10‑52.

. Inspect tire wear. See TireInspection on page 10‑57.

. Visually check for fluid leaks.

. Inspect engine air cleaner filter.See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 10‑13.

. Inspect brake system.



. Visually inspect steering,suspension, and chassiscomponents for damaged, loose,or missing parts or signs ofwear. See Exterior Care onpage 10‑96.

. Check restraint systemcomponents. See Safety SystemCheck on page 3‑24.

. Visually inspect fuel system fordamage or leaks.

. Visually inspect exhaust systemand nearby heat shields forloose or damaged parts.

. Lubricate body components. SeeExterior Care on page 10‑96.

. Check starter switch. See StarterSwitch Check on page 10‑30.

. Check automatic transmissionshift lock control function. SeeAutomatic Transmission ShiftLock Control Function Check onpage 10‑30.

. Check ignition transmission lock.See Ignition Transmission LockCheck on page 10‑31.

. Check parking brake andautomatic transmission parkmechanism. See Park Brake andP (Park) Mechanism Check onpage 10‑31.

. Check accelerator pedal fordamage, high effort, or binding.Replace if needed.

. Visually inspect gas strut forsigns of wear, cracks, or otherdamage. Check the hold openability of the strut. See yourdealer if service is required.

. Check tire sealant expirationdate, if equipped. See TireSealant and Compressor Kit onpage 10‑67.

. Inspect sunroof track and seal,if equipped. See Sunroof onpage 2‑21.

. Check hybrid low pressurecoolant level, if equipped.





Footnotes — MaintenanceSchedule Additional RequiredServices — Normal

a) Check all fuel and vapor linesand hoses for proper hook‐up,routing, and condition. Check thatthe purge valve, if the vehicle hasone, works properly. Replace asneeded.

b) Or every four years, whichevercomes first.

c) Do not directly power wash thetransfer case output seals. Highpressure water can overcome theseals and contaminate the transfercase fluid. Contaminated fluid willdecrease the life of the transfercase and should be replaced.

d) Or every five years, whichevercomes first. See Cooling System onpage 10‑15.

e) Or every 10 years, whichevercomes first. Inspect for fraying,excessive cracking, or damage;replace, if needed.





Footnotes — MaintenanceSchedule Additional RequiredServices — Severe

a) Check all fuel and vapor linesand hoses for proper hook‐up,routing, and condition. Check thatthe purge valve, if the vehicle hasone, works properly. Replace asneeded.

b) Or every four years, whichevercomes first.

c) Do not directly power wash thetransfer case output seals. Highpressure water can overcome theseals and contaminate the transfercase fluid. Contaminated fluid willdecrease the life of the transfercase and should be replaced.

d) Or every five years, whichevercomes first. See Cooling System onpage 10‑15.

e) Or every 10 years, whichevercomes first. Inspect for fraying,excessive cracking, or damage;replace, if needed.

Special ApplicationServices. Severe Commercial Use

Vehicles Only: Lubricate chassiscomponents every 5 000 km/3,000 mi.

. Have underbody flushing serviceperformed once a year.

AdditionalMaintenance and CareYour vehicle is an importantinvestment and caring for it properlymay help to avoid future costlyrepairs. To maintain vehicleperformance, additionalmaintenance services may berequired. It is recommendedthat your dealer perform theseservices — their trained dealertechnicians know your vehicle best.Your dealer can also perform athorough assessment with amulti‐point inspection to recommendwhen your vehicle may needattention. The following list isintended to explain the services andconditions to look for that mayindicate services are required.



Battery

The battery supplies power to startthe engine and operate anyadditional electrical accessories.. To avoid break‐down or failure to

start the vehicle, maintain abattery with full cranking power.

. Trained dealer technicians havethe diagnostic equipment to testthe battery and ensure that theconnections and cables arecorrosion‐free.

Belts. Belts may need replacing if they

squeak or show signs ofcracking or splitting.

. Trained dealer technicians caninspect the belts andrecommend replacement whennecessary.

Brakes

Brakes stop the vehicle and arecrucial to safe driving.. Signs of brake wear may include

chirping, grinding, or squealingnoises, or difficulty stopping.

. Trained dealer technicians haveaccess to tools and equipmentto inspect the brakes andrecommend quality partsengineered for the vehicle.

Fluids

Proper fluid levels and approvedfluids protect the vehicle’s systemsand components. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑13 for GMapproved fluids.. Engine oil and windshield

washer fluid levels should bechecked at every fuel fill.

. Instrument cluster lights maycome on to indicate that fluidsmay be low and need to befilled.

Hoses

Hoses transport fluids and shouldbe regularly inspected to ensurethat there are no cracks or leaks.With a multi‐point inspection, yourdealer can inspect the hoses andadvise if replacement is needed.

Lamps

Properly working headlamps,taillamps, and brake lamps areimportant to see and be seen onthe road.. Signs that the headlamps need

attention include dimming, failureto light, cracking, or damage.The brake lamps need to bechecked periodically to ensurethat they light when braking.

. With a multi‐point inspection,your dealer can check the lampsand note any concerns.



Shocks and Struts

Shocks and struts help aid in controlfor a smoother ride.. Signs of wear may include

steering wheel vibration, bounce/sway while braking, longerstopping distance, or uneventire wear.

. As part of the multi‐pointinspection, trained dealertechnicians can visually inspectthe shocks and struts for signsof leaking, blown seals,or damage, and can advisewhen service is needed.

Tires

Tires need to be properly inflated,rotated, and balanced. Maintainingthe tires can save money, fuel, andcan reduce the risk of tire failure.. Signs that the tires need to be

replaced include three or morevisible treadwear indicators; cordor fabric showing through therubber; cracks or cuts in thetread or sidewall; or a bulge orsplit in the tire.

. Trained dealer technicians caninspect and recommend the righttires. Your dealer can alsoprovide tire/wheel balancingservices to ensure smoothvehicle operation at all speeds.Your dealer sells and servicesname brand tires.

Vehicle Care

To help keep the vehicle looking likenew, vehicle care products areavailable from your dealer. Forinformation on how to clean andprotect the vehicle’s interior andexterior, see Interior Care onpage 10‑99 and Exterior Care onpage 10‑96.

Wheel Alignment

Wheel alignment is critical forensuring that the tires deliveroptimal wear and performance.. Signs that the alignment may

need to be adjusted includepulling, improper vehiclehandling, or unusual tire wear.

. Your dealer has the requiredequipment to ensure properwheel alignment.



Windshield

For safety, appearance, and thebest viewing, keep the windshieldclean and clear.. Signs of damage include

scratches, cracks, and chips.. Trained dealer technicians can

inspect the windshield andrecommend proper replacementif needed.

Wiper Blades

Wiper blades need to be cleanedand kept in good condition toprovide a clear view.. Signs of wear include streaking,

skipping across the windshield,and worn or split rubber.

. Trained dealer technicians cancheck the wiper blades andreplace them when needed.



Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts

Recommended Fluids and LubricantsFluids and lubricants identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Engine OilUse only engine oil licensed to the dexos1 specfication, or equivalent, ofthe proper SAE viscosity grade. ACDelco dexos1 Synthetic Blend isrecommended. See Engine Oil on page 10‑7.

Engine Coolant50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL Coolant.See Engine Coolant on page 10‑16.

Hydraulic Brake System DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 12377967, inCanada 89021320).

Windshield WasherAutomotive windshield washer fluid that meets regional freeze protectionrequirements.

Power Steering System GM Power Steering Fluid (GM Part No. 89021184, in Canada 89021186).

Automatic Transmission DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.

Key Lock CylindersMulti-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).

Chassis LubricationChassis Lubricant (GM Part No. 12377985, in Canada 88901242) orlubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.



Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Front and Rear Axle SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. 89021677, inCanada 89021678).

Transfer Case DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.

Hood HingesMulti-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).

Body Door Hinge Pins, TailgateHinge and Linkage, and Fuel Door

Hinge

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).

Outer Tailgate Handle Pivot PointsMulti-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).

Weatherstrip ConditioningWeatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. 3634770, in Canada 10953518) orDielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. 12345579, in Canada 992887).

Weatherstrip SqueaksSynthetic Grease with Teflon, Superlube (GM Part No. 12371287, inCanada 10953437).



Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified here by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.

Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 15908916 A3086C

Oil Filter 89017524 PF48

Spark Plugs 12621258 41-110

Wiper Blades

Front – 55.0 cm (21.6 in) 25877402 —

Rear – 30.0 cm (11.8 in) 25820122 —



Maintenance RecordsAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and thetype of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.

DateOdometerReading

Serviced By Maintenance Stamp Services Performed



DateOdometerReading




DateOdometerReading



Technical Data 12-1

Technical Data

Vehicle IdentificationVehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Service Parts IdentificationLabel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Vehicle DataCapacities andSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . 12-3

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN)

This legal identifier is in the frontcorner of the instrument panel, onthe left side of the vehicle. It can beseen through the windshield fromoutside. The VIN also appears onthe Vehicle Certification and ServiceParts labels and certificates of titleand registration.

Engine Identification

The eighth character in the VIN isthe engine code. This codeidentifies the vehicle's engine,specifications, and replacementparts. See “Engine Specifications”under Capacities and Specificationson page 12‑2 for the vehicle'sengine code.

Service PartsIdentification LabelThis label, on the inside of the glovebox, has the following information:. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN).. Model designation.. Paint information.. Production options and special

equipment.

Do not remove this label from thevehicle.


12-2 Technical Data

Vehicle Data

Capacities and SpecificationsThe following approximate capacities are given in metric and English conversions. See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑13 for more information.

ApplicationCapacities

Metric English

Air Conditioning RefrigerantFor the air conditioning system refrigerant chargeamount, see the refrigerant label located under the

hood. See your dealer for more information.

Cooling System 16.7 L 17.6 qt

Engine Oil with Filter 5.7 L† 6.0 qt†

Fuel Tank

Regular 98.4 L 26.0 gal

Extended 119.2 L 31.5 gal

Transmission Fluid (Pan Removal and Replacement) 5.7 L 6.0 qt

Transfer Case Fluid 1.4 L 1.5 qt

Wheel Nut Torque 190Y 140 lb ft

All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in thismanual. Recheck fluid after filling.†Oil filter should be changed at every oil change.


Technical Data 12-3

Engine Specifications

Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap

6.2LV8 F Automatic 1.02 mm (0.040 in)

Engine Drive Belt Routing



12-4 Technical Data

2 NOTES


Customer Information 13-1

CustomerInformation

Customer InformationCustomer SatisfactionProcedure (U.S. andCanada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

Customer SatisfactionProcedure (Mexico) . . . . . . . . 13-3

Customer Assistance Offices(U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . . 13-4

Customer Assistance Offices(Mexico) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) Users (U.S.and Canada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6

Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . 13-6GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram (U.S. andCanada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7

Roadside Service (U.S. andCanada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7

Roadside Service(Mexico) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9

Scheduling ServiceAppointments (U.S. andCanada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13

Courtesy TransportationProgram (U.S. andCanada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13

Collision Damage Repair(U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . 13-14

Service PublicationsOrdering Information . . . . . . 13-17

Reporting Safety DefectsReporting Safety Defects tothe United StatesGovernment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18

Reporting Safety Defects tothe CanadianGovernment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18

Reporting Safety Defects toGeneral Motors . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19

Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacyVehicle Data Recording andPrivacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19

Event Data Recorders . . . . . . 13-19OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20Navigation System . . . . . . . . . 13-20Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-20

Radio FrequencyStatement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-21

Customer Information

Customer SatisfactionProcedure (U.S. andCanada)Your satisfaction and goodwill areimportant to your dealer and toCadillac. Normally, any concernswith the sales transaction or theoperation of the vehicle will beresolved by your dealer's sales orservice departments. Sometimes,however, despite the best intentionsof all concerned, misunderstandingscan occur. If your concern has notbeen resolved to your satisfaction,the following steps should be taken:

STEP ONE: Discuss your concernwith a member of dealershipmanagement. Normally, concernscan be quickly resolved at that level.If the matter has already beenreviewed with the sales, service orparts manager, contact the owner ofyour dealership or the generalmanager.


13-2 Customer Information

STEP TWO: If after contacting amember of dealership management,it appears your concern cannot beresolved by your dealership withoutfurther help, in the U.S., call theCadillac Customer AssistanceCenter at 1-800-458-8006. InCanada, call the Canadian CadillacCustomer Care Centre at1-888-446-2000.

We encourage you to call thetoll-free number in order to give yourinquiry prompt attention. Have thefollowing information available togive the Customer Assistancerepresentative:. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN). This is availablefrom the vehicle registration ortitle, or the plate at the top left ofthe instrument panel and visiblethrough the windshield.

. Dealership name and location.

. Vehicle delivery date andpresent mileage.

When contacting Cadillac,remember that your concern willlikely be resolved at a dealer'sfacility. That is why we suggestfollowing Step One first.

STEP THREE — U.S. Owners:Both General Motors and yourdealer are committed to makingsure you are completely satisfiedwith the new vehicle. However,if you continue to remain unsatisfiedafter following the procedureoutlined in Steps One and Two, youcan file with the Better BusinessBureau (BBB) Auto Line® Programto enforce your rights.

The BBB Auto Line Program is anout-of-court program administeredby the Council of Better BusinessBureaus to settle automotivedisputes regarding vehicle repairs orthe interpretation of the New VehicleLimited Warranty. Although you maybe required to resort to this informaldispute resolution program prior tofiling a court action, use of theprogram is free of charge and yourcase will generally be heard within

40 days. If you do not agree with thedecision given in your case, youmay reject it and proceed with anyother venue for relief availableto you.

You may contact the BBB AutoLine Program using the toll-freetelephone number or write them atthe following address:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better BusinessBureaus, Inc.4200 Wilson BoulevardSuite 800Arlington, VA 22203-1838

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100www.dr.bbb.org/goauto

This program is available in all50 states and the District ofColumbia. Eligibility is limited byvehicle age, mileage, and otherfactors. General Motors reservesthe right to change eligibilitylimitations and/or discontinue itsparticipation in this program.



STEP THREE — CanadianOwners: In the event that you donot feel your concerns have beenaddressed after following theprocedure outlined in Steps Oneand Two, General Motors of CanadaLimited wants you to be aware of itsparticipation in a no-chargemediation/arbitration program.General Motors of Canada Limitedhas committed to binding arbitrationof owner disputes involvingfactory-related vehicle serviceclaims. The program provides forthe review of the facts involved byan impartial third party arbiter, andmay include an informal hearingbefore the arbiter. The program isdesigned so that the entire disputesettlement process, from the timeyou file your complaint to the finaldecision, should be completed inapproximately 70 days. We believe

our impartial program offersadvantages over courts in mostjurisdictions because it is informal,quick, and free of charge.

For further information concerningeligibility in the Canadian MotorVehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or callthe General Motors Customer CareCentre, 1-800-263-3777 (English),1-800-263-7854 (French),or write to:

Mediation/Arbitration Programc/o Customer Care CentreGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedMail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

The inquiry should be accompaniedby the Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN).

Customer SatisfactionProcedure (Mexico)

Did you get the Warranty ExtensionPlan? This plan is recommended byGeneral Motors to supplement thewarranty included with the newvehicle purchase.

See your dealer for details.

Customer AssistanceProcedure

Owner satisfaction and goodwill arevery important to your dealer andGeneral Motors.

Normally, any problem with thetransaction, sale, or usage of thevehicle must be handled by yourdealer sales or service departments.



However, we recognize that despitethe good intentions of all partiesinvolved, sometimes amisunderstanding may occur.

If you have a problem that has notbeen satisfactorily handled throughthe normal means, we suggest thefollowing steps:

STEP ONE

Explain your case to your dealerservice agent, service manager,dealer sales agent, or salesmanager, depending on your case.

Make sure that they have allnecessary information. They areinterested in your continualsatisfaction.

STEP TWO

If you are not satisfied, pleasecontact the general manager or yourdealership owner to ask for theirhelp. If they are not able to resolveyour case, ask them to contact theright people at General Motors forsupport, if needed.

STEP THREE

If your case is not resolved in areasonable amount of time by yourdealer, please call the GeneralMotors Customer AssistanceCenter (CAC) and provide thefollowing information:. Name. Address. Phone number. Model year. Brand. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN). Mileage. Delivery date. Description of the problem. Dealership name. Dealership address

See Customer Assistance Offices(U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑4 orCustomer Assistance Offices(Mexico) on page 13‑5.

Customer AssistanceOffices (U.S. and Canada)Cadillac encourages customers tocall the toll-free number forassistance. However, if a customerwishes to write or e-mail Cadillac,the letter should be addressed to:

United States

Cadillac Customer AssistanceCenterCadillac Motor Car DivisionP.O. Box 33169Detroit, MI 48232-5169www.Cadillac.com

1-800-458-80061-800-833-2622 (For TextTelephone devices (TTYs))Roadside Service: 1-800-882-1112

From Puerto Rico:

1-800-496-9992 (English)1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)

From U.S. Virgin Islands:

1-800-496-9994



Canada

General Motors of Canada LimitedCanadian Cadillac Customer CareCentre, Mail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7www.gm.ca

1-888-446-20001-800-263-3830 (For TextTelephone devices (TTYs))Roadside Service: 1-800-882-1112

Overseas

Please contact the local GeneralMotors Business Unit.

Mexico, Central America andCaribbean Islands/Countries(Except Puerto Rico and U.S.Virgin Islands)

General Motors de Mexico, S. deR.L. de C.V.Customer Assistance CenterAv. Ejercito Nacional #843Col. GranadaC.P. 11520, Mexico, D.F.

01-800-466-0805Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0805

Customer AssistanceOffices (Mexico)To contact the Customer AssistanceCenter (CAC), use the phonenumbers listed in this section.Customer assistance is availableMonday through Friday, 08:00 to20:00 hours, and Saturdays from08:00 to 15:00 hours.

All e-mail inquiries to the CustomerAssistance Center (CAC) should besent to: [email protected].

Mexico

From Mexico City

5329-0816

From Other Mexico Locations

01-800-466-0816

United States and Canada

1-866-466-8195

Costa Rica

00-800-052-1005

Guatemala

1-800-999-5252

Panama

00-800-052-0001

Dominican Republic

1-888-751-5301

El Salvador

800-6273

Honduras

800-0122-6101



Customer Assistance forText Telephone (TTY)Users (U.S. and Canada)To assist customers who are deaf,hard of hearing, or speech-impairedand who use Text Telephones(TTYs), Cadillac has TTY equipmentavailable at its Customer AssistanceCenter. Any TTY user cancommunicate with Cadillac bydialing: 1-800-833-2622. TTY usersin Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.

Online Owner Center

Manage your vehicle (U.S.) atcadillac.com. Click on“Owners,” then “Manage myCadillac/Owners Login.”

Information and servicescustomized for your specificvehicle — all in one convenientplace.. Digital owner manual, warranty

information, and more.. Storage for online service and

maintenance records.. Cadillac dealer locator for

service nationwide.. Exclusive privileges and offers.. Recall notices for your specific

vehicle.. OnStar and GM Cardmember

Services Earnings summaries.

Other Helpful Links:

Cadillac — www.cadillac.com

Cadillac Merchandise —www.cadillaccollection.com

Help Center — www.cadillac.com/pages/mds/helpcenter/faq.do. FAQ (Frequently Asked

Questions). Contact Us

Cadillac Owner Centre(Canada) cadillacowner.ca

Take a trip to the Cadillac OwnerCentre:. Chat live with online help

representatives.. Use the Vehicle Tools section.. Access third party enthusiast

sites and social media networks.. Locate owner resources such as

lease-end, financing, andwarranty information.



. Retrieve your favorite articles,quizzes, tips and multimediagalleries organized into theFeatures and Auto CareSections.

. Download the owner manual foryour vehicle, quickly and easily.

. Find the Cadillac-recommendedmaintenance services for yourvehicle.

GM MobilityReimbursement Program(U.S. and Canada)

This program is available toqualified applicants for costreimbursement of eligibleaftermarket adaptive equipment

required for the vehicle, such ashand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift for the vehicle.

For more information on the limitedoffer, visit www.gmmobility.com orcall the GM Mobility AssistanceCenter at 1-800-323-9935. TextTelephone (TTY) users, call1-800-833-9935.

General Motors of Canada also hasa Mobility Program. Call1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) fordetails. TTY users call1-800-263-3830.

Roadside Service(U.S. and Canada)U.S.: 1-800-224-1400

Canada: 1-800-882-1112.

Text Telephone (TTY) Users(U.S. Only): 1-888-889-2438.

Service is available 24 hours a day,365 days a year.

Calling for Service

When calling Roadside Service,have the following informationready:. Your name, home address, and

home telephone number.. Telephone number of your

location.. Location of the vehicle.. Model, year, color, and license

plate number of the vehicle.. Odometer reading, Vehicle

Identification Number (VIN), anddelivery date of the vehicle.

. Description of the problem.

Coverage

Services are provided up to 5 years/160 000 km (100,000mi), whichevercomes first.

In the U.S., anyone driving thevehicle is covered. In Canada, aperson driving the vehicle withoutpermission from the owner is notcovered.



Roadside Service is not a part of theNew Vehicle Limited Warranty.Cadillac and General Motors ofCanada Limited reserve the right tomake any changes or discontinuethe Roadside Service program atany time without notification.

Cadillac and General Motors ofCanada Limited reserve the right tolimit services or payment to anowner or driver if they decide theclaims are made too often, or thesame type of claim is made manytimes.

Cadillac Owner Privileges™. Emergency Fuel Delivery:

Delivery of enough fuel for thevehicle to get to the nearestservice station.

. Lock-Out Service: Service tounlock the vehicle if you arelocked out. A remote unlock maybe available if you have OnStar.For security reasons, the drivermust present identificationbefore this service is given.

. Emergency Tow from a PublicRoad or Highway: Tow to thenearest Cadillac dealer forwarranty service, or if the vehiclewas in a crash and cannot bedriven. Assistance is also givenwhen the vehicle is stuck in thesand, mud, or snow.

. Flat Tire Change: Service tochange a flat tire with spare tire.The spare tire, if equipped, mustbe in good condition andproperly inflated. It is yourresponsibility for the repair orreplacement of the tire if it is notcovered by the warranty.

. Battery Jump Start: Service tojump start a dead battery.

. Trip Routing Service: Detailedmaps of North America areprovided when requested eitherwith the most direct route or themost scenic route. Additionaltravel information is alsoavailable. Allow three weeks fordelivery.

. Trip Interruption Benefits andService: If your trip isinterrupted due to a warrantyfailure, incidental expensesmay be reimbursed during the5 years/160 000 km (100,000 mi)Powertrain warranty period.Items considered are hotel,meals, and rental car.

Cadillac Technician RoadsideService (U.S. Only)

Cadillac's exceptional RoadsideService is more than an auto club ortowing service. It provides everyCadillac owner in the United Stateswith the advantage of contacting aCadillac advisor and, whereavailable, a Cadillac trained dealertechnician who can provide on-siteservice.

A dealer technician will travel toyour location within a 30 mile radiusof a participating Cadillacdealership. If beyond this radius, wewill arrange to have your car towedto the nearest Cadillac dealership.



Each technician travels with aspecially equipped service vehiclecomplete with the necessaryCadillac parts and tools required tohandle most roadside repairs.

Services Not Included inRoadside Service. Impound towing caused by

violation of any laws.. Legal fines.. Mounting, dismounting,

or changing of snow tires,chains, or other traction devices.

. Towing or services for vehiclesdriven on a non-public road orhighway.

Services Specific toCanadian-Purchased Vehicles. Fuel delivery: Reimbursement

is approximately $5 Canadian.Diesel fuel delivery may berestricted. Propane and otherfuels are not provided throughthis service.

. Lock-Out Service: Vehicleregistration is required.

. Trip Routing Service: Limit ofsix requests per year.

. Trip Interruption Benefits andService: Pre-authorization,original detailed receipts, and acopy of the repair orders arerequired. Once authorization hasbeen received, the RoadsideService advisor will help youmake arrangements and explainhow to receive payment.

. Alternative Service: Ifassistance cannot be providedright away, the Roadside Serviceadvisor may give you permissionto get local emergency roadservice. You will receivepayment, up to $100, aftersending the original receipt toRoadside Service. Mechanicalfailures may be covered,however any cost for parts andlabor for repairs not covered bythe warranty are the ownerresponsibility.

Roadside Service(Mexico)As a new owner, your vehicle isautomatically enrolled in theRoadside Assistance program. Theservices are available at no costunder the terms and conditions ofthe program. The RoadsideAssistance program is not part of,or included, in the coverageprovided by the new vehicle limitedwarranty.

Roadside Assistance providesassistance to the driver andpassengers while driving the vehiclewithin your city of residence or onany passable road in Mexico, theUnited States, and Canada.Services are subject to thelimitations described in the followingpages. Program coverage varies bycountry.

Roadside Assistance is available24 hours a day, 365 days ofthe year.



This program expires two yearsfrom the date of the invoice for thevehicle, regardless of vehiclemileage and changes in vehicleownership.

For more information about therenewal of this program at the endof its term, contact the CadillacCustomer Assistance Centerat 01-800-466-0805.

Services Provided. Flat Tire Change: If unable to

change a flat tire, RoadsideAssistance will provide towingservice to the nearest authorizedCadillac dealership. It is theowner's responsibility for therepair or replacement of the tire.This service is limited to thetransfer of the vehicle to therepair facility.

. Emergency Fuel Delivery:Delivery of enough fuel for thevehicle to get to the nearestservice station.

. Lock-Out Service: Service tounlock the vehicle if you arelocked out.

. Battery Jump Start: Service tojump start a dead battery.

. *Emergency Messages:Transmission of urgent phonemessages.

. *Emergency Calls: Call foremergency services.

. *Dealership LocationAssistance: Informationregarding addresses andtelephone numbers for Cadillacdealers.

. Emergency Towing: Tow to thenearest dealer for warrantyservice if the vehicle cannot bedriven.

If the vehicle is involved in anaccident during the commissionof a crime, administrativeviolation, or breach of trafficregulations, Roadside

Assistance will not provideservice. When the vehicle is notaccessible to be towed, allmaneuvers required to access itwill be at the owner's expense.

If the vehicle is in another cityoutside of your residence,Roadside Assistance is limitedto moving the vehicle to thenearest dealer. If you would likethe vehicle moved to a differentdealer, you will be asked tocover the difference in cost atthe time of the move.

If the vehicle cannot be receivedby the nearest Cadillac dealerdue to scheduling conflicts, thevehicle will be taken to a safeplace where it will remain for upto 48 hours until it can be takento the dealer. If the storage costsexceed the amount authorized,the owner is responsible to paythe difference at the time ofservice. Contact RoadsideAssistance for more informationon authorized amounts.



. *Trip Interruption: This serviceis provided if you are preventedfrom further usage of yourvehicle while traveling and it isnot possible for the nearestCadillac dealership to repair thevehicle the same day, requiringthe vehicle to stay at thedealership for a night or more.If this happens, in addition to thepreviously listed services andprior to confirmation by thedealership, you are entitled tochoose one of the followingalternatives, within the limits ofexisting Roadside Assistanceprogram guidelines. If the costsexceed the amount authorizedfor these services, you must paythe difference at the time ofservice.

Roadside Assistance willcoordinate hotelaccommodations for all vehicletravelers for up to two nights.

A rental car will be provided forup to two days and the vehiclemust be returned to its originaldestination, excluding vehicleswith a carrying capacity greaterthan 3.5 tons.

Complimentary Transportation: Ifyou prefer to continue your tripto the intended destination orreturn to your place ofresidence, and the trip requiresmore than eight hours driving onthe road, transportation for thedriver and passengers by firstclass bus or coach commercialairline will be provided to alocation chosen by RoadsideAssistance, depending onavailability at the chosendestination. Restrictions applybased on vehicle specifications.

If you are on the road, taxiservice to the nearest busstation or airport will beprovided.

. *ComplimentaryTransportation for Vehicle PickUp: Transportation to pick upyour vehicle after repairs arecomplete. Once the dealer hasreported that the vehicle hasbeen repaired, RoadsideAssistance will provide bus orcommercial airline one-wayservice (subject to availability)for the person designated by youto collect your vehicle at thedealership's location if you or thedesignated person are not in thesame town or city as thedealership.

*These services are not provided forU.S. or Canada residents. Allservices provided in the U.S. andCanada are at the owner's expenseand will be reimbursed by RoadsideAssistance.



Services Not Included in RoadsideAssistance

Roadside Assistance does notcover or reimburse services for thefollowing:. Events caused by fraud or bad

faith by the driver.. Vehicle immobilization situations

due to a major force orunforeseen circumstances, suchas natural phenomena of anextraordinary nature,earthquakes, volcanic eruptions,and other cyclonic storms.

. Vehicle immobilization situationsarising from car accidentscaused by the driver of thevehicle or third parties. Thismeans any occurrence thatcauses physical injury to theoccupants and/or the vehiclecaused by external forces.

. Acts of terrorism, riot or uproar,armed forces or police actionswhich prevent timely delivery ofassistance services.

. Food service, beverages,telephone calls, or other extracosts. Accommodation costsapply only to Mexico per theterms and conditions of theRoadside Assistance program.

. Any damage to the vehiclewithout intent, derived from theservices provided.

. Cost of towing a trailer whenchoosing a Cadillac dealer thatis nearest to the temporarystorage facility for the disabledvehicle.

. Cost of all maneuvers requiredto access the vehicle when it isnot available to be towed.

. Cost of fuel provided.

Routine vehicle repair costs are notcovered by the RoadsideAssistance program. For moreinformation, see your new vehiclewarranty.

Contacting Roadside Assistance

Roadside Assistance services are ofno cost to you and available24 hours a day, 365 days a year.Costs are only incurred in situationsthat exceed the limits of theprogram, some of which are listedpreviously in this section.

To contact Roadside Assistance byphone, use the following numbers:

Mexico

01-800-466-0805

United States

1-866-466-8906

Canada

1-800-268-6800

E-mail

[email protected]

Cadillac reserves the right to makeany changes or discontinue theRoadside Assistance program atany time without notification.



Scheduling ServiceAppointments(U.S. and Canada)When the vehicle requires warrantyservice, contact your dealer andrequest an appointment. Byscheduling a service appointmentand advising the service consultantof your transportation needs, yourdealer can help minimize yourinconvenience.

If the vehicle cannot be scheduledinto the service departmentimmediately, keep driving it until itcan be scheduled for service,unless, of course, the problem issafety related. If it is, please callyour dealership, let them know this,and ask for instructions.

If your dealer requests you to bringthe vehicle for service, you areurged to do so as early in the workday as possible to allow forsame-day repair.

Courtesy TransportationProgram (U.S. andCanada)To enhance your ownershipexperience, we and our participatingdealers are proud to offer CourtesyTransportation, a customer supportprogram for vehicles with theBumper-to-Bumper (Base WarrantyCoverage period in Canada),extended powertrain, and/orhybrid-specific warranties in boththe U.S. and Canada.

Several Courtesy Transportationoptions are available to assist inreducing inconvenience whenwarranty repairs are required.

Courtesy Transportation is not apart of the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. A separate bookletentitled “Limited Warranty andOwner Assistance Information”furnished with each new vehicleprovides detailed warranty coverageinformation.

Transportation Options

Warranty service can generally becompleted while you wait. However,if you are unable to wait, GM helpsto minimize inconvenience byproviding several transportationoptions. Depending on thecircumstances, your dealer can offerone of the following:

Shuttle Service

Shuttle service is the preferredmeans of offering CourtesyTransportation. Dealers may provideshuttle service to get you to yourdestination with minimal interruptionof your daily schedule. This includesone-way or round-trip shuttle servicewithin reasonable time and distanceparameters of your dealer's area.

Public Transportation or FuelReimbursement

If the vehicle requires overnightwarranty repairs, and publictransportation is used instead ofyour dealer's shuttle service, theexpense must be supported by



original receipts and can only be upto the maximum amount allowed byGM for shuttle service. In addition,for U.S. customers, should youarrange transportation through afriend or relative, limitedreimbursement for reasonable fuelexpenses may be available. Claimamounts should reflect actual costsand be supported by originalreceipts. See your dealer forinformation regarding the allowanceamounts for reimbursement of fuelor other transportation costs.

Courtesy Rental Vehicle

Your dealer may arrange to provideyou with a courtesy rental vehicle orreimburse you for a rental vehiclethat you obtain if the vehicle is keptfor an overnight warranty repair.Rental reimbursement will be limitedand must be supported by originalreceipts. This requires that you signand complete a rental agreementand meet state/provincial, local, andrental vehicle provider requirements.Requirements vary and may includeminimum age requirements,

insurance coverage, credit card, etc.You are responsible for fuel usagecharges and may also beresponsible for taxes, levies, usagefees, excessive mileage, or rentalusage beyond the completion of therepair.

It may not be possible to provide alike vehicle as a courtesy rental.

Additional ProgramInformation

All program options, such as shuttleservice, may not be available atevery dealer. Please contact yourdealer for specific informationabout availability. All CourtesyTransportation arrangements will beadministered by appropriate dealerpersonnel.

General Motors reserves the right tounilaterally modify, change,or discontinue CourtesyTransportation at any time and toresolve all questions of claimeligibility pursuant to the terms andconditions described herein at itssole discretion.

Collision Damage Repair(U.S. and Canada)If the vehicle is involved in acollision and it is damaged, havethe damage repaired by a qualifiedtechnician using the properequipment and quality replacementparts. Poorly performed collisionrepairs diminish the vehicle resalevalue, and safety performance canbe compromised in subsequentcollisions.

Collision Parts

Genuine GM Collision parts are newparts made with the same materialsand construction methods as theparts with which the vehicle wasoriginally built. Genuine GMCollision parts are the best choice toensure that the vehicle's designedappearance, durability, and safetyare preserved. The use of GenuineGM parts can help maintain the GMNew Vehicle Limited Warranty.



Recycled original equipment partsmay also be used for repair. Theseparts are typically removed fromvehicles that were total losses inprior crashes. In most cases, theparts being recycled are fromundamaged sections of the vehicle.A recycled original equipment GMpart may be an acceptable choiceto maintain the vehicle's originallydesigned appearance and safetyperformance; however, the history ofthese parts is not known. Such partsare not covered by the GM NewVehicle Limited Warranty, and anyrelated failures are not covered bythat warranty.

Aftermarket collision parts are alsoavailable. These are made bycompanies other than GM and maynot have been tested for the vehicle.As a result, these parts may fitpoorly, exhibit premature durability/corrosion problems, and may notperform properly in subsequentcollisions. Aftermarket parts are notcovered by the GM New Vehicle

Limited Warranty, and any vehiclefailure related to such parts is notcovered by that warranty.

Repair Facility

GM also recommends that youchoose a collision repair facility thatmeets your needs before you everneed collision repairs. Your dealermay have a collision repair centerwith GM-trained technicians andstate‐of‐the‐art equipment, or beable to recommend a collision repaircenter that has GM-trainedtechnicians and comparableequipment.

Insuring the Vehicle

Protect your investment in the GMvehicle with comprehensive andcollision insurance coverage. Thereare significant differences in thequality of coverage afforded byvarious insurance policy terms.Many insurance policies providereduced protection to the GMvehicle by limiting compensation fordamage repairs by using

aftermarket collision parts. Someinsurance companies will notspecify aftermarket collision parts.When purchasing insurance, werecommend that you ensure that thevehicle will be repaired with GMoriginal equipment collision parts.If such insurance coverage is notavailable from your currentinsurance carrier, consider switchingto another insurance carrier.

If the vehicle is leased, the leasingcompany may require you to haveinsurance that ensures repairs withGenuine GM Original EquipmentManufacturer (OEM) parts orGenuine Manufacturer replacementparts. Read the lease carefully, asyou may be charged at the end ofthe lease for poor quality repairs.

If a Crash Occurs

If there has been an injury, callemergency services for help. Do notleave the scene of a crash until allmatters have been taken care of.



Move the vehicle only if its positionputs you in danger, or you areinstructed to move it by a policeofficer.

Give only the necessary informationto police and other parties involvedin the crash.

For emergency towing seeRoadside Service (U.S. andCanada) on page 13‑7 or RoadsideService (Mexico) on page 13‑9.

Gather the following information:. Driver name, address, and

telephone number.. Driver license number.. Owner name, address, and

telephone number.. Vehicle license plate number.. Vehicle make, model, and

model year.. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN).

. Insurance company and policynumber.

. General description of thedamage to the other vehicle.

Choose a reputable repair facilitythat uses quality replacement parts.See “Collision Parts” earlier in thissection.

If the airbag has inflated, see WhatWill You See after an AirbagInflates? on page 3‑32.

Managing the Vehicle DamageRepair Process

In the event that the vehicle requiresdamage repairs, GM recommendsthat you take an active role in itsrepair. If you have a pre-determinedrepair facility of choice, take thevehicle there, or have it towed there.Specify to the facility that anyrequired replacement collision partsbe original equipment parts, eithernew Genuine GM parts or recycledoriginal GM parts. Remember,recycled parts will not be covered bythe GM vehicle warranty.

Insurance pays the bill for the repair,but you must live with the repair.Depending on your policy limits,your insurance company mayinitially value the repair usingaftermarket parts. Discuss this withthe repair professional, and insist onGenuine GM parts. Remember,if the vehicle is leased, you may beobligated to have the vehiclerepaired with Genuine GM parts,even if your insurance coveragedoes not pay the full cost.

If another party's insurancecompany is paying for the repairs,you are not obligated to accept arepair valuation based on thatinsurance company's collision policyrepair limits, as you have nocontractual limits with that company.In such cases, you can have controlof the repair and parts choices aslong as the cost stays withinreasonable limits.



Service PublicationsOrdering Information

Service Manuals

Service Manuals have the diagnosisand repair information on theengines, transmission, axle,suspension, brakes, electrical,steering, body, etc.

Service Bulletins

Service Bulletins give additionaltechnical service informationneeded to knowledgeably serviceGeneral Motors cars and trucks.Each bulletin contains instructionsto assist in the diagnosis andservice of the vehicle.

Owner Information

Owner publications are writtenspecifically for owners and intendedto provide basic operationalinformation about the vehicle. TheOwner Manual includes theMaintenance Schedule for allmodels.

In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio,Owner Manual, and WarrantyBooklet.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00(U.S.) plus handling andshipping fees.

Without Portfolio: OwnerManual only.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00(U.S.) plus handling andshipping fees.

Current and Past Models

Technical Service Bulletins andManuals are available for currentand past model GM vehicles.

ORDER TOLL FREE:1-800-551-4123 Monday – Friday8:00 AM – 6:00 PM Eastern Time

For Credit Card Orders Only(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visitHelm, Inc. at: www.helminc.com.

Or write to:

Helm, IncorporatedAttention: Customer Service47911 Halyard DrivePlymouth, MI 48170

Prices are subject to change withoutnotice and without incurringobligation. Allow ample time fordelivery.

All listed prices are quoted in U.S.funds. Make checks payable in U.S.funds.



Reporting SafetyDefects

Reporting Safety Defectsto the United StatesGovernmentIf you believe that your vehiclehas a defect which could causea crash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediatelyinform the National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA) in addition to notifyingGeneral Motors.

If NHTSA receives similarcomplaints, it may open aninvestigation, and if it finds thata safety defect exists in a groupof vehicles, it may order a recalland remedy campaign.

However, NHTSA cannotbecome involved in individualproblems between you, yourdealer, or General Motors.

To contact NHTSA, you may callthe Vehicle Safety Hotlinetoll-free at 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go tohttp://www.safercar.gov; orwrite to:

Administrator, NHTSA1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.Washington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain otherinformation about motorvehicle safety fromhttp://www.safercar.gov.

Reporting Safety Defectsto the CanadianGovernmentIf you live in Canada, and youbelieve that the vehicle has a safetydefect, notify Transport Canadaimmediately, and notify GeneralMotors of Canada Limited. CallTransport Canada at1-800-333-0510 or write to:

Transport CanadaRoad Safety Branch80 rue NoelGatineau, QC J8Z 0A1



Reporting Safety Defectsto General MotorsIn addition to notifying NHTSA (orTransport Canada) in a situation likethis, notify General Motors.

Call 1-800-458-8006, or write:

Cadillac Customer AssistanceCenterCadillac Motor Car DivisionP.O. Box 33169Detroit, MI 48232-5169

In Canada, call 1‐888‐446‐2000,or write:

Canadian Cadillac Customer CareCentre, Mail Code: CA1-163-005General Motors of Canada Limited1908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Vehicle DataRecording andPrivacyThis GM vehicle has a number ofsophisticated computers that recordinformation about the vehicle’sperformance and how it is driven.For example, the vehicle usescomputer modules to monitor andcontrol engine and transmissionperformance, to monitor theconditions for airbag deploymentand deploy airbags in a crash, and,if so equipped, to provide antilockbraking to help the driver control thevehicle. These modules may storedata to help your dealer technicianservice the vehicle. Some modulesmay also store data about how youoperate the vehicle, such as rate offuel consumption or average speed.These modules may also retain theowner’s personal preferences, suchas radio presets, seat positions, andtemperature settings.

Event Data RecordersThis vehicle has an Event DataRecorder (EDR). The main purposeof an EDR is to record, in certaincrash or near crash-like situations,such as an airbag deployment orhitting a road obstacle, data that willassist in understanding how avehicle's systems performed. TheEDR is designed to record datarelated to vehicle dynamics andsafety systems for a short period oftime, typically 30 seconds or less.The EDR in this vehicle is designedto record such data as:. How various systems in the

vehicle were operating.. Whether or not the driver and

passenger safety belts werebuckled/fastened.

. How far, if at all, the driver waspressing the accelerator and/orbrake pedal.

. How fast the vehicle wastraveling.



This data can help provide a betterunderstanding of the circumstancesin which crashes and injuries occur.

Important: EDR data is recordedby the vehicle only if a non-trivialcrash situation occurs; no data isrecorded by the EDR under normaldriving conditions and no personaldata (e.g., name, gender, age, andcrash location) is recorded.However, other parties, such as lawenforcement, could combine theEDR data with the type ofpersonally identifying data routinelyacquired during a crashinvestigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR,special equipment is required, andaccess to the vehicle or the EDR isneeded. In addition to the vehiclemanufacturer, other parties, such aslaw enforcement, that have thespecial equipment, can read theinformation if they have access tothe vehicle or the EDR.

GM will not access this data orshare it with others except: with theconsent of the vehicle owner or,if the vehicle is leased, with theconsent of the lessee; in responseto an official request by police orsimilar government office; as part ofGM's defense of litigation throughthe discovery process; or, asrequired by law. Data that GMcollects or receives may also beused for GM research needs or maybe made available to others forresearch purposes, where a need isshown and the data is not tied to aspecific vehicle or vehicle owner.

OnStar®

If the vehicle is equipped with anactive OnStar system, that systemmay also record data in crash ornear crash-like situations. TheOnStar Terms and Conditionsprovides information on datacollection and use and is availableat www.onstar.com (U.S.) or

www.onstar.ca (Canada), or bypressing theQ button andspeaking to an advisor. See OnStarOverview on page 14‑1.

Navigation SystemUse of the navigation system mayresult in the storage of destinations,addresses, telephone numbers, andother trip information. See Using theNavigation System on page 7‑62 forinformation on stored data and fordeletion instructions.

Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID)RFID technology is used in somevehicles for functions such as tirepressure monitoring and ignitionsystem security, as well as inconnection with conveniences suchas key fobs for remote door locking/unlocking and starting, andin-vehicle transmitters for garagedoor openers. RFID technology in



GM vehicles does not use or recordpersonal information or link with anyother GM system containingpersonal information.

Radio FrequencyStatementThis vehicle has systems thatoperate on a radio frequency thatcomply with Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and with Industry CanadaStandards RSS‐GEN/210/220/310.

Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. The device may not causeharmful interference.

2. The device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may causeundesired operation of thedevice.

Changes or modifications to any ofthese systems by other than anauthorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.



2 NOTES


OnStar 14-1

OnStar

OnStar OverviewOnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1

OnStar ServicesEmergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5

OnStar Additional InformationOnStar AdditionalInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5

OnStar Overview

If equipped, this vehicle has acomprehensive, in-vehicle systemthat can connect to a live Advisorfor Emergency, Security, Navigation,Connection, and DiagnosticServices.

The OnStar system status light isnext to the OnStar buttons. If thestatus light is:. Solid Green: System is ready.. Flashing Green: On a call.. Red: Indicates a problem.

PushQ or call 1‐888‐4‐ONSTAR(1‐888‐466‐7827) to speak to anAdvisor.

Push X to:

. Make a call, end a call,or answer an incoming call.

. Give OnStar Hands-Free Callingvoice commands.

. Give OnStar Turn-by-TurnNavigation voice commands.Requires the available Directionsand Connections service plan.


14-2 OnStar

PushQ to connect to a liveAdvisor to:. Verify account information or

update contact information.. Get driving directions. Requires

the available Directions andConnections service plan.

. Receive On-DemandDiagnostics for a check on thevehicle’s key operating systems.

. Receive Roadside Assistance.

Push] to get a priority connectionto an Emergency Advisor available24/7 to:. Get help for an emergency.. Be a Good Samaritan or

respond to an AMBER Alert.. Get crisis assistance and

evacuation routes.

OnStar Services

EmergencyWith Automatic Crash Response,the built-in system can automaticallyconnect to help in a crash even ifyou cannot ask for it.

Push] to connect to anEmergency Advisor. GPStechnology is used to identify thevehicle location and can providecritical information to emergencypersonnel. The Advisor is alsotrained to offer critical assistance inemergency situations.

SecurityOnStar provides services like StolenVehicle Assistance, Remote IgnitionBlock, and Roadside Assistance,if the vehicle is equipped with theseservices. OnStar can unlock thevehicle doors remotely, if it isequipped with automatic door locks,and can help police locate thevehicle if it is stolen.

NavigationOnStar navigation requires theDirections and Connectionsservice plan.

PushQ to receive directions orhave them sent to the vehiclenavigation screen. Destinations canalso be forwarded to the vehiclefrom Google Maps™ orMapQuest.com. The OnStarmapping database is continuouslyupdated. Visit www.onstar.com forcoverage maps.

Turn-by-Turn Navigation

1. PushQ to connect to a liveAdvisor.

2. Request directions.

3. Directions are downloaded to thevehicle.

4. Follow the voice-guidedcommands.


OnStar 14-3

Using Voice CommandsDuring a Planned Route

Cancel Route

1. Push X. System responds:“OnStar ready,” then a tone.Say “Cancel route.” Systemresponds: “Would you like tocancel route directions to yourdestination?”

2. Say “Yes.” System responds:“OK, route canceled.”

3. Say “Goodbye.” Exits voicecommands.

Route Preview

1. Push X. System responds:“OnStar ready,” then a tone.

2. Say “Route Preview.” Systemresponds with the next threemaneuvers.


Repeat


2. Say “Repeat.” System respondswith the last direction given, thenresponds with “OnStar ready,”then a tone.


Get My Destination


2. Say “Get my destination.”System responds with miles tothe destination, then respondswith “OnStar ready,” then a tone.


Other Navigation ServicesAvailable from OnStar

OnStar eNav: Allows subscribersto send destinations from GoogleMaps and MapQuest.com to theirTurn-by-Turn Navigation orscreen-based navigation system.When ready, the directions will bedownloaded to the vehicle.

Destination Download: PushQ,then request the Advisor todownload directions to thenavigation system in the vehicle.After the call ends, push the “Go”button on the navigation screen tobegin driving directions.

Destinations can also bedownloaded on the go. Forinformation about eNav, DestinationDownload, and coverage maps visitwww.onstar.com.


14-4 OnStar

ConnectionsOnStar Hands-Free Calling allowscalls to be made and received fromthe vehicle. The vehicle can also becontrolled from a cell phone throughthe OnStar RemoteLink mobile app.See www.onstar.com forcoverage maps.

Hands-Free Calling

1. Push X. System responds:“OnStar ready.”

2. Say “Dial.” System responds:“Please say the name or numberto call.”

3. Say the entire number withoutpausing, including a “1” and thearea code. System responds:“OK calling.”

Retrieve My Number


2. Say “My Number.” Systemresponds: “Your OnStarHands-Free Calling number is.”

End a Call

Push X. System responds: “Callended.”

Store a Name Tag for SpeedDialing


2. Say “Store.” System responds:“Please say the number youwould like to store.”

3. Say the entire number withoutpausing. System responds:“Please say the name tag.”

4. Pick a name tag. “Systemresponds: ”About to store <nametag>. Does that sound OK?”

5. Say “Yes” or “No” to try again.System responds: “OK, storing<name tag>.”

Place a Call Using a StoredNumber


2. Say “Call <name tag>.” Systemresponds: “OK, calling<name tag>.”

Verify Minutes and Expiration

Push X and say “minutes” then“verify” to check how many minutesremain and their expiration date.

OnStar Mobile App

With an iPhone® orAndroid™-based mobile device, anOnStar RemoteLink mobile app canbe downloaded. The vehicle can beremote started, if equipped, or thedoors can be unlocked fromanywhere there is cell phoneservice. It can also check the fuellevel, tire pressure, and oil life.It can connect to an OnStar Advisoranytime. For OnStar mobile appcompatibility or further information,see www.onstar.com.


OnStar 14-5

DiagnosticsOnStar Vehicle Diagnostics willperform a vehicle check everymonth. It will check the engine,transmission, antilock brakes, andmajor vehicle systems. It alsochecks the tire pressures, if thevehicle is equipped with the TirePressure Monitoring System. If adiagnostics check is neededbetween e-mails, pushQ, and anAdvisor can run a check.

OnStar AdditionalInformationTransferring Service

PushQ to request account transfereligibility information. The Advisorcan assist in canceling or removingaccount information. If OnStarreceives information that vehicleownership has changed, OnStarmay send a voice message to thevehicle, requesting updated accountinformation.

Reactivation for SubsequentOwners

PushQ and follow the prompts tospeak to an Advisor as soon aspossible after acquiring the vehicle.The Advisor will update vehiclerecords and will explain the OnStarservice offers and options available.

How OnStar Service Works

Automatic Crash Response,Emergency Services, Crisis Assist,Stolen Vehicle Assistance, VehicleDiagnostics, Remote Door Unlock,Roadside Assistance, Turn-by-TurnNavigation, and Hands-Free Callingare available on most vehicles. Notall OnStar services are availableeverywhere or on all vehicles. Formore information, a full descriptionof OnStar services, systemlimitations, and OnStar terms andconditions, see www.onstar.com(U.S.) or www.onstar.ca (Canada);contact OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR(1‐888‐466‐7827) or TTY1‐877‐248‐2080; or pushQ tospeak with an Advisor. OnStarservices require a vehicle electricalsystem, wireless service, and GPSsatellite technologies to be availableand operating for features tofunction properly. These systemsmay not operate if the battery isdischarged or disconnected.


14-6 OnStar

OnStar service cannot work unlessyour vehicle is in a place whereOnStar has an agreement with awireless service provider for servicein that area, and the wirelessservice provider has coverage,network capacity, reception, andtechnology compatible with OnStar’sservice. Service involving locationinformation about the vehicle cannotwork unless GPS signals areavailable, unobstructed, andcompatible with the OnStarhardware. OnStar service may notwork if the OnStar equipment is notproperly installed or it has not beenproperly maintained. If equipment orsoftware is added, connected,or modified, OnStar service may notwork. Other problems beyondOnStar’s control may preventservice such as hills, tall buildings,tunnels, weather, electrical systemdesign and architecture of thevehicle, damage to the vehicle in acrash, or wireless phone networkcongestion or jamming.


Services for People withDisabilities

Advisors provide services to helpsubscribers with physical disabilitiesand medical conditions.

PushQ for help with:

. Locating a gas station with anattendant to pump gas.

. Finding a hotel, restaurant, etc.,that meets accessibility needs.

. Providing directions to theclosest hospital or pharmacy inurgent situations.

TTY Users

OnStar has the ability tocommunicate to the deaf,hard‐of‐hearing, or speech‐impairedcustomers while in the vehicle. Theavailable dealer‐installed TTYsystem can provide in-vehicleaccess to all of the OnStar services,except Virtual Advisor and OnStarTurn‐by‐Turn Navigation.

Onstar.com

The website provides access toaccount information, manages theOnStar subscription, and allowsviewing of videos of each service.Get subscription plan pricing andsign up for OnStar VehicleDiagnostics. Click on the “MyAccount” tab on the home page.


OnStar 14-7

OnStar Personal IdentificationNumber (PIN)

A PIN is needed to access some ofthe OnStar services, like RemoteDoor Unlock and Stolen VehicleAssistance. You will be prompted tochange the PIN the first time whenspeaking with an Advisor. Tochange the OnStar PIN, call OnStarand provide the Advisor with thecurrent number.

Warranty

OnStar equipment may bewarranted as part of the new-vehiclelimited warranty. The manufacturerof the vehicle furnishes detailedwarranty information.

Languages

The vehicle can be programmed torespond in French or Spanish. PushQ and ask an Advisor. Advisorscan speak French or Spanish.

Potential Issues

Some OnStar services are disabledafter five days. OnStar cannotperform Remote Door Unlock orStolen Vehicle Assistance after thevehicle has been off continuouslyfor five days. After five days, OnStarcan contact Roadside Assistanceand a locksmith to help gain accessto the vehicle.

Global PositioningSystem (GPS). Obstruction of the GPS can

occur in a large city with tallbuildings; in parking garages;around airports; in tunnels,underpasses, or parkinggarages; or in an area with verydense trees. If GPS signals arenot available, the OnStar systemshould still operate to callOnStar. However, OnStar couldhave difficulty identifying theexact location.

. In emergency situations, OnStarcan use the last stored GPSlocation to send to emergencyresponders.

. A temporary loss of GPS cancause loss of the ability to senda Turn-by-Turn Navigation route.The Advisor may give a verbalroute or may ask for a call backafter the vehicle is driven into anopen area.

Cellular and GPS Antennas

Avoid placing items over or near theantenna to prevent blocking cellularand GPS signal reception. Cellularreception is required for OnStar tosend remote signals to the vehicle.

Unable to Connect to OnStarMessage

If there is limited cellular coverageor the cellular network has reachedmaximum capacity, this messagemay come on. PushQ to try thecall again or try again after driving afew miles into another cellular area.


14-8 OnStar

Vehicle and Power Issues

OnStar services require a vehicleelectrical system, wireless service,and GPS satellite technologies to beavailable and operating for featuresto function properly. These systemsmay not operate if the battery isdischarged or disconnected.

Add-on Electrical Equipment

The OnStar system is integratedinto the electrical architecture of thevehicle. Do not add any electricalequipment. See Add-On ElectricalEquipment on page 9‑69. Addedelectrical equipment may interferewith the operation of the OnStarsystem and cause it to not operate.

Privacy

The complete OnStar PrivacyStatement may be found atwww.onstar.com. Privacy-sensitiveusers of wireless communicationsare cautioned that the privacy of anyinformation sent via wireless cellularcommunications cannot be assured.Third parties may unlawfullyintercept or access transmissionsand private communications withoutconsent.


INDEX i-1

AAccessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26Active Fuel Management® . . . . . 9-28Add-On ElectricalEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-69

Additional Information,OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5

Adjustable Throttle andBrake Pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22

AdjustmentsLumbar, Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . 10-13Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7Airbag SystemCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-40How Does an AirbagRestrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-31

Passenger SensingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-33

What Makes an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-31

Airbag System (cont'd)What Will You See after anAirbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32

When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29

Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . .3-27AirbagsAdding Equipment to theVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-38

Passenger Status Indicator . . .5-14Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14Servicing Airbag-EquippedVehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-38

System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25Alarm SystemAnti-theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13

All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . 10-27, 9-34AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9AntennaRear Side Window . . . . . . . . . . . .7-17Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-18

Anti-theftAlarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13Alarm System Messages . . . . .5-36

Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20

Appearance CareExterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-96Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-99

Armrest Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10Audio PlayersCD/DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-18MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-27

Audio SystemRadio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-17Rear Seat (RSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-60Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . 7-3

AutomaticDimming Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Level Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-40Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-30Transmission Fluid . . . . . . . . . 10-10


i-2 INDEX

Automatic TransmissionManual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-33Shift Lock ControlFunction Check . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30

AuxiliaryDevices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-30

Axle, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28Axle, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29

BBattery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-88Load Management . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10Power Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10Voltage and ChargingMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29

Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . 10-32Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-103

BrakePedal and AdjustableThrottle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22

System Warning Light . . . . . . . .5-19Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-35Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-36Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-36System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29

Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 9-21Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37Back-up Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35High Intensity Discharge(HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36

License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . 10-37Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60

CCalibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5CaliforniaFuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .9-52Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3

Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3Camera, Rear Vision . . . . . . . . . . 9-48Canadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . iiiCapacities andSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Carbon MonoxideEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-29Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-13

Cautions, Danger, andWarnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

CD/DVD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . 4-3Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65Charging System Light . . . . . . . . 5-16CheckEngine Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16IgnitionTransmission Lock . . . . . . . . 10-31


INDEX i-3

Child RestraintsInfants and YoungChildren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-43

Lower Anchors andTethers for Children . . . . . . . . .3-49

Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-41Securing . . . . . . . . . . 3-56, 3-59, 3-60Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-45

Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39CleaningExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-96Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-99

Climate Control SystemsDual Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Cluster, Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Collision Damage Repair . . . . . 13-14Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5Compressor Kit, TireSealant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67

Configure Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-84Connections, OnStar® . . . . . . . . . 14-4

Continuous DampingControl (CDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40

Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16CoolantEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16Engine TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15Engine Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30

Courtesy TransportationProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13

Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23

Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . 13-6Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-4, 13-5Text Telephone (TTY)Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-6

Customer InformationService PublicationsOrdering Information . . . . . . 13-17

Customer SatisfactionProcedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1, 13-3

DDamage Repair, Collision . . . . . 13-14Danger, Warnings, andCautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . 13-19Database CoverageExplanations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-99

Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Destination, Navigation . . . . . . . . 7-70Devices, Auxiliary . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30Diagnostics, OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . 14-5Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9DoorAjar Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

Drive Belt Routing, Engine . . . . . 12-3Drive SystemsAll-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . 10-27, 9-34


i-4 INDEX

Driver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23

DrivingCharacteristics andTowing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-57

Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3For Better Fuel Economy . . . . .1-25Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . .9-12If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . .9-15Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . .9-16Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-13

Dual Automatic ClimateControl System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

DVDRear SeatEntertainmentSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-31, 7-41

DVD/CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18

EE85 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54Electrical Equipment,Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-69

Electrical SystemEngine CompartmentFuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39


Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43

Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38Emergency, OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . 14-2EngineAir Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13Check and Service EngineSoon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16

Compartment Overview . . . . . . .10-6Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16Coolant TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15Cooling System Messages . . .5-30

Engine (cont'd)Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . .12-3Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-29Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-9Oil Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31Overheated ProtectionOperating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22

Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22Running While Parked . . . . . . . .9-30Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24

Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9Equipment, Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-65Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . 13-19Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . 3-24Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 6-1Exterior Lamps Off Reminder . . . 6-5


INDEX i-5

FFanEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22

FeaturesMemory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

Filter,Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . 10-13

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 6-7Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74

Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-102FluidAutomatic Transmission . . . . 10-10Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23

Fog LampsBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8

Front Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28Front Fog LampLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23

Front SeatsHeated and Ventilated . . . . . . . . . 3-7

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-51Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-53E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . . . . . . .9-54Economy Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-25Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-56

Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-55Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . . .9-52Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . .9-52Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12Management, Active . . . . . . . . . .9-28Recommended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-52Requirements, California . . . . .9-52System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32

Full-Size Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . 10-87FusesEngine CompartmentFuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39


Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43

GGarage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . 5-46Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-46

GasolineSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-52

GaugesEngine CoolantTemperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12Warning Lights andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10

General InformationService and Maintenance . . . . . 11-1Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-57Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2

Glass Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33Global PositioningSystem (GPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-96

Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7


i-6 INDEX

HHazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 6-7Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2HeadlampsAiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-35Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5High Intensity Discharge(HID) Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36

High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . .5-22High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-5Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . .5-23

HeatedRear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

Heated and Ventilated FrontSeats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17HeaterEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25

High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

High-Speed Operation . . . . . . . . 10-53Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . 9-12Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . 9-36Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16

IIgnition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22Ignition Transmission LockCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31

Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Infants and Young Children,Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43

Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii

JJump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-88

KKey and Lock Messages . . . . . . . 5-32Keyless EntryRemote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . 2-3

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

LLabeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . 10-47LampsDaytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . . 6-5Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Exterior Lamps OffReminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-16Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9

Lap Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17


INDEX i-7

LATCH SystemReplacing Parts after aCrash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-56

LATCH, Lower Anchors andTethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . 3-49

LED Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36Level ControlAutomatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-40

LiftgateCarbon Monoxide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

Lighter, Cigarette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9LightingEntry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36

LightsAirbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20

Brake System Warning . . . . . . .5-19Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .5-22Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Front Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23

Lights (cont'd)High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-5Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . .5-13Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22StabiliTrak® OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20Traction Control System(TCS)/StabiliTrak® . . . . . . . . . .5-21

Locking Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40LocksAutomatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCHSystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49

Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

MMaintenanceRecords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-16

Maintenance ScheduleRecommended Fluidsand Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-13

Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 5-16Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33Map Data Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-98Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-63Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9Memory Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5MenuConfigure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-84

MessagesAirbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35Anti-theft Alarm System . . . . . . .5-36Battery Voltage andCharging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29

Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29Engine Cooling System . . . . . . .5-30Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31Engine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32Key and Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32


i-8 INDEX

Messages (cont'd)Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32Object Detection System . . . . .5-33Ride Control System . . . . . . . . . .5-34Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28Vehicle Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37

MirrorsAutomatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .2-17Automatic DimmingRearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17

Convex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17Park Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16

Monitor System, TirePressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53

MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27

NNavigationDestination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-70OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-65Using the System . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-62Vehicle Data Recordingand Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20

New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . 9-21

OObject Detection SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33

Object Detection, Side BlindZone Alert (SBZA) . . . . . . . . . . . 9-45

Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12

Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5

OilEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . .10-9Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22

Older Children, Restraints . . . . . 3-41

Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . 13-6OnStar®

Additional Information . . . . . . . .14-5Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-4Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-5Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-1Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2System, In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-26

OrderingService Publications . . . . . . . . 13-17

OutletsPower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

Overheated EngineProtectionOperating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22

Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . 10-19Overview, InfotainmentSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

Overview, OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1


INDEX i-9

PParkShifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17

ParkingAssist, Ultrasonic . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-44Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-36Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-31

Over Things That Burn . . . . . . .9-28Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14

Passenger Sensing System . . . 3-33Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements, California . . . . . 10-3

PersonalizationVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38

PhoneBluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-103

PowerDoor Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Protection, Battery . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10Retained Accessory (RAP) . . .9-26Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19

Power Assist Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12Pregnancy, Using SafetyBelts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23

PrivacyRadio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-20

Problems with RouteGuidance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-98

ProgramCourtesy Transportation . . . . 13-13

Proposition 65 Warning,California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

RRadio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . . 13-20Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-21

RadiosAM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9CD/DVD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-18Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-17Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-15

Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-40

Rear Climate Control System . . . 8-6Rear Seat Audio (RSA)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-60

Rear SeatEntertainmentSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31, 7-41Rear Seat Audio (RSA) . . . . . . .7-60

Rear SeatsHeated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

Rear Side Window Antenna . . . 7-17Rear Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . . 9-48Rear Window Washer/Wiper . . . . 5-5


i-10 INDEX

Rearview MirrorsAutomatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .2-17

Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4RecommendedFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-52

Recommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13

RecordsMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-16

Recreational VehicleTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-93

Reimbursement Program,GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5ReplacementGlass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33

Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37Replacement PartsAirbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-40Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-15

Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . 3-40Replacing LATCH SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56

Replacing Safety BeltSystem Parts after a Crash . . . 3-25

Reporting Safety DefectsCanadian Government . . . . . . 13-18General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18

RestraintsWhere to Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-47

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26

Ride Control SystemsMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34Road Sensing Suspension . . .9-40

Road Sensing Suspension . . . . 9-40RoadsDriving, Wet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11

Roadside Service . . . . . . . . 13-7, 13-9RoofSunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21

Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . 12-3Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30

SSafety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16

Lap Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13Replacing after a Crash . . . . . .3-25Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . .3-23

Safety Defects ReportingCanadian Government . . . . . . 13-18General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18

Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 3-24Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15Scheduling Appointments . . . . . 13-13Sealant Kit, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67


INDEX i-11

SeatsHead Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Heated and Ventilated Front . . . 3-7Heated, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8Lumbar Adjustment, Front . . . . . 3-3Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . 3-3Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Second Row . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8Third Row Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12

Second Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8Secondary Latch System . . . . . 10-85Securing ChildRestraints . . . . . . . . 3-56, 3-59, 3-60

SecurityLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13

ServiceAccessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3

Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . .10-4Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16Maintenance Records . . . . . . .11-16Maintenance, GeneralInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Parts Identification Label . . . . .12-1Publications OrderingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17

Scheduling Appointments . . . 13-13Servicing the Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38Shift Lock Control FunctionCheck, AutomaticTransmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30

ShiftingInto Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27

Side Blind Zone Alert . . . . . . . . . . 9-45

Signals, Turn andLane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

Specifications andCapacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12StabiliTrakOFF Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-37

Start Assist, Hills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . . 2-5Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . 10-30Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Fluid, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22Heated Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

StepsPower Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12

StorageRear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2


i-12 INDEX

Storage AreasArmrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Center Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

Storing the Tire Sealantand Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . 10-73

Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ivSymbols, Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . 7-65SystemInfotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2Roof Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

System Needs Service, If . . . . . . 7-98

TTachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . 13-6Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . 2-14Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14

Third-Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12Throttle, Adjustable . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7TiresBuying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62Full-Size Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-87If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-65Inflation Monitor System . . . . 10-55Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36

Tires (cont'd)Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21Pressure Monitor System . . . 10-53Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58Sealant andCompressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67

Sealant and CompressorKit, Storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73

Secondary Latch System . . . 10-85Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47Terminology andDefinitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49

Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62

Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-64When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59


INDEX i-13

Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33Tow/Haul Mode Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-20TowingDriving Characteristics . . . . . . . .9-57Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-65General Information . . . . . . . . . .9-57Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . 10-93Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-61Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . .9-69Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-93

TractionControl System (TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21

Road Sensing Suspension . . .9-40TrailerSway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . .9-69Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-61

TransmissionAutomatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-30Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37

Transportation Program,Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13

Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

UUltrasonic Parking Assist . . . . . . 9-44Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62

Universal Remote System . . . . . 5-46Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-52Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-46

UpdatesMap Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-98

Using This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

VVehicleCanadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iiiControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4IdentificationNumber (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1

Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-16Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-97Reminder Messages . . . . . . . . . .5-37Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-93

Vehicle CareStoring the Tire Sealantand Compressor Kit . . . . . . . 10-73

Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21Voice Recognition . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-100


i-14 INDEX

WWarningBrake System Light . . . . . . . . . . .5-19

Warning Lights, Gauges,and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10

Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ivCautions and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . .ivHazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-37

WheelsAlignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64

Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64

When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59

Where to Put the Restraint . . . . 3-47Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19

WindshieldWiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

WinterDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-13

Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . 10-32WipersRear Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

Documents

2012 Escalade ESV Owners Manual